4. 对“逐别说”的解释巴利
4. Paṭiniddesavāravaṇṇanā
教示理趣的分别解释巴利
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
5 5. 这样,先把理趣等按偈颂的形式,从它们自身的样貌来说明,为的是便于把握。现在,为了在这些理趣当中,先以反释的方式对它们加以分别,就开始了“其中,什么是教示之理趣”等一段。其中,“什么是”是因为想要解说而提出的问题。“教示之理趣”是对所问之法作出指示。虽然教示之理趣在释论分中已经按其自身样貌显示过了,但为了显示反释所涉及的范围,便以“乐味与过患”等偈颂的一部分来提点。这个教示之理趣,既回顾前面,也指向后面。回顾前面时,先问“什么是教示之理趣”,然后对已按自身样貌显示的“乐味与过患”等作出总结。指向后面时,则是对“这个教示之理趣在解说什么”这一解说行为的施动者作出说明。由此显示教示之理趣的随义名称。“解说”的意思是详细注释、广为展开。巴利
5. Evaṃ hārādayo sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tesu hāre tāva paṭiniddesavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha katamoti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Desanāhāroti pucchitabbadhammanidassanaṃ. Kiñcāpi desanāhāro niddesavāre sarūpato dassito, paṭiniddesassa pana visayaṃ dassento ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti gāthaṃ ekadesena paccāmasati. Ayaṃ desanāhāro pubbāparāpekkho. Tattha pubbāpekkhatte ‘‘katamo desanāhāro’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti sarūpato dassitassa nigamanaṃ hoti. Parāpekkhatte pana ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’ti desanākiriyāya kattuniddeso hoti. Tena desanāhārassa anvatthasaññataṃ dasseti. Desayatīti saṃvaṇṇeti, vitthāretīti attho.
现在,为了按法的本来面目指出应当开示的法,他说出了“乐味”等话。因为前面已经讲过其中的道理,所以这些内容很容易明白。因此,接下来我们也只解释还没有说到的部分。他心里考虑这样的追问:“这个理趣到底在哪里详细解释了所提到的乐味等内容呢?”于是,为了通过教示的理趣指出应当详细解释的法,他举出“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”等语句,以此显示世尊能统摄一切教法的“六六”开示的一部分。巴利
Idāni anena desetabbadhamme sarūpato dassento ‘‘assāda’’ntiādimāha, taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva. Tasmā ito parampi avuttameva vaṇṇayissāma. ‘‘Kattha pana āgate assādādike ayaṃ hāro saṃvaṇṇetī’’ti anuyogaṃ manasikatvā desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammaṃ dassento ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādikaṃ sabbapariyattidhammasaṅgāhakaṃ bhagavato chachakkadesanaṃ ekadesena dasseti.
在这里,“法”这个词,在教理、真谛、定、慧、本性、福德、犯戒、所知等许多含义中都能看到它的用法。比如在“在此,比丘学习法”等中,它指的是教理法。在“现见法、证得法”等中,指的是真谛。在“那些世尊是如是法者”等中,指的是定。在“真实、法、坚毅、舍弃”等中,指的是慧。在“诸比丘,有生法之众生”等中,指的是本性。在“法确实保护行法者”等中,指的是福德。在“四波罗夷法”等中,指的是犯戒。在“善法、不善法”等中,指的是所知。但在这里,应当把它理解为教理。巴利
Tattha dhammanti ayaṃ dhamma-saddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādīsu bahūsu atthesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hi ‘‘idha, bhikkhu, dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattidhamme dissati. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299; mahāva. 18) sacce. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13, 145) samādhimhi. ‘‘Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo’’ti evamādīsu (jā. 1.1.57; 1.2.147-148) paññāyaṃ. ‘‘Jātidhammānaṃ, bhikkhave, sattāna’’nti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 2.398; ma. ni. 1.131) pakatiyaṃ . ‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102; 1.15.385) puññe. ‘‘Cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 233) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā akusalādhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) ñeyye. Idha pana pariyattiyaṃ daṭṭhabboti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. cittuppādakaṇḍa 1; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 1.1).
另外,这个“vo”词在“来吧,诸比丘,我现在向你们自恣”中,用在业格(对格)的意义上;在“诸比丘,你们聚集时,有两件事应作”等中,用在作格的意义上;在“的确,你们那些圣者,身业清净”等中,是填充音节的作用;在“诸比丘,我向你们宣说”等中,用在与格的意义上。这里也应当看作是与格的意义。巴利
Voti pana ayaṃ vo-saddo ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.215) ettha upayogatthe āgato. ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīya’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.273) karaṇatthe. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu padapūraṇe. ‘‘Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.72) sampadānatthe. Idhāpi sampadānatthe evāti daṭṭhabbo.
比丘,是因为从事乞食、具戒等功德;或者是因为已破除烦恼等功德。又或者,因为在轮回中看见怖畏,所以叫比丘。“诸比丘”是对他们的称呼。用这个称呼,他把他们引导到听法上,让他们面向自己。“我将开示”就是“我将讲述”。这就说明:我不是凭法的自在力让你们去做别的什么事,而是要以无碍的智慧,让一切应当了知的法直接呈现在眼前,所以我来为你们说法——这样他就宣告了即将进行的说法。在“初善”等词中,开头就善的,叫“初善”;或者具有开头之善的,叫“初善”。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。其中,以戒为初善,以定为中善,以慧为后善。或者,以佛陀的善妙觉悟为初善,以法的善妙法性为中善,以僧伽的善妙行道为后善。又或者,以教化利根者为初善,以教化中根者为中善,以教化可引导的人为后善。这里所要表达的,正是这个意思。巴利
Bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogena bhikkhū, bhinnakilesatādiguṇayogena vā. Atha vā saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhantīti bhikkhū. Bhikkhaveti tesaṃ ālapanaṃ. Tena te dhammassavane niyojento attano mukhābhimukhaṃ karoti. Desessāmīti kathessāmi. Tena nāhaṃ dhammissaratāya tumhe aññaṃ kiñci kāreyyāmi, anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ paccakkhakāritāya pana dhammaṃ desessāmīti idāni pavattiyamānaṃ dhammadesanaṃ paṭijānāti. Ādikalyāṇantiādīsu ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ ādikalyāṇaṃ, ādikalyāṇametassāti vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha sīlena ādikalyāṇaṃ. Samādhinā majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Paññāya pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Atha vā ugghaṭitaññuvinayanena ādikalyāṇaṃ. Vipañcitaññuvinayanena majjhekalyāṇaṃ neyyapuggalavinayanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto.
因为义理具足,所以是有义;因为文句具足,所以是有文。或者,由于具备宣说等六种义句,所以是有义;由于具备字母等六种文句,所以是有文。这里要表达的正是这个意思。因为没有什么可以再增添,所以是绝对圆满,称为唯圆满;因为没有什么可以减少,所以是清净。或者,以戒等五法蕴的具足为圆满;以为了渡越四种瀑流而精进修行、对世间的利养毫无希求为清净。梵行是殊胜的、最上的、最胜的,或者是诸梵天、最胜诸圣者所行的、涵盖三学的教法,我将宣说、我将阐明,这就是它的含义。巴利
Atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanādichaatthapadasamāyogato vā sātthaṃ. Akkharādichabyañjanapadasamāyogato sabyañjanaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto. Upanetabbābhāvato ekantena paripuṇṇanti kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvato parisuddhaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūriyā vā paripuṇṇaṃ. Caturoghanittharaṇāya pavattiyā lokāmisanirapekkhatāya ca parisuddhaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ brahmūnaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ cariyaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsayissāmi paridīpayissāmīti attho.
世尊这样宣说并阐明的教法,是为了显示乐味等而展开的。那些乐味等,就是教示理趣所涉及的对象。凡是经文各处对它们有特别说明的地方,就从那些地方摘取出来,以举例的方式引到这里来显示,所以说“其中,什么是乐味”等等。这里说的“欲”,是指可爱的色等,也就是称为三地法的对象欲。“想要欲的人”,就是希求的人。“如果他这个能成功”:意思是,这个想要欲的众生,如果那个称为欲的对象能成功,也就是说如果他得到了它。“确实也令人心悦”:意思是一定会心满意足。“已得”:得到之后。“人”:众生。“若他欲求”:他若欲求什么。这里只是概要,详细解释则应依照《大义释》(mahāni. 1)所说的方法来了知。“此是乐味”:即这种意愿的成就,在获得所求之时生起的喜悦、欢喜心,此因为可以被品尝,故称为乐味。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavatā desito pakāsito ca sāsanadhammo yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ dassanavasena pavatto, te assādādayo desanāhārassa visayabhūtā yattha yattha pāṭhe savisesaṃ vuttā, tato tato niddhāretvā udāharaṇavasena idhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāmanti manāpiyarūpādiṃ tebhūmakadhammasaṅkhātaṃ vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmayamānassāti icchantassa. Tassa cetaṃ samijjhatīti tassa kāmayamānassa sattassa taṃ kāmasaṅkhātaṃ vatthu samijjhati ce, sace so taṃ labhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhāpītimanohotīti ekaṃsena tuṭṭhacitto hoti. Laddhāti labhitvā. Maccoti satto. Yadicchatīti yaṃ icchati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana niddese (mahāni. 1) vuttanayena veditabbo. Ayaṃ assādoti yāyaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanā icchitalābhe pītimanatā somanassaṃ, ayaṃ assādetabbato assādo.
如果那个众生在贪求欲乐,就是说,那个人正在渴望欲乐,或者正被欲乐所驱使。已经生起欲求,就是指已经生起了渴爱。众生,就是指有情。那些欲乐若衰损,就是说,那些事欲被某种障碍所毁坏。就像被箭射中一样受苦,意思是说,就像被铁箭等射中一样,被压迫着。这就是过患,就是说,由于欲乐的变易和异变,贪求欲乐的有情受到伤害,生起忧恼,这就是过患。巴利
Tassa ce kāmayānassāti tassa puggalassa kāme icchamānassa, kāmena vā yāyamānassa. Chandajātassāti jātataṇhassa. Jantunoti sattassa. Te kāmā parihāyantīti te vatthukāmā kenaci antarāyena vinassanti ce. Sallaviddhova ruppatīti atha ayomayādinā sallena viddho viya pīḷiyatīti attho. Ayaṃ ādīnavoti yāyaṃ kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā kāmayānassa sattassa ruppanā domanassuppatti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
那位比丘对于前面所说的种种欲,或者用镇伏的方式,或者用断除的方式,完全避开它们。就像什么呢?就像用脚避开蛇头一样。好比有个想活命的人,在路上看见一条黑蛇,就用脚避开它的头。那位比丘因为安住于遍布整个世间,所以能保持正念,超越这世间中被称为“攀缠”的渴爱。这就是出离:以涅槃为所缘,通过圣道超越那被称为“攀缠”的渴爱,这就是出离。巴利
Yo kāme parivajjetīti yo bhikkhu yathāvutte kāme tattha chandarāgassa vikkhambhanena vā samucchindanena vā sabbabhāgena vajjeti. Yathā kiṃ? Sappasseva padā siroti, yathā koci puriso jīvitukāmo kaṇhasappaṃ paṭipathe passitvā attano pādena tassa siraṃ parivajjeti, somaṃ…pe… samativattatīti so bhikkhu sabbaṃ lokaṃ visaritvā ṭhitattā loke visattikāsaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ taṇhaṃ satimā hutvā samatikkamatīti. Idaṃ nissaraṇanti yadidaṃ visattikāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya nibbānārammaṇena ariyamaggena samativattanaṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ.
“田”是指稻田之类的田地。“地”是指家宅地基之类的土地。“或金”是指名为迦哈巴那的钱币和名为黄金的金子。“或”这个词表示选择,应当用在每一个词上。“牛马”就是牛和马。“奴仆”就是男奴和仆人。“妇女”就是女人。“亲属”就是亲族眷属。“众多欲”是指其他像可爱色等种种众多的欲处。“人若贪求”意思是,有情一再地渴望、希求。“此为乐味”就是:对田地等的贪求,这就是乐味,因为这是以事欲为对象的乐味。巴利
Khettanti kedārādikhettaṃ. Vatthunti gharavatthuādivatthuṃ. Hiraññaṃ vāti kahāpaṇasaṅkhātaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhātañca hiraññaṃ. Vā-saddo vikappanattho, so sabbapadesu yojetabbo. Gavāssanti gāvo ca asse cāti gavāssaṃ. Dāsaporisanti dāse ca porise cāti dāsaporisaṃ. Thiyoti itthiyo. Bandhūti ñātibandhavo. Puthū kāmeti aññepi vā manāpiyarūpādike bahū kāmaguṇe. Yo naro anugijjhatīti yo satto anu anu abhikaṅkhati patthetīti attho. Ayaṃ assādoti yadidaṃ khettādīnaṃ anugijjhanaṃ, ayaṃ assādeti vatthukāme etenāti assādo.
无力者的烦恼会压制他:对于贪恋田地等各类欲乐的人,那些应当被善法断除、所以称为“无力”的烦恼,会压制他、压倒他;或者,因为缺少信力等而无力的人,那些无力的烦恼会压制他,意思是由于他无力,所以烦恼压倒他。诸灾厄摧残他:这个贪欲的人,在追求欲乐并守护它们时,狮子等明显的灾厄,以及身恶行等不明显的灾厄,都会摧残他。从此……水:从此,被那些明显和不明显的灾厄制伏的这个人,生等痛苦便跟随他,就像海水涌入破船一样跟随他,这就是意思。此为过患:也就是以爱欲、恶行和烦恼为因而相续生起的生等诸苦,这就是过患。巴利
Abalānaṃ balīyantīti khettādibhede kāme anugijjhantaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ kusalehi pahātabbattā abalasaṅkhātā kilesā balīyanti abhibhavanti, saddhābalādivirahena vā abalaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ abalā kilesā balīyanti, abalattā abhibhavantīti attho. Maddantenaṃ parissayāti enaṃ kāmagiddhaṃ kāme pariyesantaṃ rakkhantañca sīhādayo ca pākaṭaparissayā kāyaduccaritādayo ca apākaṭaparissayā maddanti. Tato naṃ…pe… dakanti tato tehi pākaṭāpākaṭaparissayehi abhibhūtaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ samudde bhinnanāvaṃ udakaṃ viya anveti anugacchatīti attho. Ayaṃ ādīnavoti yvāyaṃ taṇhāduccaritasaṃkilesahetuko jātiādidukkhānubandho, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
所以“因此”是说:因为贪爱欲乐的人,如前所说,总有苦跟着他,所以才这么说。“有情”就是众生。“常具念”是说,在前夜和后夜都精勤警觉,保持正念。“应避开诸欲”是说,通过镇伏和彻底断除两种方式,对色等事欲不再生起任何种类的烦恼欲,应当避开诸欲、舍断诸欲。“舍断它们后,应渡越瀑流”是说,这样舍断诸欲之后,依靠那能断除它们的圣道,就能渡越四种瀑流,也就是能够渡过去的意思。“如舀出船水而到彼岸”是说,就像一个人因为取水而使船变得沉重,他把船里的水舀出去,船变轻了,便能毫不费力地到达彼岸;同样,自身这艘船被烦恼之水压得沉重,把水舀出去后,以变轻的自身到达彼岸——也就是通过证得阿罗汉果而到达那边的涅槃,在无余涅槃界中般涅槃,这就是它的意思。“此为出离”是说,以舍断诸欲为门,渡越四种瀑流之后,在无余涅槃界中的涅槃,因为出离一切有为法,所以称为出离。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā kāmagiddhassa vuttanayena dukkhānubandho vijjati, tasmā. Jantūti satto. Sadā satoti pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogena sato hutvā. Kāmāni parivajjayeti vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca rūpādīsu vatthukāmesu sabbappakāraṃ kilesakāmaṃ anuppādento kāmāni parivajjaye pajaheyya. Te pahāya tare oghanti evaṃ te kāme pahāya tappahānakaraariyamaggeneva catubbidhampi oghaṃ tareyya, tarituṃ sakkuṇeyyāti attho. Nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragūti yathā puriso udakaggahaṇena garubhāraṃ nāvaṃ udakaṃ bahi siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasireneva pāragū bhaveyya, pāraṃ gaccheyya, evameva attabhāvanāvaṃ kilesūdakagarukaṃ siñcitvā lahukena attabhāvena pāragū bhaveyya, pāraṃ nibbānaṃ arahattappattiyā gaccheyya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānenāti attho. Idaṃ nissaraṇanti yaṃ kāmappahānamukhena caturoghaṃ taritvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbānaṃ, idaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇato nissaraṇanti.
“法”是指布施等福德之法。“确实”只是一个语助词。“法护佑法行者”:一个人如果不放逸地践行这个法,法就会护佑这位法行者,保护他不受现世和来世两种无益之事的伤害。“就像雨季时的大伞”:好比雨季下雨的时候,一个熟练的人撑起一把大伞,保护他不被雨淋湿。在这里,就像那把大伞保护撑伞遮住自己的人不受雨等侵害一样,法也以端正自心、不放逸的方式,通过法行来护佑那个护佑自己的人,这就是要点。“此……行者”这句话,只是把前面已经说过的意思讲得更清楚,很容易理解。“此为果”:上面所说的法的护佑,能让人免除现世和来世的无益之事,并成就最终、最殊胜的保护,这就是果;这个果是因为开示而产生的,所以叫果。巴利
Dhammoti dānādipuññadhammo. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Rakkhati dhammacārinti yo taṃ dhammaṃ appamatto carati, taṃ dhammacāriṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikabhedena duvidhatopi anatthato rakkhati pāleti. Chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāleti vassakāle deve vassante yathā mahantaṃ chattaṃ kusalena purisena dhāritaṃ taṃ vassatemanato rakkhati. Tattha yathā taṃ chattaṃ appamatto hutvā attānaṃ rakkhantaṃ chādentañca vassādito rakkhati, evaṃ dhammopi attasammāpaṇidhānena appamatto hutvā dhammacariyāya attānaṃ rakkhantaṃyeva rakkhatīti adhippāyo. Esā…pe… cārīti etena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Idaṃ phalanti diṭṭhadhammikehi samparāyikehi ca anatthehi yadidaṃ dhammassa rakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ rakkhāvasānassa ca abbhudayassa nipphādanaṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā desanāya nibbattetabbatāya phalanti.
一切法,就是一切有为法。无我:这些法里没有作者、受者这样的自性,它们自身也不是“我”,所以叫无我。如是:就是这样。当以慧观察时:在那个时候,努力修观的人,以称为无我随观的智慧来观察。那时便对苦厌离:因为在这之前,无常性和苦性已经被看得很清楚了,所以依厌离随观,对作为观境存在的五蕴之苦感到厌离,生起厌离。这是清净之道:上面所说的这种厌离随观,因为能清净一切烦恼,所以是称为清净的圣道之路,或是究竟清净或不死界的道路、方法。此为方法:这是以无我随观为门,对一切轮回生起厌离的方法,它是证得清净的因,所以称为方法。巴利
Sabbe dhammāti sabbe saṅkhatā dhammā. Anattāti natthi etesaṃ attā kārakavedakasabhāvo, sayaṃ vā na attāti anattāti. Itīti evaṃ. Yadā paññāya passatīti yasmiṃ kāle vipassanaṃ ussukkāpento anattānupassanāsaṅkhātāya paññāya passati. Atha nibbindati dukkheti atha anattānupassanāya pubbe eva aniccatādukkhatānaṃ suparidiṭṭhattā nibbidānupassanāvasena vipassanāgocarabhūte pañcakkhandhadukkhe nibbindati nibbedaṃ āpajjati. Esa maggo visuddhiyāti yā vuttalakkhaṇā nibbidānupassanā sabbakilesavisujjhanato visuddhisaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa accantavisuddhiyā vā amatadhātuyā maggo upāyo. Ayaṃ upāyoti yadidaṃ anattānupassanāmukhena sabbasmiṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ nibbindanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ visuddhiyā adhigamahetubhāvato upāyo.
有眼之人……应当避开。这首偈颂的简要意思是:就像一个有眼睛的人,在身体走动时,会避开地面不平的地方,或者避开因凶猛而危险的大象等;同样,在这世间,有智慧的人凭智慧知道什么有益、什么有害,就应当避开种种罪恶、低劣的恶行。所谓教令,就是“应当避开诸恶”这一法王世尊的命令,这就叫教令。巴利
‘‘Cakkhumā…pe… parivajjaye’’ti imissā gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā cakkhumā puriso sarīre vahante visamāni bhūmippadesāni caṇḍatāya vā visame hatthiādayo parivajjeti, evaṃ loke sappañño puriso sappaññatāya hitāhitaṃ jānanto pāpāni lāmakāni duccaritāni parivajjeyyāti. Ayaṃ āṇattīti yā ayaṃ ‘‘pāpāni parivajjetabbānī’’ti dhammarājassa bhagavato āṇā, ayaṃ āṇattīti.
像这样,把分别出现在各部经里的果、方法和无我作为例子展示之后,现在为了把它们合在一起展示,就说“以空……”这首偈颂。巴利
Evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ suttesu āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā idāni tā ekato āgatā dassetuṃ ‘‘suññato’’ti gāthamāha.
在这其中,“摩伽罗阇,你应当观察世间为空”这句话是教令。意思是:“摩伽罗阇,你应当把整个行世间都观为‘空’——要么依据它不受主宰这一特相来观察,要么依据随观它空无实体来观察。”这是法王的话语,因为它具有指令的性质,所以称为教令。“常具念”说的是方法:只有恒常不断地保持正念,这种对空的观察才能成就。“拔除了我见”,是指把以二十种事为基础的有身见彻底拔除、断除。“如此就能超越死亡”,这是果:依照所说的,依照所述的方法超越死亡、超脱死域,为此而修的前行道便是这里所开示的“果”。然而,正如乐味等在经中有时以自相显示,有时以简择显示,有时分别显示,有时合一显示,果等则不是这样。果等在一切经中、在偈颂中,都应合一显示。为了显示这一规则,虽然已分别举例,但仍以“观察世间为空”等语作合一举例,应当如此理解。巴利
Tattha suññato lokaṃ avekkhassu, mogharājāti āṇattīti ‘‘mogharāja, sabbampi saṅkhāralokaṃ avasavattitāsallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchabhāvasamanupassanavasena vā suññoti passā’’ti idaṃ dhammarājassa vacanaṃ vidhānabhāvato āṇatti. Sabbadā satikiriyāya taṃsuññatādassanaṃ sampajjatīti ‘‘sadā satoti upāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti vīsativatthukaṃ sakkāyadassanaṃ uddharitvā samucchinditvā. Evaṃ maccutaro siyāti. Idaṃ phalanti yaṃ evaṃ vuttena vidhinā maccutaraṇaṃ maccuno visayātikkamanaṃ tassa yaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāpaṭipajjanaṃ, idaṃ desanāya phalanti attho. Yathā pana assādādayo sutte katthaci sarūpato katthaci niddhāretabbatāya katthaci visuṃ visuṃ katthaci ekato dassitā, na evaṃ phalādayo. Phalādayo pana sabbattha sutte gāthāsu vā ekato dassetabbāti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ visuṃ visuṃ udāharitvāpi puna ‘‘suññato loka’’ntiādinā ekato udāharaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
6 就这样,先用例子把乐味等按它们各自的样子展示出来之后,现在为了在当中按人的差别来说明教法的分别,所以说出了“其中,世尊”等话。巴利
6. Evaṃ assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassetvā idāni tattha puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,有一种人,只要法被简略地提一下、刚被点出来、只是被提示了个大概,还没有做详细的解释和反复的分别,他就能明白,所以叫“略开知者”。意思是说,仅仅凭着简略的提示,他就能通达其中包含的各种分类和详细义理。或者说,ugghaṭita 是被提起、被启动、被建立的意思,能明白这个的人就叫略开知者。因为法在被宣说的时候,就好像从说法的人那里转移到了接受法的容器里一样,这个人仅仅凭着那刚刚启动的就能明白,这就是它的含义。或者说,刚刚被触动就是 ugghaṭita。因为对于那些执着常见等见解的所化众生来说,佛陀特有的说法在宣说的当下就会产生触动,之后便辗转相续。在这里,这个人仅仅凭着那种被启动、刚被触动的心,就能明白法、觉悟法,所以叫略开知者。对这位略开知者,佛陀为他开示出离,仅仅凭着这些,他的利益就能成就。能够了知被广泛分别、被详细展开、被详尽说明的法的人,叫“广开知者”。或者说,能够了知那微细、缓慢渐次深入的法的人,叫广开知者。对这位广开知者,佛陀为他开示过患与出离,因为通过不太简略也不太广说的教法,他的利益才能成就。“应导者”,就是必须通过反复解说才能把义理引导入心的人;或者说,因为根器迟钝,需要从反面反复引导、需要被慢慢引导,所以叫应导者。对这位应导者,佛陀为他开示乐味、过患与出离,因为只有毫无保留地全面解说他才能成就利益。对此,有这段经文:巴利
Tattha ugghaṭitaṃ ghaṭitamattaṃ uddiṭṭhamattaṃ yassa niddesapaṭiniddesā na katā, taṃ jānātīti ugghaṭitaññū. Uddesamattena sappabhedaṃ savitthāramatthaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho, ugghaṭitaṃ vā uccalitaṃ uṭṭhapitanti attho, taṃ jānātīti ugghaṭitaññū. Dhammo hi desiyamāno desakato desanābhājanaṃ saṅkamanto viya hoti, tamesa uccalitameva jānātīti attho, calitameva vā ugghaṭitaṃ. Sassatādiākārassa hi veneyyānaṃ āsayassa buddhāveṇikā dhammadesanā taṅkhaṇapatitā eva calanāya hoti, tato paramparānuvattiyā, tatthāyaṃ ugghaṭite calitamatteyeva āsaye dhammaṃ jānāti avabujjhatīti ugghaṭitaññū, tassa ugghaṭitaññussa nissaraṇaṃ desayati, tattakeneva tassa atthasiddhito. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū, vipañcitaṃ vā mandaṃ saṇikaṃ dhammaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū, tassa vipañcitaññussa ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayati, nātisaṅkhepavitthārāya desanāya tassa atthasiddhito. Netabbo dhammassa paṭiniddisena atthaṃ pāpetabboti neyyo, mudindriyatāya vā paṭilomaggahaṇato netabbo anunetabboti neyyo, tassa neyyassa assādaṃ ādīnavaṃ nissaraṇañca desayati, anavasesetvāva desanena tassa atthasiddhito. Tatthāyaṃ pāḷi –
什么样的人是略开知者?如果有人,在法刚一被宣说的当下,就生起了对法的现观,这样的人就称为略开知者。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo ugghaṭitaññū? Yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ugghaṭitaññū.
什么样的人是“广开知者”?如果一个人,对于简要宣说的法义,在义理被详细分别时,就能生起法现观,这个人就称为广开知者。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo vipañcitaññū? Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū.
什么样的人是应导者?如果有人通过听闻教说、反复询问、如理作意,亲近、结交、侍奉善知识,就这样次第地生起对法的现观,这个人就称为应导者。巴利
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo neyyo? Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yonisomanasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato evaṃ anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo’’ti (pu. pa. 148-150).
不过在这里应当知道,句至者(padaparama,指以句为至上者,即重文字而轻义理的人)不是通达(paṭivedha)的堪任者,所以《导论》(Netti)没有收录他。在这里,有乐味、过患、出离;乐味与过患;乐味与出离;过患与出离;乐味、过患与出离——这些就是七种安立方式。巴利
Padaparamo panettha nettiyaṃ paṭivedhassa abhājananti na gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca assādo, ādīnavo, nissaraṇaṃ, assādo ca ādīnavo ca, assādo ca nissaraṇañca, ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca, assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcāti ete satta paṭṭhānanayā.
在这七种方式里,第三、第六和第七种被采用,是因为它们能调伏三类所化众生;其余四种没有被采用。因为只讲乐味、只讲过患,或者两者一起讲,都不能调伏所化众生,因为没有讲到断除烦恼。第五种也只是在讲过患,根本不是导向出离的方法。世尊的教法以解脱为味,如果不去触及解脱以及达到解脱的方法,这样的教法就不会展开。所以这四种方式没有被举出来。不过,如果针对某类根机的人,把属于杂染分、习气分或二者兼具的教法——比如某一段经文或一首偈颂——举出来作为这些方式的例子,那么七种方式也都可以被收录。所谓调伏所化众生,就是让他们相续中生起圣道。而这只能靠前面说的那三种方式来引导,不是靠其余方式,所以其余方式在这里没有提到。又因为在《藏释》中:巴利
Tesu tatiyachaṭṭhasattamā veneyyattayavinayane samatthatāya gahitā, itare cattāro na gahitā. Na hi kevalena assādena ādīnavena tadubhayena vā kathitena veneyyavinayanaṃ sambhavati, kilesānaṃ pahānāvacanato. Pañcamopi ādīnavāvacanato nissaraṇassa anupāyo eva. Na hi vimuttirasā bhagavato desanā vimuttiṃ tadupāyañca anāmasantī pavattati. Tasmā ete cattāro nayā anuddhaṭā. Sace pana padaparamassa puggalassa vasena pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ tadubhayabhāge ṭhitaṃ desanaṃ suttekadesaṃ gāthaṃ vā tādisaṃ etesaṃ nayānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena uddharati, evaṃ sati sattannampi nayānaṃ gahaṇaṃ bhaveyya. Veneyyavinayanaṃ pana tesaṃ santāne ariyamaggassa uppādanaṃ. Taṃ yathāvuttehi eva nayeti, nāvasesehīti itare idha na vuttā. Yasmā pana peṭake (peṭako. 23) –
在这里,什么是乐味和过患?巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca?
一个人做了什么,就会在自己身上看到那些。
行善的人得到善果,作恶的人得到恶果。巴利
Yāni karoti puriso, tāni attani passati; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’’nti.
在这里,行善的人享受到善的果报,这就是乐味;作恶的人承受恶的果报,这就是过患。巴利
Tattha yaṃ kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ assādo. Yaṃ pāpakārī pāpaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
比丘们,有这八种世间法。哪八种?得、失等等。其中,得、名声、快乐、称赞,这是甜头;不得、坏名声、痛苦、责备,这是祸患。巴利
Aṭṭhime , bhikkhave, lokadhammā. Katame aṭṭha? Lābhotiādi (a. ni. 8.6). Tattha lābho yaso sukhaṃ pasaṃsā, ayaṃ assādo. Alābho ayaso dukkhaṃ nindā, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
在这里,什么是乐味和出离?巴利
Tattha katamo assādo ca nissaraṇañca?
善业的果报是快乐的,心中的愿望也能实现;
他很快就能证得至高寂静的涅槃。巴利
‘‘Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo ca ijjhati; Khippañca paramaṃ santiṃ, nibbānamadhigacchatī’’ti. (peṭako. 23);
这就是它的滋味和出离。巴利
Ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
比丘们,这三十二种是大人所具有的大人相。具足这些大人相的大人,只有两种去处,不会有别的……乃至“揭开覆盖的人”,这就是完整的《相经》。这就是它的乐味与出离。巴利
Dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā…pe… vivaṭacchadoti sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasuttaṃ, (dī. ni. 3.199) ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
在这里,什么是过患和出离呢?巴利
Tattha katamo ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
五蕴确实是沉重的负担,而背负这负担的人就是个体。
在这世间,扛起负担是苦,放下负担是乐。
放下沉重的负担后,不再执取别的负担;
把贪爱连同它的根一起拔掉,不再有渴求,已经彻底寂灭。巴利
‘‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā, bhārahāro ca puggalo; Bhārādānaṃ dukhaṃ loke, bhāranikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhipitvā garuṃ bhāraṃ, aññaṃ bhāraṃ anādiya; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, nicchāto parinibbuto’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.22);
这就是过患和出离。巴利
Ayaṃ ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca.
在这里,什么是味、过患和出离呢?巴利
Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
欲乐确实五彩缤纷、甜蜜又迷人,却用种种不同的样子来搅乱人心。
所以,大王,我已经出家了,因为那确定无误的沙门生活才是更好的。巴利
‘‘Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti cittaṃ; Tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rāja, apaṇṇakaṃ sāmaññameva seyyoti. (ma. ni. 2.307; theragā. 787-788; peṭako. 23);
这就是所说的味、过患和出离。因此,那些方法也应当在这里确定之后加以了知。在果等当中,也同样可以得到这个方法。因为在《藏论》中说:“其中,什么是果和方便?‘立足于戒的有慧之人……’这一偈颂,就是果和方便。”巴利
Ayaṃ assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tepi nayā idha niddhāretvā veditabbā. Phalādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhati eva. Yasmā peṭake (peṭako. 22) ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalañca upāyo ca? Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti gāthā (saṃ. ni. 1.23), idaṃ phalañca upāyo ca.
在这里,什么是果和教诫?巴利
Tattha katamaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca?
如果你们害怕痛苦,如果痛苦对你们来说不可爱;
不要造恶业,不管是公开做还是偷偷做。巴利
‘‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ; Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā rahoti. (udā. 44);
这个就是果和教诫。巴利
Idaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca.
在这里,什么是方法和教诫?巴利
Tattha katamo upāyo ca āṇatti ca?
要认识到这个身体就像陶罐一样脆弱,要把这颗心守护得像一座坚固的城池。
用智慧作武器跟魔罗战斗,战胜之后还要守护住,不要执著留恋。巴利
‘‘Kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā, nagarūpamaṃ cittamidaṃ ṭhapetvā; Yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhena, jitañca rakkhe anivesano siyā’’ti. (dha. pa. 40);
这就是方法与教诫。对于果等,也应当以两种方式来理解其例证。在此,凡是应当通过出离之教说予以调伏者,依“略解知者”等,如说法的分类而成立个人的分类;同样,依“世尊为略解知者开示出离”等个人的分类,说法的分类得以成立。因此,他就是这样被显示的。巴利
Ayaṃ upāyo ca āṇatti ca. Evaṃ phalādīnaṃ dukavasenapi udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca yo nissaraṇadesanāya vinetabbo, so ugghaṭitaññūtiādinā yathā desanāvibhāgena puggalavibhāgasiddhi hoti, evaṃ ugghaṭitaññussa bhagavā nissaraṇaṃ desetītiādinā puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgo sambhavatīti so tathā dassito.
像这样,按照哪些人而显示了教说的分类之后,为了再按行道的分类来分别显示那些人,所以说了“四种行道”等。其中,由行道和通达所构成的区分,就是依行道而有的区分,因此说“四种行道”。而这些行道,从止和观的修习方式来说,又可分为两种。怎么分呢?在止这一边,从最初的作意开始,一直到各个禅那的近行生起为止,这期间持续进行的止的修习,称为“行道”;从近行开始,一直到安止为止,这期间持续进行的慧,称为“通达”。巴利
Evaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena desanāvibhāgo dassito, te puggale paṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭipadābhiññākato vibhāgo paṭipadākato hotīti āha – ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’ti. Tā panetā ca samathavipassanāpaṭipattivasena duvidhā honti. Kathaṃ? Samathapakkhe tāva paṭhamasamannāhārato paṭṭhāya yāva tassa tassa jhānassa upacāraṃ uppajjati, tāva pavattā samathabhāvanā ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Upacārato pana paṭṭhāya yāva appanā tāva pavattā paññā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati.
这种行道,对某些人来说是苦的,因为要执取盖等敌对法的现行,也就是艰难地、不快乐地修习,这就是它的意思;对另一些人来说,因为不存在这种情况,所以是乐的。通达对某些人来说也是迟钝的,也就是软弱、不迅速地生起;对另一些人来说则是迅速的,也就是不软弱、迅速地生起。因此,如果有人从一开始镇伏烦恼时,就是以苦、有行、有功用、疲惫不堪的方式去镇伏,他的行道就是苦行道。如果有人已经镇伏了烦恼,安住在安止的近行中,要经过很长时间才能让诸支显现出来,这就叫迟钝通达。如果有人能迅速让诸支显现出来,这就叫迅速通达。如果有人镇伏烦恼时,是以乐、不疲惫的方式去镇伏,这就叫乐行道。巴利
Sā panāyaṃ paṭipadā ekaccassa dukkhā hoti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammasamudācāragahaṇatāya kicchā asukhasevanāti attho, ekaccassa tadabhāvena sukhā. Abhiññāpi ekaccassa dandhā hoti mandā asīghappavatti, ekaccassa khippā amandā sīghappavatti. Tasmā yo ādito kilese vikkhambhento dukkhena sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto vikkhambheti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā hoti. Yo pana vikkhambhitakileso appanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Yo khippaṃ aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa khippābhiññā nāma hoti. Yo kilese vikkhambhento sukhena akilamanto vikkhambheti, tassa sukhā paṭipadā nāma hoti.
在观修这方面,如果有人通过色法和非色法(名法)这两种途径深入观修,先把握四大种,再把握所造色,然后把握非色法(名法),但在把握色法和非色法时,要艰难、吃力、疲惫地才能把握得住,他的行道就叫作“苦行道”。而对于已经把握了色法和非色法的人来说,他安住在观的近行阶段,因为圣道生起得很慢,所以叫作“迟钝通达”。也有人虽然把握了色法和非色法,但在确定名色的时候,也是艰难、吃力、疲惫地才能确定下来;确定名色之后,安住在观的近行阶段,要经过很长时间才能让圣道生起。他的行道同样叫作“苦行道、迟钝通达”。巴利
Vipassanāpakkhe pana yo rūpārūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetvā upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti arūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, rūpārūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā nāma hoti. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa pana vipassanāparivāse maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Yopi rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapento dukkhena kasirena kilamanto vavatthapeti, vavatthapite ca nāmarūpe vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkoti. Tassāpi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
还有另一类人,虽然已经确定了名色,但在把握诸缘时,仍是痛苦、艰难、疲惫地把握;把握了诸缘之后,安住在观的近行中,要经过很长时间才能让圣道生起。这样也称为“苦行道,迟钝通达”。巴利
Aparo nāmarūpampi vavatthapetvā paccaye pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggaṇhāti, paccaye ca pariggahetvā vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
还有一类人,即使已经把握了诸缘,但在通达诸相时,仍是历经痛苦、艰难与疲惫才得以通达;通达诸相之后,他安住于观的修习期,经过很长时间才让圣道生起。这也叫作苦行道、钝通达。巴利
Aparo paccayepi pariggahetvā lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto paṭivijjhati, paṭividdhalakkhaṇo ca vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
还有另一类人,他同样已经透彻通达了各种行相,当观智锐利、勇健、澄净而顺畅地运作时,内心生起了对观修的贪喜,他为了断除这股贪喜,也是历经艰苦、困顿和疲惫才将其断尽;断尽贪喜之后,他安住在观的持续修习中,经过很长时间才让圣道生起。这也叫做「苦行道,钝通达」。用同样的方式,其余三种行道也应当这样理解。在这里应当看到,这四种行道正是属于观修范畴的部分。巴利
Aparo lakkhaṇānipi paṭivijjhitvā vipassanāñāṇe tikkhe sūre suppasanne vahante uppannaṃ vipassanānikantiṃ pariyādiyamāno dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariyādiyati, nikantiñca pariyādiyitvā vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Imināvupāyena itarāpi tisso paṭipadā veditabbā. Vipassanāpakkhikā eva panettha catasso paṭipadā daṭṭhabbā.
“四种人”是指按照上面所说的行道分类而分出的四种行道者。为了说明这行道分类连同它的因、方法和果,所以说了“渴爱行者”等。巴利
Cattāro puggalāti yathāvuttapaṭipadāvibhāgena cattāro paṭipannakapuggalā. Taṃ pana paṭipadāvibhāgaṃ saddhiṃ hetupāyaphalehi dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhācarito’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这里,“行”就是行为,意思是生活方式。以渴爱所生起的行作为其特征的人,就是渴爱行者;或者说,由渴爱所推动的行者,就是渴爱行者,意思是贪欲占主导的人。对于见行者,这里也是同样的道理。“迟钝”指的是迟钝性,即无明,具足无明的人就是迟钝者,意思是愚痴增盛的人。巴利
Tattha caritanti cariyā, vuttīti attho. Taṇhāya nibbattitaṃ caritaṃ etassāti taṇhācarito, taṇhāya vā pavattito carito taṇhācarito, lobhajjhāsayoti attho. Diṭṭhicaritoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Mandoti mandiyaṃ vuccati avijjā, tāya samannāgato mando, mohādhikoti attho.
“以念根”是指以念为主导。因为他的念根本身就是明净的。由于他是渴爱行者,在前行阶段被懈怠所压制,所以精进不强;又因为痴增盛,所以慧不强。由于这两者,定也不强,因此说“他的念根是明净的”。所以又说“以念处为依止”。再者,因为他是渴爱行者,镇伏烦恼并不容易,所以行道是苦的;由于智不明净,所以是迟钝通达。应当把前面所说的方式接过来配合理解。他通过圣道从轮回之苦中出离。巴利
Satindriyenāti satiyā ādhipaccaṃ kurumānāya. Satindriyameva hissa visadaṃ hoti. Yasmā taṇhācaritatāya pubbabhāge kosajjābhibhavena na vīriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, mohādhikatāya na paññā balavatī. Tadubhayenāpi na samādhi balavā hoti, tasmā ‘‘satindriyameva hissa visadaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘satipaṭṭhānehi nissayehī’’ti. Taṇhācaritatāya cassa kilesavikkhambhanaṃ na sukaranti dukkhā paṭipadā, avisadañāṇatāya dandhābhiññāti pubbe vuttanayaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Niyyātīti ariyamaggena vaṭṭadukkhato niggacchati.
“有广大义”就是有广大的意义,也就是大慧。因为获得了慧作为助伴,他的定变得锐利,能在相应法中起主导作用。因此说“以定根”。由于智明净,所以说“速通达”。以定为主导,以诸禅那为依止,这是它的差别所在。其余部分与前面所说相同。见行者把不能导出的道也误认为能导出的道,对此因为勤力强盛,所以精进偏多。正因为精进偏多,他镇伏烦恼就容易,因此行道是乐的;但由于智不明净,所以是迟钝通达。为了说明这个道理,便说“见行者迟钝”等。其余都如前所说。巴利
Udatthoti udaattho, uḷārapaññoti attho. Paññāsahāyapaṭilābhena cassa samādhi tikkho hoti sampayuttesu ādhipaccaṃ pavatteti. Tenevāha – ‘‘samādhindriyenā’’ti. Visadañāṇattā ‘‘khippābhiññāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samādhipadhānattā jhānānaṃ jhānehi nissayehīti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Diṭṭhicarito aniyyānikamaggampi niyyānikanti maññamāno tattha ussāhabahulattā vīriyādhiko hoti. Vīriyādhikatāyeva cassa kilesavikkhambhanaṃ sukaranti sukhā paṭipadā, avisadañāṇatāya pana dandhābhiññāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘diṭṭhicarito mando’’tiādinā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“Saccehī”就是指诸圣谛。因为世间圣谛是前行智遍作观察的对象,出世间圣谛是胜解的对象,也是道智现观的对象,所以它们都是依止。其余内容跟前面说的一样。在这里,见行者当中“广大慧”的那种人,是略说就能悟入的人;爱行者当中“迟钝”的那种人,是需要引导才能悟入的人;其余两种人,则是广说才能悟入的人。这样,先前通过三种应受教化的众生类型,说明了说法的分类;现在又通过行道的分类,说明了同样的三种应受教化的众生,应当这样理解。巴利
Saccehīti ariyasaccehi. Ariyasaccāni hi lokiyāni pubbabhāgañāṇassa sammasanaṭṭhānatāya lokuttarāni adhimuccanatāya maggañāṇassa abhisamayaṭṭhānatāya ca nissayāni hontīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ettha ca diṭṭhicarito udattho ugghaṭitaññū. Taṇhācarito mando neyyo. Itare dvepi vipañcitaññūti evaṃ yena veneyyattayena pubbe desanāvibhāgo dassito, tadeva veneyyattayaṃ iminā paṭipadāvibhāgena dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为了把应受教化的众生分类作为义理连接的范畴来显示,所以说出了“两种爱行者”等话。因为贪爱是定的直接对立面,爱行者净化时,是通过定这一门而净化的,所以说“以止为前行的”。然而,依据“修习止观并行”的说法,真正出离是靠与正见相应的正定,而不是单靠正定本身,因此又说“以止为前行的观”。“由离贪而心解脱,称为阿罗汉果定”,这是《集》中所说的。但这里要说明的是不来果定,因为那是定已圆满者的果。其中,以染著为特征的就是贪。此贪通过它而退去,所以叫“离贪”,意思就是通过那离贪而断除贪。巴利
Idāni taṃ veneyyupuggalavibhāgaṃ atthanayayojanāya visayaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhāya samādhipaṭipakkhattā taṇhācarito visujjhamāno samādhimukhena visujjhatīti āha – ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāyā’’ti. ‘‘Samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (a. ni. 4.170; paṭi. ma. 2.1, 3) vacanato pana sammādiṭṭhisahiteneva sammāsamādhinā niyyānaṃ, na sammāsamādhinā evāti āha – ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāyā’’ti. ‘‘Rāgavirāgā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalasamādhī’’ti saṅgahesu vuttaṃ. Idha pana anāgāmiphalasamādhīti vakkhati. So hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakārīti. Tattha rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. So virajjati etāyāti rāgavirāgā, tāya rāgavirāgāya, rāgappahāyikāyāti attho.
关于“心解脱”:这里的“心”就是心,但用这个名称在此处指的是定,就像“修习心与慧”这句话里那样。它是通过止息而从对立面中解脱出来,所以叫解脱;或者因为靠它而解脱,或者从它而解脱,所以叫解脱,其实说的就是定。就像在世间说法的语境中,想和心是教说的核心——比如“种种身、种种想”以及“比丘,你以什么心”等;同样,在出世间的教说中,慧和定是核心——比如“具足五智的正定”和“修习止观并行”。在这里,因为是贪的直接对立面,而且有“以止为先行”的说法,所以用“心”这个词来指定;同样,“解脱”这个词也是如此,因此说“就是定”。再者,那定就是心,那定也就是解脱,所以叫心解脱。或者,如前所说,心从对立面中解脱出来,就是心解脱;或者在心中,即在果识中,如前所说的那种解脱,就是心解脱;又或者,从心的果识的对立面中解脱出来,在这个意义上称为心解脱,也就是定。关于“慧解脱”,也应依照同样的道理,在相应的地方这样理解。巴利
Cetovimuttiyāti cetoti cittaṃ, tadapadesena cettha samādhi vuccati ‘‘yathā cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23). Paṭippassaddhivasena paṭipakkhato vimuccatīti vimutti, tena vā vimutto, tato vimuccananti vā vimutti, samādhiyeva. Yathā hi lokiyakathāyaṃ saññā cittañca desanāsīsaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti (dī. ni. 3.332, 341, 357; a. ni. 7.44; 9.24) ‘‘kiṃ citto tvaṃ, bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 135) ca, evaṃ lokuttarakathāyaṃ paññā samādhi ca. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhī’’ti (vibha. 804) ca ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti ca. Tesu idha rāgassa ujuvipaccanīkato samathapubbaṅgamatāvacanato ca cetoggahaṇena samādhi vutto. Tathā vimuttivacanena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādhiyevā’’ti. Ceto ca taṃ vimutti cāti cetovimutti. Atha vā vuttappakārasseva cetaso paṭipakkhato vimutti vimokkhoti cetovimutti, cetasi vā phalaviññāṇe vuttappakārāva vimuttīti cetovimutti, cetaso vā phalaviññāṇassa paṭipakkhato vimutti vimokkho etasminti cetovimutti, samādhiyeva. Paññāvimuttiyāti etthāpi ayaṃ nayo yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbo.
见行者在自己的领域里,其运作方式与慧相似,所以当见行者净化时,是通过慧门而净化的,因此说“两种见行者,以观……”等。“由于无明离欲而有慧解脱”,这是指阿拉汉果的慧。通过举出止,从它的对立面来确定贪爱;通过举出观,来确定无明,这样就能容易地显示第一种模式的阶段,所以说“那些以止……应当被引导”。巴利
Diṭṭhiyā savisaye paññāsadisī pavattīti diṭṭhicarito visujjhamāno paññāmukhena visujjhatīti āha – ‘‘ubho diṭṭhicaritā vipassanā’’tiādi. Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti arahattaphalapaññā . Samathaggahaṇena tappaṭipakkhato taṇhaṃ vipassanāggahaṇena avijjañca niddhāretvā paṭhamanayassa bhūmiṃ sakkā sukhena dassetunti āha – ‘‘ye samatha…pe… hātabbā’’ti.
在这里,“以止为先导的行道”指的是前两种行道,另一种则应看作“以观为先导的行道”。“应当被引导”意思是应当被推进、应当被引导。由于观具有无常想、苦想、无我想,又因为苦想包含了不净想,所以这四种想就显示出来了。而通过它们的对立面——四种颠倒,就能轻松地展示整个“狮子游戏”论的基础,因此说“那些以观……应当被引导”。巴利
Tattha samathapubbaṅgamā paṭipadāti purimā dve paṭipadā, itarā vipassanāpubbaṅgamāti daṭṭhabbā. Hātabbāti gametabbā, netabbāti attho. Vipassanāya aniccadukkhaanattasaññābhāvato dukkhasaññāparivārattā ca asubhasaññāya imā catasso saññā dassitā honti. Tappaṭipakkhena ca cattāro vipallāsāti sakalassa sīhavikkīḷitanayassa bhūmiṃ sukhena sakkā dassetunti āha – ‘‘ye vipassanā…pe… hātabbā’’ti.
7 像这样,先按修行方式的差别,说明了应受教化之人的差别;现在要用智慧的差别来说明它。因为世尊的开示,目的只是教化应受教化的人;而教化他们,就是让他们依次生起闻所成慧等三种智慧。再者,阐明世尊开示生起的情形,正是论理方法的作用。所以,先问这种论理最初是以什么方式生起的,然后通过说明人的差别来分解开示,并想在其中把开示论理运用到开示上,为了说明这一点,就说“这种论理在哪里生起”等话。巴利
7. Evaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgena veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ ñāṇavibhāgena dassento yasmā bhagavato desanā yāvadeva veneyyavinayanatthā, vinayanañca nesaṃ sutamayādīnaṃ tissannaṃ paññānaṃ anukkamena nibbattanaṃ, yathā bhagavato desanāya pavattibhāvavibhāvanañca hāranayabyāpāro, tasmā imassa hārassa samuṭṭhitappakāraṃ tāva pucchitvā yena puggalavibhāgadassanena desanābhājanaṃ vibhajitvā tattha desanāyaṃ desanāhāraṃ niyojetukāmo taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro kattha sambhavatī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“凡”指的是这样的人:他已经从八种无暇(八难)中解脱出来,又具备听闻等圆满成就。“导师”是因为他根据现世利益、来世利益和最上利益,恰如其分地教导,所以称为导师。“法”是指:依照教导去实践的人,不会堕入恶趣,因为它能这样持守,所以叫做法,也就是这个法。“宣说”是指以简略和详细的方式来讲说、讲述。“某一位”是指世尊弟子中的某一位。“应受尊重者”是指因为具备戒、多闻等殊胜功德,所以值得被人尊重。“同梵行者”中,“梵”在最殊胜的意义上,指整个佛陀的教法;与这梵行共同行持、共同实践的人,就叫同梵行者。“获得信心”是指生起这样的信心:对如来生起信心——“那位世尊确实是正自觉者,能宣说这样的法”;对法也生起信心——“这个法确实是善说的,如此完全圆满、完全清净”。意思是说,他生起、产生这样的信心。巴利
Tattha yassāti yo so aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vimutto sotāvadhānapariyosānāhi ca sampattīti samannāgato yassa. Satthāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsanato satthā. Dhammanti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, taṃ dhammaṃ. Desayatīti saṅkhepavitthāranayehi bhāsati katheti. Aññataroti bhagavato sāvakesu aññataro. Garuṭṭhānīyoti sīlasutādiguṇavisesayogena garukaraṇīyo. Sabrahmacārīti brahmaṃ vuccati seṭṭhaṭṭhena sakalaṃ satthusāsanaṃ. Samaṃ saha vā brahmaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti sabrahmacārī. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā yo evarūpassa dhammassa desetā’’ti tathāgate, ‘‘svākkhāto vatāyaṃ dhammo yo evaṃ ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho’’tiādinā dhamme ca saddhaṃ labhati uppādetīti attho.
这里说的“于此”,是指在所听闻、所掌握的教法当中。“审察”是指对巴利经文和经文含义进行审察的慧。其余几个词都是它的同义词。因为它在上面所说的审察中不退缩,从策励的角度叫“策励”,从衡量的角度叫“衡量”,从仔细考察的角度叫“考察”。或者,因为能审察,所以叫“审察”,那是对字词和含义加以分别考察的慧。“策励”是指由精进支撑、能忆持并熟悉法的慧。“衡量”是指对一句和另一句之间,或一种教说和另一种教说之间加以衡量、比对之后把握的慧。“考察”是指把(所说的内容)放入四大引据中去,对巴利经文和经文含义进行考察的慧。希望自利利他的人所听到的,就叫“所闻”,因为言说没有固定时间限制,就像“duddha”这个词的情形一样。那它到底是什么呢?从主要作用或能力来说,可以知道就是教法。或者,听闻就是“所闻”,意思是顺着耳门对教法加以执持。以所闻为因而产生的,就是“闻所成”。以某种方式了知,就叫“慧”。凡是那种审察,这就是闻所成慧,也应该这样逐一对应理解。“如是”的意思是:正如闻所成慧具有审察等不同名称、具有审察等不同分类一样,思所成慧也是如此。或者,这是在显示:就像闻所成慧是低劣的、不稳固的,思所成慧也是如此。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāsute yathāpariyatte dhamme. Vīmaṃsāti pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca vīmaṃsanapaññā . Sesaṃ tassā eva vevacanaṃ. Sā hi yathāvuttavīmaṃsane saṅkocaṃ anāpajjitvā ussahanavasena ussāhanā, tulanavasena tulanā, upaparikkhaṇavasena upaparikkhāti ca vuttā. Atha vā vīmaṃsatīti vīmaṃsā, sā padapadatthavicāraṇā paññā. Ussāhanāti vīriyena upatthambhitā dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayasādhikā paññā. Tulanāti padena padantaraṃ, desanāya vā desanantaraṃ tulayitvā saṃsanditvā gahaṇapaññā. Upaparikkhāti mahāpadese otāretvā pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca upaparikkhaṇapaññā. Attahitaṃ parahitañca ākaṅkhantehi suyyatīti sutaṃ, kālavacanicchāya abhāvato, yathā duddhanti. Kiṃ pana tanti? Adhikārato sāmatthiyato vā pariyattidhammoti viññāyati. Atha vā savanaṃ sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena pariyattidhammassa upadhāraṇanti attho. Sutena hetunā nibbattā sutamayī. Pakārena jānātīti paññā. Yā vīmaṃsā, ayaṃ sutamayī paññāti paccekampi yojetabbaṃ. Tathāti yathā sutamayī paññā vīmaṃsādipariyāyavatī vīmaṃsādivibhāgavatī ca, tathā cintāmayī cāti attho. Yathā vā sutamayī oramattikā anavaṭṭhitā ca, evaṃ cintāmayī cāti dasseti.
以所闻为依:意思是依靠所听闻的教法,或者以听闻教法作为近依。这里是用工具格来表达“如此这般之相”,含义是“依于所说的所闻”。在“审察”等词中,“审察”是指对“这是戒,这是定,这些是色法、无色法,这些是五蕴”等种种法,以了知其自性的方式生起的慧。“衡量”是指放下这些法的名称含义,像用秤称量一样去把握这些法的自性、作用和特相的慧。“推度”是指不离开这些法的自相,进一步以无常性、生起、有因等行相去推理、去思择,从而生起的审察之慧。“以意一再观察”是指对于如此审察过的法,如同有分别般地呈现时,使它们如此成为可忍可许的,以心一再地观察,以意一再地观察。在这里,依所闻而生的慧,由于依所闻之法的受持、熟习而转起,故是勇猛所生,值得称为“勇猛”,而思所成慧则不是这样,所以此处没有说“勇猛”一词。思择即思,也就是深入省察的意思。其余则如前所说。巴利
Sutena nissayenāti sutena pariyattidhammena pariyattidhammassavanena vā upanissayena itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ sutaṃ upanissāyāti attho. Vīmaṃsātiādīsu ‘‘idaṃ sīlaṃ, ayaṃ samādhi, ime rūpārūpadhammā, ime pañcakkhandhā’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvavīmaṃsanabhūtā paññā vīmaṃsā. Tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ vacanatthaṃ muñcitvā sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇassa tulayitvā viya gahaṇapaññā tulanā. Tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇaṃ avijahitvā aniccatādiruppanasappaccayādiākāre ca takketvā vitakketvā ca upaparikkhaṇapaññā upaparikkhā, tathā upaparikkhite dhamme saviggahe viya upaṭṭhahante evametehi nijjhānakkhame katvā cittena anu anu pekkhaṇā manasānupekkhaṇā. Ettha ca yathā sutamayī paññā yathāsutassa dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena pavattanato ussāhajātā ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, na evaṃ cintāmayīti idha ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti padaṃ na vuttaṃ. Cintanaṃ cintā, nijjhānanti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“以这两种慧”:是指以上面所说的两种慧作为基础。因为,只有立足于闻所成智和思所成智之后,才能开始修观。也有版本读作“在这两种慧中”。或者,应当补上“由它们所生、已经生起的”这一省略成分来理解。“与作意相应”:是指与摄取色法和非色法等作意相应、已经投入其中的状态。“所生起的智”:按照前面所说的方式,通过作意的运用,依次完成见清净、度疑清净、道非道智见清净、行道智见清净,这样精勤修观的人,所生起的、被称为智见清净的圣道智——这种慧就是修所成慧。这就是前后文的关联。而这种见又分为见和修两种,所以说“在见地或修地”。如果称为“见”,那为什么这里的慧是修所成慧呢?因为这种智本身就是修所成慧,只是由于它第一次现见涅槃,所以称为“见”。因此,有果报的初道属于见地;其余有学和无学的法,则属于修地。巴利
Imāhi dvīhi paññāhīti yathāvuttāhi dvīhi paññāhi kāraṇabhūtāhi. Sutacintāmayañāṇesu hi patiṭṭhito vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti. ‘‘Imāsu dvīsu paññāsū’’tipi paṭhanti. ‘‘Tehi jātāsu uppannāsū’’ti vā vacanaseso yojetabbo. Manasikārasampayuttassāti rūpārūpapariggahādimanasikāre yuttappayuttassa. Yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti vuttanayena manasikārappayogena diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhimaggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhipaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīnaṃ sampa ādanena vipassanaṃ ussukkantassa yaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāmayī paññāti sambandho. Taṃ pana dassanaṃ bhāvanāti duvidhanti āha – ‘‘dassanabhūmiyaṃ vā bhāvanābhūmiyaṃ vā’’ti. Yadi dassananti vuccati, kathaṃ tattha paññā bhāvanāmayīti? Bhāvanāmayameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ, paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato pana ‘‘dassana’’nti vuttanti saphalo paṭhamamaggo dassanabhūmi. Sesā sekkhāsekkhadhammā bhāvanābhūmi.
8 现在,为了用另一种方式说明这三种慧,说了“从他闻声”等话。其中,“从他”的意思不是从自己,而是从别人——从导师或从弟子那里。“闻声”是指从他们的说法音声,也就是以说法为条件。或者也可以这样理解:从他人那里有声音,所以叫“从他闻声”;那慧属于闻所成,应该这样连接起来。“自内所生”是指在每个人自己身内生起的。“如理作意”是指以把握诸法自性等方式,按照前面所说的办法生起的作意。“由从他闻声”是指以从他闻声为因。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
8. Idāni imā tisso paññā pariyāyantarena dassetuṃ ‘‘paratoghosā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paratoti na attato, aññato satthuto sāvakato vāti attho. Ghosāti tesaṃ desanāghosato, desanāpaccayāti attho. Atha vā parato ghoso etissāti paratoghosā, yā paññā, sā sutamayīti yojetabbaṃ. Paccattasamuṭṭhitāti paccattaṃ tassa tassa attani sambhūtā. Yonisomanasikārāti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvapariggaṇhanādinā yathāvuttena upāyena pavattamanasikārā. Parato ca ghosenāti paratoghosena hetubhūtena. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,为了说明提出这些慧是为了哪类所教化的众生,就结合所教化众生的类别来显示,而说了“凡此人”等。其中,先用数量说“此二”,然后再从自相上显示它们是闻所成和思所成。此人是略开知者:此人因为通过闻所成和思所成的慧,已经成就了对意乐和加行的觉悟,所以仅仅依靠略说就能了知,因此称为略开知者。此人是广演知者:因为思所成慧还没有审察他的意乐,所以要依靠略说和广释才能了知,这就是广演知者。此人是应引导者:因为连闻所成慧也不具备,所以必须依靠毫无遗漏的广说教法来引导,这就是应引导者。巴利
Idāni yadatthaṃ imā paññā uddhaṭā, tameva veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imā dveti gaṇanavasena vatvā puna tā sutamayī cintāmayī cāti sarūpato dasseti. Ayaṃ ugghaṭitaññūti ayaṃ sutamayacintāmayañāṇehi āsayapayogapabodhassa nipphāditattā uddesamatteneva jānanato ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vipañcitaññūti cintāmayañāṇena āsayassa aparikkhatattā uddesaniddesehi jānanato vipañcitaññū. Ayaṃ neyyoti sutamayañāṇassāpi abhāvato niravasesaṃ vitthāradesanāya netabbato neyyo.
9 就这样,按教说、行道和慧这三方面的区分,把三类可教化众生分别说明之后,现在为了确定并衔接世尊在此处所转起的说法之教说论理,便开始说“此即法教”等。巴利
9. Evaṃ desanāpaṭipadāñāṇavibhāgehi desanābhājanaṃ veneyyattayaṃ vibhajitvā idāni tattha pavattitāya bhagavato dhammadesanāya desanāhāraṃ niddhāretvā yojetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
这里,“此”指的就是那个。先前在“比丘们,我要为你们说法”等(《导论》5)返指句的开头,作为开示论理的所缘而安立的经文,现在正是为了把开示论理应用到这里,所以回顾说“此即法教”。接着以“在说什么?”这种想要说明的心态,问取教说的总义,再用数量加以限定,从总体上显示:“四圣谛”。因为世尊的教说确实没有脱离圣谛的。而它的总义就是四圣谛。又因为所化导者若脱离了流转、令流转、流转之灭以及达彼之方便,便不存在,所以这四者应以无颠倒的方式视为圣谛。然后从它们各自的面貌显示:“苦、集、灭、道”。巴利
Tattha sāyanti sā ayaṃ. Yā pubbe ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādinā (netti. 5) paṭiniddesavārassa ādito desanāhārassa visayabhāvena nikkhittā pāḷi, tamevettha desanāhāraṃ niyojetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti paccāmasati. Kiṃ desayatīti kathetukamyatāvasena desanāya piṇḍatthaṃ pucchitvā taṃ gaṇanāya paricchinditvā sāmaññato dasseti ‘‘cattāri saccānī’’ti. Saccavinimuttā hi bhagavato desanā natthīti. Tassā ca cattāri saccāni piṇḍattho. Pavattipavattakanivattitadupāyavimuttassa neyyassa abhāvato cattāri aviparītabhāvena saccānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tāni ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti sarūpato dasseti.
在这里,苦是指:它是众多灾祸的依处,所以可厌;它不具备凡夫所构想的常、净、乐、我这样的性质,所以是空的。集是指:当其余条件具足时,它是苦生起的原因。灭是指:因为一切趣都是空的,所以这里没有所谓轮回牢狱的苦聚;或者,当这个灭被证得时,所谓轮回牢狱的苦聚就不存在了,所以叫灭;又或者,因为它是使苦不再生起的灭的缘。道是指:它朝着灭除烦恼的方向进行,或者被希求涅槃的人所寻求。其中,以集为味,以苦为过患,以道和灭为出离。这样,在那些经中四圣谛是以自相出现的,就按经文本身来理解。而在那些经中四圣谛没有以自相出现的,就从义理上提取四圣谛,再依它们来确定味等。在那些味等以自相出现的地方,就不需要再多说;在没有出现的地方,就从义理上提取味等,再依它们来确定四圣谛。但在这里,味等是以举例的方式从自相显示的,所以是依它们来确定圣谛,因此说了“过患”等这样的话。巴利
Tattha anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānabhāvena kucchitattā bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahena tucchattā ca dukkhaṃ. Avasesapaccayasamavāye dukkhassa uppattikāraṇattā samudayo. Sabbagatisuññattā natthi ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhāto dukkharodho, etasmiṃ vā adhigate saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvotipi nirodho, anuppādanirodhapaccayattā vā. Mārento gacchati, nibbānatthikehi maggiyatīti vā maggo. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ yasmiṃ sutte cattāri saccāni sarūpato āgatāni, tattha yathārutavasena. Yattha pana sutte cattāri saccāni sarūpato na āgatāni, tattha atthato cattāri saccāni uddharitvā tesaṃ vasena assādādayo niddhāretabbā. Yattha ca assādādayo sarūpato āgatā, tattha vattabbameva natthi. Yattha pana na āgatā, tattha atthato uddharitvā tesaṃ vasena cattāri saccāni niddhāretabbāni. Idha pana assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassitāti tehi saccāni niddhāretuṃ ‘‘ādīnavo cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,根据“简要地说,五取蕴就是苦”这句话,除了渴爱之外,属于三界的一切法就是苦谛;而这些法因为具有无常等性质,所以是过患,它们的果也应该通过开示来成立。其中,凡是属于世间的,就是针对这些法而说“果也是苦”。关于“味”:因为渴爱和颠倒的人也会贪求这些法,所以针对这些法而说“味是集”。与观智一起生起的圣道就是开示,而开示是证得开示之果的方法,因此说“方法和教令是道”。在出离这一项中,也应该确定是圣道。不应该认为这里对谛的分别有混乱。正如在《谛分别》中,以集谛的性质分别“渴爱、其余的烦恼、其余的不善法、有漏的善根、有漏的善法”,按照各种理路,其余属于三界的法都以苦谛的性质分别,在这里也应该这样理解。这就是“这些就是四圣谛”的总结。“这就是法轮”:世尊以四圣谛的方式所作的这种自赞叹的开示,就是法轮。巴利
Tattha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120; 3.373; vibha. 202) vacanato taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, te ca aniccādisabhāvattā ādīnavo, phalañca desanāya sādhetabbaṃ. Tattha yaṃ lokiyaṃ, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘phalañca dukkha’’nti. Assādoti taṇhāvipallāsānampi icchitattā te sandhāya ‘‘assādo samudayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo desanā ca desanāphalādhigamassa upāyoti katvā ‘‘upāyo āṇatti ca maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Nissaraṇapade cāpi ariyamaggo niddhāretabbo, na cāyaṃ saccavibhāgo ākuloti daṭṭhabbo. Yathā hi saccavibhaṅge (vibha. 208) ‘‘taṇhā avasiṭṭhā kilesā avasiṭṭhā akusalā dhammā sāsavāni kusalamūlāni sāsavā ca kusalā dhammā samudayasaccabhāvena vibhattā’’ti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ naye taṃtaṃavasiṭṭhā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhasaccabhāvena vibhattā, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbanti. Imāni cattāri saccānīti nigamanaṃ . Idaṃ dhammacakkanti yāyaṃ bhagavato catusaccavasena sāmukkaṃsikā dhammadesanā, idaṃ dhammacakkaṃ.
现在,为了通过《谛分别经》等来说明这次说法具有法轮的性质,所以说了“如世尊所说”等话。其中,“此是苦”:这是指以生等来分类、简要地归结为五取蕴、排除渴爱、属于三界的一切法;因为它是苦的立足处,又具有苦苦等形态,所以是苦圣谛。“我”:是世尊指称自己。“在波罗奈”:在名叫波罗奈的城市附近。“仙人堕处”:因为诸独觉佛仙人从空中降落到这里,所以叫仙人堕处。“鹿野苑”:因为在这里给了鹿群无畏,所以得名;精舍就建在那里。“无上”:超越、越过,或者说是最殊胜;因为没有比它更上的,所以叫无上;也可以说是无可比拟、无可匹敌。世尊的说法,虽然在许多天众和人群当中,为了让他们通达圣谛已经说过几百次,但最初这一次,是以憍陈如为首的十八位梵天众为对象,阐明四圣谛通达的法说。因为这次说法格外殊胜,所以独得“法轮”这个特别名称,因此说“转法轮”。巴利
Idāni tassā dhammadesanāya dhammacakkabhāvaṃ saccavibhaṅgasuttavasena (ma. ni. 3.371 ādayo) dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ jātiādivibhāgaṃ saṅkhepato pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅgahaṃ taṇhāvajjaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvena dukkhadukkhādibhāvena ca dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti attho. Meti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasīnāmakassa nagarassa avidūre. Paccekabuddhaisīnaṃ ākāsato otaraṇaṭṭhānatāya isipatanaṃ. Migānaṃ tattha abhayassa dinnattā migadāyanti ca laddhanāme assame. Uttarati atikkamati, abhibhavatīti vā uttaraṃ, natthi etassa uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Anatisayaṃ appaṭibhāgaṃ vā. Kiñcāpi bhagavato dhammadesanā anekāsu devamanussaparisāsu anekasatakkhattuṃ tesaṃ ariyasaccappaṭivedhasampādanavasena pavattitā, tathāpi sabbapaṭhamaṃ aññāsikoṇḍaññappamukhāya aṭṭhārasaparimāṇāya brahmakoṭiyā catusaccappaṭivedhavibhāvanīyā dhammadesanā, tassā sātisayā dhammacakkasamaññāti ‘‘dhammacakkaṃ pavattita’’nti vuttaṃ.
在这里,念处等法本身因为能运转、推动,所以称为“轮”,这就是法轮;或者“轮”是指教令。因为它不离开法,所以它既是法又是轮,因此叫法轮。依法、依理而运转,也叫法轮。正如经中所说:“既运转法又运转轮,所以叫法轮;既运转轮又运转法,所以叫法轮;以法而运转,所以叫法轮”等等。所谓“不退转”,是因为世尊在法中得自在、是正等正觉者,而且法轮是无上的,所以无法被遮止、否定。那么,它被谁所不退转呢?接着就说“沙门或……”等话。这里,“沙门”指已经出家的人。“婆罗门”指种姓上的婆罗门。因为那些真正达到究竟意义的沙门、婆罗门,根本不会有违逆之心。“天”指欲界的天人。“任何人”指其他任何随行的大众。到这里,应当理解为八类大众已经全部包括在内,没有遗漏。“于世间”指众生世间。巴利
Tattha satipaṭṭhānādidhammo eva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkanti vā āṇā. Dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.41-42). Appaṭivattiyanti dhammissarassa bhagavato sammāsambuddhabhāvato dhammacakkassa ca anuttarabhāvato appaṭisedhanīyaṃ. Kena pana appaṭivattiyanti āha ‘‘samaṇena vā’’tiādi. Tattha samaṇenāti pabbajjaṃ upagatena. Brāhmaṇenāti jātibrāhmaṇena. Paramatthasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañhi paṭilomanacittaṃyeva natthi. Devenāti kāmāvacaradevena. Kenacīti yena kenaci avasiṭṭhapārisajjena. Ettāvatā aṭṭhannampi parisānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lokasminti sattaloke.
这里说的“其中”,是指在宣说四圣谛的法义当中。“文句无量、文字无量”这句话,是为了说明大部分文字都被包含在文句里,所以采用这种随顺的说法。应当知道,这里说“文句、文字、音节”,是把它们的词性顺序颠倒了。“其义”,就是指由四圣谛所构成的含义。“略说”,就是应当以简略的方式来说明。这个道理在其余几处也一样适用。“其义”在这里用的是属格,表示所属关系。至于“此亦”:“iti”表示方式,“pi”表示总括;整句的意思是,应当通过这种方式、通过这种方式来理解“此是苦圣谛”。借此,就能说明前面所说的苦圣谛,按生等不同类别具有多种分类;而揭示这些差别的文句、文字等,也确实如前所说,是无量的。巴利
Tatthāti tissaṃ catusaccadhammadesanāyaṃ. Aparimāṇā padā, aparimāṇā akkharāti uppaṭipāṭivacanaṃ yebhuyyena padasaṅgahitāni akkharānīti dassanatthaṃ. Padā akkharā byañjanāti liṅgavipallāso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthassāti catusaccasaṅkhātassa atthassa. Saṅkāsanāti saṅkāsitabbākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atthassāti ca sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Itipidanti itīti pakārattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, imināpi imināpi pakārena idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ veditabbanti attho. Tena jātiādibhedena yathāvuttassa dukkhasaccassa anekabhedataṃ taṃdīpakānaṃ akkharapadādīnaṃ vuttappakāraṃ aparimāṇatañca samattheti.
这就是苦的集起:这里的渴爱分为欲爱等各类,是渴爱轮回的根本,因为它是前面所说的苦生起的原因,所以叫苦的集起。这就是苦的灭尽:这是一切有为法所超越的无为界,因为它是前面所说的苦不再生起、灭尽的条件,所以叫苦的灭尽。这就是通向苦之灭尽的道路:这是由正见等八支组成的整体,它以涅槃为所缘,朝向名为苦灭的涅槃,是达到苦灭的修行道路,所以叫通向苦之灭尽的道路。至于“此亦”等语句,在集圣谛方面,应当以一百零八种渴爱的活动方式来分别理解其含义;在灭圣谛方面,应当以我慢的摧破等不同角度来分别;在道圣谛方面,则应当以三十七菩提分法来分别。其余部分,按照前面所说的方式理解即可。巴利
Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti ayaṃ kāmataṇhādibhedā taṇhāvaṭṭassa mūlabhūtā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa nibbattihetubhāvato dukkhasamudayo. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti ayaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭā asaṅkhatadhātu yathāvuttassa dukkhassa anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādiaṭṭhaṅgasamūho dukkhanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasena tadabhimukhībhūtattā paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyāti dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Itipidanti padassa pana samudayasacce aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritehi, nirodhasacce madanimmadanādipariyāyehi, maggasacce sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammehi attho vibhajitvā veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
就这样,在“十二句为经”这个偈颂里,按照整部教法的六种义句和六种文句来说,就是所说的十二句性。这里先以“诸比丘,我要为你们说法”等语,从显示说法范围的角度,用六六法门的方式部分地提示出来;为了显示《转法轮经》已经总摄了其中的义理,从而阐明世尊的一切言说都是四圣谛之教说、其内容就是四圣谛,于是以“诸比丘,这在波罗奈……”等语,从纲目上开示《谛分别经》;接着又以“其中有无量句”等语,分别文句和义句,说明十二句的性质。现在,为了显示这些句彼此之间以互为所缘、互为能缘的方式相互关联,便说“其中,世尊以文字而略说”等语。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti gāthāya sakalassa sāsanassa channaṃ atthapadānaṃ channañca byañjanapadānaṃ vasena yā dvādasapadatā vuttā, tameva ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayadassanavasena chachakkapariyāyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.420 ādayo) ekadesena uddisitvā dhammacakkappavattanasuttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) tadatthassa saṅgahitabhāvadassanamukhena sabbassāpi bhagavato vacanassa catusaccadesanābhāvaṃ tadatthassa ca catusaccabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti me, bhikkhave, bārāṇasiya’’ntiādinā saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.371 ādayo) uddesato dassetvā ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā padā’’tiādinā byañjanatthapadāni vibhajanto dvādasapadabhāvaṃ dīpetvā idāni tesaṃ aññamaññavisayivisayabhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,通过把握词的组成部分来把握词;一旦把握了词,那些已经了解约定含义的人就能明白词的意思。在这里,就像通过把握词的组成部分来把握词一样,通过把握词义的组成部分也能把握词义,由此产生一种特别的助益,所以论师说“以文字来略说”。然而,因为以文字简略显示的义理,在词结束的时候,由于句子还没有完结,所以它其实只是由词本身来显示和说明的,因此说“以词来阐明”。而当句子完结时,那个义理就被展开、显露出来了,所以说“以音节来开显”。又因为当句子按各种方式分析时,那个义理才算是被分别清楚,所以说“以行相来分别”。同样,当句子的各个部分逐一进行词源分析时,那个义理就变得明显,所以说“以词源解释来令明了”。当经过词源分析的句子各部分,以详尽的方式毫无遗漏地开示时,就能让应受调伏的众生生起内心的满足,智慧也变得锐利,所以说“以细说来令知”。在这里,不应该把“正是以文字来略说”理解为一种排他的限定,而应该理解为“正是以文字来略说”这样的强调。这样理解的话,义句属于不同句子的情况也能成立。因此,在单一连贯的经文中,只有六个义句;而在多个连贯处的经文中,则应该在每一个连贯处各别确定六个义句。巴利
Tattha padāvayavaggahaṇamukhena padaggahaṇaṃ, gahite ca pade padatthāvabodho gahitapubbasaṅketassa hoti. Tattha ca padāvayavaggahaṇena viya padaggahaṇassa, padatthāvayavaggahaṇenāpi padatthaggahaṇassa visesādhānaṃ jāyatīti āha – ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’ti. Yasmā pana akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padapariyosāne vākyassa apariyositattā padeneva pakāsito dīpito hoti, tasmā ‘‘padehi pakāsetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vākyapariyosāne pana so attho vivarito vivaṭo kato hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjanehi vivaratī’’ti. Yasmā ca pakārehi vākyabhede kate tadattho vibhatto nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘ākārehi vibhajatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vākyāvayavānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘niruttīhi uttānīkarotī’’ti. Katanibbacanehi vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ buddhinisānañca kataṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘niddesehi paññapetī’’ti. Ettha ca akkharehi eva saṅkāsetīti avadhāraṇaṃ akatvā akkharehi saṅkāsetiyevāti evaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sati atthapadānaṃ nānāvākyavisayatāpi siddhā hoti. Tena ekānusandhike sutte chaḷeva atthapadāni, nānānusandhike pana anusandhimhi anusandhimhi cha cha atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni.
以“以文字和文句来举示”等说法,是在显示文句达成其作用的方式。因为它们的运作,正是为了调伏三类应受调伏的人。然而,由于“通过证悟圣谛而成为以文句为最高”这种情况并不成立,所以这里没有提到以文句为最高。或者也可以这样理解:仅仅通过提到“应被引导的人”,就已经把那种人也包含在内了,就像通过提到“有学”,也把善凡夫包含在内一样。在“以文字”等说法中,用的是工具格,表示工具,而不是表示原因的因格。因为文字等是用来举示等的,而不是举示等是用来指文字等的。凡是行为为了某个目的而发生,那个目的就是因,就像“以食物而住”的说法一样。“举示”:对于那些已经专注倾听、心得等持的应受调伏者,以简要开示的方式,通过文字施加特别的影响,使他们在文句结束时,内心的意向能够觉醒;也就是说,以简要的方式说出或提示所想要的义理,这就是它的意思。“细解释”:就是详细说明前面已经提示的义理。“广开演”:就是使其详尽,或者以详尽的方式告知、反复宣示,这就是它的意思。而在这里,所说的“举示”指的是提示和指出,也就是讲说的开端,因此说“举示为始”。同样地,细解释是指详细说明,广开演是指反复宣示,而详细说明和反复宣示又是讲说的中间和结尾。因此说:“细解释在中间,广开演在结尾。”巴利
‘‘Akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī’’tiādinā byañjanapadānaṃ kiccasādhanaṃ dasseti. Veneyyattayavinayameva hi tesaṃ byāpāro. Aṭṭhānabhāvato pana saccappaṭivedhassa padaparamo na idha vutto. Neyyaggahaṇeneva vā tassāpi idha gahaṇaṃ sekkhaggahaṇena viya kalyāṇaputhujjanassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akkharehītiādīsu karaṇasādhane karaṇavacanaṃ, na hetumhi. Akkharādīni hi ugghaṭanādiatthāni, na ugghaṭanādiakkharādiatthaṃ. Yadatthā ca kiriyā so hetu, yathā ‘‘annenavasatī’’ti. Ugghaṭetīti sotāvadhānaṃ katvā samāhitacittānaṃ veneyyānaṃ saṅkāsanavasena akkharehi visesaṃ ādahanto yathā padapariyosāne āsayappaṭibodho hoti, tathā yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ saṅkhepena katheti uddisatīti attho. Vipañcayatīti yathāuddiṭṭhaṃ atthaṃ niddisati. Vitthāretīti vitthāraṃ karoti, vitthāraṃ katvā ācikkhati vā, paṭiniddisatīti attho. Yasmā cettha ugghaṭetīti uddisanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Uddeso ca desanāya ādi, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘ugghaṭanā ādī’’ti. Tathā vipañcanaṃ niddisanaṃ, vittharaṇaṃ paṭiniddisanaṃ, niddesapaṭiniddesā ca desanāya majjhapariyosānāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vipañcanā majjhe, vitthāraṇā pariyosāna’’nti.
像这样,先用“以文字来显示”等说法,说明六种文句的作用,现在为了说明义句的作用,就说了“这个法与律”等话。其中,戒等法本身就是教理的实质内容,因为它能调伏应当调伏的人,所以叫做法与律。“被举示”:就是正在被提示、指出。“以它”:就是通过举示知者的调伏方式。“被细解释”:就是正在被详细解说。“被广开演”:就是正在被反复详尽地宣示。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādinā channaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetvā idāni atthapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlādidhammo eva pariyattiatthabhūto veneyyavinayanato dhammavinayo. Ugghaṭīyantoti uddisiyamāno. Tenāti ugghaṭitaññūvinayanena. Vipañcīyantoti niddisiyamāno. Vitthārīyantoti paṭiniddisiyamāno.
10 到这一步,已经通过“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”这段被标出的经文,显示了三种善妙,现在为了显示义与文的圆满,就说了“六句是义”等话。这很容易理解。接着用“因此世尊说”等话,以说法之食所涉的范围,把前面标出的经文作总结性的显示。“出世间”等话,是对“完全圆满、清净”这些词的含义解释。其中,“一切殊胜现前”,是指一切被称为超人法的殊胜,或者增上戒学等殊胜的现前之处。应当知道这个词的构词方式,就像“这是他们的路径”等说法那样。“这也被称为如来句”等话中,这个含摄三学、作为教法梵行的东西,由于如来香象的修行、说法、来去,覆盖了烦恼丛林而成为所行之道;也因此,通过行境的修习和亲近而得以修习、奉行。由于它被大金刚智和一切知智的象牙所刻画,所以也被称为三界诸法的刻画之处,这就是意思。因此,正因为被称为如来句等,仅仅以这个理由,梵天的、一切众生中最上者——世尊的,或者最胜的梵行,就被人所知,也就是按前面所说的那样被充分阐明而了知。因此世尊说:这是以总结的方式显示前面所说的经文。巴利
10. Ettāvatā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni atthabyañjanasampattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cha padāni attho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyaṃ. ‘‘Tenāha bhagavā’’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayabhāvena uddiṭṭhaṃ pāḷiṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Lokuttarantiādi ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha’’nti padānaṃ atthavivaraṇaṃ. Tattha upaṭṭhitaṃ sabbavisesānanti sabbesaṃ uttarimanussadhammasaṅkhātānaṃ visesānaṃ adhisīlasikkhādivisesānaṃ vā upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ nesaṃ padakkanta’’ntiādīnaṃ viya etassa saddasiddhi veditabbā. ‘‘Idaṃ vuccati tathāgatapadaṃ itipī’’tiādīsu idaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ tathāgatagandhahatthino paṭipattidesanāgamanehi kilesagahanaṃ ottharitvā gatamaggotipi. Tena gocarabhāvanāsevanāhi nisevitaṃ bhajitantipi. Tassa mahāvajirañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇadantehi ārañjitaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ ārañjanaṭṭhānantipi vuccatīti attho. Ato cetanti yato tathāgatapadādibhāvena vuccati, ato aneneva kāraṇena brahmuno sabbasattuttamassa bhagavato, brahmaṃ vā sabbaseṭṭhaṃ cariyanti paññāyati yāvadeva manussehi suppakāsitattā yathāvuttappakārehi ñāyati. Tenāha bhagavāti yathāvuttatthaṃ pāḷiṃ nigamanavasena dasseti.
世尊的说法只是为了导向无执取的般涅槃,而“说法之食”也只是为了让人证得圣道。为了说明这一点,先问“这个说法是为谁说的”,然后回答“是为瑜伽行者”。所谓瑜伽行者,就是通过修习四圣谛业处而精勤努力的人。因为他们正是在运用这个“说法之食”。应当知道,这句话是结集者在结集这部论典时,为了表明“说法之食的分别”是依照内在脉络妥善安立的。正如论中所说:“因此,具寿大迦旃延说。”所谓“已联结”,意思是从巴利圣典中确定味等词句的含义并加以连接。巴利
Anupādāparinibbānatthatāya bhagavato desanāya yāvadeva ariyamaggasampāpanattho desanāhāroti dassetuṃ ‘‘kesaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yogīna’’nti āha. Catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya yuttappayuttāti yogino. Te hi imaṃ desanāhāraṃ payojentīti. Idaṃ vacanaṃ desanāhāravibhaṅgassa yathānusandhinā sammā ṭhapitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ pakaraṇaṃ saṅgāyantehi ṭhapitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha āyasmā mahākaccāyano’’ti. Niyuttoti pāḷito assādādipadatthe niddhāretvā yojitoti attho.
2. 审查句分别的注释巴利
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
11 11. 其中,“什么是审查句”等,是审查句分别的解说。这里先对没有出现过的词作解释:在“审查什么”这句话里,用“审查”这个词,是要表明“审查”这个词指的是行为者。那么,当问“这个义理句的范围是什么”时,为了说明它的范围,就说了“审查词句”等。其中,“审查词句”是指从头开始一直到结论,审查整部经里所有的词句。而这种审查有两种:从语言上审查,和从意义上审查。在这两种当中,“这是名词,这是动词,这是前缀,这是小品词,这是阴性词,这是阳性词,这是中性词,这是过去时,这是未来时,这是现在时,这是作者构成的词,这是工具构成的词,这是宾语构成的词,这是所依构成的词,这是主格表达,这是宾格表达,乃至这是处格表达,这是单数,这是复数”等等,像这样作出区分的说法,就是从语言上审查词句。应当知道,这种词句审查,只有通过对不颠倒的自性语的准确观察才能完成。而从意义上审查,则是对每一个词所表达的意义进行解释。如果词是以提问等方式出现的,那么与它相应意义的提问等性质也应当被审查。为了说明这个意思,就说了“审查问题”等。巴利
11.Tattha katamo vicayo hārotiādi vicayahāravibhaṅgo. Tatthāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – kiṃ vicinatīti ettha ‘‘vicinatī’’ti etena vicayasaddassa kattuniddesataṃ dasseti. Kinti panatthassa hārassa visayo pucchitoti taṃ tassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘padaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha padaṃ vicinatīti ādito paṭṭhāya yāva nigamanā suttassa sabbaṃ padaṃ vicinati. Ayañca vicayo duvidho saddato atthato ca. Tesu ‘‘idaṃ nāmapadaṃ, idaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ, idaṃ upasaggapadaṃ, idaṃ nipātapadaṃ, idaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ, idaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ, idaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ, idaṃ atītakālaṃ, idaṃ anāgatakālaṃ, idaṃ vattamānakālaṃ, idaṃ kattusādhanaṃ, idaṃ karaṇasādhanaṃ, idaṃ kammasādhanaṃ, idaṃ adhikaraṇasādhanaṃ, idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, yāva idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, idaṃ ekavacanaṃ, idaṃ anekavacana’’nti evamādivibhāgavacanaṃ, ayaṃ saddato padavicayo. So panāyaṃ padavicayo aviparītasabhāvaniruttisallakkhaṇeneva sampajjatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthato pana vicayo tena tena padena vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanā. Sace pana padaṃ pucchādivasena pavattaṃ, tassa tadatthassa ca pucchādibhāvo vicetabboti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘pañhaṃ vicinatī’’tiādimāha.
因为一切教说所摄的内容都属于审查句的范畴,也就是对经的审查,所以说了“审查乐味”等话。又因为在这里,“随颂”是指随顺相应的偈颂,这个含义也被认可,所以为了说明在审查某一经句时,也要从其他经文中引入与之相应的经句——或者按引出义理的方式,或者按引出词语的方式——来进行审查,于是说“他审查所有九种经”。所谓“九种经”,是指契经、祇夜等九种经,意思是随其所在之处而适用。以上就是审查句这一门的词义解说。巴利
Yasmā ca sabbo desanāhāro vicayahārassa visayo suttassa vicayoti katvā, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘assādaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi. Yasmā pana anugītīti ettha anurūpā gīti anugītīti ayampi attho icchito, tasmā viciyamānassa suttapadassa anurūpato suttantarapadānipi atthuddhāravasena vā paduddhāravasena vā ānetvā vicetabbānīti dassento ‘‘sabbe nava suttante vicinatī’’ti āha. Nava suttanteti suttageyyādike nava sutte, yathāsambhavatoti adhippāyo. Ayaṃ vicayahārassa padatthaniddeso.
在解说门中,审查句已经按简要的方式说明了。为了把它分开来解说,并且按照详解的方式加以分析,因为逐字逐句审查经文极其繁重、不容易做到,所以就不去碰它,先展示对问答的审查,于是说“如何会有呢”等话。其中,“如何会有呢”的意思是:那种审查应该以什么方式来进行,它会是怎样的呢?也有读作“如何会有呢”的。“如同”只是一个虚词。“尊者”是亲切的称呼。“阿耆多”是婆罗门婆和利的十六位随侍弟子之一。“彼岸”指涅槃,因为它教导了达到彼岸的方法。虽然世尊的一切教说都可以称为“彼岸”,但结集者把《阿耆多经》等十六部经,连同背景偈、随颂偈等一起,命名为“彼岸”,所以说“彼岸中”。有些人读作“彼岸行者”。据说他们在出家为苦行者之前,曾学习《彼岸》而四处游历,因此他也因诵习彼岸而被称为“彼岸行者”。为什么说“他问”呢?难道问题不是已经过去了吗?确实如此,不过他是把发问的方式放在心中反复运转之后,才这样说的。巴利
Evaṃ niddesavāre vicayahāro saṅkhepato niddiṭṭhoti taṃ vibhāgena niddisitvā paṭiniddesavasena vibhajanto yasmā padavicayo suttassa anupadaṃ pavattetabbatāya atibhāriko na sukaro cāti taṃ anāmasitvā pañhavissajjanavicaye tāva dassento ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā kiṃ bhaveti yena pakārena so vicayo pavattetabbo, taṃ pakārajātaṃ kiṃ bhave, kīdisaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. ‘‘Yathā kiṃ bhaveyyā’’tipi pāṭho. Puna yathāti nipātamattaṃ. Āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ ajitoti bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakabhūtānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro. Pārāyaneti pāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, tassa adhigamūpāyadesanattā kiñcāpi sabbaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ ‘‘pārāyana’’nti vattabbataṃ arahati, saṅgītikārehi pana vatthugāthānugītigāthādīhi saddhiṃ ajitasuttādīnaṃ (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) soḷasannaṃ suttānaṃ idaṃ nāmaṃ katanti tesaññeva pārāyanasamaññāti āha ‘‘pārāyane’’ti. Keci ‘‘pārāyaniko’’ti paṭhanti. Te kira tāpasapabbajjūpagamanato pubbe pārāyanaṃ adhīyantā vicariṃsu. Tasmā ayampi pārāyanaṃ vattetīti pārāyanikoti vutto. Pucchatīti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pucchānibbattattā atītāti? Saccametaṃ, pucchanākāraṃ pana buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānaṃ katvā evamāha.
而所谓“问”,其实有很多种类:为了显示未见之理的问、与已见之理相印证的问、断除疑惑的问、征求同意的问、想要开口说法的问、应当一向记答的问、应当分别记答的问、应当反问后再记答的问、应当搁置不答的问、以法为所依的问、以有情为所依的问。因此,应当根据具体情况来审查,比如“这个问是不是为了显示未见之理的问”等等。而且,就像这里有问的分类一样,在审查解答时,解答的分类也应当根据具体情况来说明,因为解答是跟问相对应的。在这里,举出断疑的、以有情为所依的问作为例子,为了显示其中审查的方式,而说了“世间被什么覆盖?”等等。巴利
Pucchā ca nāmesā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā vimaticchedanā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā vibhajjabyākaraṇīyā paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyā ṭhapanīyā dhammādhiṭṭhānā sattādhiṭṭhānāti anekavidhā. Tasmā ‘‘kimayaṃ pucchā adiṭṭhajotanā’’tiādinā yathāsambhavaṃ pucchā vicetabbā. Yathā cettha pucchāvibhāgo, evaṃ vissajjanavibhāgopi vissajjanavicaye yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbo. Pucchāsabhāgena hi vissajjananti. Idha pana vimaticchedanaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ udāharitvā tattha vicayanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādimāha.
这里,“由什么”是主动语态中表示工具格的问法。“su”只是一个语气词;或者说“su”是表示疑问的语气词,由此显示这个问题的性质是断除疑惑的追问。“被覆盖”就是被遮蔽。“世间”指有情世间。“如,尊者阿耆多”是结集者的话。“不显现”就是不为人所知。“你说它的涂抹物是什么?”意思是:你说这世间的涂抹物是什么?也有版本写作“kiṃ svābhilepanaṃ”,拆开来就是“kiṃ su abhilepanaṃ”。巴利
Tattha kenāti kattari karaṇavacanaṃ. Sūti nipātamattaṃ, sūti vā saṃsaye nipāto, tenassa pañhassa vimaticchedanapucchābhāvaṃ dasseti. Nivutoti paṭicchādito. Lokoti sattaloko. Iccāyasmā ajitoti saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ. Nappakāsatīti na paññāyati. Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsīti kiṃ assa lokassa abhilepanaṃ vadasi. ‘‘Kiṃ svābhilepana’’ntipi pāṭho, tassa kiṃ su abhilepananti padavibhāgo.
所谓“句”(padāni),就是通过这些来通达意义的,所以叫“句”,也就是语句。“被问”的意思是:以提问的方式说出来。虽然按提问的方式说出了四个词句,但想要了解的意义只有一个,所以说“一个问题”。在这里说出理由:“以一个事物为所摄故。”这段话的意思是:虽然这四种意义——称为障碍、不显现、涂抹、大怖畏——是被提问所把握的,但它们都相对于同一个世间而成为其属性,而世间是作为主要方面被把握的,因此依据这一点来说,这只是一个问题。正因如此,接着才说“以世间为所依”等等。那么,那个世间是什么呢?回答说“世间有三种”等等。巴利
Padānīti pajjati etehi atthoti padāni, vākyāni. Pucchitānīti pucchābhāvena vuttānīti attho. Eko pañhoti yadipi cattāri padāni pucchanavasena vuttāni, ñātuṃ icchito pana attho eko evāti ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘ekavatthupariggahā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiñcāpi nivāraṇaappakāsanaabhilepanamahābhayasaṅkhātā pucchāya gahitā cattāro ete atthā, te panekaṃ lokaṃ patiguṇabhūtā, loko padhānabhāvena gahitoti tabbasena ekovāyaṃ pañhoti. Tenevāha ‘‘lokādhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Ko pana so lokoti? Āha ‘‘loko tividho’’tiādi.
在这里,因为贪等烦恼特别多,欲界众生就是烦恼世间。因为禅定和神通的清净,色界众生就是有世间。因为不动定很多、诸根明利,无色界众生就是根世间。或者另一种说法:染污就是烦恼,意思是果报之苦。因此,因为苦多,恶趣中的众生就是烦恼世间。其余众生因为成就殊胜的存在,就是有世间。其中,那些具足能成熟解脱的诸根的众生,应当知道就是根世间。这是按所摄法的角度安立世间的名称,圣者不包括在这里面。巴利
Tattha rāgādikilesabahulatāya kāmāvacarasattā kilesaloko. Jhānābhiññāparibuddhiyā rūpāvacarasattā bhavaloko. Āneñjasamādhibahulatāya visadindriyattā arūpāvacarasattā indriyaloko. Atha vā kilissanaṃ kileso, vipākadukkhanti attho. Tasmā dukkhabahulatāya apāyesu sattā kilesaloko. Tadaññe sattā sampattibhavabhāvato bhavaloko. Tattha ye vimuttiparipācakehi indriyehi samannāgatā sattā, so indriyalokoti veditabbaṃ. Pariyāpannadhammavasena lokasamaññāti ariyapuggalā idha na saṅgayhanti.
世间被无明遮住:就像被具有四种成分的黑暗遮住一样,无明的特相是遮蔽车、瓶等诸法的自性,世间被这样的无明覆盖、遮住。疑故,就是以疑为因。《摄论》里说“疑、悭”,说的就是这个。放逸故,就是以放逸为因。渴爱为涂抹:jappā就是渴爱,它对于这个世间来说,就像猴胶之于猴子一样,是黏着物,我说它是黏着。苦,指生等轮回之苦,这是这个词的含义。其余的意思从经文本身就能明白。这四句,在问偈中已经说了,在答偈中用“这些”等四句来回答。怎样回答呢?他说“第一”等等。这就表明,问和答应当按顺序来理解。巴利
Avijjāya nivuto lokoti caturaṅgasamannāgatena andhakārena viya rathaghaṭādidhammasabhāvappaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya avijjāya nivuto paṭicchādito loko. Vivicchāti vicikicchāhetu. ‘‘Vivicchā macchariya’’nti saṅgahe vuttaṃ. Pamādāti pamādahetu. Jappābhilepananti jappā taṇhā assa lokassa makkaṭālepo viya makkaṭassa abhilepanaṃ silesoti brūmi. Dukkhanti jātiādikaṃ vaṭṭadukkhanti ayaṃ padattho. Sesaṃ pāḷiyā eva viññāyati. Imāni cattāri padāni pucchāgāthāyaṃ vuttāni ‘‘imehī’’ti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vuttehi imehi catūhi padehi vissajjitāni. Kathanti āha ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādiṃ. Tena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanāni veditabbānīti dasseti.
现在,为了依次把那个问答的真实情况展示出来,并解释偈颂的含义,所以说了“kenassu”等话。其中,为了把“nīvaraṇehi”这个词已经说过的意思更清楚地显示出来,所以说了“avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā”等话。这里应当知道,通过“yathāhā”等引述经文,是在这个问答辨析中显示摄颂的抉择。其中,“pariyāyato”是从原因上来说。被称为盖的欲贪等,既然本身就是原因,又有遮蔽的作用,所以我说这就是同一种盖,并不是说没有其他具有盖的性质的法,这就是这里的意思。又,为了显示无明存在时诸盖就存在、无明彻底不存在时诸盖也不存在,所以说了“sabbaso”等话。巴利
Idāni taṃ yathākkamaṃ pucchaṃ vissajjanañca sarūpato dassetuṃ gāthāya ca atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘kenassū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘nīvaraṇehī’’ti padena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādinā suttantaradassanena imasmiṃ pañhavissajjanavicaye anugītivicayaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pariyāyatoti kāraṇato. Nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ kāmacchandādīnampi kāraṇabhāvato paṭicchādanabhāvato ca ekaṃyeva nīvaraṇaṃ vadāmi, na pana aññesaṃ nīvaraṇasabhāvānaṃ abhāvāti attho. Yathā ca avijjāya sati nīvaraṇānaṃ bhāvo, evaṃ avijjāya asati na santi nīvaraṇānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“由此”指的是“无明覆盖了世间”这一句。“第一句”指的是“什么覆盖了世间”这一句。“相应”是指连接起来,也有“合适”的意思。通过这句话,显示了回答与提问是相应的,因此可以知道这里说的是对前后文的审察。用“某人被诸盖所覆盖”等说法,说明疑和放逸是以无明为条件的。因为被覆盖的人确实不会显露出来。“Vivicchā”就是疑。所以他说:“所谓vivicchā,说的就是疑。”这里对词的解释是这样的:比如邪见和正见以“常、无常”等而决定执取的方式生起,这个(疑)却不是这样。而这个(疑)由于以多种方式执取,以“是常吗?是无常吗?”等而欲求种种或相违的,所以称为vivicchā。“他这样疑惑”等说法,揭示了疑和放逸是不显现的原因。“Sukke dhamme na uppādiyatīti”是不受持而行。“Nappakāsantīti”的意思是:那些善法不在自己的相续中生起,因此不使那个人在世间显现、被了知。“Abhilimpatīti”的意思是:像猴胶粘住猴子一样,使人在木石等处粘着于色等对象。“Āsattibahulassāti”是执着多者的。“Evaṃ abhijappāti karitvāti”是“这样以缠缚状态而住”的意思,以此因由。“Tatthāti”是以那渴爱。世间被粘着,犹如被胶所涂,是这个意思。巴利
Tenāti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena. Paṭhamassa padassāti ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti padassa. Yuttāti yojitā, anurūpāti vā attho. Etena pucchānurūpatā vissajjanassa dassitāti pubbāparavicayo vuttoti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo puggalo nīvaraṇehi nivuto’’tiādinā vivicchāpamādānaṃ avijjāya paccayabhāvaṃ dasseti. Nivuto eva hi nappakāsati. Vivicchāti vicikicchā. Tenevāha – ‘‘vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ padasiddhi – yathā micchādiṭṭhisammādiṭṭhiyo ‘‘niccaṃ anicca’’ntiādinā ekaṃsaggāhabhāvena pavattanti, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana anekaṃsaggāhabhāvato ‘‘niccaṃ nu kho aniccaṃ nu kho’’tiādinā vividhaṃ viruddhaṃ vā icchati esatīti vivicchāti . ‘‘So vicikicchanto’’tiādinā appakāsanassa vivicchāpamādānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ vivarati. Sukke dhamme na uppādiyatīti na samādāya vattati. Nappakāsantīti te attano santāne anuppādiyamānā kusalā dhammā taṃ puggalaṃ pakāsaṃ loke abhiññātaṃ na karontīti attho. Abhilimpatīti makkaṭālepo viya makkaṭaṃ dārusilādīsu purisaṃ rūpādivisaye allīyāpetīti attho. Āsattibahulassāti āsaṅgabahulassa. Evaṃ abhijappāti karitvāti evaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyinīti iminā kāraṇena. Tatthāti tāya taṇhāya. Loko abhilitto silesena makkhito viya hotīti attho.
因为令人害怕,所以叫“怖畏”。巨大的怖畏就是“大怖畏”。因此他说“苦是它的大怖畏”。为了把“苦、忧”——也就是一切苦——分别说明清楚,才说了“三种苦性”等等。“Odhaso”的意思是:有时以自己发起的加行为根源,有时以他人发起的加行为根源,按这样的区分,那些能从苦苦中解脱出来的众生,特指色界众生。“Tathā”也是指像这样分别地,有时偶尔被牵引。能从坏苦中解脱出来的众生,大多是常安住于舍等至的,特指无色界众生。“少病”这个词,是说明从苦苦中解脱的原因。“长寿”则是关于坏苦的,因为无色界天人在世间确实寿命极长。而这种解脱是非究竟的。又因为即使是苦受,也是有为之法,本质上就是无常等行苦,所以为了以无余、完全穷尽的方式统摄显示,才说了“然而,从行苦……”等等。巴利
Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Mahantaṃ bhayaṃ mahabbhayaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. Dukkhaṃ domanassanti dukkhameva vibhattanti sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso dukkhatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Odhasoti kadāci attūpakkamamūlāya kadāci parūpakkamamūlāyātiādinā vibhāgena dukkhadukkhatāya muccanakā visesena rūpāvacarā. Tathāti odhaso kadāci karahacīti evaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanakā upekkhāsamāpattibahulā visesena arūpāvacarasattā. Appābādhāti padaṃ dukkhadukkhatāya muccanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Dīghāyukāti vipariṇāmadukkhatāya. Arūpadevā hi loke visesato dīghāyukāti. Idañca muccanamaccantikaṃ. Yasmā ca dukkhā vedanāpi saṅkhatattā aniccatādisaṅkhāradukkhasabhāvā eva, tasmā yato muccanamaccantikaṃ, taṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena saṅgaṇhitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“被执取”就是“取蕴”,指的是异熟蕴以及由业所生的色法。取蕴之外剩余的部分,就是“有余”;这种东西不存在于她那里,所以叫“无余”,也就是涅槃界。以这个无余涅槃界来说明“如此状态”的特征,这里的具格是用来表示方式。而“涅槃界”只是寂灭本身的意思。“因此”,是因为遍及整个世间、总摄一切的行苦,所以说“因此”。“世间的”是表示关系的属格,用这个词来显示“这是他的苦”这句话的意思。这样,在这里,对于不了解世间的盖等,或者因为长期接触其他宗派而对此生起疑惑、一味偏执的人来说,因为必须给出决定性的回答,所以提出了以众生为立足点的问题;而这个问题又因为无知或疑惑,以盖等为对象,所以分为四种。不过在经典中,偈颂是以世间作为盖等的依处来说的,因此显示为一个问题。这就是这里对提问的审察。对回答的审察,也应当依照“显示了未见者、断除了疑惑”等说法,按照提问审察中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Tattha upādiyatīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. Upādissa sesaṃ upādisesaṃ, taṃ natthi etissāti anupādisesā, nibbānadhātu, tāya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Nibbānadhātūti ca nibbāyanamattaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā sakalalokabyāpinī sabbasaṅgāhinī ca saṅkhāradukkhatā, tasmā. Lokassāti sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Tena ‘‘dukkhamassā’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Evamettha lokassa nīvaraṇādīni ajānantena, samayantaraparicayena vā tattha saṃsayapakkhandena ekaṃseneva byākātabbattā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katā, sā ca ajānanassa, saṃsayassa vā nīvaraṇādivisayatāya catubbidhā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana nīvaraṇādīnaṃ loko ādhārabhāvena gāthāyaṃ vuttoti eko pañhoti dassitanti. Ayamettha pucchāvicayo. Vissajjanavicayopi adiṭṭhajotinī vissajjanā vimaticchedinī cātiādinā pucchāvicaye vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
像这样,先显示了单所依的问题之后,现在为了显示多所依的问题,就说了“savanti sabbadhī”等话。其中,“savanti”是流动的意思。“sabbadhī”是在一切色等诸处中。“sotā”是渴爱等流。“Kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ”是问:什么是它们的遮止,什么是守护。“Saṃvaraṃ brūhi”是说:请讲他们称为律仪的防护。“Kena sotā pidhīyare”是说:以什么法,这些渴爱等流被遮止、被切断——这是这里的词义。其余部分,依照圣典本身就能明白。巴利
Evaṃ ekādhāraṃ pucchaṃ dassetvā idāni anekādhāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savanti sabbadhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha savantīti sandanti. Sabbadhīti sabbesu rūpādīsu āyatanesu. Sotāti taṇhādisotā. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti tesaṃ kiṃ āvaraṇaṃ kā rakkhā. Saṃvaraṃ brūhīti taṃ nesaṃ nīvaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ kathehi. Kena sotā pidhīyareti kena dhammena taṇhādisotā pidhiyyanti pacchijjantīti ayamettha padattho. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva āvi bhavissati.
“那两个问题”:这个偈颂虽然是以提问的方式说出来的,共有四个词、四句,但因为所要了解的义理有两类,所以那两个就是两个问题。为什么这么说呢?回答说:“因为是用涉及许多事物的语句来问的。”这里的简要意思是:这个偈颂所包含的义理,由于是以统摄许多事物而说出的语句来发问,所以那两个就是两个问题。在教法中,把“一之上的多数”称为“多”,这正是为了说明所问有两种义理对象,因此说了“这样”等话。它的意思是:众生被那些称为亲属衰败等的杀生等,或者被那些作为恶趣之因的种种灾难,平等地、共同地卷入,或者说,这个世间已经完全陷入、被覆盖了。以那些为因的十种烦恼事而被染污,心中想着那种陷入的样子和染污的样子,便说:“这样陷入的,这样染污的。”“清净”:通过它而变得清净,就是止与观。“出离”:通过它而从相和转起中出离,就是圣道。巴利
Te dve pañhāti yadipi imissā gāthāya pucchāvasena pavattāya cattāri padāni cattāri vākyāni. Ñātuṃ icchitassa pana atthassa duvidhattā te dve pañhā. Kasmāti ce? ‘‘Imehi bahvādhivacanena pucchitā’’ti āha. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ime etāya gāthāya gahitā atthā yasmā bahūni adhikicca pavattavacanena pucchitā, tasmā te dve pañhāti. Ekato upari bahūti hi sāsanavohāro, tameva pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yāhi ñātibyasanādisaṅkhātāhi pāṇavadhādīhi eva vā duggatihetubhūtāhi āpadāhi samaṃ saha, sabbathā vā ayaṃ loko āpanno ajjhotthaṭo. Taṃnimittehi dasahi kilesavatthūhi saṃkiliṭṭho ca, tassa taṃ āpannākāraṃ saṃkiliṭṭhākārañca buddhiyaṃ katvā āha – ‘‘evaṃ samāpannassa evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassā’’ti. Vodāyati sujjhati etenāti vodānaṃ, samathavipassanā. Vuṭṭhāti etena nimittato pavattato cāti vuṭṭhānaṃ, ariyamaggo.
心散乱的人,就是在各种不同的所缘上心思散乱的人。流动,就是不断生起、运转。贪欲等,是显示心不得定的原因。所以他说,这样就是心散乱的人。接着用“正如世尊所说”等语句,在这里也显示对摄颂的审察。诸流的流动,大多数是顺着贪著欣喜而发生的,所以说“它在悦意的色等中流动”。这里,眼等作为诸流的门而运转,从近行的角度来说,就好像它们自己在流动一样。Iti,就是如此。Sabbā,就是从一切。Sabbathā,就是以一切方式。Idaṃ vodānaṃ,这里所说的“击破现行缠缚”,就是断除缠缚,也就是清净。巴利
Asamāhitassāti nānārammaṇesu vikkhittacittassa. Savantīti pavattanti. Abhijjhātiādi asamādhānahetudassanaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘evaṃ asamāhitassā’’ti. ‘‘Yathāha bhagavā’’tiādinā idhāpi anugītivicayaṃ dasseti. Sotānaṃ savanaṃ yebhuyyena anurodhavasenevāti āha – ‘‘savati manāpikesu rūpesū’’ti. Ettha ca cakkhādayo sotānaṃ dvārabhāvena pavattamānā upacāravasena sayaṃ savantā viya vuttā. Itīti evaṃ. Sabbāti sabbasmā. Sabbathāti sabbappakārena. Idaṃ vodānanti idaṃ ‘‘pariyuṭṭhānavighāta’’nti vuttaṃ pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ vodānaṃ.
在回答偈中说“有正念,就能阻止这些流”:与观相应的正念,正在探寻善法与不善法的去向,它就能阻止这些流。我说,这正念就是对这些流的防护。所谓“这些流被慧封闭”:依靠能彻底通达色等事物无常等性质的道慧,这些流就被完全封闭,也就是说,由于不再给它们生起的机会,它们就被彻底断除了。巴利
Vissajjanagāthāya sati tesaṃ nivāraṇanti vipassanāsampayuttā sati kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā tesaṃ sotānaṃ nivāraṇanti. Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmīti tameva satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi. Paññāyete pidhīyareti rūpādīsu aniccatādipaṭivedhasādhikāya maggapaññāya ete sotā sabbaso pidhiyyanti, uppajjituṃ appadānavasena samucchijjantīti attho.
“不贪求”是指:不以贪欲等生起之门把心相续或那个人拖走。这里所说的“遮止”,意思就是断除随眠,所以说“以慧断除诸随眠”。因为以随眠为因的现行,在随眠不存在时不会生起,所以说“于随眠”等。现在,为了用譬喻阐明这个道理,就说“即如拥有蕴者”等。在这里也一样,由于不了知被称为诸流之防护的律仪与遮止,或者对此心存疑惑,为了得到确定的结论,就以法为依处而问。因此,问中的审察,以及按照所说之理作答时的审察,都应当依照上述方式理解。巴利
Nāviñchatīti abhijjhādippavattidvārabhāvena cittasantānaṃ, puggalaṃ vā nākaḍḍhati. Anusayappahānaṃ idha pidhānaṃ adhippetanti āha – ‘‘paññāya anusayā pahīyantī’’ti. Yasmā anusayanimittaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ anusayābhāve na hotīti āha ‘‘anusayesū’’tiādi. Idāni tamevatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘taṃ yathā khandhavantassā’’tiādimāha. Etthāpi sotānaṃ nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ pidhānañca ajānantena tattha vā saṃsayitena ekaṃsikattā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katāti idha pucchāvicayo vuttanayeneva vissajjanavicayo ca veditabbo.
在这里,针对“世间被什么遮蔽”这个偈颂,虽然按照意图,可以问的有遮蔽等四种,但只说了是一个问题。那么,如果先抓住“所问的就是诸流的防护和遮盖”,把诸流看作同一个意思,因为问题只有一个立足点,就可以说是一个问题。或者,因为诸流有很多,有多少诸流就有多少问题。然而,按照另一种意图,在“诸流到处流”这个偈颂里,不涉及诸流,而是从防护和遮盖的角度说成“两个问题”。因此,在第一首偈颂里,虽然遮蔽等可以作为世间的依托,但不涉及世间,而是按遮蔽等的分类,也可以说成四个问题——应当这样理解这个思路。巴利
Ettha ca yena adhippāyena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti gāthāya (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1; netti. 45) satipi nivāraṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ pucchitabbabhāve eko pañhoti vuttaṃ. Tena tāva sotānaṃyeva saṃvaro pidhānañca pucchitanti sote ekatthavasena gahetvā pucchāya ekādhiṭṭhānabhāvato eko pañhoti vattabbaṃ siyā. Sotānaṃ vā bahubhāvato bahūti yattakā sotā, tattakā pañhāti. Yena pana adhippāyena ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’ti gāthāyaṃ (su. ni. 1040; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 59, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 3; netti. 45) sote anāmasitvā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena ‘‘dve pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭhamagāthāyaṃ satipi nivāraṇādīnaṃ lokādhārabhāve lokaṃ anāmasitvā nivāraṇādīnaṃ vibhāgena cattāro pañhātipi vattabbanti ayaṃ nayo dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,因为提问者并不是只按自己先前构想的路子来问,而是也抓住说法时所说内容的脉络来问,所以,为了指出考察那脉络的方式,他在“yāni sotānī”这一颂之后,紧接着说了“paññā ceva sati cā”这一颂。它的简要含义是:世尊所说的这种慧,这种念,以及除此之外的那些名色,这一切在哪里灭尽?请为我说出我所问的这个道理。巴利
Idāni yasmā pucchanto na kevalaṃ pubbe attanā racitaniyāmeneva pucchati, atha kho desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhiṃ gahetvāpi pucchati, tasmā tassa anusandhiṃ pucchāya vicetabbākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yāni sotānī’’ti gāthāya anantaraṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’ti gāthamāha. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yāyaṃ bhagavatā vuttā paññā, yā ca sati yañca tadavasesaṃ nāmarūpaṃ, etaṃ sabbampi kattha nirujjhati, etaṃ me puṭṭho pabrūhīti.
在回答的偈颂里,因为慧与念本来就以名称的方式被含摄在内,所以没有单独把它们列出来。这里简要的意思是:阿耆多,你问我的那个问题——“这一切在哪里灭尽”——在紧接着的偈颂里,我就告诉你它在哪里无余灭尽。因为每一份识灭去时,这一切就在那里同时无前无后地灭尽,就在那里因识灭而灭尽,这就是识灭,它的灭尽不超出这个识灭,这样说。这是问关于问题的连贯关系。在紧接着的偈颂里,连同断除诸流缠随眠的作用,念与慧被宣说;听了那个之后,在断除那随眠时,当慧与念住立时,它们必须依止名色,若如此,则轮回确然继续。这些依止的慧与念在哪里无余灭尽呢?以这个意趣,这个问题被提出,所以说“这个问题……界”。在那里,以这个宣说被连贯起来,这就是连贯关系。巴利
Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ panassa yasmā paññāsatiyo nāmeneva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tasmā tā visuṃ na vuttā. Ayañcettha saṅkhepattho – yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ, ajita, etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi – ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti anantaragāthāyaṃ (su. ni. 1042; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 61, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 5; netti. 11, 45), yattha taṃ asesaṃ uparujjhati, taṃ te vadāmi. Tassa tassa hi viññāṇassa nirodhena saheva apubbaṃ acarimaṃ etthetaṃ uparujjhati, ettheva viññāṇassa nirodhena nirujjhati, etaṃ viññāṇanirodhaṃ tassa nirodho nātivattatīti vuttaṃ hotīti. Ayaṃ pañhe anusandhiṃ pucchatīti anantaragāthāyaṃ sotānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānānusayappahānakiccena saddhiṃ sati paññā ca vuttā, taṃ sutvā tappahāne paññāsatīsu tiṭṭhantīsu tāsaṃ sannissayena nāmarūpena bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati vaṭṭati eva. Kattha nu kho imāsaṃ sanissayānaṃ paññāsatīnaṃ asesanirodhoti iminā adhippāyena ayaṃ pucchā katāti āha – ‘‘ayaṃ pañhe…pe… dhātu’’nti. Tattha anusandhīyati desanā etāyāti anusandhi.
为了说明是依靠哪条修行道路证得无余涅槃界,并且连同它所缘的对象一起显示出来,所以说了“三谛”等这些话,这条道路就叫作“四圣谛业处修习”。其中,“有为”是指由各种因缘共同聚合、一起造作出来的,所以叫有为。“灭法”是指本性就是会坏灭的法。苦、集、道,这是显示它们各自的面貌。那么灭又是怎样的呢?所以说“灭是无为”。因为它不是由任何因缘造作出来的,所以是无为。为了在具有所断和能断这两种性质的圣谛中,通过能断的分别来显示所断的分别,所以说了“其中,集”等这些话。巴利
Yāya paṭipadāya anupādisesaṃ nibbānadhātuṃ adhigacchanti, taṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ saha visayena dassetuṃ ‘‘tīṇi ca saccānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhatānīti samecca sambhūya paccayehi katānīti saṅkhatāni. Nirodhadhammānīti nirujjhanasabhāvāni. Dukkhaṃ samudayo maggoti tesaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Nirodho pana kathanti āha ‘‘nirodho asaṅkhato’’ti. So hi kenaci paccayena na saṅkhatoti asaṅkhato. Saha visayena pahātabbapahāyakasabhāvesu ariyasaccesu pahāyakavibhāgamukhena pahātabbavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha samudayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这里,“无明残余”的意思是:被见道所断之后还剩下的无明。而“残余”这个词,也要套用到欲贪、嗔恚、慢、掉举这些词上。因为就像无明一样,这些法也具有导致堕入恶趣的性质,只是在初道就被断除了。“无明无残余”也是一种读法,在这里,“无残余”这个词同样要套用到前面所说的欲贪等词上。因为欲贪等在前二道断除时还留有残余,而靠其余的道断除时则没有残余。“三界中的这十种结”,这里的“三界”是显示这些结的活动范围,因为在那三界中,它们是以结的方式在运作。巴利
Tattha avijjāvasesāti dassanamaggena pahīnāvasesā avijjāti attho. Ayañca sesa-saddo kāmacchando byāpādo māno uddhaccanti etthāpi yojetabbo. Yathā hi avijjā, evaṃ etepi dhammā apāyagamanīyasabhāvā paṭhamamaggena pahīyanti evāti. ‘‘Avijjāniravasesā’’tipi pāṭho, etthāpi yathāvuttesu kāmacchandādipadesupi niravasesa-saddo yojetabbo . Sāvasesañhi purimamaggadvayena kāmacchandādayo pahīyanti, itarehi pana niravasesanti. Tedhātuke imāni dasa saṃyojanānīti ettha tedhātuketi saṃyojanānaṃ visayadassanaṃ. Tattha hi tāni saṃyojanavasena pavattanti.
12 依“未知当知根”而住,意思是达到了能断除它的道。这里“yaṃ”这个词,是表示原因的虚词。“此尽智”:以那作为原因的智慧,了知“我的生已灭尽”,了知自己之生的灭尽状态,这个作为省察之相的阿拉汉果智,就叫作“尽智”。在“了知不再有此后世”这句里,也应补入“yaṃ”,即“了知不再有此后世”。这里的“无生智”,同样按前面所说的方式,以阿拉汉果智来理解其义。不过在《殊胜义注》中说:“尽智是指能断尽烦恼的圣道中的智慧。无生智则是指依结生而不再生起,在各道所断烦恼的无生之终点所生起的圣果中的智慧。”但在本处,这两者都依阿拉汉果智来分别。因此他说:“这二智是已知根”,又说“因所缘的名称而得到两个名称”。巴利
12.Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti taṃ pahāyakaṃ patvā. Yaṃ panāti ettha yanti hetuatthe nipāto. Idaṃ khaye ñāṇanti yena ñāṇena hetubhūtena ‘‘khīṇā me jātī’’ti attano jātiyā khīṇabhāvaṃ jānāti, idaṃ evaṃ paccavekkhaṇassa nimittabhūtaṃ arahattaphalañāṇaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ nāma. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātīti etthāpi yanti ānetabbaṃ ‘‘yaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti. Idaṃ anuppāde ñāṇanti idhāpi pubbe vuttanayeneva arahattaphalañāṇavasena attho yojetabbo. Aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. cittuppādakkaṇḍa 135-142) pana ‘‘khaye ñāṇaṃ kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇanti vuttaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇaṃ paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idha pana ubhayampi arahattaphalañāṇavaseneva vibhattaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘imāni dve ñāṇāni aññātāvindriya’’nti, ‘‘ārammaṇasaṅketena dve nāmāni labbhantī’’ti ca.
已知根虽然在下三果和上三道中生起,会一次又一次地生起,但它并不像未知当知根那样——在初果生起时,乃至在阿拉汉果生起时,以不再生起的息灭而灭尽——因此他说:“而那未知当知根……”等。以此显示:就像那些应断的法一样,其余的果法在阿拉汉果生起时,也以不再生起的息灭而灭尽。那么,对于三界内的那些法,还有什么可说的呢?唯一的慧就是已知根。如果只是一个,为什么被说成两种?于是他说“然而……”等。因为依于“尽”与“无生”这样的所缘共称而命名,所以被说成两种。那以了知为义的慧,即是先前所说以遮蔽诸漏为作用的慧,它以了知的本质而为慧。而另一种,则以不漂浮之义、沉浸之义,对如所见、如所执取的所缘而成为念。巴利
Aññindriyaṃ heṭṭhimesu tīsu phalesu, uparimesu ca tīsu maggesu uppattiyā punappunaṃ uppajjamānampi anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ viya paṭhamaphaluppattiyā aggaphaluppattiyā anuppādanirodhena nirujjhatīti āha – ‘‘yañca anaññātaññassāmītindriya’’ntiādi. Etena pahātabbadhammā viya dassanabhāvanāhi aggaphaluppattiyā tadavasesaphaladhammāpi anuppādanirodhena nirujjhanti. Ko pana vādo tebhūmakadhammānanti dasseti, ekā paññā aññātāvindriyattā. Yadi ekā, kathaṃ dvidhā vuttāti āha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi. Ārammaṇasaṅketenāti khaye anuppādeti imāya ārammaṇasamaññāya. Sā pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti yā pubbe sotānaṃ pidhānakiccā vuttā paññā, sā pajānanasabhāvena paññā. Itarā pana yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāgahitaṃ ārammaṇaṃ apilāpanaṭṭhena ogāhanaṭṭhena satīti.
13 13. 这样解释了“慧与念”这一句的含义之后,现在要解释“名色”这一句的含义,所以说:“其中,那些五取蕴,这就是名色。”为了把名色分开来显示,也为了便于把握,他特别把显而易见的名色分辨出来,因此说了“其中,那些……”等话。因为一旦把握了这些,通过俱行等方式,也就同时把握了除此之外的心、心所和色法。在这里,通过“名”这一表述,只是把握了三蕴,所以说“与识相应的名色”。那么,那个色是与识相应的吗?这并不是依“相应缘”的关系而说的。应当这样理解:这是针对一般人没有精确区分、容易把握的自性而说的。巴利
13. Evaṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivaritvā idāni ‘‘nāmarūpa’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā, idaṃ nāmarūpa’’nti āha. Nāmarūpañca vibhāgena dassento sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pākaṭanāmarūpameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha ye’’tiādimāha. Taggahaṇeneva hi sahacaraṇādinā tadaññe cittacetasikā rūpadhammā ca gahitā hontīti. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha khandhattayameva gahitanti ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇasampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana rūpaṃ sampayuttanti? Nayidaṃ sampayuttapaccayavasena vuttaṃ. Pacurajanassa pana avibhāgena gahaṇīyasabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
偈颂里问的是无余涅槃界。为了说明它是通过四神足这条途径、以证得圣道而获得的,也为了用念和慧来指明作为神足修习根本的诸根,他说:“其中,念和慧就是四根。”念在探求善法与不善法的去向时,一旦成就,就一定会完成定。这里通过提到念,是要表明断除现起烦恼就是此处所说的意思,所以他说:“念是两种根:念根和定根。”同样,慧能断除随眠烦恼,当它成就时,绝不会离开四种正勤的精进,因此说:“慧是两种根:慧根和精进根。”巴利
Gāthāya anupādisesā nibbānadhātu pucchitāti taṃ caturiddhipādamukhena ariyamaggādhigamena pattabbanti dassento iddhipādabhāvanāmūlabhūtāni indriyāni satipaññāhi niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha sati ca paññā ca cattāri indriyānī’’ti āha. Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā sati sijjhantī ekantena samādhiṃ nipphādeti. Satiggahaṇena cettha pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ idhādhippetanti āha – ‘‘sati dve indriyāni, satindriyañca samādhindriyañcā’’ti. Tathā anusayasamugghātavidhāyinī paññā sijjhamānā na vinā catubbidhasammappadhānavīriyaṃ sijjhatīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññā dve indriyāni paññindriyañca vīriyindriyañcā’’ti.
在这四种根中,也就是在念等四种根当中,作为依止缘而成为根基的、与它们俱生的那种信。巴利原文也有“由这四种根”的读法,那是省略了“相应”这个词,意思是“与这四种根相应”。以对境净信为特相的信,会成为具有想要行动之本质的欲的殊胜助缘,因此说:“以信为增上心的心一境性,这就是欲定。”在“心得定时”这句话中,是指以观定而心得定。这个“断”,是指能成办镇伏断的定,被称为断,因为依靠它而断除烦恼。也有“padhāna”的读法,意思是最上。正如“定为一境”所说的那样。巴利
Yā imesu catūsu indriyesūti imesu satiādīsu catūsu indriyesu nissayapaccayatāya adhiṭṭhānabhūtesu taṃsahajātā eva yā saddahanā. ‘‘Imehi catūhi indriyehī’’tipi pāḷi, tassā imehi catūhi indriyehi sampayuttāti vacanaseso, ārammaṇe abhippasādalakkhaṇā saddhā kattukāmatāsabhāvassa chandassa visesapaccayo hotīti āha – ‘‘yā saddhādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ chandasamādhī’’ti. Samāhite citteti vipassanāsamādhinā samāhite citte. Idaṃ pahānanti vikkhambhanappahānasādhako samādhi pahānanti vutto pajahati etenāti katvā. ‘‘Padhāna’’ntipi pāṭho, aggoti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi ekodī’’ti vuccati.
以“入出息”等语,是借由身行、语行、心行作为代表,指出能生起这些的精进行本身。因为它们在修习完成之前,一直以同一作用被忆念、被思惟,所以称为“忆念与思惟”。又因为它们能令“愿我的修习如此进行”这一意愿按照所希望的那样生起,所以是它的因。“那两者”,就是指称为欲定的,以及称为增上行的精进的,这两种精进。正因为这两者,透过近行的作用,被当成好像不同的东西,而说为“具有欲定及勤行神足”。即使是不可分离的法,透过近行的作用,也会被说成好像分离一样,就像说“石女的儿子的身体”那样。巴利
‘‘Assāsapassāsā’’tiādinā kāyavacīcittasaṅkhārasīsena taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā vīriyasaṅkhārāva gahitā. Te hi yāva bhāvanānipphatti tāva ekarasena saraṇato saṅkappetabbato ca sarasaṅkappā’’ti vuttā ‘‘evaṃ me bhāvanā hotū’’ti yathā icchitā, tathā pavattiyā hetubhāvato. Tadubhayanti chandasamādhisaṅkhātañca padhānasaṅkhārasaṅkhātañca vīriyanti taṃ ubhayaṃ. Ubhayameva hi upacāravasena aññaṃ viya katvā ‘‘chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipāda’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinnampi hi upacāravasena bhinnaṃ viya katvā voharanti, yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti.
在这里,“成就”就叫“神足”,意思是圆满达成、产生出来。或者,众生依靠它而成就,成为有成就的、增长的、达到殊胜的,所以叫“神足”;“足”是借由它而到达的意思。按第一种含义,神足本身就是足,也就是神足的组成部分,意思是神足的构成要素。按第二种含义,神足的足、安住处、证得的方便,就叫神足。因为依靠它,人们到达、证得越来越殊胜的神足。“依远离”的意思是,修习依彼分远离、依断远离、依出离远离的神足。也就是说,这位专心修习神足的瑜伽行者,在观智生起的刹那,从作用上说是依彼分远离,从意向倾向上说是依出离远离;而在圣道生起的刹那,从作用上说是依断远离,从所缘上说是依出离远离,这样来修习神足。“依离贪”等说法也是同样的道理。巴利
Tattha ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā tāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, pajjati etenāti pādo, paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo patiṭṭhā adhigamūpāyoti iddhipādo. Tena hi uparūparivisesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti. Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ samucchedavivekanissitaṃ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Tathā hi ayaṃ iddhipādabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ. Maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti. Esa nayo virāganissitantiādīsu.
正因为是远离,才有离贪等这些状态。而在这里,舍离只有两种:舍弃式的舍离和投入式的舍离。其中,舍弃式的舍离在观智的刹那,是以暂时压伏的方式断除烦恼;在圣道的刹那,是以彻底断除的方式断除烦恼。投入式的舍离在观智的刹那,是以心倾向于涅槃的方式;在圣道的刹那,是以把涅槃作为所缘的方式,投入涅槃。这两种方式,在这套把世间与出世间混合起来解说的义理体系中,都能成立。就像这样,这第一神足按照前面所说的方式,既舍弃烦恼,也投入涅槃。而“转成舍离”这句话的意思是:为了舍离而正在转起、已经转起,正在成熟、已经成熟。因为这位修习神足的瑜伽行者,就像第一神足为了舍弃烦恼的舍离之义和投入涅槃的舍离之义而正在成熟、已经成熟那样,他就这样去修习它。其余的神足也是同样的道理。不过有一个差别:以欲为上首而运作的定,叫欲定;同样,以精进为上首而运作的定,叫精进定;以心为上首而运作的定,叫心定;以观为上首而运作的定,叫观定。巴利
Vivekattā eva hi virāgādayo, kevalañcettha vossaggo duvidho pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo cāti. Tattha pariccāgavossaggo vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ. Pakkhandanavossaggo vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ. Tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthasaṃvaṇṇanānaye yujjati. Tathā hi ayaṃ paṭhamiddhipādo yathāvuttena pakārena kilese pariccajati nibbānañca pakkhandati. Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana vacanena vossaggatthaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti attho. Ayañhi iddhipādabhāvanānuyutto yogī yathā paṭhamo iddhipādo kilesapariccāgavossaggatthaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggatthañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakko hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetīti. Sesiddhipādesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi chandasamādhi. Evaṃ vīriyaṃ cittaṃ vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhīti.
14 不只是第四神足以定和智为根本,而是所有定都是如此。为了说明这一点,所以经中说:“一切定都以智为根本,以智为先导,以智随转。”既然这样,为什么偏偏只说它是“观定”呢?这是因为它以观为上首而运作,所以这样说,这就是它的意思。其中,以加行慧为智的根本,以证得慧为智的先导,以省察慧为智的随转。或者,以加行慧为智的根本,以近行慧为智的先导,以安止慧为智的随转。又或者,以近行慧为智的根本,以安止慧为智的先导,以神通慧为智的随转,应当这样理解。巴利
14. Na kevalaṃ catutthaiddhipādo eva samādhiñāṇamūlako, atha kho sabbopīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbo samādhi ñāṇamūlako ñāṇapubbaṅgamo ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā so eva vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vuttoti? Vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattitattāti vuttovāyamattho. Tattha pubbabhāgapaññāya ñāṇamūlako. Adhigamapaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Paccavekkhaṇapaññāya ñāṇānuparivatti. Atha vā pubbabhāgapaññāya ñāṇamūlako. Upacārapaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Appanāpaññāya ñāṇānuparivatti. Upacārapaññāya vā ñāṇamūlako. Appanāpaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Abhiññāpaññāya ñāṇānuparivattīti veditabbaṃ.
正如前面所说:依于定力的宿住随念智随转,在过去一生又一生中,即使在数不清的成坏劫中,自己和他人那些难以看透的蕴以及和蕴相关的事物,也没有所谓难以看透的。同样,依于定力的未来分智随转,在未来一生又一生中,即使在数不清的成坏劫中,自己和他人那些难以看透的蕴以及和蕴相关的事物,也没有所谓难以看透的。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Yathāpureti yathā samādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvena pure pubbe atītāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano paresañca khandhaṃ khandhūpanibaddhañca duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi, tathā pacchā samādhissa anāgataṃsañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano paresañca khandhaṃ khandhūpanibaddhañca duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthīti attho.
如过去:就像依靠定中的他心智随转,在未来七天里,没有哪个其他众生的心是难以透彻了知的;同样,在过去七天里,也没有哪个其他众生的心是难以透彻了知的。这就是这段话的意思。如昼:就像在白天,阳光驱散了黑暗,有眼睛的众生眼前出现的、眼所能识知的色,很容易辨认。如夜:同样,在夜间,即使处在四种要素具足的黑暗中,由于定中的天眼智随转,也没有难以透彻了知的色处。巴利
Yathā pacchāti yathā samādhissa cetopariyañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatesu sattasu divasesu parasattānaṃ cittaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi, tathā pure atītesu sattasu divasesu parasattānaṃ cittaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Yathā divāti yathā divasabhāge sūriyālokena andhakārassa vidhamitattā cakkhumantānaṃ sattānaṃ āpāthagataṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ rūpaṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Tathā rattinti tathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre vattamāne samādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattitāya duppaṭivijjhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ natthi.
就像“如夜,如昼”所说的:夜间怎样,白天也怎样;即使在极细微、被什么东西遮住、以及极遥远的地方,也没有任何一种色法是难以通达的。又,像在色处所说的那样,由于定伴随天耳智,在声处也应当同样理解。所以经文说“以敞开的心”等等。其中,“不被遮蔽”是指不被障碍神通智的烦恼所覆盖;正因为不被遮蔽,心才清净光明。应当知道,仅凭这一点,也已经说明了定伴随神变智。“五根”是指与神足相应的有学五根,所以说“善”。“心俱生”等语,是为了显示:识灭时,它们也灭。同样,“名色”等语也是如此。由此表明:不只是五根,名色也以识为因,识灭时名色也灭。巴利
Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā ca rattiyaṃ tathā divāpi atisukhumaṃ kenaci tirohitaṃ yañca atidūre, taṃ sabbarūpaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā ca rūpāyatane vuttaṃ, tathā samādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattitāya saddāyatane ca netabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘iti vivaṭena cetasā’’tiādi. Tattha apariyonaddhenāti abhiññāñāṇassa pāribandhakakilesehi anajjhotthaṭena, apariyonaddhattā eva sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ. Eteneva samādhissa iddhividhañāṇānuparivattitāpi vuttā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pañcindriyānīti iddhipādasampayuttāni sekkhassa pañcindriyāni adhippetānīti āha ‘‘kusalānī’’ti. Cittasahabhūnītiādi tesaṃ viññāṇanirodhena nirodhadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tathā ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘na kevalaṃ pañcindriyāni eva, atha kho nāmarūpañca viññāṇahetukaṃ viññāṇassa nirodhā nirujjhatī’’ti.
这里的“它的”,指的是识。“因”,指的是渴爱、无明这一类。“无食”是对这个词含义的解释。“不欢喜”是说,因为作为欢喜的渴爱已经断除,所以不再有所希求。正因为这样,那个不再结生的识就灭去了。识是这样,名色也是这样:由于被称为识的因和缘不存在了,以它们为缘的诸行等也不存在了,所以名色就成了无因、无缘的。其余内容已经很清楚了。问答之间推究考察的部分,也应当依照前面所说的道理来理解。巴利
Tassāti viññāṇassa. Hetūti taṇhāavijjādiko. Anāhāranti padassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Anabhinanditanti abhinandanabhūtāya taṇhāya pahīnattā eva apatthitaṃ. Tato eva appaṭisandhikaṃ viññāṇaṃ taṃ nirujjhati. Yathā ca viññāṇaṃ, evaṃ nāmarūpampi viññāṇasaṅkhātassa hetuno paccayassa ca abhāvā tappaccayānaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ abhāvā ahetu appaccayaṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva. Pucchāvissajjanavicayopi vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
这样把带有连接的问题也说明之后,前面从众生依据和法依据两个角度分别展示的各个问题,现在要把它们合在一起展示,所以开始了“那些被了知之法”等这一段。这里的词义是:“被了知之法”指以无常等角度被审察过的法,这是对阿罗汉的称呼。“有学”指其余那些还在修学戒等学处的圣者。“凡夫”指众多普通人。“那些有学与无学之人的行道,被问到的您这位智者请为我宣说”——意思是,世尊,您这位智者、贤明者,被问及那些有学和无学之人的修行之道,请您为我宣说。其余内容按巴利原文本身就能理解。巴利
Evaṃ anusandhipucchampi dassetvā heṭṭhā sattādhiṭṭhānā dhammādhiṭṭhānā ca pucchā visuṃ visuṃ dassitāti idāni tā saha dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca saṅkhātadhammāse’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ padattho – saṅkhātadhammāti aniccādivasena parivīmaṃsitadhammā, arahataṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sekkhāti sīlādīni sikkhamānā avasesā ariyapuggalā. Puthūti bahū sattajanā. Tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhīti tesaṃ sekhāsekhānaṃ nipako paṇḍito tvaṃ bhagavā paṭipattiṃ puṭṭho me brūhīti. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva viññāyati.
15 “Kissā”是问“为了什么原因、以什么理由”,意思是“由于什么因、以什么为因”。所谓“在有学与无学中,以观为先导的断”,意思是:针对有学和无学,以及以观为先导的断,用提问的方式、按提问的规则来问。巴利
15.Kissāti kissa hetu, kena kāraṇenāti attho. Sekhāsekhavipassanā pubbaṅgamappahānayogenāti sekhe asekhe vipassanāpubbaṅgamappahāne ca pucchanayogena, pucchāvidhināti attho.
在回答的偈颂里,“于诸欲不应贪求”意思是:对事欲,不应以烦恼欲去贪求。“意应无浊”是说:舍弃嗔恚寻思、身恶行等会让心变得污浊的法,以心保持清净无浊。可是,无学者因为已经以无常等角度衡量了一切法,所以在一切法上都得善巧;又因身念处等而具足正念;已断尽一切烦恼,达到最上比丘的身份;并且在一切威仪中都保持正念而行。因此说“善巧……应遍行”。这就是简要的含义。巴利
Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ kāmesu nābhigijjheyyāti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena na abhigijjheyya. Manasānāvilo siyāti byāpādavitakkādayo kāyaduccaritādayo ca manaso āvilabhāvakare dhamme pajahanto cittena anāvilo bhaveyya. Yasmā pana asekkho aniccatādivasena sabbadhammānaṃ paritulitattā kusalo sabbadhammesu kāyānupassanāsatiādīhi ca sato sabbakilesānaṃ bhinnattā uttamabhikkhubhāvaṃ patto ca hutvā sabbairiyāpathesu pavattati, tasmā ‘‘kusalo…pe… paribbaje’’ti āhāti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho.
这里,偈颂提问中说的“nipako”(有智慧的人)这个词,是针对世尊说的;而世尊的智慧成熟已经达到最高圆满,应当通过无障碍的知见来显示。因此,为了先按业门的分类来解析无障碍之智,并展示有学与无学的修行道路,才说了“世尊的一切身业”等话。借此,以在一切处都无障碍的知见,正说明如来在开示有学与无学修行上的善巧。其中,“ko cāti”是在问:在哪里?在什么对象上?为了指出那个对象,就说“于无常、苦、无我中”。这话的意思是:知见生起时,是以“一切有为法都是无常、苦,一切法都是无我”的方式生起的;然而,在那个对象上,如果有某种东西使这知见无法生起,那就是障碍。由此显示出,通达无常、苦、无我这三相极为困难,而且不是共于他人的独特之处。因为正是通过阐明这三相,有智慧的人才能认可世尊对四圣谛的通达以及正等觉。巴利
Tattha yaṃ pucchāgāthāyaṃ ‘‘nipako’’ti padaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, bhagavato ca nepakkaṃ ukkaṃsapāramippattaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇadassanena dīpetabbanti anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kammadvārabhedehi vibhajitvā sekhāsekhapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tena sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇadassanena tathāgatassa sekhāsekhapaṭipattidesanākosallameva vibhāveti. Tattha ko cāti kva ca, kasmiṃ visayeti attho. Taṃ visayaṃ dasseti ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattani cā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma uppajjamānaṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhataṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti uppajjati, tassa pana tasmiṃ visaye yena appavatti, so paṭighātoti, etena lakkhaṇattayappaṭivedhassa durabhisambhavataṃ anaññasādhāraṇatañca dasseti. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanena hi bhagavato catusaccappaṭivedhaṃ sammāsambodhiñca paṇḍitā paṭijānanti.
“无知”和“无见”是从本质上直接指出那个障碍。因为,遮蔽六种所缘各自特性的迷痴,确实就是如实知见的障碍。如实知见本该在某个所缘上生起,却恰恰在那个所缘上遭到它的阻碍,因此说“于无常、苦、无我中者”。接着,“就像这里有一个男人”等,是譬喻的说明。这里的譬喻对应关系是:一切世间就像那个男人,六种所缘就像那些星星的形状,世间通过眼识等如其所应地认知六种所缘,就像那个男人看见星星的形状;而那个男人虽然看见了星星的形状,却不能用“这几百颗、这几千颗”这样的计算方式知道数目,同样地,世间虽然以某种方式认知了色法等所缘,却未能领悟无常、苦、无我这三相。其余内容就很明白了。巴利
Aññāṇaṃ adassananti taṃ paṭighātaṃ sarūpato dasseti. Chaḷārammaṇasabhāvappaṭicchādako hi sammoho ñāṇadassanassa paṭighātoti. Yasmiṃ visaye ñāṇadassanaṃ uppattirahaṃ, tattheva tassa paṭighātena bhavitabbanti āha – ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattani cā’’ti. Yathā idha purisotiādi upamādassanaṃ. Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – puriso viya sabbo loko, tārakarūpāni viya cha ārammaṇāni, tassa purisassa tārakarūpānaṃ dassanaṃ viya lokassa cakkhuviññāṇādīhi yathārahaṃ chaḷārammaṇajānanaṃ, tassa purisassa tārakarūpāni passantassāpi ‘‘ettakāni satāni, ettakāni sahassānī’’tiādinā gaṇanasaṅketena ajānanaṃ viya lokassa rūpādiārammaṇaṃ kathañci jānantassāpi aniccādilakkhaṇattayānavabodhoti. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
现在,为了分别解释世尊用哪些词句讲述了尊者阿耆多的有学与无学行道,说了“在此,有学者”等。其中,“在此”只是一个不变词,或者是指那个解答。“有学者”:因为戒属于他,所以是有学,即指这样的有学者。“于二种法中”:意思是针对两种法。“应现起处”:由于被嗔恚所盘踞,应当在那里活动,意思就是怨恨的起因。也有人读作“应撞击处”,意思相同。巴利
Idāni yehi padehi bhagavatā āyasmato ajitassa sekhāsekhapaṭipadā vuttā, tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha sekhenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti nipātamattaṃ, tasmiṃ vā vissajjane. Sekhenāti sikkhā etassa sīlanti sekho, tena sekhena. Dvīsu dhammesūti duvidhesu dhammesūti adhippāyo. Pariyuṭṭhānīyesūti dosena pariyuṭṭhitena yattha parivattitabbaṃ, tesu āghātavatthūsūti attho. ‘‘Paṭighaṭṭhānīyesū’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
在这里,针对呵责贪著、遮止贪著的教诫中,因为贪著存在时,以贪著为因的过失就会产生,所以也从这一点出发,把应当守护心这件事确定下来并作了说明。可是,由于世尊说过“于诸欲中不应贪求”,所以接着以“在此,那种欲求”等语句,从贪著的角度作了详细说明。或者也可以这样理解:应当从过失方面守护心,这一点已经由那首偈颂的第二句说到了。因为第二句展示了其余的杂染法和清净法。也就是说,为了按照已生起和未生起的区分,把一切杂染法和清净法作为正精进的所缘,分成四种,再通过正勤这一门径,将有学的修行之道推到顶点并展示出来,所以才说了“有学者若贪求”等话。其中,“无浊之思”是指:因为没有欲思等浑浊的思虑,所以是无浊之思。正因如此,他不贪求地精进,策发精进力。怎样精进呢?接着说“他对于未生起的……”等等。巴利
Ettha ca gedhapaṭisedhacodanāyaṃ gedhanimitto doso gedhe sati hotīti tatopi cittassa rakkhitabbatā niddhāretvā vuttā. Yasmā pana bhagavatā ‘‘kāmesu nābhigijjheyyā’’ti (su. ni. 1045; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 64, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 8; netti. 15-17) vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tattha yā icchā’’tiādinā gedhavasena niddeso kato. Atha vā dosato cittassa rakkhitabbatā gāthāya dutiyapādena vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyapādena hi sesakilesavodānadhammā dassitā. Tathā hi uppannānuppannabhedato sammāvāyāmassa visayabhāvena sabbe saṃkilesavodānadhamme catudhā vibhajitvā sammappadhānamukhena sekhapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sekho abhigijjhanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anāvilasaṅkappoti āvilānaṃ kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ abhāvena anāvilasaṅkappo. Tato eva ca anabhigijjhanto vāyamati, vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Kathaṃ vāyamatīti āha – ‘‘so anuppannāna’’ntiādi.
在这里,“他”指的是为了追求更高的殊胜境界而修行的有学圣者。“未生起的”指还没有产生的。“恶的”指低劣的。“不善法”指从不善巧所生的诸法。“为了令不生起”就是为了不让它们生起。“生起欲求”就是生起被称为“想要去做”的善法欲。“精进”就是付出努力和勤行。“策发精进”就是发动身心的精进力。“策励心”就是用与它同时生起的精进力把心提起来。“勤行”就是作出勤修的精进。而“精进”等这四句,应当与反复练习、修习、多作、持续不断地造作联系起来理解。对于“已生的恶法”,指已经进入不能被说成“未生起”状态的恶法。“为了断除”就是为了舍弃它们。对于“未生的善法”,指尚未产生的、从善巧所生的诸法。“为了令生起”就是为了让它们生起。对于“已生的”,指已经产生的。“为了安住”就是为了安住。“为了不忘失”就是为了不令忘失。“为了更增长”就是为了反复地修习。“为了广大”就是为了广大的状态。“为了修习”就是为了增长。“为了圆满”就是为了圆满。以上是逐词的含义。巴利
Tattha soti uttarivisesatthāya paṭipajjamāno sekkho. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaparakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Vāyamatītiādīni pana cattāri padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni. Uppannānaṃ pāpakānanti anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ . Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāyāti ayaṃ tāva padattho.
16 “哪些是未生起的”等这一段,是为了说明不善法和善法当中,哪些是未生起的,哪些是已生起的。其中,“这些是未生起的”:这些欲寻等,或者因为还没有现行,或者因为还没有被体验为所缘,所以称为未生起。否则,在无始的轮回中,根本不存在所谓未生起的不善法。这里举出三种寻,应当理解为只是举例而已。“不善根”:这里说的是随眠,因为随眠正是一切不善法的根本,所以这样讲,并不只是指贪等。“这些是已生起的”:这些随眠,因为可以用“已由地而得生起”“未被断除而生起”等带有“已生起”含义的说法来描述,所以是从名称上称为已生起,并不是说它们正在现行,这就是这里的含义。“这些是未生起的善法”:这是为了说明,对于正在为证悟入流果而修行的人来说,信等善法属于未生起;至于凡夫,就更不用说了。这里“善”这个词,应当像《婆醯迦经》中那样,理解为“无过失”的同义词。“这些是已生起的善法”:对于为证悟入流果而修行的人来说,在最初的道上,信等善法就是已生起的善法。巴利
16.‘‘Katame anuppannā’’tiādi akusaladhammā kusaladhammā ca yādisā anuppannā yādisā ca uppannā, te dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha ime anuppannāti ime kāmavitakkādayo asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannā nāma. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma akusalā dhammā natthi. Vitakkattayaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akusalamūlānīti anusayā eva sabbesaṃ akusalānaṃ mūlabhāvato evaṃ vuttā, na lobhādayo eva. Ime uppannā anusayā bhūmiladdhuppannā asamugghāṭituppannātiādiuppannapariyāyasabbhāvato nāmavasena uppannā nāma, na vattamānabhāvenāti attho. Ime anuppannā kusalā dhammāti ime sotāpannassa saddhādayo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa anuppannā kusalā dhammā nāma, ko pana vādo puthujjanānanti dasseti. Kusalasaddo cettha bāhitikasutte (ma. ni. 2.358 ādayo) viya anavajjapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo. Ime uppannā kusalā dhammāti ime paṭhamamagge saddhādayo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa uppannā kusalā dhammā nāma.
修习念处能很好地制止欲寻,所以经中说:“用来制止欲寻的,这就是念根。”以没有过失的快乐作为近因,心不散乱,而瞋思惟是内心苦的依靠和散乱的助缘,它被很好地制止了,因此说:“用来制止瞋思惟的,这就是定根。”在善法中已经发动精进的人,能轻松承受他人的伤害,因此通过精进来很好地制止害思惟,所以经中说:“用来制止害思惟的,这就是精进根。”定等诸根各自断除各自的对立面,这只有具足智慧的人才能做到——为了显示这个道理,经中说:“凭借此,对已生起的、已生起的……”等等。巴利
Satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya suniggahito kāmavitakkoti āha – ‘‘yena kāmavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ satindriya’’nti. Anavajjasukhapadaṭṭhānena avikkhepena cetodukkhasannissayo vikkhepapaccayo byāpādavitakko suniggahitoti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yena byāpādavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ samādhindriya’’nti. Kusalesu dhammesu āraddhavīriyo parāparādhaṃ sukhena sahatīti vīriyena vihiṃsāvitakko suniggahitoti āha – ‘‘yena vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ vīriyindriya’’nti. Samādhiādīnampi yathāsakaṃpaṭipakkhappahānaṃ paññavantasseva ijjhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘yena uppannuppanne’’tiādi.
为了说明这五根在各自对应的范围内处于主导地位,说了“信根应当在哪里见到”等话。这很容易理解。接着,为了说明由于有学者的信等诸根得以生起,一切有学法都达到了顶点,便以“如此,有学者……”等语来总结有学之道。巴利
Etesaṃ yathāniddhāritānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ savisaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhindriyaṃ kattha daṭṭhabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Imesañca saddhādīnaṃ sekhānaṃ indriyānaṃ nibbattiyā sabbepi sekhā dhammā matthakappattā hontīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ sekho’’tiādinā sekhapaṭipadaṃ nigameti.
17 17. 这样分析了有学行道之后,现在为了分析无学行道,而说“善巧于一切法”等。其中,“一切法”这个词,是先分析前面所说的那些法,然后为了显示无学者对它们的善巧,而说“名为世间”等。这和前面所说的意思一样。由烦恼世间集起了有世间,意思是:依靠欲界法,进而集起色界、无色界法。“他”是指那位住于广大法中,或住于小法与广大法中的(无学者)。“令根生起”:就是把戒和定作为抉择分,然后生起能令解脱成熟的信等诸根。“当诸根被修习时”:当上面所说的诸根被增长时,通过把握色界、无色界等方式,对应知之法就获得了遍知。巴利
17. Evaṃ sekhapaṭipadaṃ vibhajitvā idāni asekhapaṭipadaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘kusalo sabbadhammāna’’ntiādimāha . Tattha sabbadhammānanti iminā padena vuttadhamme tāva vibhajitvā tattha asekkhassa kosallaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vuttatthameva. Kilesalokena bhavaloko samudāgacchatīti kāmāvacaradhammaṃ nissāya rūpārūpāvacaradhamme samudāgametīti attho. Soti so mahaggatadhammesu, parittamahaggatadhammesu vā ṭhito. Indriyāni nibbattetīti sīlasamādhayo nibbedhabhāgiye katvā vimuttiparipācanīyāni saddhādīni indriyāni uppādeti. Indriyesu bhāviyamānesūti yathāvuttaindriyesu vaḍḍhiyamānesu rūpārūpapariggahādivasena neyyassa pariññā bhavati.
“见遍知”就是知遍知。“修遍知”就是审察遍知和断遍知。用“它有两种”等话简略说过的意思,通过“当有学……”等话加以展开。其中,“以伴随厌离的想和作意”这一句,显示的是强有力的观。这里“当有学”一词,因为善凡夫也具有修学的性质,所以也被归入“有学”之中,因此说“两种法到达善巧:见善巧……”这里的意思是:当善凡夫修习前行之道,以伴随厌离的想和作意遍知所应了知的对象时,他的那些观法就到达见善巧,成就初道智,与它相应。而当入流者等有学者,按所说的方式遍知所应了知的对象时,他的那些观法就到达修善巧。巴利
Dassanapariññāti ñātapariññā. Bhāvanāpariññāti tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññā ca. ‘‘Sā duvidhenā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadā hi sekho’’tiādinā vivarati. Tattha ‘‘nibbidāsahagatehi saññāmanasikārehī’’ti iminā balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Yadā hi sekhoti cettha sikkhanasīlatāya kalyāṇaputhujjanopi sekhapadena saṅgahitoti katvā ‘‘dve dhammā kosallaṃ gacchanti dassanakosallañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yadā kalyāṇaputhujjano pubbabhāgasikkhaṃ sikkhanto nibbidāsahagatehi saññāmanasikārehi ñeyyaṃ parijānāti, tadā tassa te vipassanādhammā dassanakosallaṃ paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ gacchanti sampāpuṇanti tena saddhiṃ ghaṭenti. Yadā pana sotāpannādisekho vuttanayena neyyaṃ parijānāti, tadā tassa te vipassanādhammā bhāvanākosallaṃ gacchantīti.
那被称为“智”的,就是前面所说的对应当被了知之境的遍知,也就是了知应当被了知之境的智。应当以五种方式来了知,这是从所缘境的差别来显示它的分类。于诸法的自相智,是指对色法与无色法,以坚硬、触等各自特有的相为对象的智。然而,因为一切应当被了知之境,从因、果的差别来看只有两种,所以被解说为“法辨析和义辨析”。巴利
Taṃ ñāṇanti yā pubbe neyyassa pariññā vuttā, taṃ neyyaparijānanañāṇaṃ. Pañcavidhena veditabbanti visayabhedena tassa bhedaṃ dasseti. Dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇe ñāṇanti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ kakkhaḷaphusanādisalakkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā sabbaṃ neyyaṃ hetuhetuphalabhedato duvidhameva hoti, tasmā ‘‘dhammapaṭisambhidā ca atthapaṭisambhidā cā’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ.
“遍知”在这里指的是审察遍知。因为他先以自相和缘的方式了知色法与无色法,再以善等类别把它们把握起来,然后以无常等方式去认知,所以说“这样了知之后,那种遍知,这是善”等等。其中,“这样把握的”,是指这样以无常等方式、以聚的思惟等方式所把握、所审察的。“这产生果”,是指这些依次生起生灭智等果;这是从相作为作者的角度来施设,就像说“能使人成为圣者的诸谛就是圣谛”一样。“对这些”,是指对生灭智等。“这样把握的”,是指这样运作的诸法。“这个义”,是指这个义就是对诸谛的随觉通达。正如遍知慧对所应审察的诸法、对审察之法,在那里遍知它的审察方式;同样,遍知慧也遍知那审察的果。这样作意,这个理趣已被显示。巴利
Pariññāti tīraṇapariññā adhippetā. Yasmā panassa rūpārūpadhamme salakkhaṇato paccayato ca abhijānitvā kusalādivibhāgehi te pariggahetvā aniccādivasena jānanā hoti, tasmā ‘‘evaṃ abhijānitvā yā parijānanā, idaṃ kusala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃgahitāti evaṃ aniccādito kalāpasammasanādivasena gahitā sammasitā. Idaṃ phalaṃ nibbattentīti idaṃ udayabbayañāṇādikaṃ phalaṃ paṭipāṭiyā uppādenti , nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaraṇato yathā ariyabhāvakarāni saccāni ariyasaccānīti. Tesanti udayabbayañāṇādīnaṃ . Evaṃgahitānanti evaṃpavattitānaṃ. Ayaṃ atthoti ayaṃ saccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedho attho. Yathā hi pariññāpaññā sammasitabbadhamme sammasanadhamme tattha sammasanākāraṃ parijānāti, evaṃ sammasanaphalampi parijānātīti katvā ayaṃ nayo dassito.
“那些是不善的”这句话说的是集谛。因为一切不善都属于集谛这一边。“那些是善的”指的是正见等道法。虽然果法也应当被证知,但因为这里强调的是对四谛的证悟,所以说“哪些法是应当被证知的?那就是无为法”。“义善巧”是指对缘所生起的义善巧。“法善巧”是指对缘法善巧。或者也可以说,圣典的义和圣典的法就是义和法。“善性善巧”是指对恰当性善巧,也就是对四种理趣善巧,或者说是对说法的恰当性善巧。“果性善巧”是指对漏已尽者的果善巧。在“于入处善巧”等说法中,“入”是指增长。它有两种:从无义之损减来说,以及从处所之生起来说。“非入”是指不增长。它也有两种:从义之损减来说,以及从非处所之生起来说。“于方便善巧”是指:当有情遇到紧急之事或怖畏时,能够对治那件事的、依处所而生起的因缘,对此善巧,就是这里的意思。因为漏已尽者已经完全断除了无明,达到了慧的圆满,所以对这些入处等都能善巧。这样从一部分说明了无学者的善巧之后,为了再毫无遗漏地显示出来,所以说“具备广大善巧”。巴利
Ye akusalāti samudayasaccamāha. Sabbe hi akusalā samudayapakkhiyāti. Ye kusalāti maggadhammā sammādiṭṭhiādayo. Yadipi phaladhammāpi sacchikātabbā, catusaccappaṭivedhassa pana adhippetattā ‘‘katame dhammā sacchikātabbā, yaṃ asaṅkhata’’nti vuttaṃ. Atthakusaloti paccayuppannesu atthesu kusalo. Dhammakusaloti paccayadhammesu kusalo. Pāḷiatthapāḷidhammā vā atthadhammā. Kalyāṇatākusaloti yuttatākusalo, catunayakovidoti attho, desanāyuttikusalo vā. Phalatākusaloti khīṇāsavaphalakusalo. ‘‘Āyakusalo’’tiādīsu āyoti vaḍḍhi. Sā anatthahānito aṭṭhuppattito ca duvidhā. Apāyāti avaḍḍhi. Sāpi atthahānito anaṭṭhuppattito ca duvidhā. Upāyoti sattānaṃ accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne tassa tikicchanasamatthaṃ ṭhānuppattikāraṇaṃ, tattha kusaloti attho. Khīṇāsavo hi sabbaso avijjāya pahīnattā paññāvepullappatto etesu āyādīsu kusaloti. Evaṃ asekhassa kosallaṃ ekadesena vibhāvetvā puna anavasesato dassento ‘‘mahatā kosallena samannāgato’’ti āha.
对于已经完成学处的无学者来说,因为念的作用已经圆满,再没有别的目的,所以说“为现法乐住”。现在,为了总结前面所说的有学和无学的修行道路,说出“这两种行”等话。其中,应当觉悟的,就是所应觉知的对象。那所应觉的有四种,因为它是四谛。“他这样知道”:就是以遍知、现观等方式了知的人。“这被称为”:这位无学者达到了念的圆满,从究竟意义上可以说他“具念地前进”等。其余内容容易理解。这里的问答辨析,也应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Pariniṭṭhitasikkhassa asekhassa satokāritāya aññaṃ payojanaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārattha’’nti. Idāni yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ sekhāsekhapaṭipadaṃ nigamento ‘‘imā dve cariyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bojjhanti bujjhitabbaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhanti taṃ bojjhaṃ catubbidhaṃ, catusaccabhāvato. Evaṃ jānātīti evaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena yo jānāti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ asekho sativepullappatto nippariyāyena ‘‘sato abhikkamatī’’tiādinā vuccatīti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Idhāpi pucchāvissajjanavicayā pubbe vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
到这里为止,大长老在分析审查理趣时,依据《阿耆多经》等(《经集》103等;《小部·阿耆多童子问》57等,《阿耆多童子问义释》1等),展示了问的审查和答的审查。现在,为了说明其他经中也存在问与答的审查方法,他说“应这样问,应这样答”。其中,“这样”指的是用这个方法。“应问”的意思是应当提问,或者应当宣说,应当分辨清楚。“应这样答”也是同样的道理。“以及对于经”等语,是随颂审查的示例。随颂,应当从义理和文句两方面来等同,也就是说,被称为其他经教说的随颂,在义理和文句上,应当与所注释的经相同、相似,或者应当正确地归入那部经中。“义已偏离”,是指在义理上脱离了,或者指意义没有关联,就像“十粒石榴”之类的话。因此他说这“成为杂秽语”。由此,他说明了应当将义理等同的原因。“不善放置”,是指不正确地说出。“难引导”,是指难以被引导,或者无法被引导。“具备文句”,是指具备自性语词。巴利
Ettāvatā ca mahāthero vicayahāraṃ vibhajanto ajitasuttavasena (su. ni. 103 ādayo; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) pucchāvicayaṃ vissajjanavicayañca dassetvā idāni suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanavicayānaṃ nayaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti āha. Tattha evanti iminā nayena. Pucchitabbanti pucchā kātabbā, ācikkhitabbā vā, vivecetabbāti attho. Evaṃ vissajjitanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suttassa cātiādi anugītivicayanidassanaṃ. Anugīti atthato ca byañjanato ca samānetabbāti suttantaradesanāsaṅkhātā anugīti atthato byañjanato ca saṃvaṇṇiyamānena suttena samānā sadisī kātabbā, tasmiṃ vā sutte sammā ānetabbā. Atthāpagatanti atthato apetaṃ, asambandhatthaṃ vā dasadāḷimādivacanaṃ viya. Tenevāha ‘‘samphappalāpaṃ bhavatī’’ti. Etena atthassa samānetabbatāya kāraṇamāha. Dunnikkhittassāti asammāvuttassa. Dunnayoti dukkhena netabbo, netuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Byañjanupetanti sabhāvaniruttisamupetaṃ.
这样展示了随颂审查之后,为了在释义部分中分析“对经的审查”这个简要说到的意思,先说了“应当审查经”,接着为了展示审查的方式,又说了“这部经是亲说言教吗”等话。其中,“亲说言教”是指世尊触及地点和场合、直接面对而说出的言教,也就是正自觉者亲自开示的经,这是它的意思。“随接言教”是指声闻所说的。因为它是紧接在世尊的言教之后而说起的,所以叫“随接言教”。“了义”是指按照字面就能知道的意义。“未了义”是指必须经过审察判定之后才能把握的意义。“杂染部分”等词的意思,将在基本分的注释中明了。不过,世尊的教法在十六种教法基本中没有哪一种是不属于其中某一部分的,因此那种审查方法也作为应当审查的方式,在这里列了出来。巴利
Evaṃ anugītivicayaṃ dassetvā niddesavāre ‘‘suttassa yo pavicayo’’ti saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘suttañca pavicinitabba’’nti vatvā tassa vicinanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kiṃ idaṃ suttaṃ āhaccavacana’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āhaccavacananti bhagavato ṭhānakaraṇāni āhacca abhihantvā pavattavacanaṃ, sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ desitasuttanti attho. Anusandhivacananti sāvakabhāsitaṃ. Tañhi bhagavato vacanaṃ anusandhetvā pavattanato ‘‘anusandhivacana’’nti vuttanti. Nītatthanti yathārutavasena ñātabbatthaṃ. Neyyatthanti niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ. Saṃkilesabhāgiyantiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho paṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Yasmā pana bhagavato desanā soḷasavidhe sāsanapaṭṭhāne ekaṃ bhāgaṃ abhajantī nāma natthi, tasmā sopi nayo vicetabbabhāvena idha nikkhitto.
这部经在哪里?就是问这部经在开头、中间、结尾的哪一部分。应当见到一切谛,意思是:苦谛应当在这部经的哪里、哪一部分、哪一句中被见到?要确定并审查;集谛、灭谛、道谛应当在哪里被见到、被看到?要确定并审查。也就是说,应当把一切谛都提取出来加以审查,这就是它的用意。从开头、中间、结尾,意思是:应当这样从头、从中间、从结尾,依照提问和审查等方法来审查这部经。在这里,提问、回答、前后、随颂这几种审查,在经文中已经以它们本身的形式显示出来了。而乐味等审查,则是通过抉择谛的方式,按方法显示出来的,应当依照释义部分所说的方式来理解。而且,正是通过那种审查,句的审查也得以完成。巴利
Kuhiṃ imassa suttassāti imassa suttassa kasmiṃ padese ādimajjhapariyosānesu. Sabbāni saccāni passitabbānīti dukkhasaccaṃ suttassa ‘‘kuhiṃ kasmiṃ padese kasmiṃ vā pade passitabbaṃ niddhāretvā vicetuṃ, samudayasaccaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ maggasaccaṃ kuhiṃ passitabbaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ niddhāretvā vicetu’’nti evaṃ sabbāni saccāni uddharitvā vicetabbānīti adhippāyo. Ādimajjhapariyosāneti evaṃ suttaṃ pavicetabbanti ādito majjhato pariyosānato ca evaṃ iminā pucchāvicayādinayena suttaṃ pavicitabbanti attho. Ettha ca pucchāvissajjanapubbāparānugītivicayā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva dassitā. Assādādivicayo pana saccaniddhāraṇamukhena nayato dassito, so niddesavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tabbicayeneva ca padavicayo siddhoti.
3. 相合理趣分别的注释巴利
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
18 18. 其中,“什么是理趣”等部分,是对理趣分别的解说。这里问“什么连接?”是在问理趣的范围。那么它的范围是什么?以不如实的方式被执取的诸经义就是它的范围,因为它们应当通过理趣的抉择,以特别如实的方式被连接起来。在其它的理趣中,这种理趣同样是被需要的,但那只是如实叙述而已。然而,既然这种名为“理趣寻求”的事,离开四大教法就无法成立,所以在分析理趣时,为了先说明它的特相,就说了“四大教法”等。巴利
18.Tatthakatamo yuttihārotiādi yuttihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kiṃ yojayatīti yuttihārassa visayaṃ pucchati. Ko panetassa visayo? Atathākārena gayhamānā suttatthā visayo, te hi tena sātisayaṃ yāthāvato yuttiniddhāraṇena yojetabbā. Itaresupi ayaṃ hāro icchito eva. Taṃ pana bhūtakathanamattaṃ hoti. Yasmā panāyaṃ yuttigavesanā nāma na mahāpadesena vinā, tasmā yuttihāraṃ vibhajanto tassa lakkhaṇaṃ tāva upadisituṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādimāha.
这里,“大教法”就是“大依处”,意思是把佛陀等伟大人物作为依据而说出的重大理由。或者,“大教法”也可以理解为“大处所”,说的是法的伟大安立处。这里的词义是这样的:被依止的就是“依处”;以佛为依处,就叫“佛依处”。其余几种也是同样的道理。“这是我从世尊面前亲耳听到的”等等,就是当某人带来一部教本时,用来判断它到底是法还是非法的依据。那么,什么是“教本”呢?就是那样带来的经的入经等等。既然这样,为什么是四种呢?因为所依止的对象有区别。法的传承有两种:世尊和声闻。其中,声闻又按僧团、僧众、个人分为三种。由于“我从某某那里领受了这个法”这样的所依止对象不同,所以有四种。因此说:“佛依处……乃至……单个上座依处”。那些“文句”,就是某人带来的经的句和文,也就是义理之句和文句。或者,是指注释者以注释方式引用的文句。“应被放入经中”,就是应被引入经中;“应被对照”,就是应被会通;“应被安放”,就是应被放入。巴利
Tattha mahāpadesāti mahāapadesā, buddhādayo mahante apadisitvā vuttāni mahākāraṇānīti attho. Atha vā mahāpadesāti mahāokāsā, mahantāni dhammassa patiṭṭhānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – apadissatīti apadeso, buddho apadeso etassāti buddhāpadeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Sammukhā metaṃ bhagavato suta’’ntiādinā kenaci ābhatassa ganthassa dhammoti vā adhammoti vā vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Tassa tathā ābhatassa suttotaraṇādi eva. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ cattāroti? Apadisitappabhedato. Dhammassa hi dve sampadāyo bhagavā sāvakā ca. Tesu sāvakā saṅghagaṇapuggalavasena tividhā. ‘‘Evamamumhā mayāyaṃ dhammo paṭiggahito’’ti apadisitabbānaṃ bhedena cattāro. Tenāha – ‘‘buddhāpadeso…pe… ekattherāpadeso’’ti. Tāni padabyañjanānīti kenaci ābhatasuttassa padāni byañjanāni ca, atthapadāni ceva byañjanapadāni cāti attho. Saṃvaṇṇakena vā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena āhariyamānāni padabyañjanāni. Sutte otārayitabbānīti sutte anuppavesitabbāni. Sandassayitabbānīti saṃsandetabbāni. Upanikkhipitabbānīti pakkhipitabbāni.
为了说明经等,说了“哪一个”等话。其中,因为世尊的言语哪怕只有一个偈颂,也离不开真实,所以为了说明“经”这个词的含义,说了“在四圣谛中”。而在注释书里,则说三藏就是经,应当看到,这与《指导论》的这句话完全吻合、一致。世尊的开示,只要是为了无取般涅槃,就必定宣说止息贪等烦恼;为了说明“律”这个词的含义,所以说了“在调伏贪中”等话。因为这里所说的“律”,就是指调伏贪等的因由。正如所说:巴利
Suttādīni dassetuṃ ‘‘katamasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā bhagavato vacanaṃ ekagāthāmattampi saccavinimuttaṃ natthi, tasmā sutteti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu ariyasaccesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tīṇi piṭakāni suttanti vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā nettivacanena aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yāvadeva anupādāparinibbānatthā bhagavato desanā, sā ekantena rāgādikilesavūpasamaṃ vadatīti vinayetipadassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘rāgavinaye’’tiādimāha. Vinayoti hi kāraṇaṃ rāgādivūpasamanimittaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Yathāha –
乔达弥,如果你知道某些法导向贪欲而不是离贪,导向系缚而不是离系,导向积聚而不是减损,导向多欲而不是少欲,导向不知足而不是知足,导向群居而不是独处,导向懈怠而不是精进,导向难养而不是易养,那么乔达弥,你应当确定地认定:这不是法,这不是律,这不是导师之教。乔达弥,如果你知道某些法导向离贪而不是贪欲,导向离系而不是系缚,导向减损而不是积聚,导向少欲而不是多欲,导向知足而不是不知足,导向独处而不是群居,导向精进而不是懈怠,导向易养而不是难养,那么乔达弥,你应当确定地认定:这是法,这是律,这是导师之教。巴利
‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti no visaññogāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti no apacayāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no santuṭṭhiyā, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti no pavivekāya, kosajjāya saṃvattanti no vīriyārambhāya, dubbharatāya saṃvattanti no subharatāya, ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’nti. Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti no sarāgāya, visaññogāya saṃvattanti no saññogāya, apacayāya saṃvattanti no ācayāya, appicchatāya saṃvattanti no mahicchatāya, santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no asantuṭṭhiyā pavivekāya saṃvattanti no saṅgaṇikāya, vīriyārambhāya saṃvattanti no kosajjāya, subharatāya saṃvattanti no dubbharatāya, ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (cūḷava. 406).
为了说明“法性”这个词的含义,所以说了“在缘起中”。缘起确实被说成是“那安住着的界、法住性、法决定性”(《增支部》3.137)。“应安放于法性中”这句话在经文里原本没有,应当理解为是为了显示其含义才在这里说的。在这里,如果能讲明流转、还灭以及它们的方法,还有障碍等的确定性,就叫做“入于经”;如果能彻底开示调伏贪等烦恼的方法,就叫做“现于律”;同样,如果能避开常见和断见,通过开示同一性等理趣,把自性法的缘与缘生关系讲清楚,就叫做不违背法性。巴利
Dhammatāyantipadassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭiccasamuppāde’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādo hi ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatāti (a. ni. 3.137) vutto. ‘‘Dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbānī’’ti idaṃ pāḷiyaṃ natthi, atthadassanavasena pana idha vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca pavattiṃ nivattiṃ tadupāyañca bādhakādibhāve niyataṃ paridīpento sutte otarati nāma. Ekantena rāgādikilesavinayaṃ vadanto vinaye sandissati nāma. Tathā sassataṃ ucchedañca vajjetvā ekattanayādiparidīpanena sabhāvadhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvaṃ vibhāvento dhammataṃ na vilometi nāma.
像这样的人,不会生起欲漏等烦恼——为了说明这个意思,就说了“如果于四圣谛中……”等话。有人问:缘起顺着说是流转,逆着说是还灭,它既然已经含摄在四圣谛里了,为什么这里还要单独提出来呢?确实如此。不过这里单独提出来,是为了通过显示诸法依因缘而生灭,来说明无常相、无力相、无主宰相;既然显示了它们有生起,也就有灭去,由这两方面就显出无常性,由生灭的逼迫就显出苦性,由这两者就显出无我性。这样就把三相结合起来,摧破一切恶见和邪思,显示出不共他派的教法成就。巴利
Evaṃvidho ca kāmāsavādikaṃ āsavaṃ na uppādetīti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yadi catūsu ariyasaccesū’’tiādimāha. Nanu ca anulomato paṭiccasamuppādo pavatti, paṭilomato nivattīti so cattāri ariyasaccāni anupaviṭṭho kasmā idha visuṃ gahitoti? Saccametaṃ. Idha pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ dhammānaṃ paccayāyattavuttidassanena aniccapaccayalakkhaṇaṃ asamatthapaccayalakkhaṇaṃ nirīhapaccayalakkhaṇañca vibhāvetvā tesaṃ udayavantatā tato eva vayavantatā tadubhayena aniccatā udayabbayapaṭipīḷanena dukkhatā anattatāti tilakkhaṇasamāyogaparidīpanī sabbadiṭṭhigatakumatividdhaṃsanī anaññasādhāraṇā sāsanasampatti pakāsitā hotīti dassanatthaṃ.
在这里,应当知道有这四种:经、随顺经、师说、自意。其中,经是指三次结集所收录的三藏。随顺经是指四大教法,也就是被称为“随顺的开许”的那些。师说是指义注。自意是指通过把握理趣、以自己的智慧随觉而生的见解。在这四种当中,经是不可违背的;谁违背经,就等于违背了世尊。随顺的开许,只应采纳与经相符的部分,不相符的则不取。师说也只应采纳与经相符的部分,不相符的则不取。自意同样如此,而且它在这四种当中最为薄弱。巴利
Ettha ca suttaṃ suttānulomaṃ ācariyavādo attanomatīti idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ – tattha suttaṃ nāma tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni tīṇi piṭakāni. Suttānulomaṃ nāma mahāpadesā, yaṃ ‘‘anulomakappiya’’nti vuccati. Ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā. Attanomati nāma nayaggāhena anubuddhiyā attano paṭibhānaṃ. Tattha suttaṃ appaṭibāhiyaṃ, taṃ paṭibāhantena satthāva paṭibāhito hoti. Anulomakappiyaṃ pana suttena samentameva gahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ. Ācariyavādopi suttena samento eva gahetabbo, na itaro. Tathā attanomati, sā pana sabbadubbalāti.
现在,为了说明这里引用四大教法的目的,就说了“以四大教法……”等话。其中,“yaṃ yaṃ”指的是任何生起的义理和法。“yujjati”是说与前面所说的四大教法相符。“yena yena”是指以任何理由。“yathā yathā”是指以任何方式。“taṃ taṃ gahetabbaṃ”的意思是:在注释所解释的经中,根据所引用的理由、关联和方式,从经里提取出来,以注释的方式加以采纳。由此表明:应当以不违背四大教法的理路,从经中确定义理之后,再进行理趣的运用。巴利
Idāni yadatthaṃ idha cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūhi mahāpadesehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yanti yaṃ yaṃ atthajātañca dhammajātañca. Yujjatīti yathāvuttehi catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati. Yena yenāti yena yena kāraṇena. Yathā yathāti yena yena pakārena. Taṃ taṃ gahetabbanti saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte ābhatena kāraṇena pasaṅgena pakārena ca suttato uddharitvā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena gahetabbanti attho. Tena catumahāpadesāviruddhāya yuttiyā suttato atthe niddhāretvā yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti dasseti.
19 19. 现在,为了说明这个理路的阐明,开始说“被提问者……”等。其中,“kati padāni”是有多少语句的意思。为了说明“pariyogāhitabbaṃ”这个词的含义,所以说“vicetabbaṃ”(应当审察)。有多少语句表达了所想要表达的意思,这些语句因为能让人想了解那一个意思,所以称为“一个问题”。而在一首偈颂里,如果所有语句都表达同一个意思,或者哪怕只有一个语句表达一个意思,那也只是一个问题。为了说明这个意思,就说“如果所有……”等。“taṃ”指那个问题。“aññātabbaṃ”指应当被了知。“什么是这些法?”等,是显示了知的方式。其中,“法”指教法,“nānatthā”指不同的意思。巴利
19. Idāni taṃ yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchitenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kati padānīti kittakāni padāni. Pariyogāhitabbanti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vicetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Yattakāni padāni yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ abhivadanti, tattakāni padāni tadatthassekassa ñātuṃ icchitattā ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuccati, tāni pana ekagāthāyaṃ yadi vā sabbāni padāni yāva yadi vā ekaṃ padaṃ ekaṃ atthaṃ abhivadati, ekoyeva so pañhoti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yadi sabbānī’’tiādinā. Tanti taṃ pañhaṃ. Aññātabbanti ājānitabbaṃ. Kiṃ ime dhammātiādi ājānanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Nānatthāti nānā atthā.
在提问偈中,这一段的意思是:kenassubbhāhato loko是说,这个七分世界就像盗贼被刽子手击杀一样,是被什么击中、杀害的?kenassu parivārito是说,世间就像树被藤蔓缠住一样,是被什么覆盖的?kena sallena otiṇṇo是说,就像被毒箭射入身体内部一样,是被什么箭穿入的?kissa dhūpāyito是说,由于什么原因,世间被熏烧、被热恼?Sadā(常)这个词应当连接到一切处。te是四个词。为呼应“问题”一词的词性,故以阳性词形表示。用“回答”这个词表明,因为回答,可知有三个问题。巴利
Pucchāgāthāyaṃ ayaṃ padattho – kenassubbhāhato lokoti ayaṃ sattaloko coro viya coraghātakena kena abhihato vadhīyatīti attho. Kenassu parivāritoti māluvalatāya viya nissitarukkho kena loko ajjhotthaṭo. Kena sallena otiṇṇoti kena visapītakhurappena viya sarīrabbhantaranimuggena sallena anupaviṭṭho. Kissa dhūpāyitoti kissa kena kāraṇena dhūpāyito santāpito loko. Sadāti padaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Teti cattāri padāni. Pañhasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅganiddeso. ‘‘Vissajjetī’’ti etena vissajjanato tayo pañhāti ñāyatīti dasseti.
20 这里,在回答偈的第二句里说的“老”,以及第一句里说的“死”,这两者就是有为五蕴的“有为相”,因为以它们为标记,所以称为有为相。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,有为法有三种有为相。哪三种?生被了知,灭被了知,住时的变异被了知。”因此说:“老就是住时的变异,死就是灭。”这里,“住时的变异”表明:此处说的老,是指蕴相续前后之间的差别,而不是刹那住。“死就是灭”则表明:这是世间所说的世俗意义上的死,比如“帝思死了,弗思死了”,而不是刹那死,也不是断灭死。巴利
20.Tatthāti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ dutiyapāde vuttā jarā ca paṭhamapāde vuttaṃ maraṇañcāti imāni dve saṅkhatassa pañcakkhandhassa ‘‘saṅkhato’’ti lakkhīyati etehīti saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47; kathā. 214). Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ, maraṇaṃ vayo’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘ṭhitassa aññathatta’’nti etena khandhappabandhassa pubbāparaviseso idha jarā, na khaṇaṭṭhitīti dasseti. ‘‘Maraṇaṃ vayo’’ti iminā ca ‘‘tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti evaṃ loke vuttaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ dasseti, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, samucchedamaraṇaṃ vā.
现在,为了用合理的方式说明前面所说的“那三个问题”的含义,就说了“由老……”等这些话。其中,因为大多数人都是看到人老了才会死,所以对于那些不接受老和死是两回事的人,为了让他们看到这两者的差别,就说“因为连住在胎里的胎儿也会死”。这话的意思是:因为看到有人还没到一般所认为的老就死了,所以老是另一回事,死又是另一回事。因此他说:“他们也不会变老。”还有什么呢?因为单纯看到死亡,所以老是一回事,死又是另一回事,就像诸天那样。为了说明这个意思,就用“而且有诸天的……”等话来说明。再者,靠非超人法和治疗,或许可以对治老,但对死就不是这样。为了说明老和死在意义上也确实有差别,就说了“可能……”等话。其中,“sakkate”就是“可能”的意思,也就是“能够”。“paṭikamma”就是对治。难道对死也不能通过修习神足、获得自在来对治吗?针对这个质疑,他说:“除非是具神通者的神通领域。”关于这一点,世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Idāni ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ yuttivasena dassetuṃ ‘‘jarāya cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yebhuyyena jiṇṇassa maraṇadassanato jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ asampaṭicchamānaṃ pati tesaṃ nānattadassanatthaṃ ‘‘gabbhagatāpi hi mīyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathādhippetajarāvirahitassa maraṇassa dassanato aññā jarā aññaṃ maraṇanti. Tenevāha – ‘‘na ca te jiṇṇā bhavantī’’ti. Kiñca bhiyyo? Kevalassa maraṇassa diṭṭhattā aññāva jarā aññaṃ maraṇaṃ, yathā taṃ devānanti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘atthi ca devāna’’ntiādinā. Anuttarimanussadhammena ca tikicchanena sakkā jarāya paṭikāraṃ kātuṃ, na tathā maraṇassāti evampi jarāmaraṇānaṃ atthato nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘sakkatevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sakkateti sakyate, sakkāti attho. Paṭikammanti paṭikaraṇaṃ. Nanu ca maraṇassāpi paṭikāraṃ kātuṃ sakkā iddhipādabhāvanāya vasibhāve satīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha – ‘‘aññatreva iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayā’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿难,任何人只要修习了四神足,反复修习,把它当作车乘,当作立足处,持续实践,不断积累,善加精勤,那么他如果愿意,就可以住满一劫,或一劫之余。巴利
‘‘Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṃ vā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.166, 182; saṃ. ni. 5.822; kathā. 623; udā. 51).
那么,这里说的“劫”是什么?“劫余”又是什么?“劫”是指寿量劫:无论哪个时代,人类当时的寿命有多长,能把它活满,就叫住满一劫。而经文里说“少一些或更多”,意思是住世超过百岁等,就叫住劫余。如果是这样,那为什么那些有神通、心得自在的漏尽者,为了利益世间,却不那样住世呢?因为他们已经彻底了知了名为“蕴”的苦的重担,所以不再操心;那些最上之人,已经止息了一切操心。法将军确实这样说过——巴利
Ko panettha kappo, ko vā kappāvasesoti? Kappoti āyukappo, yasmiṃ tasmiñhi kāle yaṃ manussānaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, taṃ paripuṇṇaṃ karonto kappaṃ tiṭṭhati nāma. ‘‘Appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.7; a. ni. 7.74) vuttaṃ pana vassasatādito atirekaṃ tiṭṭhanto kappāvasesaṃ tiṭṭhati nāma. Yadi evaṃ kasmā iddhimanto cetovasippattā khīṇāsavā lokahitatthaṃ tathā na tiṭṭhantīti? Khandhasaṅkhātassa dukkhabhārassa pariññātattā anussukkatāya ca. Paṭippassaddhasabbussukkā hi te uttamapurisāti. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā –
我不贪恋死亡,也不渴望活着。
我等待着时机,就像雇工等着拿工钱。巴利
‘‘Nābhinandāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhikaṅkhāmi jīvitaṃ; Kālañca paṭikaṅkhāmi, vetanaṃ bhatako yathā’’ti. (theragā. 654; mi. pa. 2.2.4);
就像老死彼此在含义上不同一样,当通过它们和渴爱显示出这种不同时,“三个问题”这个说法就成立了。为了说明这一点,他接着说了“然而什么”等话。巴利
Yathā jarāmaraṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ atthato nānattaṃ, evaṃ tehi taṇhāya ca nānatte dassite ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti idaṃ sijjhatīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,因为即使没有渴爱,在漏尽者的相续中仍然可以见到老死,所以说“离贪者也在衰老、也在死亡”,这句话就是为了说明“老死是一回事,渴爱是另一回事”这个道理。难道渴爱不也具有衰老、坏灭的性质吗?确实如此,但这里所说的老死并不是指那个,这个意思前面已经说过了。接着用“如果……”等话,是为了显示:如果老死和渴爱没有差别,就会有过失。意思是说:如果是那样,那么青春年华的人也应该没有渴爱了,这并不合理。意思是说:如果老死和渴爱没有差别,那么老死本身也应该成为苦的集起。然而,如果渴爱与老死没有差别,渴爱也就不应该是苦的集起。老死不是苦的集起,渴爱才是苦的集起,所以应当知道它们在意义上是有差别的——这就是他的意旨。再者,就像渴爱是道所断的,如果老死和渴爱没有差别,那么老死也应该成为道所断;反过来,就像老死不是道所断的,那么渴爱也应该不是道所断——这个推论方式也已经说过了,应当这样理解。依此正理,就是指依上面所说的这些道理。以相互不同的方式,意思是:如果从意义上看确实有差别,那么即使在文句上有相同之处,也应当去推求它们的差别。巴利
Tattha yasmā taṇhāya abhāvepi sati jarāmaraṇaṃ labbhati khīṇāsavasantāne, tasmā aññaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ aññā taṇhāti imamatthamāha ‘‘dissanti vītarāgā jīrantāpi mīyantāpī’’ti. Nanu ca taṇhāpi jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvāti? Saccaṃ, na idaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ idhādhippetanti vuttovāyamattho. ‘‘Yadi cā’’tiādinā jarāmaraṇato taṇhāya anaññatte dosaṃ dasseti. Yobbanaṭṭhāpi vigatataṇhā siyuṃ, na idaṃ yuttanti adhippāyo. Jarāmaraṇampi siyā dukkhassa samudayo taṇhāya anaññatte satīti adhippāyo. Na ca siyā taṇhā dukkhassa samudayo jarāmaraṇato anaññatte satīti bhāvo. Na hi jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhassa samudayo, taṇhā dukkhassa samudayo, tasmā veditabbaṃ etesamatthato nānattanti adhippāyo. Yathā ca taṇhā maggavajjhā, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi siyā maggavajjhaṃ taṇhāya anaññatte sati. Yathā ca jarāmaraṇaṃ na maggavajjhaṃ, tathā taṇhāpi siyāti ayampi nayo vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imāya yuttiyāti imāya yathāvuttāya upapattiyā. Aññamaññehīti aññāhi aññāhi kāraṇūpapattīhi atthato ce aññattaṃ, tadaññampi byañjanato gavesitabbanti attho.
为了说明这些法在意义上就是同一个,他用“这确实不合理”等说法来展开解释。当渴爱的愿望没有实现时,就说为“所求不得”。由此说明,欲求和渴爱在意义上是同一个。因此,欲求和渴爱在意义上不可能是不同的,这样才说得通。就像这个说法能够成立一样,在欲求得不到满足这种不如意的情况下,在引发嗔怒的种种事由中,忿和恨会生起,这个说法也能成立;但在老和死这种不如意的情况下,就不是这样。由此论证老死和渴爱在意义上是不同的。为了显示这个道理,他说了“以这个正理”等话。巴利
Imesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthato ekattanti imamevatthaṃ ‘‘na hi yujjatī’’tiādinā vivarati. Taṇhāya adhippāye aparipūramāneti icchitālābhamāha. Tena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato ekattaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti. Etena na hi yujjati icchāya ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattanti. Yathā idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthanaṃ hoti, evaṃ icchāvipariyāye āghātavatthūsu kodho ca upanāho ca uppajjatīti idampi samatthanaṃ hoti, na tathā jarāmaraṇavipariyāyeti jarāmaraṇataṇhānaṃ atthato aññattampi samatthitaṃ hotīti etamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘imāya yuttiyā’’tiādinā.
如果欲求和渴爱在含义上没有差别,那么世尊为什么在这个偈颂里把它分成两种来说呢?对此,他给出了回答:“然而那……”等。这里“那”是指向行为的。“所宣称的”说的是这个宣称,应当结合外在的色等事物,从所缘的角度,或者从作所缘的角度来理解。“以两种法”是指以两种自性。那这两种自性是什么呢?对于还没得到的所缘,以寻求的方式生起的是欲求;对于已经得到的,或者为了让还没得到的显现出来,以想要使之显现的方式生起的是渴爱,这就是它们之间的区别。即便如此,为了显示一切渴爱在吞没色等所缘、最终确定之后,都是通过执取而成为同一性质的,所以说:“因为一切渴爱都以执取为相,具有同一相。”现在用譬喻来说明这个道理,接着说了“一切火……”等,这很容易理解。巴利
Yadi icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato anaññattaṃ, atha kasmā bhagavatā imissā gāthāya dvidhā vuttāti? Tattha parihāramāha ‘‘yaṃ panida’’ntiādinā. Tattha yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ. Abhilapitanti vuttaṃ yaṃ idaṃ abhilapanaṃ , idaṃ bāhirānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ ārammaṇavasena, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā yojetabbaṃ. Dvīhi dhammehīti dvīhi pakatīhi. Kā pana tā pakatiyoti? Appattassa visayassa esanavasena icchā, pattassa appattassa vā pātukāmatāvasena taṇhā, ayametāsaṃ viseso. Yadipi evaṃ, tathāpi sabbā taṇhā rūpādivisayaṃ gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahaṇena ekasabhāvā evāti dassento ‘‘sabbā hi taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇā’’ti āha. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pakāsento ‘‘sabbo aggī’’tiādimāha, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
不过,这里并不是说渴爱仅仅按照它在所缘上生起的差别,就只有这两种名称;为了说明它其实还可以通过许多不同的方式来表述,所以才接着说了“叫作欲求(icchā)”等这些话。巴利
Ayaṃ pana na kevalaṃ taṇhā ārammaṇe pavattivisesena dvīhi eva nāmehi vuttā, atha kho anekehipi pariyāyehīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘icchāitipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,以渴求来贪求各种所缘,所以叫欲求。以渴爱、贪求的含义,所以叫渴爱。因为它产生逼迫,又难以拔除,就像浸了毒的箭一样,所以叫箭。以烧灼、灼热的含义,所以叫烟熏。以牵引、拉拽的含义,就像湍急的水流一样,所以叫急流;或者以湿润的含义,叫湿润,正如所说:有情的湿润、润滑、喜悦就会出现。这里的意思就是湿润和润滑。散布开来,所以叫扩散;铺展开来,所以叫扩散;不平等,所以叫扩散;极为广大,所以叫扩散;像毒一样起作用,所以叫扩散;欺骗诳惑,所以叫扩散;带来伤害,所以叫扩散;以邪恶为根,所以叫扩散;以邪恶为果,所以叫扩散;以邪恶为受用,所以叫扩散。或者说,那渴爱在诸色、诸声、诸香、诸味、诸触、诸法上,在家族中,在群体中,散布开来、铺展开来,所以叫扩散。巴利
Tattha icchanti tāya ārammaṇānīti icchā. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā. Pīḷājananato duruddhāraṇato ca visapītaṃ sallaṃ viyāti sallaṃ. Santāpanaṭṭhena dhūpāyanā. Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā, allaṭṭhena vā saritā, ‘‘saritāni sinehitāni ca, somanassāni bhavanti jantuno’’ti (dha. pa. 341) hi vuttaṃ. Allāni ceva siniddhāni cāti ayamettha attho. Visattikāti visatāti visattikā. Visaṭāti visattikā. Visamāti visattikā. Visālāti visattikā. Visakkatīti visattikā. Visaṃvādikāti visattikā . Visaṃharatīti visattikā. Visamūlāti visattikā. Visaphalāti visattikā. Visaparibhogāti visattikā. Visatā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme kule gaṇe visatā vitthatāti visattikā.
以润泽的作用,称为润泽。因为在各种投生处产生疲劳,称为疲劳。以缠绕为义,就像藤蔓一样,所以称为藤蔓。正如《法句经》第340颂所说:“藤蔓生起后就停住在那里。”以执取“我所”的思惟作用,称为我慢。即使远在天边也能拉过来绑住,以这种束缚为义,称为束缚。以希求为义,称为希望。以想要品尝所缘之味为作用,称为渴。以欢喜、热衷为义,称为欢喜。如此,这些渴爱虽然随着所缘活动方式的差别而被赋予种种不同的名称,但一切渴爱都以执取为同一特征。这段话就是对上述意义的总结。巴利
Sinehanavasena sineho. Nānāgatīsu kilamathuppādanena kilamatho. Paliveṭhanaṭṭhena latā viyāti latā. ‘‘Latā uppajja tiṭṭhatī’’ti (dha. pa. 340) hi vuttaṃ. Mamanti maññanavasena maññanā. Dūragatampi ākaḍḍhitvā bandhanaṭṭhena bandho. Āsīsanaṭṭhena āsā. Ārammaṇarasaṃ pātukāmatāvasena pipāsā. Abhinandanaṭṭhena abhinandanā. Itīti evaṃ ārammaṇe pavattivisesena anekehi nāmehi gayhamānāpi sabbā taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇāti yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigameti.
接着,为了说明渴爱确实被许多不同的名称所指,论师用“如同……”等话,通过层层展开的方式加以显示。其中,“同义词”是指在“同义词摄”这一分别门中。至于“希望与冀求……”这首偈颂(《导论》37;《藏论》11)的含义,我们将在那里再作解释。在“未离染者”等语中:以染着的意义称为“贪”(rāgo),以欲求的意义称为“欲”(chando),以爱乐的意义称为“爱”(pemaṃ),以燃烧的意义称为“燃烧”(paridāho)——这些说的就是渴爱本身。正因如此才说:“这些是渴爱的同义词。”这样就能成立。意思是:因为“欲求”和“渴爱”在意义上并无差别,所以前面所说的“三问”能够成立,也就是说,这个说法在道理上通得过、能吻合。巴利
Puna taṇhāya anekehi nāmehi gahitabhāvameva ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādinā upacayena dasseti. Tattha vevacaneti vevacanahāravibhaṅge. ‘‘Āsā ca pihā’’ti gāthāya (netti. 37; peṭako. 11) atthaṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. Avigatarāgassātiādīsu rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, chandanaṭṭhena chando, piyāyanaṭṭhena pemaṃ, paridahanaṭṭhena paridāhoti taṇhāva vuttā. Tenevāha – ‘‘taṇhāyetaṃ vevacana’’nti. Evaṃ yujjatīti evaṃ icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato anaññattā ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yujjati yuttiyā saṅgacchatīti attho.
21 21. 像这样,在“世间被什么所遍烧?”(《相应部》1.66)这首偈颂中,先说明了“三问”之所以成立为三问的道理;现在为了从其他角度展示对合理性的探求,接着说了“一切苦的现行……”等话。其中,“苦的现行”指苦的生起。“以欲爱、行为根本”意思是:以欲爱为缘、以行为因,这是可以成立的。“厌离的现行”指厌离的生起,也就是由于诸欲变易、变异而生起的不喜乐,以及由智慧产生的智厌离。“以欲爱资具为根本”指以那些作为欲爱资具的所缘之欲为因。其中,被称为不喜乐的那种厌离,确实以欲爱资具为根本,但智厌离则不是。因此,若说“一切厌离的现行都以欲爱资具为根本”,就不成立。通过这一合理性来展示方法。这里说的是:正如对“三问”已说明其合理性,对“苦的现行”和“厌离的现行”也已说明其合理性一样,同样依照这一合理性、以这种方式、这个理趣,在巴利文各个相应之处,应当以彼此不同、各自适宜的其他种种因由,去寻求其合理性。巴利
21. Evaṃ ‘‘kenassubbhāhato loko’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.66) gāthāya ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti pañhattayabhāve yuttiṃ dassetvā idāni aññehi pakārehi yuttigavesanaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbo dukkhūpacāro’’tiādimāha. Tattha dukkhūpacāroti dukkhappavatti. Kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlakoti kāmataṇhāpaccayasaṅkhārahetukoti yujjatīti adhippāyo. Nibbidūpacāroti nibbidāpavatti kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjamānā anabhirati ñāṇanibbidā ca. Kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti kāmataṇhāya parikkhārabhūtavatthukāmahetuko. Tattha anabhiratisaṅkhātā nibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā, na ñāṇanibbidāti sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na pana yujjatīti vuttaṃ. Imāya yuttiyāti nayaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā pañhattayabhāve yutti vuttā, yathā ca dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāresu, evaṃ imāya yuttiyā iminā yogena nayena aññamaññehi kāraṇehi taṃtaṃpāḷippadese anurūpehi aññathā aññehi hetūhi yutti gavesitabbāti.
现在,为了把这种理路的示范详细展开来说明,先简略地指出它,于是开始了“就像世尊……”这一段。这里的简要含义是:对贪行者、嗔行者、痴行者,依次说不净、慈心等作为所缘的修行方法,因为能对治贪等烦恼,所以是适合的——这就是教法上的合理性。在这样确定之后,如果对贪行者开示慈心解脱,这个开示就不成立,因为它不适合。对“乐行道”等也是如此。有人会问:所谓“乐行道”等,难道不是就实际修行说的,而不是就开示说的吗?这话没错。但这里说的贪行者,是指烦恼非常猛利的贪行者。这种人要靠苦行道修行才能成就。对于靠苦行道修行才能成就的人,比较重的不净开示才适合他;既然比较重的不净开示才适合他,就不能像对烦恼轻的人那样,给他开示比较轻的。为了说明这个意思,所以说:“如果去说乐行道……那么,这样的开示是不成立的。”按照这个道理,后面那些文句也应当根据具体情况来理解。在这里,通过排除不合理的部分来达成合理性,也就是说,在考察合理性时,连不合理的部分也要去探究,所以说:“如果……那么,这样的开示是不成立的。”后面也是如此。像“无论什么”等等,就是为了把合理性摄的运用展示出来,而做的理路示范。巴利
Idāni taṃ nayadassanaṃ saṃkhittanti vitthārato vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hi bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – rāgadosamohacaritānaṃ yathākkamaṃ asubhamettāpaccayākārakathā rāgādivinayanato sappāyāti ayaṃ sāsanayutti. Evamavaṭṭhite yadi rāgacaritassa mettācetovimuttiṃ deseyya, sā desanā na yujjati asappāyabhāvato. Tathā sukhāpaṭipadādayoti. Nanu ca sukhāpaṭipadādayo paṭipattiyā sambhavanti, na desanāyāti? Saccametaṃ, idha pana rāgacaritoti tibbakileso rāgacaritoti adhippeto. Tassa dukkhāya paṭipadāya bhāvanā samijjhati. Yassa ca dukkhāya paṭipadāya bhāvanā samijjhati, tassa garutarā asubhadesanā sappāyā, yassa garutarā asubhadesanā sappāyā, na tassa mandakilesassa viya lahukatarāti imamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘sukhaṃ vā paṭipadaṃ…pe… deseyya na yujjati desanā’’ti. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi yathāsambhavaṃ attho vattabbo. Ettha ca ayuttaparihārena yuttisamadhigamoti yuttivicāraṇāya ayuttipi gavesitabbāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yadi hi…pe… na yujjati desanā’’ti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ yaṃ kiñcītiādi yuttihārayojanāya nayadassanameva.
在这里,“这样”是指用这种方法。“凡任何”是指除此之外的其他任何内容。“随顺断除”是指与断除相契合、有能力断除,这就是它的意思。对经典中所有词义,逐句进行审察,这叫审查摄;在对审查摄作解释时,对已经确定下来的义理再去寻找其合理性,是容易做到的,所以说“这一切都要先用审查摄审察清楚,再用合理性摄加以联结”。所谓“智慧的境地有多广”,意思是:正在作注释的这位阿阇梨,他的智慧和辩才所达到的范围有多大,他运用合理性摄所作的审察就有多广,这就是这句话的含义。这是什么原因呢?因为正法理趣无量、在一切方面都圆满完备、经得起反复推敲,而且能以种种不同的方式加以宣说。巴利
Tattha evanti iminā nayena. Yaṃ kiñcīti aññampi yaṃ kiñci. Anulomappahānanti pahānassa anurūpaṃ, pahānasamatthanti attho. Sutte anavasesānaṃ padatthānaṃ anupadavicāraṇā vicayo hāro, vicayahārasaṃvaṇṇanāya niddhāritesu atthesu yuttigavesanaṃ sukaranti āha – ‘‘sabbaṃ taṃ vicayena hārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabba’’nti. Yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmīti saṃvaṇṇentassa ācariyassa yaṃ ñāṇaṃ yaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, tassa yattako visayo, tattako yuttihāravicāroti attho. Taṃ kissa hetu? Anantanayo samantabhaddako vimaddakkhamo vicittadesano ca saddhammoti.
就这样,仅仅通过显示理趣的方式,已经说明了理趣的运用。接着,为了用梵住、果等至、九次第等至和自在力来分别说明,便开始了“慈住者之存在……”等经文。其中,“慈住者”指获得慈心住的人。“存在者”指处于那种状态者,也就是如是状态的人,意思是如此。“嗔恨”指内心的愤怒。“将遍取心而住”指将会压制、掌控心。然而,因为善法与不善法不会无前无后地生起,为了说明这是从等至出定之后的阶段,所以说了“将住”。所谓“说法不成立”,意思是:因为慈是嗔恨的对治,所以那种说法不合理。“嗔恨趋向断除、消失,说法才成立”,意思是:依据前面所说的理由,这种说法才合理。其余各段也应以同样的方法来理解其含义。我们只对不明显之处加以解说。巴利
Evaṃ nayadassanavaseneva yuttihārayojanā dassitāti taṃ brahmavihāraphalasamāpattinavānupubbasamāpattivasibhāvehi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘mettāvihārissa sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mettāvihārissāti mettāvihāralābhino. Satoti samānassa, tathābhūtassāti attho. Byāpādoti padoso. Cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti cittaṃ abhibhavissati. Yasmā pana kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ pavatti nāma natthi, tasmā samāpattito vuṭṭhānassa aparabhāgeti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ṭhassatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na yujjati desanāti byāpādapaṭipakkhattā mettāya tādisī kathā na yuttāti attho. Byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti yujjati desanāti yathāvuttakāraṇato eva ayaṃ kathā yuttāti. Sesavāresupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Anuttānaṃ eva vaṇṇayissāma.
无相住者,是指以无常随观为门、证得果等至而安住的人。随相而行者,是指随逐诸行相的人。由彼彼,是指在常等颠倒中,凡已被断除的,就由那已被断除的相。“我是”已消失,是指在五取蕴中,由见与慢而产生的“我是”这种执取已经消失。为了阐明这个含义,所以说“我不将‘我是这个’视为”。“疑与犹豫之箭”,因为悔恨也有“如何、如何”的心理活动,所以用“疑”这个词来加以区分。所谓“说法不成立”,意思是由于疑已被断除,这种说法不合理。巴利
Animittavihārissāti aniccānupassanāmukhena paṭiladdhaphalasamāpattivihārassa. Nimittānusārīti saṅkhāranimittānusārī. Tena tenevāti niccādīsu yaṃ yaṃ pahīnaṃ, tena teneva nimittena. Asmīti vigatanti pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu diṭṭhimānavasena yaṃ asmīti maññitaṃ, taṃ vigataṃ. Tamevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘ayamahamasmīti na samanupassāmī’’ti. Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti vinayakukkuccassāpi kathaṃ kathanti pavattisabbhāvato vicikicchāpadena visesitaṃ. Na yujjati desanāti vicikicchāya pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato na yuttāyaṃ kathā.
已经进入初禅的人,就是指具备初禅的人。说欲贪和嗔恨能促成进步,这是讲不通的。因为五盖还没有断除的时候,连初禅的近行定都达不到,更不用说初禅本身了。所以,说欲贪和嗔恨能促成第二禅的进步,这种说法不合理。但是,对于已经获得的初禅,欲贪和嗔恨如果全面现起,就会导致退失。这样讲才讲得通,才是合理的说法。这个道理应该套用到每一处。所谓无寻相伴的想和作意,是指连同近行定在内的第二禅的法。这里相伴这个词,意思是作为所缘。导致退失,是指从初禅退下来。导致进步,是指朝向第二禅。按照这个方法,各处所说的退失和进步,都应该这样理解。有寻与伺相伴的,是指初禅的法,或者就是欲界的法。有舍与乐相伴的,是指连同近行定在内的第二禅的法,因为这里说的舍,指的是中舍。有喜与乐相伴的,是指连同近行定在内的第三禅的法。有舍、念与清净相伴的,是指第四禅的法。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassāti paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgino. Kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya saṃvattantīti na yujjatīti yasmā nīvaraṇesu appahīnesu paṭhamajjhānassa upacārampi na sampajjati, pageva jhānaṃ, tasmā kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya dutiyajjhānāya saṃvattantīti na yuttāyaṃ kathā. Yathāladdhassa pana paṭhamajjhānassa kāmarāgabyāpādā pariyuṭṭhānappattā hānāya saṃvattantīti yujjati desanā yuttā kathāti, evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Avitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā nāma saha upacārena dutiyajjhānadhammā, ārammaṇakaraṇattho hettha sahagata-saddo. Hānāyāti paṭhamajjhānato parihānāya. Visesāyāti dutiyajjhānāya. Iminā nayena tattha tattha hānanti, visesoti ca vuttadhammā veditabbā. Vitakkavicārasahagatāti paṭhamajjhānadhammā, kāmāvacaradhammā eva vā. Upekkhāsukhasahagatāti upacārena saddhiṃ dutiyajjhānadhammā, tatramajjhattupekkhā hi idha upekkhāti adhippetā. Pītisukhasahagatāti saha upacārena tatiyajjhānadhammā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhisahagatāti catutthajjhānadhammā.
“想现行”,是指那些正在执行敏锐想作用的心生起时,也有人称之为“无所有处法”。“与想受灭相伴的”,是指为了“我要进入并安住于想受灭定”而以其准备工作为基础所生起的法。然而,因为这些法只有在安住于非想非非想处等至时,才有可能进入并安住于想受灭定,而不是从那个等至退失的人能做到的,所以说它们“会导致非想非非想处等至的退失”是不合理的说法;但说它们“会导致进步”则是合理的说法。因此说“导致退失……乃至……开示”。“熟习适业”,是指以堪能的状态加以熟习,意思是对上述各种等至以自在的状态加以熟习。因此说“能够引导”。其余的一切都很清楚。巴利
Saññūpacārāti paṭusaññākiccaṃ karontā eva ye keci cittuppādā, ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatanadhammā’’tipi vadanti. Saññāvedayitanirodhasahagatāti ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharissāmī’’ti tassa parikammavasena pavattadhammā. Te pana yasmā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyaṃ ṭhiteneva sakkā saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ, na tato parihīnena, tasmā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā hānāya saṃvattantīti na yuttā kathā. Visesāya saṃvattantīti pana yuttā kathāti āha – ‘‘hānāya…pe… desanā’’ti. Kallatāparicitanti samatthabhāvena paricitaṃ, yathāvuttasamāpattīsu vasibhāvena paricitanti attho. Tenevāha – ‘‘abhinīhāraṃ khamatī’’ti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ uttānameva.
不过在这里,通过“不厌恶想”这个入口,欲贪会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“厌恶想”的相似样子,嗔恨会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“定”这个入口,昏沉睡眠会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“发起精进”这个入口,掉举会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“想学”这个入口,后悔会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“审察两边”这个入口,疑会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“对可意和不可意都平等看待”这个入口,愚痴会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“了解自己”这个入口,在不愿自己被轻视的情况下,慢会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“探究”这个入口,把像因的东西执取为非因,邪见会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“离染”的相似样子,对众生没有悲悯会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“受用允许之物”的相似样子,沉溺欲乐会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“活命清净”的相似样子,不肯分享的习性会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“分享习性”的相似样子,邪命会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“不与人交往而住”的相似样子,不摄受他人的习性会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“摄受他人习性”的相似样子,不顺应的交往会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“说真实语”的相似样子,两舌会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“不说两舌”的相似样子,不希望他人得利益会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“说可爱语”的相似样子,谄媚会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“说话有节制”的相似样子,不友善交谈的习性会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“友善交谈习性”的相似样子,谄曲和欺诈会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“说呵责语”的相似样子,粗恶语会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“呵责恶行”的相似样子,专看他人过失会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“亲近家族”的相似样子,对家族的悭吝会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“想久住住处”这个入口,对住处的悭吝会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“排除法的障碍”这个入口,对法的悭吝会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“乐于说法”这个入口,乐于闲谈会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“不用粗恶语来摄受徒众”这个入口,乐于群聚会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“想修福”的相似样子,乐于做事会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“悚惧”的相似样子,内心焦灼会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“有信”的相似样子,不审察会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“审察”的相似样子,不信会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“以自己为主”的相似样子,对师长们的教诫不肯虚心接受会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“以法为主”的相似样子,对同梵行者不恭敬会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“以世间为主”的相似样子,轻视自己和法会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“修慈”这个入口,贪会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“修悲”的相似样子,忧会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“修喜而住”的相似样子,嬉笑会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。通过“修舍而住”的相似样子,对善法失去兴趣会来欺骗人,这是说得通的。像这样,对于像经教的东西、像证悟的东西等等,也应当按道理来了知它们同样有欺骗人的性质。应当这样随顺经教去寻求道理。巴利
Api cettha appaṭikkūlasaññāmukhena kāmacchando vañcetīti yujjati. Paṭikkūlasaññāpatirūpatāya byāpādo vañcetīti yujjati. Samādhimukhena thinamiddhaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Vīriyārambhamukhena uddhaccaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Sikkhākāmatāmukhena kukkuccaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Ubhayapakkhasantīraṇamukhena vicikicchā vañcetīti yujjati. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhasamupekkhanamukhena sammoho vañcetīti yujjati. Attaññutāmukhena attani aparibhavane māno vañcetīti yujjati. Vīmaṃsāmukhena hetupatirūpakapariggahena micchādiṭṭhi vañcetīti yujjati. Virattatāpatirūpakena sattesu adayāpannatā vañcetīti yujjati. Anuññātapaṭisevanapatirūpatāya kāmasukhallikānuyogo vañcetīti yujjati. Ājīvapārisuddhipatirūpatāya asaṃvibhāgasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṃvibhāgasīlatāpatirūpatāya micchājīvo vañcetīti yujjati. Asaṃsaggavihāritāpatirūpatāya asaṅgahasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṅgahasīlatāpatirūpatāya ananulomikasaṃsaggo vañcetīti yujjati. Saccavāditāpatirūpatāya pisuṇavācā vañcetīti yujjati. Apisuṇavāditāpatirūpatāya anatthakāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Piyavāditāpatirūpatāya cāṭukamyatā vañcetīti yujjati. Mitabhāṇitāpatirūpatāya asammodanasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Sammodanasīlatāpatirūpatāya māyā sāṭheyyañca vañcetīti yujjati. Niggayhavāditāpatirūpatāya pharusavācatā vañcetīti yujjati. Pāpagarahitāpatirūpatāya paravajjānupassitā vañcetīti yujjati. Kulānuddhayatāpatirūpatāya kulamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Āvāsaciraṭṭhitikāmatāmukhena āvāsamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammaparibandhapariharaṇamukhena dhammamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammadesanābhiratimukhena bhassārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Apharusavācatāgaṇānuggahakaraṇamukhena saṅgaṇikārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Puññakāmatāpatirūpatāya kammārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṃvegapatirūpena cittasantāpo vañcetīti yujjati. Saddhālutāpatirūpatāya aparikkhatā vañcetīti yujjati. Vīmaṃsanāpatirūpena assaddhiyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Attādhipateyyapatirūpena garūnaṃ anusāsaniyā appadakkhiṇaggāhitā vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammādhipateyyapatirūpena sabrahmacārīsu agāravaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Lokādhipateyyapatirūpena attani dhamme ca paribhavo vañcetīti yujjati. Mettāyanāmukhena rāgo vañcetīti yujjati. Karuṇāyanāpatirūpena soko vañcetīti yujjati. Muditāvihārapatirūpena pahāso vañcetīti yujjati. Upekkhāvihārapatirūpena kusalesu dhammesu nikkhittachandatā vañcetīti yujjati. Evaṃ āgamapatirūpakaadhigamapatirūpakādīnampi tathā tathā vañcanasabhāvo yuttito veditabbo. Evaṃ āgamānusārena yuttigavesanā kātabbāti.
第四,近依处摄的详细解释巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
22 22. 其中,“什么是近依处摄”等部分,是对近依处摄的分别解释。在这里,因为近依处摄的特征是阐明“这是这个的近依处,这是那个的近依处”,也就是辨识那些作为各种法之近依处的法,所以,以流转的根本——无明为起点,为了确定诸实有法的近依处即直接原因,而说明无明的自性:“无明,以不能如实通达一切法为特征。”这句话的意思是:由于它,一切法的非颠倒自性不能被通达,所以叫“不能如实通达一切法”。这就是它的特征,因此无明被这样描述。通过这句话,就说明了无明以遮蔽法的自性为特征。或者,正确地通达就是“通达”,与它相反的就是“不通达”。那么,这个“不通达”在哪里是“通达”的对立面呢?回答说:“一切……特征。”另外,因为当“不净中执为净”等颠倒存在时,那里的迷惑只会一层层地生起,不会减退,所以说“那些颠倒是它的近依处”。巴利
22.Tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārotiādi padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yasmā ‘‘idaṃ imassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, idaṃ imassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtadhammavibhāvanalakkhaṇo padaṭṭhāno hāro, tasmā pavattiyā mūlabhūtaṃ avijjaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabhāvadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ niddhārento avijjāya sabhāvaṃ niddisati ‘‘sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā avijjā’’ti. Tassattho – sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo na sampaṭivijjhīyati etenāti sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedho. So lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sā tathā vuttā. Etena dhammasabhāvappaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā avijjāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā sammā paṭivedho sampaṭivedho. Tassa paṭipakkho asampaṭivedho. Kattha pana so sampaṭivedhassa paṭipakkhoti āha – ‘‘sabba…pe… lakkhaṇā’’ti. Yasmā pana asubhe subhantiādivipallāse sati tattha sammoho uparūpari jāyatiyeva na hāyati, tasmā ‘‘tassā vipallāsā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
可爱形和可乐形,是指应当被贪爱的那一类事物和令人满意的那一类事物,它们是渴爱生起的近因。因为经中说过:“世间中凡是可爱形、可乐形,这渴爱在生起时,就在那里生起。”“不与取”是指不与取的思。这个思即使只生起一次,由于看不见它的过患,也会成为贪生起的原因,所以说它是贪的近因。嗔以杀生为近因,痴以邪行为近因——这里也应当依照同样的道理来理解。所谓“执取颜色、形状、细节的特征”,就是执取相与随相的特征。对于乐想,以触的现前为其特征,这说的正是以触为缘。因为经中说过:“被触之后而感知。”“味著”是指渴爱。有为法的特征是生、灭、变异。大多数情况下,对常的执取是依于识而说的,这是说常想以识为近因。因为那位比丘认为“正是这个识在流转轮回”,这就表明他对常的执取,其对象仅仅是识的境界。如果对五蕴的无常性和苦性已经善加观见,那么我想和乐想就没有生起的机会,所以说:“我想”的特征是不随观无常想和苦想。因为经中说过:“凡是无常的即是苦,凡是苦的即是无我。”巴利
Piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti piyāyitabbajātiyaṃ iṭṭhajātiyañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 203) hi vuttaṃ. Adinnādānanti adinnādānacetanā. Sā hi ekavāraṃ uppannāpi anādīnavadassitāya lobhassa uppattikāraṇaṃ hotīti tassa padaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Dosassa pāṇātipāto padaṭṭhānaṃ, mohassa micchāpaṭipadā padaṭṭhānanti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānabyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇāti nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇā. Sukhasaññāya phassassa upagamanalakkhaṇatā phassapaccayatāva vuttā. ‘‘Phuṭṭho sañjānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) hi vuttaṃ . Assādoti taṇhā. Saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni uppādavayaññathattāni. Yebhuyyena niccaggahaṇaṃ viññāṇādhīnanti niccasaññāya viññāṇapadaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Tathā hi so bhikkhu taṃyeva viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratīti viññāṇavisayameva attano niccaggāhaṃ pavedesi. Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ yadi aniccatā dukkhatā ca sudiṭṭhā, attasaññā sukhasaññā anavakāsāti āha – ‘‘aniccasaññādukkhasaññāasamanupassanalakkhaṇā attasaññā’’ti. ‘‘Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) hi vuttaṃ.
大多数情况下,对“我”的执著都发生在无色法上,所以说“它的近因是名身”。所谓“一切应知”,就是指四圣谛,因为在四圣谛之外没有其他应知之法。收摄心的散乱,就是镇伏掉举。“不净”:指不净随观,或者就是指作为似相的不净本身;因为能对治贪爱,所以说不净是止的近因。由于能削弱贪欲,离不与取被说成无贪的近因。同样,由于能削弱嗔恚,离杀生被说成无嗔的近因。于事不倒转,就是对境自性的通达;正确的行道,就是戒与定的具足,或者依厌患智而生起的不乐智那样转起。把一切受都看作苦,因为它们具有苦苦等性质,所以说“苦想以受为近因”。“法想”:就是对“唯有法”这样的想。巴利
Yebhuyyena attābhiniveso arūpadhammesūti āha – ‘‘tassā nāmakāyo padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sabbaṃ neyyanti cattāri saccāni catusaccavinimuttassa ñeyyassa abhāvato. Cittavikkhepapaṭisaṃharaṇaṃ uddhaccavikkhambhanaṃ. Asubhāti asubhānupassanā, paṭibhāganimittabhūtā asubhā eva vā, taṇhāpaṭipakkhattā samathassa asubhā padaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ. Abhijjhāya tanukaraṇato adinnādānāveramaṇī alobhassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tathā byāpādassa tanukaraṇato pāṇātipātāveramaṇī adosassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Vatthuavippaṭipatti visayasabhāvapaṭivedho, sammāpaṭipatti sīlasamādhisampadānaṃ nibbidāñāṇena anabhiratiñāṇameva vā tathā pavattaṃ. Sabbāpi vedanā dukkhadukkhatādibhāvato dukkhanti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhasaññāya vedanā padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Dhammasaññāti dhammamattanti saññā.
众生身体里还没有离开贪欲,这是就五种内处来说的,所以经文说:色法的五根是色贪的近因。这里所说的“身体”就是指色法。特别是在作为禅那所依的意处上也会有贪著,所以经文说:第六处是有贪的近因。希望不要生起这样的色法,不要生起这样的感受——像这样生起的对色法等的欢喜,就是期求再生之有的随观。所谓“智见”,是指业自作智见。因为对如理作意的人来说,宿命通能成为业自作智的因,而不是对不如理作意、心向外浮动的人。为了阐明这个道理,应当引用《大那罗陀迦叶本生》和《梵网经》中某些常见论者作为例证。以“笃信之相”等语,显示了对佛、法、僧净信的区别。然而那只是信本身的不同状态,应当如此理解。其中,“笃信”是以信解的方式深入对象并确定下来。“无浊”是指没有不信,因此心没有混浊。“专求”即是确信。“证净”是指与慧相伴、已经达到圣者之境的殊胜净信。“不漂泛”是指不忘失,或者像沉入一样深入对象。在此,对于信等法,依次说信、净信、正勤、念处、禅支为近依处,应当理解这是就不同状态而说近依处。或者,对于念与定来说,身等是念处。而寻等是禅支,这是以近依处的方式来说的。巴利
Sattānaṃ kāye avītarāgatā pañcannaṃ ajjhattikāyatanānaṃ vasena hotīti āha – ‘‘pañcindriyāni rūpīni rūparāgassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kāyo hi idha rūpanti adhippeto. Visesato jhānanissayabhūte manāyatane ca nikanti hotīti āha – ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanaṃ bhavarāgassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Edisaṃ mā rūpaṃ nibbattatu, mā edisī vedanāti evaṃ pavattā rūpādiabhinandanā nibbattabhavānupassitā. Ñāṇadassanassāti kammassakataññāṇadassanassa. Yonisomanasikāravato hi pubbenivāsānussati kammassakataññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, na ayoniso ummujjantassa. Imassa ca atthassa vibhāvanatthaṃ mahānāradakassapajātakaṃ (jā. 2.22.1153 ādayo), brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.38 ādayo) ekaccasassatavādo ca udāharitabbo. ‘‘Okappanalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā saddhāpasādānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti. So pana saddhāyayeva avatthāviseso daṭṭhabbo. Tattha okappanaṃ saddahanavasena ārammaṇassa ogāhaṇaṃ nicchayo. Anāvilatā assaddhiyāpagamena cittassa akālussiyatā. Abhipatthiyanā saddahanameva. Aveccapasādo paññāsahito āyatanagato abhippasādo. Apilāpanaṃ asammoso nimujjitvā viya ārammaṇassa ogāhaṇaṃ vā, ettha ca saddhādīnaṃ pasādasaddhāsammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānajhānaṅgāni yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānanti vadantena avatthāvisesavasena padaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satisamādhīnaṃ vā kāyādayo satipaṭṭhānāti. Vitakkādayo ca jhānānīti padaṭṭhānabhāvena vuttā.
对味道的作意,就是在会被结缚的法上不断观察味道。所谓“后有的再生长”,是指为了后有而生长,也就是有能力产生后有的异熟法性,这是它的意思。所谓“再生招感的特征”,是指以再生有的状态生起的自性。所谓“名身与色身和合的特征”,是指无色身与色身聚在一起的状态。所谓“根的差别”,是指眼等六根各自安立的状态。所谓“再生招感性”,是指能引生再生诸蕴的法。所谓“依”,就是自身。愚人想到自己亲爱的人死亡时,大多数情况下忧愁就会生起,所以说死亡是忧愁的近因。所谓“焦灼”,是内心的烧灼。所谓“投入”,就是专注地安放。为了说明“令自己的所依焦灼,那就是‘有’”,才说了“有这些”等话。其中,有的组成部分和被称为有的部分,就是“有分”。在这些当中,烦恼是有的组成部分,业与异熟的轮转是被称为有的部分。所谓“和合”,是指全部。蕴、处等前后不断地相续流转,就是轮回。由过去一生又一生所造出的烦恼等轮转,正是它的因,所以说“轮回的近因是有”。着眼于能使人到达的因性,所以说“灭的近因是道”。巴利
Assādamanasikāro saṃyojanīyesu dhammesu assādānupassitā. Punabbhavavirohaṇāti punabbhavāya virohaṇā, punabbhavanibbattanārahatā vipākadhammatāti attho. Opapaccayikanibbattilakkhaṇanti upapattibhavabhāvena nibbattanasabhāvaṃ. Nāmakāyarūpakāyasaṅghātalakkhaṇanti arūparūpakāyānaṃ samūhiyabhāvaṃ. Indriyavavatthānanti cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ vavatthitabhāvo. Opapaccayikanti upapattikkhandhanibbattakaṃ. Upadhīti attabhāvo. Attano piyassa maraṇaṃ cintentassa bālassa yebhuyyena soko uppajjatīti maraṇaṃ sokassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ. Ussukkaṃ cetaso santāpo. Odahananti avadahanaṃ. Attano nissayassa santapanameva bhavassāti vuttaṃ bhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhavassa aṅgāni bhavasaṅkhātāni ca aṅgāni bhavaṅgāni. Tesu kilesā bhavassa aṅgāni. Kammavipākavaṭṭaṃ bhavasaṅkhātāni aṅgāni. Samaggānīti sabbāni. Khandhāyatanādīnaṃ aparāparuppattisaṃsaraṇaṃ saṃsāro. Tassa purimapurimajātinipphannaṃ kilesādivaṭṭaṃ kāraṇanti āha – ‘‘bhavo saṃsārassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sampāpakahetubhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘maggo nirodhassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
对于要进入业处的人来说,多闻就是他的入口,所以叫“渡口”;正确地亲近、承事这个渡口,就是“知道渡口”。与法相关的喜悦叫“饮”;通过听闻适合自己的法而生起那种喜悦,进而让业处增长,就是“知道饮”。在修习时,能知道哪怕只是一点点沉没和掉举,就是“知道量”。能知道自己具备了五种精进支,就是“知道自己”;其中,前面的每一个都是后面那个的近因,这一点很容易理解。只有曾经做过福德的人才能出生在合适的地方,别人不行,所以说“过去做过福德是出生在合适地方的近因”。与决意一起生起的如实知见,是初嫩的观智。厌离是强有力的观智。离贪是道。解脱是果。如此,就像通过“那些颠倒的近因”等说法开示了无明等的近因一样,按这个道理,凡是任何一种强有力的亲依止缘,或者任何其余的缘,都应理解为近因,也就是原因。也有人读作“如此,任何亲依止,从理与从缘”。其中,“亲依止”是原因;“从理”是从合理性来说;“从缘”是仅就它是缘这一点来说——应当这样理解其含义。至于这里没有从义理上详细分析的内容,本身很容易明白。巴利
Kammaṭṭhānogāhakassa otaraṇaṭṭhānatāya bahussuto titthaṃ nāma, tassa sammāpayirupāsanā titthaññutā. Dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ pītaṃ nāma, sappāyadhammassavanena taṃ uppādetvā kammaṭṭhānassa brūhanā pītaññutā, bhāvanāya thokampi layāpattiyā uddhaṃpattiyā ca jānanā pattaññutā. Attano pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatassa jānanā attaññutā, tesu purimānaṃ purimānaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa padaṭṭhānabhāvo suviññeyyo eva. Katapuññasseva patirūpadesavāso sambhavati , na itarassāti ‘‘pubbekatapuññatā patirūpadesavāsassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ saha adhiṭṭhānena taruṇavipassanā. Nibbidāti balavavipassanā. Virāgoti maggo. Vimuttīti phalaṃ. Evanti yadidaṃ ‘‘tassā vipallāsā padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ, iminā nayena athāpi yo koci upanissayo balavapaccayoti yo koci avasesapaccayo, sabbo so padaṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ yā kāci upanisā yogato ca paccayato cā’’tipi paṭhanti. Tattha upanisāti kāraṇaṃ, yogatoti yuttito, paccayatoti paccayabhāvamattatoti attho veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
第五章 相论的详细解释巴利
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
23 23. 其中,“什么是相论”等部分,就是相论的分别解释。这里问“它标记什么”,是在询问相论的作用范围。先用“诸法”等话简要说明相论,然后为了用例子来详细分析,就开始讲“眼”等内容。在这里应当知道,通过“以杀害之义为同一相”这句话,也说明了以不稳定等性质为同一相。巴利
23.Tatthakatamo lakkhaṇo hārotiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kiṃ lakkhayatīti lakkhaṇahārassa visayaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā’’tiādinā lakkhaṇahāraṃ saṅkhepato dassetvā taṃ udāharaṇehi vibhajituṃ ‘‘cakkhu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘vadhakaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇānī’’ti iminā anavaṭṭhitabhāvādināpi ekalakkhaṇatā vuttā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
像这样,先按“处”的角度说明它们具有同一相,现在为了按“蕴”等的角度来说明,就引了“罗陀,对过去的诸色不要有牵挂”等经文。在《双论教诫经》(《相应部》3.85)里,是以“杀者”的含义来说同一相的,所以那部经中出现了“不如实了知色是杀者、色是杀者”等文句,因此这里这样说。“Itīti”的意思是:如此,在这首偈颂中所说的身至念,由于念处具有同一相,也就等于说了受随观念住、心随观念住和法随观念住,这是其意趣所在。至于“已见”等的含义,我们将在后面解释。巴利
Evaṃ āyatanavasena ekalakkhaṇataṃ dassetvā idāni khandhādivasena dassetuṃ ‘‘atīte, rādha, rūpe anapekkho hotī’’tiādi suttaṃ ābhataṃ. Yamakovādasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.85) vadhakaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇā vuttāti tasmiṃ sutte ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ vadhakaṃ rūpanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādinā āgatattā vuttaṃ. Itīti evaṃ, imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ kāyagatāya satiyā vuttāya sati vedanāgatā sati cittagatā sati dhammagatā ca sati vuttā bhavati satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo. Diṭṭhantiādīnaṃ atthaṃ parato vaṇṇayissāma.
在“你应于身随观身而住”这句话里,“身”指的是色身。这里说的色身,是因为四肢、身体各部分以及头发等东西聚在一起,所以叫“身”;同时,也因为它是可厌恶之物的来源处,所以叫“身”。来源处就是生起的地方。这个词的意思可以这样解释:它们从那里来,所以叫“来处”。什么从那里来?头发等可厌恶的东西。所以,极可厌恶之物的来处,就叫“身”,它也是来处。巴利
Kāyekāyānupassī viharāhīti ettha kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca samūhaṭṭhena kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo, āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo, iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“身随观”是指有随观身的习惯,或者正在随观身。说了“身”之后,又说一次“身随观”,这第二次提到“身”,是为了显示不混杂的界定,以及破除密集等。因此,他不是在身中随观受、随观心或随观法,而恰恰只是随观身。这样,在被称为“身”的所依上,只显示身随观这个行相,就显示了不混杂的界定。同样,他不是在身中随观脱离各部分的一个法,也不是脱离头发、身毛等来随观女人、男人。巴利
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. ‘‘Kāye’’ti ca vatvā puna ‘‘kāyānupassī’’ti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassī evāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī.
在这里,所谓身体,是指由发、毛等组成,被称为四大种及所造色之集合的东西。即使在这个身体上,他也不是在观察某个脱离四大种及所造色的单独的法,而是像观察马车的各个部件那样,观察各个部分的总聚;像观察城市的各个组成部分那样,观察发、毛等的集合;像剥开芭蕉树干一层层叶鞘的人,像解开空拳的人那样,观察的正是四大种及所造色的集合。这样一来,就以种种方式,仅仅通过集合,在展示被称为“身”的这个对象时,揭示了破除密集。因为在这里,除了上述那样的集合之外,看不到有所谓的身,也看不到有其他任何法,然而众生恰恰对上述这些法的集合,以种种方式产生错误的执著。因此古德说:巴利
Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthapi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī , atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibbhujjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassī evāti nānappakārato samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatte eva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
所见者非被见,被见者非所见。
愚痴的人因为看不见真相而被绑住,已经被绑住就解脱不了。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.36; mahāni. aṭṭha. 3);
“密集分解等”是为了显示什么,通过“等”这个字可以明白这个意思。因为在这个身体当中,他只是随观身,而不是随观其他法。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti ādisaddena ayamattho veditabbo. Ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī.
这里要表达的意思是:就像在没有水的阳焰里,也会有人把它看成是水;但在这里不是这样——对这个实际上是无常、苦、无我、不净的身体,他并不是把它看成常、乐、我、净,而是作为身随观者,随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些相所组成的整体。或者另一种理解:无论是《大念处经》里从入出息开始一直说到粉末骨、以骨为最终所说的身,还是《无碍解道》里所说的身——“有人在这里把地身随观为无常,把水身、火身、风身、发身……乃至骨髓身”,对于这一切身,都只是在这身之中随观,所以叫于身随观身。这里也应该这样理解。巴利
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūte eva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī , atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhaanattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīti attho. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.374 ādayo) assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ tejokāyaṃ vāyokāyaṃ kesakāyaṃ…pe… aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.34 ādayo) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者也可以这样理解:由于在身体中,没有任何东西可以被执取为“我”或“我所”,所以不作那种随观;而是随观毛发等种种法的集合。因此,对于那由毛发等种种法所构成的身体,应当理解为“于身随观身”的意思。再者,依照《无碍解道》中依次说到的“对此身随观为无常,不随观为常”等语句所传下的整套方法,由于随观那由无常相等种种行相之集合所构成的身,所以称为“于身随观身”。这就是这里的意思。巴利
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato, tassa pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhāte kāyānupassīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Api ca ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.34 ādayo) āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādikassa ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti attho.
“安住”是指他应当安住。“热诚者”:在三有中烧尽烦恼,所以叫热诚,他具有这种热诚,就是热诚者。“正知者”:具备被称为正知的智慧。“具念者”:具备能执取身体的念。不过,这里是先用念执取所缘,再用慧去随观;因为离开了念,就没有随观。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,我说念在一切处。”(相应部注 5.234)而且,没有热诚的人,内心会退缩,成为障碍,禅修业处就无法成就。因此,为了说明靠哪些法的力量才能成就它,才说了“热诚者”等话。巴利
Viharāhīti vattāhi. Ātāpīti tīsu bhavesu kilese ātāpetīti ātāpo, so assa atthīti ātāpī. Sampajānoti sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitā anupassanā atthi, tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Anātāpino ca anto saṅkoco antarāyakaro hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati. Tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,“应当调伏”是指用暂时压伏的方式或用镇伏的方式调伏之后。“世间”就是指这个身体本身。因为在这里,身体以坏灭、毁坏之义被称为世间。这里用“贪欲”一词代表欲贪,用“忧”一词代表瞋害,这样通过指出诸盖中这两种最强的法被断除,就说明了诸盖的断除,也就是显示了身随观念处的“断除支”。而“热诚”等语则显示了“相应支”。为了说明这个道理,才说了“热诚”等语。在这里,贪和忧的止息是直接的对治,因此,当说“调伏了世间中的贪忧”时,就是在显示定根。所以注释书说:“调伏世间中的贪忧——这就是定根。”(相应部注 3.5.367)由于四根具有同一特征:正如依靠精进根、慧根、定根使身随观念处成就,同样,依靠它们也使受随观、心随观、法随观念处成就。因此,在成就四念处方面,这些根没有自性上的差别,具有相同的特征,所以说到它们时,其他念处也同样被说到了,这就是这里的意思。巴利
Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi tasmiṃyeva kāye. Kāyo hi idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti adhippeto. Abhijjhāggahaṇena cettha kāmacchando, domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo gahitoti nīvaraṇesu balavadhammadvayappahānadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttanti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassitaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādinā pana sampayogaṅgaṃ dassitanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhādomanassānaṃ samatho ujupaṭipakkhoti abhijjhādomanassavinayo vuccamāno samādhindriyaṃ dīpetīti āha – ‘‘vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti samādhindriya’’nti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.367). Ekalakkhaṇattā catunnaṃ indriyānanti yathā vīriyapaññāsamādhindriyehi kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ ijjhati, evaṃ vedanācittadhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānānipi tehi ijjhantīti catusatipaṭṭhānasādhane imesaṃ indriyānaṃ sabhāvabhedābhāvato samānalakkhaṇattā itarāni satipaṭṭhānānipi vuttāni eva hontīti attho.
24 现在,为了说明当四念处被掌握时,一切菩提分法也就都被掌握了,所以说了“于四念处中”等话。其中,觉支:意思是走向觉悟、走向圣道智,所以叫觉支。菩提分:意思是属于前面所说的觉悟的方面,所以叫菩提分。以导出相:这里,导出是指从所缘的相和生起中出离;从事于导出,就叫导出者,就像“守门人”这个词的构成方式一样。或者,能获得被称为导出的果,就是导出者。又或者,以导出为目的,就是导出者。也有读作“neyyānikā”的,那时意思是“它们有导出”。还有读作“niyyāniyā”的,它的意思应理解为“它们导出”。以导出相,就是以导出的自性。巴利
24. Idāni satipaṭṭhānesu gahitesu sabbesaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bodhaṅgamāti bodhaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ gacchantīti bodhaṅgamā. Yathāvuttassa bodhassa pakkhe bhavāti bodhipakkhiyā. Neyyānikalakkhaṇenāti ettha nimittato pavattato ca vuṭṭhānaṃ niyyānaṃ, niyyāne niyuttāti neyyānikā, yathā dovārikoti. Niyyānasaṅkhātaṃ vā phalaṃ arahantīti neyyānikā. Niyyānaṃ payojanaṃ etesanti vā neyyānikā. ‘‘Niyyānikā’’tipi pāṭho, tattha niyyānaṃ etesaṃ atthīti niyyānikāti attho. ‘‘Niyyāniyā’’tipi pāṭho, tassa niyyantīti niyyāniyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Niyyānikalakkhaṇenāti niyyānikasabhāvena.
不善法也是这样。就像善法被判定为具有同一个特征,不善法也应当从同一个特征的角度来判定。怎么判定呢?为了说明它们都以“应当被断除”为共同点,所以说“断除,归于消逝”。接下来,为了阐明这种断除,又说了“于四念处中”等话。在这里,当身随观等四念处被修习时,把不净执为净等四种颠倒就会被断除,段食等四种食也会被遍知,而阻碍这种遍知的欲贪等就会被彻底消除。为什么呢?因为那些应当被断除的法都具有同一个特征。这个道理应当套用到一切地方。所以注释书说:“如此,不善法也因为同一个特征而断除,归于消逝。”巴利
Evaṃ akusalāpi dhammāti yathā kusalā dhammā ekalakkhaṇabhāvena niddhāritā, evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇaṭṭhena niddhāretabbā. Kathaṃ? Pahānekaṭṭhatāvasenāti dassento ‘‘pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti āha. Idāni taṃ pahānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyānupassanādīsu catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu asubhe subhantiādayo cattāro vipallāsā pahīyanti, kabaḷīkārāhārādayo cattāro āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ parijānanassa paribandhino kāmarāgādayo byantīkatā hontīti attho, kasmā? Tehi pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti. Evaṃ sabbattha attho yojetabbo. Tenevāha – ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti.
现在,为了用另一种方式举出“相引摄”的例子,所以说了“或凡于……”等这一段。其中,“凡于”(yattha)是指在那一教说中。“或”(vā)这个词表示选择。“而”(pana)是补足音节的虚词。“色根”(rūpindriya)是指以变坏为自性的八种根。“其中”(tattha)是指在那一教说中。“色界”(rūpadhātu)是指以变坏为自性的十种界。“色处”(rūpāyatana)是指以变坏为自性的十种处,意思就是十种有色处。因为它们在“变坏”这一相上具有同一相,所以这些法被放在一起宣说,这就是这里的意趣。在这里,乐根和喜根也因为同具“乐受”性而具有同一相,这就是意趣所在。巴利
Idāni aññenapi pariyāyena lakkhaṇahārassa udāharaṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yatthāti yassaṃ desanāyaṃ. Vā-saddo vikappattho. Panāti padapūraṇo. Rūpindriyanti ruppanasabhāvaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriyaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ desanāyaṃ. Rūpadhātūti ruppanasabhāvā dasa dhātuyo. Rūpāyatananti ruppanasabhāvaṃ dasāyatanaṃ, rūpīni dasāyatanānīti attho. Ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā imāni desitānīti adhippāyo. Desitaṃ tattha sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ sukhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo.
“苦集圣谛”这一说法,是就不善的悦受而言的,但也同样适用于有漏的善。而“整个缘起也被开示了”这句话,是承接前文的关联。之所以这样说,是因为在不苦不乐受中,无明随眠仍然潜伏着。经中确实这样说过:“无明随眠潜伏在不苦不乐受中。”又说:“因为在不苦不乐受中,无明潜伏着。”通过这里对不苦不乐受的把握,就显示出无明也被把握了。既然把握了无明,为了表明整个缘起也被开示了,所以接着说了“无明缘行”等。这里的“而”字表示区别,它点出缘起有顺观和逆观两种,这是接下来要说明的差别。其中,顺观的缘起,如前所示,应当从有贪、有嗔、有痴的杂染这一面来断除;而逆观的缘起,就是经中说的“由无明的无余离贪灭尽……”等,针对这种缘起,则说“应当以离贪、离嗔、离痴的圣法来断除”。巴利
Dukkhasamudayo ca ariyasaccanti idaṃ akusalassa somanassassa vasena vuttaṃ, sāsavakusalassāpi vasena yujjati eva. Sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti sambandho. Avijjānusayitattā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukhāya hi vedanāya avijjā anusetī’’ti. Etena adukkhamasukhāvedanāggahaṇena avijjā gahitāti dasseti. Sati ca avijjāggahaṇe sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So cāti ettha ca-saddo byatirekattho, tena so paṭiccasamuppādo anulomapaṭilomavasena duvidhoti imaṃ vakkhamānavisesaṃ joteti. Tesu anulomato paṭiccasamuppādo yathādassito sarāgasadosasamohasaṃkilesapakkhena hātabboti vutto, paṭilomato pana paṭiccasamuppādo yo ‘‘avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1) vutto, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘vītarāgavītadosavītamohaariyadhammehi hātabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了通过阐明“同一相”来显示“相引摄”的运用方法,所以说了“如此,凡那些法”等话。其中,从作用来说:地等、触等色法和非色法,因为支持、结合等作用而归为一类;或者,那些各自的缘法,对于各自缘所生的法,以“缘的作用”这一意义而归为一类。从相来说:因为粗、触等自性。从共性来说:因为变坏、弯曲等,无常等,蕴、处等。从死生来说:因为有为法的灭与生,或者因为同时灭、同时生,就是这个意思。另外,这里“而”字还包含了俱行、同因性、同果性、同地性、同境性、同所缘性等,应当这样理解。其余内容,意思很明白。巴利
Idāni ekalakkhaṇatāvibhāvanena lakkhaṇahārayojanāya nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kiccatoti pathavīādīnaṃ phassādīnañca rūpārūpadhammānaṃ sandhāraṇasaṅghaṭṭanādikiccato, tesaṃ tesaṃ vā paccayadhammānaṃ taṃtaṃpaccayuppannadhammassa paccayabhāvasaṅkhātakiccato. Lakkhaṇatoti kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvato. Sāmaññatoti ruppananamanādito aniccatādito khandhāyatanādito ca. Cutūpapātatoti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ bhaṅgato uppādato ca, samānanirodhato samānuppādato cāti attho. Ettha ca sahacaraṇaṃ samānahetutā samānaphalatā samānabhūmitā samānavisayatā samānārammaṇatāti evamādayopi ca-saddena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
四阵列引摄的分别解说巴利
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
25 25. 其中,什么是四阵列引摄?就是四阵列引摄的分别解说。在这里,通过言辞来探寻经文的辞、意欲、起因以及前后连接,这样先简略地展示了四阵列。用“通过言辞”这一句,表明这些摄句都是对经文言辞的推求,所以应当从言辞层面来辨明这些四阵列摄句的句义。辞,就是词源、训释的意思。辞本身就是辞。因此说“与辞句相应的”。它的意思是:这里所说的辞,就是指辞。那么,什么是辞呢?句聚:就是在句中聚集、相应;通过性、数、时、格、人称等特殊关联,对于每一种应当述说的意义,都以其本然的语言形式来表达,这就是自性辞的意思。正如所说“对诸法以名称而了知”。巴利
25.Tattha katamo catubyūho hāroti catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha byañjanena suttassa neruttañca adhippāyo ca nidānañca pubbāparasandhi ca gavesitabboti saṅkhepena tāva catubyūhaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Byañjanenā’’ti iminā hārānaṃ suttassa byañjanavicayabhāvato byañjanamukheneva ete catubyūhahārapadatthā niddhāretabbāti dasseti. Neruttanti niruttaṃ nibbacananti attho. Niruttameva neruttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘yā niruttipadasaṃhitā’’ti. Tassattho – yā nirutti, idaṃ neruttaṃ. Kā pana sā nirutti? Padasaṃhitāti padesu saṃhitā yuttā, liṅgavacanakālasādhanapurisādivisesayogena yo yo attho yathā yathā vattabbo, tathā tathā pavattasabhāvaniruttīti attho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti.
这里,“yaṃ”是一个表示原因的不变词,意思是“以它为因”。“诸法”指应当被了知的法。“以名称”:像“大地、触、蕴、界、三触”这样,以各种不同名称而智生起,这就叫“自性词句”。因为,取来“大地”等这样的声音之后,再通过约定俗成的方式去理解其中的意义,这正是依靠执取那些各自固定的名称施设才发生的。另一种说法:“词句聚”就是由词句组合而成。因为通过词句,才能理解词句的意义。而这种理解,只有在执取了作为意义生起之因的施设之后才会发生;这个施设又与被称为词源的词句结合在一起,从而使词句的意义被理解,所以叫“词句聚”。接着,用“当比丘……”等语句,来说明“对诸法以名称而了知”这句话的意义。巴利
Tattha yanti hetuatthe nipāto, yāya kāraṇabhūtāyāti attho. Dhammānanti ñeyyadhammānaṃ. Nāmasoti pathavī phasso khandhā dhātu tisso phussoti evamādināmavisesena ñāṇaṃ pavattati, ayaṃ sabhāvanirutti nāma. Pathavīti hi evamādikaṃ saddaṃ gahetvā tato paraṃ saṅketadvārena tadatthapaṭipatti taṃtaṃaniyatanāmapaññattiggahaṇavaseneva hotīti. Atha vā padasaṃhitāti padena saṃhitā . Padato hi padatthāvabodho. So panassa atthe pavattinimittabhūtāya paññattiyā gahitāya eva hotīti sā pana paññatti niruttisaṅkhātapadena saṃhitā padatthaṃ bodhetīti padasaṃhitāti vuttā. ‘‘Yadā hi bhikkhū’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivarati.
这里,“义”指音声所表达的意义。“知名称”是指,通过名称的施设而知道“这是这个名称”。“法”指自性之法。“如实地安立”:无论何种义与法,应当以何种方式称呼,就按照那种方式,以名称的言说如实地安立、开示,这就是这里的意思。到此为止,可以说这位比丘善巧于义,乃至善巧于多种称谓,应当这样连接起来理解。巴利
Tattha atthassāti saddābhidheyyassa atthassa. Nāmaṃ jānātīti nāmapaññattivasena ayaṃ nāmāti nāmaṃ jānāti. Dhammassāti sabhāvadhammassa. Tathātathā naṃ abhiniropetīti yo yo attho dhammo ca yathā yathā ca voharitabbo, tathā tathā naṃ nāmaṃ vohāraṃ abhiniropeti desetīti attho. Ettāvatā ca ayaṃ bhikkhu atthakusalo yāva anekādhivacanakusaloti vuccatīti sambandhitabbaṃ.
在这里,“义善巧”是指对圣典意义的善巧。“法善巧”是指对圣典本身的善巧。“词句善巧”是指对字和句的善巧。“词源善巧”是指对解释词的善巧。“前后善巧”是指对教说前后次第的善巧。“教说善巧”是指对说法开示的善巧。“过去称说善巧”是指对过去施设的善巧。未来、现在等其余各项,也依同样的方式理解。应当这样处理一切,也就是说,凡是众生世间所使用的种种言语名称,都应当根据经典,尽可能以解释词源的方式来安立和表述。同时,对一切方俗语词,也应当恰如其分地处理。因为经中说:“不应逾越共许的通称。”确实,正是通过世俗谛这个途径,才能证得胜义谛。巴利
Tattha atthakusaloti pāḷiatthe kusalo. Dhammakusaloti pāḷiyaṃ kusalo. Byañjanakusaloti akkharesu ca vākyesu ca kusalo. Niruttikusaloti nibbacane kusalo. Pubbāparakusaloti desanāya pubbāparakusalo. Desanākusaloti dhammassa desanāya kusalo. Atītādhivacanakusaloti atītapaññattikusalo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evaṃ sabbāni kātabbāni, janapadaniruttānīti yattakāni sattavohārapadāni, tāni sabbāni yathāsambhavaṃ sutte nibbacanavasena kātabbāni vattabbānīti attho. Sabbā ca janapadaniruttiyoti sabbā ca lokasamaññāyo yathārahaṃ kātabbā. ‘‘Samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi sammutisaccamukheneva paramatthasaccādhigamo hotīti.
在“意趣品”里,并没有任何一处是隐晦不明的。巴利
Adhippāyakaṇḍe anuttānaṃ nāma natthi.
27 在“起因品”中,“以此事”就是指以这种称为“儿子”“牛”等的叙述作为原因。这里,“事”就是原因,所以也叫做“起因”。应当依照这个方法,理解一切处对起因的确定。巴利
27. Nidānakaṇḍe iminā vatthunāti iminā puttagavādikittanasaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Kāraṇañhettha vatthu nidānanti ca vuttaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbattha nidānaniddhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
被烦恼欲弄瞎了眼,就是“欲盲”。被渴爱之网缠住,就是“被网覆盖”。被叫作渴爱的黑暗遮住,就是“被爱暗遮蔽”。被叫作五欲的束缚绑住,就是“被束缚所缚”。也有写成“放逸所缚”的版本,意思是因放逸而被绑。前后,是指在前或在后的说法之间,也就是不同教导之间。相应,就是连接上、契合,意思是完全一致。以这些词句为现行,就是指以上面所说的那些偈颂词句,作为显示渴爱现行的标志。那个渴爱本身,就是前一偈所说的那个渴爱,就是同一个渴爱。通过“无论何所爱”等说法,把两首偈颂的义理互相贯通,从而说明它们的前后关联。以方式,是指以其表现方式。因此,意思是:渴爱在它自己生起的那个生命相续中,不允许它脱离,反而用种种所缘来诱惑它,以种种烦恼彻底占据心识并盘踞其中。正因如此,从烦恼层面和现行层面来说,它才被称为渴爱的束缚。巴利
Kāmandhāti kilesakāmena andhā. Jālasañchannāti taṇhājālapaliguṇṭhitā. Taṇhāchadanachāditāti taṇhāsaṅkhātena andhakārena pihitā. Bandhanābaddhāti kāmaguṇasaṅkhātena bandhanena baddhā. ‘‘Pamattabandhanā’’tipi pāṭho, pamādenāti attho. Pubbāparenāti pubbena vā aparena vā desanantarenāti adhippāyo. Yujjatīti yogaṃ upeti, sametīti attho. Imehi padehipariyuṭṭhānehīti imehi yathāvuttehi gāthāpadehi taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānadīpakehi. Sāyeva taṇhāti yā purimagāthāya vuttā, sāyeva taṇhā. ‘‘Yañcāhā’’tiādinā dvinnampi gāthānaṃ atthasaṃsandanena pubbāparaṃ vibhāveti. Payogenāti samudācārena. Tasmāti yattha sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ santānaṃ nissarituṃ adentī nānārammaṇehi palobhayamānā kilesehi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Tasmā kilesavasena ca pariyuṭṭhānavasena ca taṇhābandhanaṃ vuttā.
戏论:因为它们让人在轮回里长久停留,所以叫戏论。住:众生依靠这些而安住,所以叫住。从束缚的意义来说,它就像系绳,所以叫系绳。因为它阻挡进入涅槃之城,就像门闩,所以叫门闩。以无余断除渴爱,就是无渴爱者。因为如实观照自利与利他、此世与他世,所以叫牟尼。这首偈颂的句义应当这样理解。至于戏论等的含义,在经典中已经分析过了。在这里,如果一个人的这些戏论等已经彻底灭尽,他就连一丝一毫的渴爱都不剩。因此说:“凡是完全超越这一切的人,就称为无渴爱者。”巴利
Papañcenti saṃsāre ciraṃ ṭhapentīti papañcā. Tiṭṭhanti etāhīti ṭhitī. Bandhanaṭṭhena sandānaṃ viyāti sandānaṃ. Nibbānanagarappavesassa paṭisedhanato palighaṃ viyāti palighaṃ. Anavasesataṇhāpahānena nittaṇho. Attahitaparahitānaṃ idhalokaparalokānañca munanato munīti evaṃ gāthāya padattho veditabbo. Papañcādiatthā pana pāḷiyaṃ vibhattā evāti. Tattha yassete papañcādayo abbhatthaṃ gatā, tassa taṇhāya lesopi na bhavati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yo etaṃ sabbaṃ samatikkanto, ayaṃ vuccati nittaṇho’’ti.
28 “现行”是指经典里说的“渴爱的现行”,也就是渴爱所展现出来的种种游走活动。“行”是指经典里说的“被它造作出来的诸行”,也就是以渴爱、恶见、我慢为根本原因而产生的种种造作。不过,在七个速行心的思当中,第一个速行的思,只要因缘具足,就会在这一生中产生果报;最后一个速行的思,会在紧接着的下一生中产生果报;而中间那些速行的思,则会在随便哪一世中产生果报。因此,为了按果报成熟的机会来分类说明,才说了“现法受”等。再者,由于与各种思相应的渴爱,也和思一样分为现法受等三种,所以才说“如此,渴爱会给出三种果报”。“前后相合”的意思是:前面关于诸行有现法受等的说法,和后面这里关于业有现法受等的说法,彼此契合贯通,就像恒河水与耶牟那河水汇流交融一样,意思是完全一致。巴利
28.Pariyuṭṭhānanti ‘‘taṇhāya pariyuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttāni taṇhāvicaritāni. Saṅkhārāti ‘‘tadabhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā’’ti vuttā taṇhādiṭṭhimānahetukā saṅkhārā. Te pana yasmā sattasu javanacetanāsu paṭhamacetanā sati paccayasamavāye imasmiṃyeva attabhāve phalaṃ deti. Pacchimacetanā anantare attabhāve. Ubhinnaṃ vemajjhacetanā yattha katthaci phalaṃ deti, tasmā vipaccanokāsavasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃtaṃcetanāsampayuttā taṇhāpi cetanā viya diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādivasena tidhā hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ taṇhā tividhaṃ phalaṃ detī’’ti. Pubbāparena yujjatīti yaṃ pubbaṃ purimaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyatādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā aparena kammassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyatādivacanena yujjati gaṅgodakaṃ viya yamunodakena saṃsandati sametīti attho.
诸行由见力:在五种心生起的状态中——四种与恶见相应,一种与疑相应——这些行是由初道之慧的力量所断除的。三十六种爱行由修力:这是就初道断除之后剩余的部分而说的,并不是就全部三十六种爱行而言。巴利
Saṅkhārā dassanabalenāti catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu vicikicchāsampayutte cāti pañcasu cittuppādesu saṅkhārā paṭhamamaggapaññābalena. Chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni bhāvanābalenāti paṭhamamaggena pahīnāvasesavasena vuttaṃ, na sabbesaṃ vasena.
“随转”是指渴爱等不断接连地生起运作。而“papañco”等句子,是把这里的内容和《罗陀经》中“papañceti”等说法互相会通。正因为这样,才说“这是同一个义理”。虽然从义理上说是同一个,但在教导方式上确实有差别,为了显示这一点,才说了“api ca”等话。“如是”,就是按刚才所说的这种方式。“以经”,就是以正在注释的这部经。“余经”,指别的经文。“会通”就是把它们结合起来,在义理上视为没有差别。“与前后连接”,就是把前文或后文跟经文在义理上关联起来。这样,已经说过的义理就变得更加清楚,通过展示其他经典中的相应说法,这部经的含义也就被指明并详细展开了。巴利
Anubandhoti taṇhādīnaṃ anuppabandhena pavatti. Yo cāpi papañcotiādinā ‘‘papañcetī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ rādhasuttañcasaṃsandati. Tenevāha – ‘‘idaṃ ekattha’’nti. Yadipi atthato ekaṃ, desanāya pana viseso vijjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘api cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti iminā vuttappakārena. Suttenāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānena suttena. Suttanti suttantaraṃ. Saṃsandayitvāti vimissitvā atthato abhinnaṃ katvā. Pubbāparena saddhiṃ yojayitvāti pubbena vā aparena vā suttena saddhiṃ atthato sambandhaṃ yojetvā. Vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti tena suttassa attho niddiṭṭho hoti vitthārito suttantaradassanena.
不只是经文之间的相互会通才算前后连接,还有其他种类的连接存在,为了说明这一点,才说了“so cāyaṃ”等话。其中,“义理连接”是指从动作、行为者等方面把义理关联起来。不过,这种连接只适用于简说等六种义理句,因为一切词句的含义都包含在这六种之中。巴利
Na kevalaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanameva pubbāparasandhi, atha kho aññopi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so cāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha atthasandhīti kiriyākārakādivasena atthassa sambandho. So pana yasmā saṅkāsanādīnaṃ channaṃ atthapadānaṃyeva hoti, sabbassāpi padatthassa tadavarodhato.
所谓“连接”并不是某种独立存在的意义。因此才说“意义连接有六词”等等。所谓“言辞连接”,就是一个词和另一个词之间的关联。然而,因为一切名词等词类,没有不被六种言辞词所涵盖的,所以说“言辞连接有六词”等等。巴利
Sambandho ca nāma na koci attho. Tasmā ‘‘atthasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Byañjanasandhīti padassa padantarena sambandho. Yasmā pana sabbampi nāmādipadaṃ chahi byañjanapadehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘byañjanasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“教法衔接”是指:把前面所说的那段教法,与后面的教法连接贯通起来。“不依于地”是说:不把被称为“境”的地当作依止,也就是不攀缘地的意思。“入禅者”是指以果等至的禅那而入定的人。因为他入定时所缘的是出离一切行的涅槃,而不是依靠地来入定,所以被称为“不依地而入禅”。其余几句也是同样的道理。这里,由于四大种是色法所依而运作的,所以一切欲有和色有都已被涵盖在内;无色有则以其自身的形式被直接包含。这样穷尽了一切世间之后,为了再用另一种方式说明它,才说出了“na ca imaṃ lokaṃ”等经文。因为一切世间,归纳起来就只有此世间和他世间这两部分。不过,“此世间”特指处于现法状态的有情相续;“他世间”是指归入另一生存界的有情相续;而脱离这两者、不被感官所系缚的物质相续,就是“yamidaṃ ubhayamantarena”等语所指的对象。巴利
Desanāsandhīti yathāvuttadesanantarena desanāya saṃsandanaṃ. Na ca pathaviṃ nissāyāti pathaviṃ visayasaṅkhātaṃ nissayaṃ katvā, pathaviṃ ālambitvāti attho. Jhāyīti phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyī. So hi sabbasaṅkhāranissaṭaṃ nibbānaṃ ālambitvā samāpajjanavasena jhāyati, na pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyatīti vutto. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca catūhi mahābhūtehi rūpappaṭibaddhavuttitāya sabbo kāmabhavo rūpabhavo ca gahitā. Arūpabhavo pana sarūpeneva gahitoti sabbaṃ lokaṃ pariyādiyitvā puna aññenapi pariyāyena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādimāha. Sabbo hi loko idhaloko paraloko cāti dveva koṭṭhāsā honti. Yasmā pana ‘‘idhaloko’’ti visesato diṭṭhadhammabhūto sattasantāno vuccati. ‘‘Paraloko’’ti bhavantarasaṅkhepagato sattasantāno tadubhayavinimutto anindriyabaddho rūpasantāno. Tasmā taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yamidaṃ ubhayamantarenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
有些人却抓住“两者之间”这个说法,主张有中阴身,这种看法是错误的。因为中阴身在阿毗达摩里已经被否定了。“所见”,是指色处。“所闻”,是指声处。“所触”,是指因为接触才能取到的香处、味处和触处。“所识”,是指其余归入法所缘的色。“所得”,是指寻求过或没寻求过而得到的。“所寻”,是指对已得或未得的东西加以寻求。“所寻思、所伺察”,是指以寻思和推度的方式所攀缘的。“以意随虑”,是指用心反复思虑。“这位……以无所依着的心,在包括天神的世间中不被了知地禅修”:这位漏已尽的人以果等至的禅那禅修时,因为先前已经把贪爱、邪见等依着彻底断除,所以在包括天神的世间中……无论在哪里,都以无所依着的心禅修。也正因如此,世间没有任何人知道“他依着这个在禅修”。巴利
Ye pana ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti vacanaṃ gahetvā antarābhavaṃ icchanti, tesaṃ taṃ micchā. Antarābhavo hi abhidhamme paṭikkhittoti. Diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ . Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ. Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanañca. Viññātanti avasiṭṭhaṃ dhammārammaṇapariyāpannarūpaṃ. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Vitakkitaṃ vicāritanti vitakkanavasena anumajjanavasena ca ālambitaṃ. Manasānucintitanti cittena anu anu cintitaṃ. Ayaṃ sadevake…pe… anissitena cittena na ñāyati jhāyantoti ayaṃ khīṇāsavo phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyanto pubbeva taṇhādiṭṭhinissayānaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā sadevake loke…pe… manussāya yattha katthacipi anissitena cittena jhāyati nāma. Tato eva loke kenacipi na ñāyati ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ nāma nissāya jhāyatī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
礼敬你,人中良骏!礼敬你,人中最胜者!
我们不知道你依止什么而禅修。巴利
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te nābhijānāma, kiṃ tvaṃ nissāya jhāyasī’’ti. (netti. 104);
现在,为了通过《瞿低迦经》和《婆迦梨经》来说明漏尽者的心在任何地方都无所依着,所以说了“如魔罗”等话。
“遍寻识”:是指般涅槃之后,向上追寻识。
“超越了戏论”等话,是说明为什么看不见。
“以无所依着的心,他们正在禅修而不被了知”:不只是漏尽者入无余涅槃界时,魔罗等不知道他心的趣向;即使是在有余涅槃界时,魔罗等也同样不知道它——这就是这句话的意思。
这就是开示连接。意思是说,像《瞿低迦经》和《婆迦梨经》那样,诸经之间义理相互合会,就叫做开示连接。巴利
Idāni khīṇāsavacittassa katthacipi anissitabhāvaṃ godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vakkalisuttena (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā māro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Viññāṇaṃ samanvesantoti parinibbānato uddhaṃ viññāṇaṃ pariyesanto. ‘‘Papañcātīto’’tiādinā adassanassa kāraṇamāha. Anissitacittā na ñāyanti jhāyamānāti na kevalaṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā khīṇāsavassa cittagatiṃ mārādayo na jānanti, api ca kho saupādisesāyapi nibbānadhātuyā tassa taṃ na jānantīti attho. Ayaṃ desanāsandhīti godhikasuttavakkalisuttānaṃ viya suttantānaṃ aññamaññaatthasaṃsandanā desanāsandhi nāma.
释义连接,指的是释义与释义之间的连接,或者说是通过释义而形成的连接。意思是:用前面那段对经文的释义,来连接后面那段释义;或者用后面那段释义,来连接前面那段。为了说明这一点——因为世尊大多数情况下都是先讲轮回流转,再讲还灭——所以说了“有所依心者”等话。在这里,如果按人来理解,“这些人的心有所依着”,那么“有所依心者”就是指这些人;这是依于人来施设教法时应当解释的,这就是它的意趣。如果按法来理解,则是“此处有有所依着的心”,那么“有所依心”就是指那些具有有所依着之心的经文语句,也就是那些依着渴爱和邪见的执取而生起的经文语句。这里其余的一切都很明白易懂。巴利
Niddesasandhīti niddesassa sandhi niddesasandhi, niddesena vā sandhi niddesasandhi. Purimena suttassa niddesena tasseva pacchimassa niddesassa, pacchimena vā purimassa sambandhananti attho. Taṃ dassetuṃ yasmā bhagavā yebhuyyena paṭhamaṃ vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā pacchā vivaṭṭaṃ dasseti, tasmā ‘‘nissitacittā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nissitaṃ cittaṃ etesanti nissitacittā, puggalā, niddisitabbā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāyāti adhippāyo. Dhammādhiṭṭhānāya pana nissitaṃ cittaṃ etthāti nissitacittā, nissitacittavanto taṇhādiṭṭhinissayavasena pavattā suttapadesā. Sesamettha sabbaṃ pākaṭameva.
7. 轮转方法分别的注释巴利
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
29 29. 其中,“什么是轮转?”就是轮转义的分别。
其中,“要策励”的意思是:应当去做被称为策励界的精进。
“要出离”的意思是:因为已经从懈怠那一方出离,所以应当去做被称为出离界的、比那更殊胜的精进。
“要致力于佛陀的教法”:由于对戒的防护、在诸根门上的守护、在饮食上知节量、正念正知——对于在这些法中已站稳的人,凭借实行警寤精勤,策励界和出离界就能成就,因此,在名为如是止与观的世尊教法中,你们应当成为真正投入、真正相应的人。
“要摧破死魔的军队,就像大象摧破芦苇屋”:这样行道的人,意思是:统领三界的死王能把众生控制在他的势力之下,而名为他军队的烦恼聚,无力又虚弱,就像一头具足力量的大象刹那间摧毁芦苇搭成的屋子一样;同样,你们要摧破、粉碎、毁坏这烦恼聚(相应部注 1.1.185)。巴利
29.Tatthakatamo āvaṭṭo hāroti āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha ārambhathāti ārambhadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ karotha. Nikkamathāti kosajjapakkhato nikkhantattā nikkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ taduttarivīriyaṃ karotha. Yuñjatha buddhasāsaneti yasmā sīlasaṃvaro indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā satisampajaññanti imesu dhammesu patiṭṭhitānaṃ jāgariyānuyogavasena ārambhanikkamadhātuyo sampajjanti, tasmā tathābhūtasamathavipassanāsaṅkhāte bhagavato sāsane yuttappayuttā hotha. Dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaroti evaṃ paṭipajjantā ca tedhātuissarassa maccurājassa vasaṃ satte netīti tassa senāsaṅkhātaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ yathā nāma balūpapanno kuñjaro naḷehi kataṃ agāraṃ khaṇeneva viddhaṃseti, evameva kilesagaṇaṃ dhunātha vidhamatha viddhaṃsethāti attho (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.185).
现在,为了说明这首偈颂究竟是为了什么目的而安立的,就把它的意义连接起来展示,因此说了“应当精勤,应当出勤——这是精进的立足处”等等。其中,“应当精勤,应当出勤”这句话是精进的立足处,是精进努力的因,因为它把人激励起来着手精进;正如“勤修能生起大智慧”(《法句经》282)所说的,勤修就是修习。在这里,因为接下来要讲观修习,所以此处指的是定修习,因此说“应当致力于佛陀的教法——这是定的立足处”。对于被称为“死魔之军”的烦恼军,要真正把它彻底摧破,只有靠智慧才能做到,所以说“应当摧破……——这是智慧的立足处”。再者,为了显示在与精进、定、慧相应的这些法中,它们以增上的作用能够断除戏论、切断轮回之根、引导人走向出离,于是又说“应当精勤,应当出勤——这是精进根的立足处”等等。这些立足处就是指教说本身,也就是说,前面讲的“那些精进的立足处”等等,是关于精进等的立足处的教说,意思并不是指精进策励所依的具体事项等。注释也正是这样解说的。巴利
Idāni yadatthaṃ ayaṃ gāthā nikkhittā, taṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārambhatha nikkamathāti idaṃ vacanaṃ vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ vīriyapayogassa kāraṇaṃ vīriyārambhe niyojanato, ‘‘yogā ve jāyatī bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato yogo bhāvanā. Tattha vipassanābhāvanāya vakkhamānattā samādhibhāvanā idhādhippetāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yuñjatha buddhasāsaneti samādhissa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Maccuno sena’’nti vuttāya kilesasenāya sammā dhunanaṃ ñāṇeneva hotīti āha – ‘‘dhunātha…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Puna yathāvuttavīriyasamādhipaññāsampayuttesu ādhipaccakiccatāya papañcappahānasamatthā vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpenti cāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyindriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Imāni padaṭṭhānāni desanāti ‘‘yānimāni vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā vīriyādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni vuttāni, sā ārambhatha nikkamathāti ādidesanā, na vīriyārambhavatthuādīnīti attho. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.
像这样,按照已经安立的教说,从立足处的角度确定了含义之后,现在想再按同类法和异类法来转说,为了显示它的基础,就说“对于没有投入修行的众生,或者已经投入修行的众生的努力……”等等。它的意思是:对于没有投入修行、智慧尚未成熟的众生,为了让他们将来能依着习气倾向而了知,所以开始这个教说;或者是为了已经投入修行、智慧已经成熟的众生。巴利
Evaṃ yathānikkhittāya desanāya padaṭṭhānavasena atthaṃ niddhāretvā idāni taṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭetukāmo tassa bhūmiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayuñjantānaṃ vā sattānaṃ yoge yuñjantānaṃ vā ārambho’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yoge bhāvanāyaṃ taṃ ayuñjantānaṃ vā sattānaṃ aparipakkañāṇānaṃ vāsanābhāgena āyatiṃ vijānanatthaṃ ayaṃ desanārambho yuñjantānaṃ vā paripakkañāṇānanti.
这个放逸有两种。由于这种放逸,人们不致力于修习,所以这个放逸按它自身成因的不同而分为两种。由无知,是指以遮蔽五蕴自相与共相的愚痴。被遮蔽,就是被盖住。应知处,就是既是应被了知的对象,又是“这是色,这是色的集起”等等智慧生起的处所,所以叫应知处。因为恶法有多种多样,依彼之故,放逸也有多种多样;但如果从根本的无明来说,就只有一种,所以说“无明之一种”。对利得的决断、执取和悭吝,都包含在寻求、守护和受用之中。欲贪和执著就是渴爱,即使是以渴爱为根的那些法,也都被归入这里,所以说“渴爱之三种”。巴利
So pamādo duvidhoti yena pamādena bhāvanaṃ nānuyuñjanti, so pamādo attano kāraṇabhedena duvidho. Aññāṇenāti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭicchādakena sammohena. Nivutoti chādito. Ñeyyaṭṭhānanti ñeyyañca taṃ ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, iti rūpassa samudayo’’tiādinā ñāṇassa pavattanaṭṭhānañcāti ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ. Anekabhedattā pāpadhammānaṃ tabbasena anekabhedopi pamādo mūlabhūtāya avijjāya vasena eko evāti āha – ‘‘ekavidho avijjāyā’’ti. Lābhavinicchayapariggahamacchariyāni pariyesanāārakkhāparibhogesu antogadhāni. Chandarāgajjhosānā taṇhā evāti taṇhāmūlakepi dhamme ettheva pakkhipitvā ‘‘tividho taṇhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在有色诸有中,指的是色法。执取,就是渴爱的执著。这句话揭示了“渴爱以色身为立足处”这个说法的含义。因为在无始的轮回中,男人和女人对彼此的色身互相贪恋,这个道理可以用《心为所遍取经》(《增支部》1.1-10)来说明。在无色法中,痴是指:因为触等法的本性极其微细,而且相续、聚集、作用、所缘之密集难以分解,所以对无色法产生愚痴,这里还隐含众生依止于此的意思。这样确定之后,对于称为色身和名身的五取蕴,以作为所缘的方式生起的渴爱和无明,不加区分地说了之后,再依四种取来分别解说,是为了显示那些蕴和取的苦集性质,以及它们应当被遍知和断除的体性,因此说“其中,色身”等等。巴利
Rūpīsu bhavesūti rūpadhammesu. Ajjhosānanti taṇhābhiniveso. Etena ‘‘taṇhāya rūpakāyo padaṭṭhāna’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivarati. Anādimati hi saṃsāre itthipurisā aññamaññarūpābhirāmā, ayañcattho cittapariyādānasuttena (a. ni. 1.1-10) dīpetabbo. Arūpīsu sammohoti phassādīnaṃ atisukhumasabhāvattā santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavinibbhogassa dukkarattā ca arūpadhammesu sammoho, sattānaṃ patiṭṭhitoti vacanaseso. Evaṃ niddhārite rūpakāyanāmakāyasaṅkhāte upādānakkhandhapañcake ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattaṃ taṇhañca avijjañca avisesena vuttaṃ catupādānānaṃ vasena vibhajitvā tesaṃ khandhānaṃ upādānānañca dukkhasamudayabhāvena sahapariññeyyapahātabbabhāvaṃ dasseti ‘‘tattha rūpakāyo’’tiādinā.
30 像这样,先通过放逸这个入口确定了前两个真理,接着又要通过放逸这个入口来确定另外两个真理,所以说“其中,凡……”。这里,“那”指的是那放逸。“以通达”是指以正确而全面的了知,也就是对味等的了知。“守护、收摄”是指守护自己的心,这称为放逸的收摄,也就是以它的对立面——不放逸的勤修——来舍弃它。这是“止”:从作用上表示定。这是依离垢分中不同类法的转动。“当他了知诸欲……的利益”这句话,显示了证得止的方法。巴利
30. Evaṃ pamādamukhena purimasaccadvayaṃ niddhāretvā pamādamukheneva aparampi saccadvayaṃ niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha yo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti tassa pamādassa. Sampaṭivedhenāti sammā parijānanena assādādīnaṃ jānanena. Rakkhaṇā paṭisaṃharaṇāti attano cittassa rakkhaṇasaṅkhātā pamādassa paṭisaṃharaṇā, tappaṭipakkhena saṅkocanā appamādānuyogena yā khepanā. Ayaṃ samathoti kiccena samādhiṃ dasseti. Ayaṃ vodānapakkhavisabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭanā. ‘‘Yadā jānāti kāmānaṃ…pe… ānisaṃsa’’nti iminā samathādhigamassa upāyaṃ dasseti.
在这里,“诸欲”指的是事物欲和烦恼欲。“乐味以及乐味”:是指依诸欲而生起、被称为快乐与喜悦的乐味,以乐味之故仅视为乐味。“过患”:就是像“诸欲乐味少、苦多”等经文所说的过患、过失。“出离”:指初禅。因为这样说:“这就是诸欲的出离,也就是离欲。”“卑劣”:低劣的状态。“染污”:就是被染污。众生确实因为诸欲而被染污。“清净”:就是变得清净。以及在出离中的功德,也就是具备断除五盖等殊胜功德。在那里:当所说的止存在时。“那一种考察”:就是慧。因为这样说:“诸比丘,心得定的比丘能如实了知。”正如伴随着渴爱的无明,成为诸行的缘;同样,伴随着无明的渴爱,成为取的缘。当这两法被灭除时,取等也就不存在了。为了显示通过断除渴爱与无明,整个轮回之苦也随之灭尽,所以说“当这两种法被断除时”等等。其意旨是:这四圣谛是依异类法与同类法的轮转而确定的。巴利
Tattha kāmānanti vatthukāmānañca kilesakāmānañca. Assādañca assādatoti kāme paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ sukhasomanassasaṅkhātaṃ assādaṃ assādatāya assādamattato. Ādīnavanti ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.236) vuttaṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ. Nissaraṇanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Okāranti lāmakabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesanti saṃkilissanaṃ. Kāmahetu hi sattā saṃkilissanti. Vodānanti visujjhanaṃ. Nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsanti nīvaraṇappahānādiguṇavisesayogaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte samathe sati. Yā vīmaṃsāti yā paññā. ‘‘Samāhito, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1071) hi vuttaṃ. Yathā taṇhāsahitāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, evaṃ avijjāsahitāva taṇhā upādānānaṃ paccayo. Tāsu niruddhāsu upādānādīnaṃ abhāvo evāti taṇhāavijjāpahānena sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Imāni cattāri saccāni visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti adhippāyo.
就这样,先放下“清净分”的部分,为了说明依异类法和同类法而转起的情况;现在再放下“杂染分”的部分,同样为了说明依异类法和同类法而转起的情况,说出了“犹如于根……”这首偈颂。它的意思是:就像那被称为“根”、作为安立之因、长在地下的部分,如果没有被斧头砍断等障碍所破坏,而且它本身坚固牢靠,那么即使树干被砍掉,像无花果树那样的树还是会再长出来;同样,如果那被称为渴爱随眠的根——也就是这个身体之树的根——没有被道智的斧头彻底斩断,那么这种苦就会一次又一次地、以不断再生的方式生起,不会止息。为了遮止欲爱等,所以说了“有爱”。这是此法的缘:对于这个被称为有爱的法,以覆盖生存过患等方式执取乐味,就是它的缘。正如所说:“诸比丘,对于可被结缚的诸法,若观察其乐味,渴爱就会增长。”因此他说:“因为以无明为缘,才有有爱。”这里,止与观就是指道定和道慧,所以说“以何彻底拔除渴爱随眠……”等。这四圣谛,是依异类法和同类法转起的角度来确定的。其余部分则如前所说。巴利
Evaṃ vodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetvā idāni saṃkilesapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpi mūle’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yathā nāma patiṭṭhāhetubhāvena mūlanti laddhavohāre bhūmigate rukkhassa avayave pharasuchedādiantarāyābhāvena anupaddave tato eva daḷhe thire sati khandhe chinnepi assatthādirukkho ruhati, evameva taṇhānusayasaṅkhāte attabhāvarukkhassa mūle maggañāṇapharasunā anupacchinne tayidaṃ dukkhaṃ punappunaṃ aparāparabhāvena nibbattati na nirujjhatīti. Kāmataṇhādinivattanatthaṃ ‘‘bhavataṇhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etassa dhammassa paccayoti etassa bhavataṇhāsaṅkhātassa dhammassa bhavesu ādīnavappaṭicchādanādivasena assādaggahaṇassa paccayo. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saṃyojanīyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.57). Tenevāha – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā hi bhavataṇhā’’ti. Idha samatho vipassanā ca maggasamādhi maggapaññā ca adhippetāti āha – ‘‘yena taṇhānusayaṃ samūhanatī’’tiādi. Imāni cattāri saccānīti visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,不只是通过已经确定的异类法和同类法来说明轮转,还要通过经典中记载的那些法来说明轮转,为了显示这就是“轮转的义理”,所以说出“诸恶莫作”这首偈颂。其中,“诸恶”指一切不善。“莫作”指不让它生起。“善”指四地所摄的善法。“具足”指获得。“自心清净”指让自己的心清净,而这要通过阿罗汉果才能达成。这样一来,以戒的防护断除一切恶,以止和观圆满成就善,再以阿罗汉果使心清净——这就是诸佛的教法、教诫和教导。这是简要的含义,详细的义理则可以从经典本身去了解。巴利
Idāni na kevalaṃ niddhāriteheva visabhāgasabhāgadhammehi āvaṭṭanaṃ, atha kho pāḷiāgatehipi tehi āvaṭṭanaṃ āvaṭṭahāroti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti gāthamāha . Tattha sabbapāpassāti sabbākusalassa. Akaraṇanti anuppādanaṃ. Kusalassāti catubhūmakakusalassa. Upasampadāti paṭilābho. Sacittapariyodāpananti attano cittavodānaṃ, taṃ pana arahattena hoti. Iti sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpaṃ pahāya samathavipassanāhi kusalaṃ sampādetvā arahattaphalena cittaṃ pariyodapetabbanti etaṃ buddhāna sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhīti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho, vitthārato pana attho pāḷito eva viññāyati.
在这里,“一切恶”等说法中,“以嗔为源”是指嗔正是它的来源,所以叫“以嗔为源”,并不是说嗔本身就是来源。因为离间语也可能从贪生起。对照“身恶行”这个词来看,“以嗔为源”用的是中性词形。“以贪为源”“以痴为源”也是同样的道理。杂秽语是由掉举之心引发的,因此才说它以痴为源。巴利
Tattha ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāmā’’tiādīsu dosasamuṭṭhānanti doso samuṭṭhānameva etassāti dosasamuṭṭhānaṃ, na doso eva samuṭṭhānanti. Lobhasamuṭṭhānāyapi pisuṇavācāya sambhavato. Kāyaduccaritanti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘dosasamuṭṭhāna’’nti napuṃsakaniddeso. Lobhasamuṭṭhānaṃ mohasamuṭṭhānanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Samphappalāpo uddhaccacittena pavattayatīti adhippāyena tassa mohasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā.
像这样,先用恶行、不善业道和业的分类,把“一切恶”里面所说的恶拆开来讲清楚;现在为了再说明按不善根来分的非行道分类,就说了“不善根”等话。其中,“不善根走向加行”的意思是:贪等不善法会推动身和语的加行,也就是会引发身和语的加行。“欲”是指以欲为原因。凡是因欲而走上非行道,这种非行道就是以贪为根源。其余的表述也应当这样理解。到这里,已经说明了“一切恶不作”里的恶;接下来要说明不作恶:通过“贪……智慧……”这三善根,以断除三不善根的方式,说明一切恶的不作、不令它生起。同样,也通过“以舍断贪”等句所说的梵住来说明。其中,喜能平息不乐,而因为喜断除了作为其根本的痴,所以说“痴因喜而被断除、被灭尽”。巴利
Evaṃ duccaritaakusalakammapathakammavibhāgena ‘‘sabbapāpa’’nti ettha vuttapāpaṃ vibhajitvā idānissa akusalamūlavasena agatigamanavibhāgampi dassetuṃ ‘‘akusalamūla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha akusalamūlaṃ payogaṃ gacchantanti lobhādiakusalāni kāyavacīpayogaṃ gacchantāni, kāyavacīpayogaṃ samuṭṭhāpentānīti attho. Chandāti chandahetu. Yaṃ chandā agatiṃ gacchati, idaṃ lobhasamuṭṭhānanti chandā agatiṃ gacchatīti yadetaṃ agatigamanaṃ, idaṃ lobhasamuṭṭhānanti. Evaṃ sesesupi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ettāvatā ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti ettha pāpaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa akaraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘lobho…pe… paññāyā’’ti tīhi kusalamūlehi tiṇṇaṃ akusalamūlānaṃ pahānavasena sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ anuppādanamāha. Tathā lobho upekkhāyātiādinā brahmavihārehi. Tattha aratiṃ vūpasamentī muditā tassā mūlabhūtaṃ mohaṃ pajahatīti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘moho muditāya pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti.
31 现在,再用另一种方式说明恶以及不去作恶,并通过解释剩余词句的含义,来展示与法相应和不相应的转起,于是说了一切恶,就是八种邪等等。通过不作、不造、不违行这三个词,说的就是不让那些邪法生起。同样,通过作、造、违行这三个词,说的就是让它们生起。违行,是指决意之后去造作。过去的,是指因为长久以来一直在运作,所以是古旧的。道的,是指圣道。这确实正如经中所说:旧道、古道,就是这八支圣道的别名。或者,也可以联系过去毗婆尸世尊所证悟并宣说的状态,而说为过去的道。因为这首巴帝摩卡诵偈,正是正自觉者毗婆尸世尊的。巴利
31. Idāni aññenapi pariyāyena pāpaṃ tassa akaraṇañca dassetvā sesapadānañca atthavibhāvanamukhena sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāma aṭṭha micchattānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhācāroti tīhipi padehi micchattānaṃ anuppādanameva vadati. Tathā kiriyā karaṇaṃ ajjhācāroti tīhipi padehi uppādanameva vadati. Ajjhācāroti adhiṭṭhahitvā ācaraṇaṃ. Atītassāti cirakālappavattivasena purāṇassa. Maggassāti ariyamaggassa. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘purāṇamaggaṃ purāṇaṃ añjasanti kho ariyassetaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.65 atthato samānaṃ). Atītena vā vipassinā bhagavatā yathādhigataṃ desitabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘atītassa maggassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vipassino hi ayaṃ bhagavato sammāsambuddhassa pātimokkhuddesagāthāti.
由证悟是指以遍知的现观。它被清净了,这就是灭:虽然无为界不会被任何染污所染污,但这是从证得者的角度才这样说。因为只要那个人的染污还没有消失,无为界对他来说就称为尚未清净。就像证得涅槃时,那些应当被止息的诸蕴,依照它们是否还有残余,分别称为有余依和无余依一样,这里也应该这样理解。巴利
Yaṃ paṭivedhenāti yassa pariññābhisamayena. Yaṃ pariyodāpitaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti yadipi asaṅkhatā dhātu kenaci saṃkilesena na saṃkilissati, adhigacchantassa pana puggalassa vasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi yāva saṃkilesā na vigacchanti, tāva asaṅkhatā dhātu apariyodapitāti vuccati. Yathā nibbānādhigamena ye khandhā vūpasametabbā, tesaṃ sesabhāvena asesabhāvena ca ‘‘saupādisesā’’ti ca, ‘‘anupādisesā’’ti ca vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这些四圣谛,是依据经典中所说的法与同类、异类法的运作方式而确定的。为了再次通过经典中所说的法与同类、异类法的运作来展示“运作方式”这一方法,便说了“法确实会守护”这首偈颂。这首偈颂的词义前面已经讲过了。这里的“法”,指的是福德之法。为了把它分开来说明,便说:“法有两种:根律仪和道。”在这里应当理解,以根律仪为代表,已经涵盖了全部的戒。因为将一切投生视为恶趣,由于与苦苦等相结合而成为苦的去处,所以称为苦趣。对于前面所说的两种法,为了说明第一种法怎样才算好好修习,它从哪里守护人,又把人安立在何处,便说了“其中,在律仪戒中不违犯……”等等。现在,为了说明这个法必定能守护人免于恶趣,便引用了《伽弥尼相应》中的《阿西班达咖子经》。巴利
Imāni pāḷiāgatadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni cattāri saccāni punapi pāḷiāgatadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanena āvaṭṭahāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammo have rakkhatī’’ti gāthamāha. Tassā padattho pubbe vutto eva. Dhammoti puññadhammo idhādhippeto. Taṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dhammo nāma duvidho indriyasaṃvaro maggo cā’’ti āha. Indriyasaṃvarasīsena cettha sabbampi sīlaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Sabbā upapattiyo duggati dukkhadukkhatādiyogena dukkhā gatiyoti katvā. Yathāvutte duvidhe dhamme paṭhamo dhammo yathā suciṇṇo hoti, yato ca so rakkhati, yattha ca patiṭṭhāpeti, taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yā saṃvarasīle akhaṇḍakāritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni tassa dhammassa apāyato rakkhaṇe ekantikabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ gāmaṇisaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 4.358) asibandhakaputtasuttaṃ ābhataṃ.
在这里,“如此”是指以这种方式。“ca”这个词表示集合,意思是:也应当以这种方式来理解这个道理。“剑带之子”就是名叫剑带那人的儿子。因为他在村里是长者,所以叫村长。“后地人”就是后地地区的居民。“持水罐者”就是拿着自己水罐的人。“以水草为花环者”就是天一亮就从水里捞取水草和青莲等,做成花环戴在身上,以此来辨认水是否干净的人。“入水者”就是傍晚和早晨都下水沐浴的人。“令投生”就是让他们投生到上界。“令正确地行”就是正确地引导他们。“进入天界”就是他们围绕着那人,一边说着:“去吧,贤者,去梵天世界吧!去吧,贤者,去梵天世界吧!”,一边就这样引导他进入天界。巴利
Tattha evanti pakārena. Ca-saddo sampiṇḍane, imināpi pakārena ayamattho veditabboti adhippāyo. Asibandhakaputtoti asibandhakassa nāma putto. Gāme jeṭṭhakatāya gāmaṇī. Pacchābhūmakāti pacchābhūmivāsino. Kāmaṇḍalukāti sakamaṇḍaluno. Sevālamālikāti pātova udakato sevālañceva uppalādīni ca gahetvā udakasuddhibhāvajānanatthaṃ mālaṃ katvā piḷandhanakā. Udakorohakāti sāyaṃ pātaṃ udakaṃ orohaṇakā. Uyyāpentīti upariyāpenti. Saññāpentīti sammā yāpenti. Saggaṃ nāma okkāmentīti parivāretvā ṭhitāva ‘‘gaccha, bho, brahmalokaṃ, gaccha, bho, brahmaloka’’nti vadantā saggaṃ pavesenti.
“随行”是指跟着他走。“浮出”是指从水里站起来。“漂浮”是指浮在水面上。“登上陆地”是指爬上干燥的陆地。“在那里,如果有”是指在那个地方,假如有的话。“碎石瓦片”就是碎石或碎陶片。“它会下沉”是说它会往下沉,成为向下沉的东西。“向下沉去”就是沉到下面去。“道的”指圣道。“锋利性”就是锐利。不过,这并不是像刀剑那样磨出来的锐利,而是指诸根的敏锐,为了说明这一点,所以说“增上性”。有人问:难道圣道不是能把自身应当断除的烦恼毫无剩余地彻底断尽吗?那怎么还说不上“极锋利”呢?确实如此,但根据“如同见至者一样”这句话,信解脱者和见至者在断除烦恼方面,还是可以说有某种细微差别。不过,这里要说的并不是这个差别,因为这里要说明的是超越一切再生。圣道是分阶段断除烦恼的,而这种断除方式取决于道法诸根的迟钝、敏锐或极敏锐。因此,在如金刚喻诸法中达到顶点的最上道法之极敏锐状态,就是这里所说的“道的锋利性”。所以世尊说:“此法善修习,能防护免于一切再生。”又通过“是故护心者”等经文,说明即使是名为善趣的再生,也可能变成恶趣。巴利
Anuparisakkeyyāti anuparigaccheyya. Ummujjāti uṭṭhaha. Uplavāti jalassa upariplava. Thalamuplavāti thalaṃ abhiruha. Tatra yāssāti tatra yaṃ assa, yaṃ bhaveyya. Sakkharakaṭhalanti sakkharā vā kaṭhalā vā. Sā adhogāmī assāti sā adho gaccheyya, heṭṭhāgāmī bhaveyya. Adho gaccheyyāti heṭṭhā gaccheyya. Maggassāti ariyamaggassa. Tikkhatāti tikhiṇatā. Sā ca kho na satthakassa viya nisitakaraṇatā, atha kho indriyānaṃ paṭubhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘adhimattatā’’ti āha. Nanu ca ariyamaggo attanā pahātabbakilese anavasesaṃ samucchindatīti atikhiṇo nāma natthīti? Saccametaṃ, tathāpi no ca kho ‘‘yathā diṭṭhippattassā’’ti vacanato saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattānaṃ kilesappahānaṃ pati atthi kāci visesamattāti sakkā vattuṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso na idhādhippeto, sabbupapattisamatikkamanassa adhippetattā. Yasmā pana ariyamaggena odhiso kilesā pahīyanti, tañca nesaṃ tathāpahānaṃ maggadhammesu indriyānaṃ apāṭavapāṭavatarapāṭavatamabhāvena hotīti yo vajirūpamadhammesu matthakappattānaṃ aggamaggadhammānaṃ paṭutamabhāvo. Ayaṃ idha maggassa tikkhatāti adhippetā. Tenevāha – ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo suciṇṇo sabbāhi upapattīhi rakkhatī’’ti. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādinā suttantarena (udā. 32) sugatisaññitānampi upapattīnaṃ duggatibhāvaṃ sādheti.
32 现在,为了以简别的方式,把前面所说的法——也就是像渴爱、无明这些不同类的法,以及像止、观这些同类的法——套用到回转轮上加以说明,所以说了“其中,恶趣的因是渴爱和无明……”等等。这一段因为前面已经讲过它的理路,所以很容易理解。“这被称为梵行”,意思是:这被称为圣的、由止和观组成的道梵行。“它守护”,意思是:对于从一切恶趣中守护的圣道来说,作为其所缘的灭,被说成好像在守护一样,这是把相当作主动者来作譬喻。整段的意思是:这四圣谛是通过不同类法和同类法的回转方式而被简别出来的。巴利
32. Idāni yathāvuttassa dhammassa visabhāgadhammānaṃ taṇhāvijjādīnaṃ sabhāgadhammānañca samathavipassanādīnaṃ niddhāraṇavasena āvaṭṭahāraṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha duggatīnaṃ hetu taṇhā ca avijjā cā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Idaṃ vuccati brahmacariyanti idaṃ ariyaṃ samathavipassanāsaṅkhātaṃ maggabrahmacariyanti vuccati. Yaṃ rakkhatīti sabbāhi duggatīhi rakkhantassa ariyamaggassa ārammaṇabhūto nirodho rakkhanto viya vutto, nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaritattā. Imāni cattāri saccāni visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti adhippāyo.
第八节,分别的分别解释。巴利
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
33 33. 其中,什么是分别理趣?就是分别理趣的解释。其中,法分别、地分别、足处分别,这是三种分别。在这三种当中,因为诸法已经按类别分别阐明之后,从中可得的地分别和足处分别,在说明时就很容易理解,所以先说明法分别。在说明法分别时,为了指出在十六种发趣当中,哪些经应该特别加以分别,而说:“有两部经:熏习分和通达分。”其中,熏习是福德的修习,它的部分或类别就是熏习分,对它有益的即是熏习分经。通达是突破、摧毁贪蕴等,它的部分就是通达分,其余的解释与前面相同。在哪部经中教导了三种福行事,那部经就是熏习分。在哪部经中教导了有学与无学,那部经就是通达分。而这个意义,在圣典原文中将会出现。巴利
33.Tatthakatamo vibhattihāroti vibhattihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha dhammavibhattibhūmivibhattipadaṭṭhānavibhattīti tividhā vibhatti. Tāsu yasmā dhammesu vibhāgato niddiṭṭhesu tattha labbhamāno bhūmivibhāgo padaṭṭhānavibhāgo ca niddisiyamāno suviññeyyo hoti, tasmā dhammavibhattiṃ tāva niddisanto soḷasavidhe paṭṭhāne yesaṃ suttānaṃ vasena visesato vibhajitabbā, tāni suttāni dassetuṃ ‘‘dve suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vāsanā puññabhāvanā, tassā bhāgo koṭṭhāso vāsanābhāgo, tassa hitanti vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, suttaṃ. Nibbijjhanaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho, tassa bhāgoti sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Yasmiṃ sutte tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni desitāni, taṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana sekkhāsekkhā desitā, taṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Ayañca attho pāḷiyaṃyeva āgamissati.
属于福分,就是存在于福的部分中。果分也应同样理解。而“果”是指沙门果。“防护戒”是指巴帝摩卡防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护,这五种防护就是防护戒。“断戒”是指彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断、出离断,这五种断。在这些断中,应当依照除了出离断以外的那些断来理解断戒。“他”是指那位领受熏习分经的人。“以那梵行”是指以那被称为防护戒的殊胜修行作为原因,而成为梵行者。在这里,并没有否定八等至的梵行;不过有些人读作“就以那梵行”,按照他们的理解,那可能就有否定的意思了。巴利
Puññabhāgiyāti puññabhāge bhavā. Tathā phalabhāgiyā veditabbā. Phalanti pana sāmaññaphalaṃ. Saṃvarasīlanti pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti pañca saṃvarā saṃvarasīlaṃ. Pahānasīlanti tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcappahānāni. Tesu nissaraṇappahānavajjānaṃ pahānānaṃ vasena pahānasīlaṃ veditabbaṃ. Soti yo vāsanābhāgiyasuttasampaṭiggāhako, so. Tena brahmacariyenāti tena saṃvarasīlasaṅkhātena seṭṭhacariyena kāraṇabhūtena brahmacārī bhavati. Ettha ca aṭṭhasamāpattibrahmacariyassa na paṭikkhepo, keci pana ‘‘teneva brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ matena siyā tassa paṭikkhepo.
安住于断戒,是指依正断与安息断而安住于断戒。以那梵行,是指以那殊胜的断戒,也就是道梵行。然而,那些读作“即以那梵行”的人,他们的经文是:“所谓熏习分的经,就是布施论、戒论、生天论、福报论。”而那些读作“以那梵行”的人,他们的经文是:“所谓熏习分的经,就是布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、出离的功德。”在这里,哪种经文更合理?应当得出结论:后一种经文更合理。因为后面将会说“所谓通达分的经,就是宣说四圣谛”,大长老说法是不会有所保留的。巴利
Pahānasīle ṭhitoti samucchedapaṭippassaddhippahānānaṃ vasena pahānasīle ṭhito. Tena brahmacariyenāti tena pahānasīlena visesabhūtena maggabrahmacariyena. Ye pana ‘‘teneva brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ ayaṃ pāṭho ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ dānakathā, sīlakathā, saggakathā, puññavipākakathā’’ti. Ye pana ‘‘tena brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ ayaṃ pāṭho – ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ dānakathā, sīlakathā, saggakathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavo nekkhamme ānisaṃso’’ti. Tattha katamo pāṭho yuttataroti? Pacchimo pāṭhoti niṭṭhaṃ gantabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ yā catusaccappakāsanā’’ti vakkhati, na hi mahāthero sāvasesaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desesīti.
“没有知”等语句,是以一种特别的方式说明这两部经互不混杂的原因。其中,“知”指的是作为圣道基础、能导向出离的观慧。“这四部经”指的是:按熏习分、通达分,以及接下来要说的杂染分和无学分来分,共有四部经。“以说法”就是按说法的方式。“以一切方式的观察理趣审察后”意思是,从全面的一切方面,把它们归入十一个处中,再用观察理趣去审察。“应以合理理趣连结”这句话,说明了观察理趣和合理理趣是分别理趣的前行准备。“凡是智慧所及的范围”这句话,则说明了分别理趣的范围非常广大。巴利
‘‘Natthi pajānanā’’tiādinā ubhinnaṃ suttānaṃ sātisayaṃ asaṅkarakāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tattha pajānanāti ariyamaggassa padaṭṭhānabhūtā vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanāpaññā. Imāni cattāri suttānīti imesaṃ suttānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyānaṃ vakkhamānānañca saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyānaṃ vasena cattāri suttāni. Desanāyāti desanānayena. Sabbato vicayena hārena vicinitvāti sabbatobhāgena ekādasasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā vicayena hārena vicinitvā. ‘‘Yuttihārena yojetabbānī’’ti etena vicayahārayuttihārā vibhattihārassa parikammaṭṭhānanti dasseti. ‘‘Yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti iminā vibhattihārassa mahāvisayataṃ dasseti.
34 34. 这样,先按“有熏习分”和“有决择分”的性质,对法作了部分的分别;现在为了再按“有杂染分”和“有无学分”的性质,以及“共”和“不共”的性质来分别它们,就开始了“其中,哪些法是共的?”等讨论。其中,“哪些法”是指哪些具有自性的法。“共的”意思是不特殊、不独有的,也就是相同的。“二法”是指两种性质。因为这里的“法”字是“性质”的意思,就像“有生法的众生”等说法中那样。“名称共”是指名称上共通,意思是“善、不善”等有相同的名称。“所依共”是指依所依而共通,意思是由于它们生起在同一个相续中,所以有相同的所依。具体来说,在杂染这一边,断除时起相同作用的,是“名称共”;生起时伴随在一起的,是“所依共”。其他类似的情况,也按“生起方式”“作用”“条件”“对立面”等来归纳理解。“邪定性和不定性的人”这句,是用来标示凡夫的。因此,应当把所有类型的凡夫,比如持常见者、持断见者等,都纳入来说明。十种见所断的烦恼,对邪定性和不定性的人是共的,因为它们可能生起;对正定性的人则不共,因为它们不可能生起。按照这个方法,其余各句的意义也应当这样理解。巴利
34. Evaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi dhamme ekadesena vibhajitvā idāni tesaṃ kilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha katame dhammāti katame sabhāvadhammā. Sādhāraṇāti avisiṭṭhā, samānāti attho. Dve dhammāti duve pakatiyo. Pakatiattho hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ sattāna’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.33) viya. Nāmasādhāraṇāti nāmena sādhāraṇā, kusalākusalāti samānanāmāti attho. Vatthusādhāraṇāti vatthunā nissayena sādhāraṇā, ekasantatipatitatāya samānavatthukāti attho. Visesato saṃkilesapakkhe pahānekaṭṭhā nāmasādhāraṇā, sahajekaṭṭhā vatthusādhāraṇā. Aññampi evaṃ jātiyanti kiccapaccayapaṭipakkhādīhi samānaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānanti idaṃ puthujjanānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā sassatavādā ucchedavādāti ādiko sabbo puthujjanabhedo āharitvā vattabbo. Dasanappahātabbā kilesā sādhāraṇā micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānaṃ eva ca sambhavato sammattaniyatānaṃ asambhavato ca. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo.
“圣弟子”这个说法,是针对有学圣者说的。他那些定,全都与尚未离染的人共通:也就是世间定、色界定、无色界定、天住、梵住、初禅等至等等,用这些不同的说法来表明它们是共通的。但善的等至若按这个角度来说,就可能变成不共的了。有些人看到这个毛病,就读作“无论哪种……那一切定,都与未离染的人共通”。如何它们被限定地取,抑或应当限定地取?它到底怎么个“共通”法?带着这个疑问仔细思量,为了厘清这个道理,论师接着说:“共通的法,确实是这样互相不超出彼此的”等等。这话的意思是:就像前面说的,邪定性和不定性的人共有那些法一样,这些“共通的法”并不是因为一切众生都共有才叫共通。为什么呢?因为这些法互相之间、各自都不会超出自己的范围。也就是说,它们活动的地方是严格限定的;如果不是这样,那样的说法根本就成立不了。正因为这些法有这样的限定范围,所以论中说:“凡具足这些法的人,他就不会超出那个法的范围。”因为,并不是邪定性和不定性的人就没有见道所断的烦恼,也不是说别的人才会有。照这个道理,剩下的也应当这样理解。巴利
Ariyasāvakoti sekkhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sabbā sā avītarāgehi sādhāraṇāti lokiyasamāpatti rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā dibbavihāro brahmavihāro paṭhamajjhānasamāpattīti evamādīhi pariyāyehi sādhāraṇā. Kusalasamāpatti pana iminā pariyāyena siyā asādhāraṇā , imaṃ pana dosaṃ passantā keci ‘‘yaṃ kiñci…pe… sabbā sā avītarāgehi sādhāraṇā’’ti paṭhanti. Kathaṃ te odhiso gahitā, atha odhiso gahetabbā, kathaṃ sādhāraṇāti? Anuyogaṃ manasikatvā taṃ visodhento āha – ‘‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā evaṃ aññamañña’’ntiādi. Tassattho – yathā micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānañca sādhāraṇāti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sādhāraṇā dhammā na sabbasattānaṃ sādhāraṇatāya sādhāraṇā, kasmā? Yasmā aññamaññaṃ paraṃ paraṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ visayaṃ nātivattanti. Paṭiniyatañhi tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, itarathā tathā vohāro eva na siyāti adhippāyo. Yasmā ca ete eva dhammā evaṃ niyatā visayā, tasmā ‘‘yopi imehi dhammehi samannāgato na so taṃ dhammaṃ upātivattatī’’ti āha. Na hi micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānañca dassanena pahātabbā kilesā na santi, aññesaṃ vā santīti evaṃ sesepi vattabbaṃ.
所谓“不共法”,就是每个人各自独有的、由自身限定的法。在圣者当中,要依照有学法和无学法来寻求;在非圣者当中,则要依照一切应被断除之法来寻求,因为除此之外的情况并不能这样被指出。而它正因为远离了共通性,才随着各各人而依照所说的教法来理解。为了显示这个道理,论中说:“哪些法是不共的?乃至依教法而应寻求:有学、无学、堪能、不堪能。”所谓“第八者”,是指为了亲证入流果而修行的人。所谓“法性”,就是法的自性:对第一个人来说是道位,对第二个人来说是果位;或者,对第一个人来说是正在被断除的烦恼性,对第二个人来说是已被断除的烦恼性。再者,“第八者”是指处于不来道的人。“名”就是指“有学”这个名称。“法性”就是指各个道位以及下一层的果位。“行道者”就是指具有道的人。“名”就是指“行道者”这个名称。这样,通过“第八者”等说法显示了圣者个人身上的不共法之后,为了在其他类人身上显示同样的道理,又说了“如此,观察殊胜者”等话。因为只有在世间法中才有低劣等状态的差别。其中,“观察殊胜者”就是观察不共法的人。对于决定堕入邪道的人来说,不决定随转的法是共通的,决定随邪道而转的法是不共的。即使在决定邪道的人当中,对于持有定邪见的人来说,不定的法是共通的,而定邪见则是不共的。应当以这种方式了知“观察殊胜者”。巴利
Asādhāraṇo nāma dhammo tassa tassa puggalassa paccattaniyato ariyesu sekkhāsekkhadhammavasena anariyesu sabbābhabbapahātabbavasena gavesitabbo, itarassa tathā niddisitabbabhāvābhāvato. So ca kho sādhāraṇāvidhuratāya taṃ taṃ upādāya tathāvuttadesanānusārenāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘katame dhammā asādhāraṇā yāva desanaṃ upādāya gavesitabbā sekkhāsekkhā bhabbābhabbā’’ti iminā. Aṭṭhamakassāti sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo paṭhamassa maggaṭṭhatā dutiyassa phalaṭṭhatā. Paṭhamassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā. Dutiyassa pahīnakilesatā. Puna aṭṭhamakassāti anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassa. Nāmanti sekkhāti nāmaṃ. Dhammatāti taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā heṭṭhimaphalaṭṭhatā ca. Paṭipannakānanti maggasamaṅgīnaṃ. Nāmanti paṭipannakāti nāmaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhamakassā’’tiādinā ariyapuggalesu asādhāraṇadhammaṃ dassetvā itaresu nayadassanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Lokiyadhammesu eva hi hīnādibhāvo. Tattha visesānupassināti asādhāraṇadhammānupassinā. Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā micchattaniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhi asādhāraṇāti iminā nayena visesānupassinā veditabbā.
像这样用各种方式说明了法的分别之后,现在为了分别说明地的分别和立足处的分别,而说了“见地”等。其中,“见地”就是初道。因为在初道那一刹那,圣弟子才算是正在进入正性决定,从那以后就算是已经进入了,所以说“见地是进入正性决定的立足处”。虽然每一个较低的道都是证得更高道的因——因为不断除有身见等,就不可能断除欲贪、嗔恚等——但为了说明圣道是自己果报的殊胜之因和近因,所以说“修习地是证得更高果报的立足处”。“乐行道速通达智”:当具备与之相应的各种条件时,它就属于这种根性的人,所以说它是观的立足处。而其他三种行道也都能带来止。其中,因为已经展示了四种行道中最柔软的一种,其余的也就一并展示了,所以说“苦行道迟通达智是止的立足处”。巴利
Evaṃ nānānayehi dhammavibhattiṃ dassetvā idāni bhūmivibhattiṃ padaṭṭhānavibhattiñca vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dassanabhūmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha dassanabhūmīti paṭhamamaggo. Yasmā pana paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe ariyasāvako sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamanto nāma hoti, tato paraṃ okkanto , tasmā ‘‘dassanabhūmi niyāmāvakkantiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi heṭṭhimo heṭṭhimo maggo upariuparimaggādhigamassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīni appahāya kāmarāgabyāpādādippahānassa asakkuṇeyyattā. Tathāpi ariyamaggo attano phalassa visesakāraṇaṃ āsannakāraṇañcāti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhāvanābhūmiuttarikānaṃ phalānaṃ pattiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā ñāṇuttarassa tathāvidhapaccayasamāyoge ca hotīti sā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Itarā pana tissopi paṭipadā samathaṃ āvahanti eva. Tāsu sabbamudutāya dassitāya sesāpi dassitā evāti āha – ‘‘dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā samathassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
布施所成的福行事:布施本身就是“布施所成”;因为能产生值得供养的果报,所以是“福”;那件事应当去做,所以是“行”;因为它是勤行成就等的依处,所以是“事”;合起来就是布施所成的福行事。“他闻”,就是听闻佛法。“共通的”:不是像种子对芽那样,也不是像见地等对入正定那样,是某一种法独有的因,而是共通的,意思是说,即使有其他因缘,也能让听闻佛法发生。对此,有些人说,施主随喜自己的布施成了习惯,所以布施是听闻佛法的因。但是,施主想要得到布施的清净,就会努力听闻布施、持戒等种种殊胜功德,因此说布施是听闻佛法的因。巴利
Dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti dānameva dānamayaṃ, pujjaphalanibbattanaṭṭhena puññaṃ, tadeva kattabbato kiriyā, payogasampattiyādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vatthu cāti dānamayapuññakiriyavatthu. Paratoghosassāti dhammassavanassa. Sādhāraṇanti na bījaṃ viya aṅkurassa, dassanabhūmiādayo viya vā niyāmāvakkantiādīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ, atha kho sādhāraṇaṃ, tadaññakāraṇehipi paratoghosassa pavattanatoti adhippāyo. Tattha keci dāyakassa dānānumodanaṃ āciṇṇanti dānaṃ paratoghosassa kāraṇanti vadanti. Dāyako pana dakkhiṇāvisuddhiṃ ākaṅkhanto dānasīlādiguṇavisesānaṃ savane yuttappayutto hotīti dānaṃ dhammassavanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
具足戒的人因为不后悔,所以心得安定,有能力思择法义,因此戒是思所成智的因,所以说“戒所成”等。修所成,就是名为止的修所成。对于修所成者,是指对于更高层次的禅那以及名为观慧的修所成而言。因为前前是后后的立足处。现在,布施、持戒和世间修习,并不只是像前面所说的听闻佛法等的因,而且依次也是通达教理、多闻、修行业处、圣道、正见的缘。为了说明这个道理,又以“施所成”等来展开教导。同样,为了说明“住在适当的地方等,是身远离、心远离等的因”这个道理,而说了“住在适当的地方”等。其中,于善思察,是指于省察观照。舍弃不善,以此说明了断遍知。对于定根,是指对于道定根。其余内容都很容易理解。巴利
Sīlasampanno vippaṭisārābhāvena samāhito dhammacintāsamattho hotīti sīlaṃ cintāmayañāṇassa kāraṇanti āha ‘‘sīlamaya’’ntiādi. Bhāvanāmayanti samathasaṅkhātaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ. Bhāvanāmayiyāti uparijhānasaṅkhātāya vipassanāsaṅkhātāya ca bhāvanāmayiyā. Purimaṃ purimañhi pacchimassa pacchimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Idāni yasmā dānaṃ sīlaṃ lokiyabhāvanā ca na kevalaṃ yathāvuttaparatoghosādīnaṃyeva, atha kho yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnampi paccayā honti, tasmā tampi nayaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘dānamaya’’ntiādinā desanaṃ vaḍḍhesi. Tathā patirūpadesavāsādayo kāyavivekacittavivekādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hotīti imaṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘patirūpadesavāso’’tiādimāha. Tattha kusalavīmaṃsāyāti paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya. Akusalapariccāgoti iminā pahānapariññā vuttāti. Samādhindriyassāti maggasamādhindriyassa. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
变化环分解注释巴利
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
35 35. 其中,什么是“转起门”?就是“转起门”的分别解说。在这里,当解释经文时,对所开示的善法与不善法,从应断除等方面,对作为其对立面的不善法与善法进行拣择,这就是从对立面来说的“转起”。因此,经文一开始就说“对于有正见的人,邪见已被摧毁”等等。其中,“正见”是指殊胜的、美好的见解,具有这种见解的人就叫有正见,这里说的就是这个人。而他的这种正见,应当理解为或者是前行阶段的正见,或者是出世间的正见。“邪见已被摧毁”:按前一种解释,是被观的正见所断除,意思是镇伏;按后一种解释,是被初道正见所断除,意思是彻底断尽。巴利
35.Tatthakatamo parivattano hāroti parivattanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yathāniddiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūte akusalakusaladhamme pahātabbabhāvādivasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sammā pasatthā, sundarā diṭṭhi etassāti sammādiṭṭhi, tassa. Sā panassa sammādiṭṭhitā pubbabhāgasammādiṭṭhiyā vā lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiyā vā veditabbā. Micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatīti purimanaye vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā pahīnā hoti, vikkhambhitāti attho. Pacchimanaye paṭhamamaggasammādiṭṭhiyā pahīnā samucchinnāti attho.
那些以邪见为缘的:以邪执为因,诸如不愿见圣者之类的贪等,以及杀生等众多不善法——因为卑劣所以是恶的,因为从不善巧所生所以是不善的——这些都可能生起。这是针对已开始修观的人以及圣者而言的。所谓“法”,指止观之法,或者三十七菩提分法,即未生起的得以生起,已生起的得以修习圆满。“正思惟”等也应按同样方式理解。不过有一个差别:关于“正解脱”等,“邪解脱”是指并非真正解脱,却自以为“我们已经解脱”;或者在非解脱的状态下生起解脱想。这里的字面含义是:这种解脱、这种脱离是错误的、邪恶的,所以叫“邪解脱”。八种邪解脱,如前所述,是以邪执之力生起的,具有落入两边的特征。“正解脱”则是果位上的法;而亲近邪见之人,则生起邪脱离或邪解脱。至于“邪解脱的智见”,则是以邪解脱和邪见为精要而执取,由此生起的不善心念,乃至造了恶却自认为“我做了善事”时生起的愚痴。关于“正解脱的智见”,这里指的是有学圣者反省观察的智慧,被称为正解脱的智见。因为它能导向进一步修习的圆满。巴利
Ye cassa micchādiṭṭhipaccayāti micchābhinivesahetu ye ariyānaṃ adassanakāmatādayo lobhādayo pāṇātipātādayo ca aneke lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakā akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalā dhammā uppajjeyyuṃ. Imassa āraddhavipassakassa ariyassa ca. Dhammāti samathavipassanādhammā, sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā vā anuppannā vā sambhavanti uppannā, bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Sammāsaṅkappassātiādīnampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sammāvimuttiādīnaṃ micchāvimutti avimuttāva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino avimuttiyaṃ vā vimuttisaññino. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – micchā pāpikā vimutti vimokkho etassāti micchāvimutti. Aṭṭhaṅgā ca micchāvimutti yathāvuttenākārena micchābhinivesavasena ca pavattā antadvayalakkhaṇā. Sammāvimutti pana phaladhammā, micchādiṭṭhike samāsevato micchāvimokkho vā micchāvimutti. Micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana micchāvimokkhe micchādiṭṭhiyā ca sāranti gahaṇavasena pavatto akusalacittuppādo antamaso pāpaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhato uppannamoho ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanassāti ettha sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammāvimuttiñāṇadassananti adhippetaṃ. Tañhi uttaribhāvanāpāripūriyā saṃvattati.
36 36. 这样,先通过正见等入口指出邪见等之后,为了进一步说明通过远离杀生、不与取、欲邪行等来转变杀生等,接着开始“凡……”等经文。其中,“适时而说者”是描述其特征的说法。所谓适时、有根据、有节制、与义相应地说,就是说他已经进入了断除绮语的修行。巴利
36. Evaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādimukhena micchādiṭṭhiādiṃ dassetvā puna pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācārādito veramaṇiyādīhi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kālavādissāti lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Kālena sāpadesaṃ pariyantavatiṃ atthasañhitanti so samphappalāpassa pahānāya paṭipanno hotīti vuttaṃ.
再次,通过“然而,任何那些……”等经文,以正见等为切入点,用另一种方式说明邪见等是如何被转化的。其中,“现见的”是指直接可见的;“同法的”是指有正当理由的;“应受责备的”是指应当被谴责的;“论诤及随诤”是指主张以及随之而来的主张;也有读作“论诤随逐”的,意思是随主张而转起。“应受供养的”是指值得供养的;“应受赞叹的”是指值得赞叹的。巴利
Puna ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādimukheneva micchādiṭṭhiādīhi eva parivattanaṃ pakārantarena dasseti. Tattha sandiṭṭhikāti paccakkhā. Sahadhammikāti sakāraṇā. Gārayhāti garahitabbayuttā. Vādānuvādāti vādā ceva anuvādā ca. ‘‘Vādānupātā’’tipi pāṭho, vādānupavattiyoti attho. Pujjāti pūjanīyā. Pāsaṃsāti pasaṃsitabbā.
再者,通过“然而,任何那些……”等语句,说明以中道来转化两个极端。其中,“应当受用”等四个词,要结合事欲(感官对象方面的欲)来理解;“应当修习、应当多修习”这两个词,则要结合烦恼欲来理解。他们的非法:对他们来说,应当修习的才被称为法,但实际是非法;而诸欲正是他们所应修习、所期望的,离欲则是诸欲的对立面,这样一来,离欲就成了他们的非法——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Puna ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādinā majjhimāya paṭipattiyā antadvayaparivattanaṃ dasseti. Tattha bhuñjitabbātiādīni cattāri padāni vatthukāmavasena yojetabbāni. Bhāvayitabbā bahulīkātabbāti padadvayaṃ kilesakāmavasena. Tesaṃ adhammoti bhāvetabbo nāma dhammo siyā, kāmā ca tesaṃ bhāvetabbā icchitā, kāmehi ca veramaṇī kāmānaṃ paṭipakkho, iti sā tesaṃ adhammo āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
“导向出离的法”说的是和观一起的圣道。“苦”说的是那种为了“我要把恶业消尽”而进行的折磨身体的做法。“乐”说的是由无可指责的因缘所带来的受用快乐。在这些情形里,也应当按前面说过的方式说明它如何成为非法。现在,为了显示以不净想等为入口来转变净想等,说了“或者,正如……”等话。对于已经开始修观的人,因为烦恼和不净的渗漏,三界的一切行都显现为不净,所以说“安住于对一切行观不净者”。又通过“而无论哪些……”等话,阐明对立面的特征。其中,“已进入”就是已违犯、已深入,意思是已完全了知。巴利
Niyyāniko dhammoti saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo. Dukkhoti pāpaṃ nijjarāpessāmāti pavattitaṃ sarīratāpanaṃ vadati. Sukhoti anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukhaṃ. Etesupi vāresu vuttanayeneva adhammabhāvāpatti vattabbā. Idāni asubhasaññādimukhena subhasaññādiparivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āraddhavipassakassa kilesāsucipaggharaṇavasena tebhūmakasaṅkhārā asubhato upaṭṭhahantīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasaṅkhāresu asubhānupassino viharato’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ vā panā’’tiādinā paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāveti. Tattha ajjhāpannoti adhiāpanno, abhiupagato pariññātoti attho.
10. 同义词负载的分别解说巴利
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
37 37. 其中,“什么是同义词引导”?就是同义词引导的分别。在这里,为了显示同义词的开示方式是怎样的,所以说:“世尊用种种同义词来开示同一种法。”“用同义词”就是用语词的不同说法,这个意思前面已经讲过了。那么,世尊为什么要用多种不同的说法来开示同一种法呢?回答是:为了在说法的时候以及在未来,让某些人能以某种方式领悟那个含义,所以用不同的说法;为了那些心思散乱、注意力在别处的人,能通过另一种说法领悟那个含义,所以用不同的说法;因为即使用同一个词再说一遍,其他人也可能因此有所领会,所以为了让智慧迟钝的人反复思察那个含义而不致迷惑,用不同的说法;因为同一个词句也可能有多种含义,为了避免对其含义产生别的猜测,所以用不同的说法;为了让不同的人用各种不同的名称了解各种不同的含义,就像词典类典籍那样,所以用不同的说法;也是为了让说法师容易成就对经义的关联理解和广泛通达,所以用不同的说法;为了显示自己已经证得法的无碍解和语言的无碍解,或者为了在应当受教化的人心中播下种子,世尊就用不同的说法来开示。巴利
37.Tatthakatamo vevacano hāroti vevacanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yathā vevacananiddeso hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ aññamaññehi vevacanehi niddisatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vevacanehīti pariyāyasaddehīti attho. Padattho pubbe vutto eva. Kasmā pana bhagavā ekaṃ dhammaṃ anekapariyāyehi niddisatīti? Vuccate – desanākāle āyatiñca kassaci kathañci tadatthapaṭibodho siyāti pariyāyavacanaṃ, tasmiṃ khaṇe vikkhittacittānaṃ aññavihitānaṃ aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Teneva padena puna vacane tadaññesaṃ tattha adhigatatā siyāti mandabuddhīnaṃ punappunaṃ tadatthasallakkhaṇe asammosanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Anekepi atthā samānabyañjanā hontīti yā atthantaraparikappanā siyā, tassā parivajjanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ anaññassa vacane anekāhi tāhi tāhi saññāhi tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ ñāpanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ seyyathāpi nighaṇṭusatthe. Dhammakathikānaṃ tantiatthupanibandhanaparāvabodhanānaṃ sukhasiddhiyāpi pariyāyavacanaṃ. Attano dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāppattiyā vibhāvanatthaṃ, veneyyānaṃ tattha bījāvāpanatthaṃ vā pariyāyavacanaṃ bhagavā niddisati.
何必多说呢?正自觉者因为彻底通达法界,所以在一切意义上都能以无碍的智慧行持,在一切言说上也同样如此,因此能用无数种方式让人领悟同一个意义,不会在那里对意义迟疑不决、拖泥带水。也不是[单纯]法的开示。为了显示“这正是诸佛不共的法”,于是从“期望”等开始说明异门开示。在解释意义时说:“所谓期望,就是对未来可希求之义的渴爱。”这里“未来之义”指尚未到来、可希求的利益。用“必定会到来”等说明它生起的方式。面向未来之义的渴爱是“期望”;面向未来和现在之义的渴爱是“希求”,这就是两者的差别。巴利
Kiṃ bahunā yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā sammāsambuddhā yathā sabbasmiṃ atthe appaṭihatañāṇācārā, tathā sabbasmiṃ saddavohāreti ekampi atthaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi bodheti, na tattha dandhāyitattaṃ vitthāyitattaṃ atthassa. Nāpi dhammadesanāhāni, āveṇikovāyaṃ buddhadhammoti pariyāyadesanaṃ dassento ‘‘āsā’’tiādimāha. Tattha atthaṃ dassento ‘‘āsā nāma vuccati yā bhavissassa atthassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhavissassa atthassāti anāgatassa icchitabbassa atthassa. ‘‘Avassaṃ āgamissatī’’tiādinā tassā pavattiyākāraṃ dasseti. Anāgatatthavisayā taṇhā āsā. Anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihāti ayametāsaṃ viseso.
“等待利益的达成”,是指通过它来等待、期盼所想要利益的达成,或者通过它来守护、保护已经达成的利益。这叫作“欢喜”,意思是对已经得到的利益产生执著。为了从众生诸行的角度分析并显示这种利益的达成,世尊说了“所爱的亲戚”等话。其中,“法”指色等所缘。对于极其可爱的所缘,他产生欢喜;为了说明即使对不可爱的所缘也会产生欢喜,所以说了“或者对不厌恶的也欢喜”。这是因为众生以颠倒的力量,把可厌恶的诸行也当作不厌恶的来欢喜。巴利
Atthanipphattipaṭipālanāti yāya icchitassa atthassa nipphattiṃ paṭipāleti āgameti, yāya vā nipphannaṃ atthaṃ paṭipāleti rakkhati. Ayaṃ abhinandanā nāma, yathāladdhassa atthassa kelāyanā nāmāti attho. Taṃ atthanipphattiṃ sattasaṅkhāravasena vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘piyaṃ vā ñāti’’ntiādimāha . Tattha dhammanti rūpādiārammaṇadhammaṃ, atiiṭṭhārammaṇaṃ abhinandati, aniṭṭhārammaṇehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appaṭikkūlato vā abhinandatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkūlepi hi vipallāsavasena sattaṃ, saṅkhāraṃ vā appaṭikkūlato abhinandati.
在众多界中生起的渴爱,被称为“在众多界中流转”。为了把这些界分别展示出来,所以说“眼界”等等。虽然在《界分别》等典籍里也提到了欲界等其他许多界,但为了表明它们也都包含在这里面,所以这里只列出了十八界。有人说“有些人倾向于色”等等,这是在说明渴爱在这些界中的活动方式。其中,因为五种内界、七种识界和法界都已经被法所缘包含在内,所以应当知道:列出十八界之后,实际上只是区分出六种渴爱生起的地方。属于渴爱这一边的,即使是由出离所生的忧之伺察,也会在那些对无上解脱生起希求的人心中生起,正如经文所说“以希求为缘而有忧”,更何况是由世俗所生的忧之伺察呢?因此,这二十四个方面被称为“渴爱的一边”。而基于世俗的舍,由于是无智慧之舍的状态,会成为如其执取那样的条件,所以说“这六种世俗的舍,属于见解的一边”。巴利
Yāsu anekadhātūsu pavattiyā taṇhā ‘‘anekadhātūsu sarā’’ti vuttā, tā dhātuyo vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi dhātuvibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 172 ādayo) kāmadhātuādayo aññāpi anekadhātuyo āgatā, tāsampi ettheva samavarodhoti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhārasevettha dassitā. Keci rūpādhimuttātiādi tāsu dhātūsu taṇhāya pavattidassanaṃ. Tattha yasmā pañca ajjhattikā dhātuyo satta ca viññāṇadhātuyo dhammadhātu ca dhammārammaṇeneva saṅgahitā, tasmā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo uddisitvā chaḷeva taṇhāya pavattiṭṭhānāni vibhattānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhā nekkhammassitāpi domanassupavicārā tassa anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati ‘‘pihapaccayā domanassa’’nti vacanato, ko pana vādo gehassitesu domanassupavicāresūti imāni catuvīsati padāni ‘‘taṇhāpakkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Gehassitā pana upekkhā aññāṇupekkhatāya yathābhinivesassa paccayo hotīti ‘‘yā cha upekkhā gehassitā, ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttaṃ.
38 现在,为了说明那些伺察对应的渴爱同义语,世尊说了“正是那种以渴望为形态的法喜”等话。接着,为了通过确定“心、慧、世尊、法、僧、戒、施”这些同义语,来分别阐明同义词的引导方式,又开始了“心、意、识”等的论述。其中,通过“还有其他这样一类”这句话,应当看到:像“慧、了知、简择、审择、法简择、总相把握、别相把握、对别相的再把握、聪敏、善巧、明彻、明辨、思考、遍察、广慧、深慧、导引、观、正知、刺棍、慧、慧根、慧力、慧刀、慧殿、慧光、慧明、慧炬、慧宝、不迷”等这样一类慧的同义语词,也被包含在内了。巴利
38. Idāni tesaṃ upavicārānaṃ taṇhāpariyāyaṃ dassento ‘‘sāyeva patthanākārena dhammanandī’’tiādimāha. Puna cittaṃ paññā bhagavā dhammo saṅgho sīlaṃ cāgoti imesaṃ pariyāyavacananiddhāraṇena vevacanahāraṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘cittaṃ mano viññāṇa’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘aññampi evaṃ jātiya’’nti iminā paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo dhammavicayo sallakkhaṇā upalakkhaṇā paccupalakkhaṇā paṇḍiccaṃ kosallaṃ nepuññaṃ vebhabyā cintā upaparikkhā bhūrī medhā pariṇāyikā vipassanā sampajaññaṃ patodo paññā paññindriyaṃ paññābalaṃ paññāsatthaṃ paññāpāsādo paññāāloko paññāobhāso paññāpajjoto paññāratanaṃ amohoti (mahāni. 149) evamādīnampi paññāya pariyāyasaddānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“五出世根”指的是“尽智”等五根,它们是出世间的,意思是这些是出世间慧的同义词。“一切慧”是指用其余同义词所说的一切慧,意思是包含了世间与出世间混合的慧。通过“又以……”等文字,显示还可以用这种方式来说明同义词。“以增上的意义”是指在具有胜解之相中,以增上的意义。正如在佛随念的解说中所说——依照“彼世尊即是阿拉汉……世尊”等经典,应当以众多同义词随念世尊——把这句话引出来之后,应当这样理解其关联:依此道理,从达到力的成就、证得无所畏,一直到作法的光明与炬火,对于佛陀世尊的这些同义词,应当在佛随念中加以阐述。不过这些也只是世尊的少数几个同义词而已。因为佛陀的功德无量无数,而世尊的一切名号也都是依其功德而安立的。正如法将(舍利弗尊者)所说:巴利
Pañcindriyānilokuttarānīti khaye ñāṇantiādīni pañcindriyāni lokuttarāni, lokuttarapaññāya vevacanānīti attho. Sabbā paññāti itarehi vevacanehi vuttā sabbā paññā lokiyalokuttaramissikāti attho. ‘‘Api cā’’tiādinā imināpi pariyāyena vevacanaṃ vattabbanti dasseti. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhenāti adhimokkhalakkhaṇe ādhipateyyaṭṭhena. Yathā ca buddhānussatiyaṃvuttanti yathā buddhānussatiniddese (visuddhi. 1.123) ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā pāḷiyā so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ…pe… itipi bhagavāti anekehi vevacanehi bhagavā anussaritabboti vuttaṃ. Imināva nayena balanipphattigato vesārajjappatto yāva dhammobhāsapajjotakaroti, etehi pariyāyehi buddhassa bhagavato vevacanaṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vattabbanti padaṃ āharitvā sambandho veditabbo. Etānipi katipayāni eva bhagavato vevacanāni. Asaṅkhyeyyā hi buddhaguṇā guṇanemittakāni ca bhagavato nāmāni. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā –
大牟尼的名号多得数不清,每一个都带着他的功德。
应以功德称扬其名,哪怕用上千个名号。巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāma sahassato’’ti. (udā. aṭṭha. 53);
在随念法的时候,对于“无为”等词是这样解释的:不被任何因缘造作出来的,就是无为。它没有尽头、不会毁灭,所以叫无边。因为它不是诸漏所缘取的对象,所以叫无漏。因为它的本性没有颠倒,所以叫谛。因为它是轮回的彼岸,所以叫彼岸。因为它是微细智慧的境界,本性又微细,所以叫微细。没有积集智慧资粮的人根本看不见它,所以叫极难见。因为它不被生和老所逼迫,所以叫不老。因为坚固,所以叫恒常。因为不会被老和死破坏,所以叫不坏。因为肉眼和天眼都看不到它,所以叫不可见。因为远离贪等种种戏论,所以叫无戏论。因为它是烦恼和种种造作得以止息的因,所以叫寂静。巴利
Dhammānussatiyaṃ ‘‘asaṅkhata’’ntiādīsu na kenaci paccayena saṅkhatanti asaṅkhataṃ. Natthi etassa anto vināsoti anantaṃ. Āsavānaṃ anārammaṇato anāsavaṃ. Aviparītasabhāvattā saccaṃ. Saṃsārassa paratīrabhāvato pāraṃ. Nipuṇañāṇavisayattā sukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇa. Anupacitañāṇasambhārehi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkāti sududdasaṃ. Uppādajarāhi anabbhāhatattā ajajjaraṃ. Thirabhāvena dhuvaṃ. Jarāmaraṇehi apalujjanato apalokitaṃ. Maṃsacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā ca apassitabbattā anidassanaṃ. Rāgādipapañcābhāvena nippapañcaṃ. Kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamahetutāya santaṃ.
因为没有非吉祥的业、烦恼、异熟轮回,所以叫吉祥。巴利
Amatahetutāya bhaṅgābhāvato ca amataṃ. Uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītaṃ. Asivānaṃ kammakilesavipākavaṭṭānaṃ abhāvena sivaṃ. Catūhi yogehi anupaddavabhāvena khemaṃ. Taṇhā khīyati etthāti taṇhakkhayo. Katapuññehipi kadācideva passitabbattā acchariyaṃ. Abhūtapubbattā abbhutaṃ. Anantarāyattā anītikaṃ. Anantarāyabhāvahetuto anītikadhammaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.377-409).
因为它的本性就是不生起,所以叫“不生”。正因为如此,所以叫“非有”。这两者合起来,就是在说它完全没有生起。因为它不被任何东西所损害,所以叫“无恼害”。它不是由任何缘所造作的,所以叫“非所作”。这里面没有忧愁,所以叫“无忧”。因为忧愁的根源已经消失,所以叫“离忧”。因为它不是任何东西所能缠缚的,所以叫“无逼迫”。因为它是无逼迫状态的,所以叫“无逼迫法”。巴利
Anibbattisabhāvattā ajātaṃ. Tato eva abhūtaṃ. Ubhayenāpi uppādarahitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kenaci anupaddutattā anupaddavaṃ. Na kenaci paccayena katanti akataṃ. Natthi ettha sokoti asokaṃ. Sokahetuvigamena visokaṃ. Kenaci anupasajjitabbattā anupasaggaṃ. Anupasaggabhāvahetuto anupasaggadhammaṃ.
因为所了知的境界甚深,所以叫“甚深”。如果没有正行道,就无法看见它、无法达到它,所以叫“难见”。它超越一切世间而安住,所以叫“超越”。没有任何东西能超越它,所以叫“无上”。没有与它相等或相似的,所以叫“无等”。没有能和它相比的,所以叫“无等对”。以最上之义叫“最胜”,或者因为最值得赞叹也叫“最胜”。被轮回之苦逼迫的众生可以从它那里得到庇护,所以叫“窟宅”。因为它能保护,所以叫“救护”。因为没有尘劳,所以叫“无尘”。因为没有瑕疵,所以叫“无瑕”。因为没有过失,所以叫“无秽”。因为贪等污垢已经远离,所以叫“无垢”。因为不会被四种瀑流淹没,所以叫“洲渚”。因为具有轮回止息之乐,所以叫“乐”。因为没有可衡量的法,所以叫“无量”;也因为无法计算它,所以叫“无量”。因为在轮回大海中是不会沉没的依止处,所以叫“依止处”。因为没有贪等执取、没有摄受,所以叫“无所”。应当这样理解这些词的含义。巴利
Gambhīrañāṇagocarato gambhīraṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiṃ vinā passituṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā duppassaṃ. Sabbalokaṃ uttaritvā ṭhitanti uttaraṃ. Natthi etassa uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Samassa sadisassa abhāvena asamaṃ. Paṭibhāgābhāvena appaṭisamaṃ. Uttamaṭṭhena jeṭṭhaṃ, pāsaṃsatamattā vā jeṭṭhaṃ. Saṃsāradukkhaṭṭitehi letabbato leṇaṃ. Tato rakkhaṇato tāṇaṃ. Raṇābhāvena araṇaṃ. Aṅgaṇābhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ. Niddosatāya akācaṃ. Rāgādimalāpagamena vimalaṃ. Catūhi oghehi anajjhottharaṇīyato dīpo. Saṃsāravūpasamasukhatāya sukhaṃ. Pamāṇakaradhammābhāvato appamāṇaṃ, gaṇetuṃ etassa na sakkāti ca appamāṇaṃ. Saṃsārasamudde anosīdanaṭṭhānatāya patiṭṭhā. Rāgādikiñcanābhāvena pariggahābhāvena ca akiñcananti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
在随念僧伽时,“众生的坚实”是指:因为具备戒坚实等种种坚实功德,所以在众生中成为坚实。“众生的醍醐”是指:就像乳制品中最精华的醍醐一样,在众生中成为最精华。“众生的拔出者”是指:正因为具有坚实功德的力量,才应当从众生中被拔出。“众生的门柱”是指:因为功德具有不动的性质,所以是众生的门柱。“众生的香花”是指:因为功德的光辉和芬芳超胜,在众生中就像牲畜的香花一样。巴利
Saṅghānussatiyaṃ sattānaṃ sāroti sīlasārādisāraguṇayogato sattesu sārabhūto. Sattānaṃ maṇḍoti gorasesu sappimaṇḍo viya sattesu maṇḍabhūto. Sāraguṇavaseneva sattesu uddharitabbato sattānaṃ uddhāro. Niccalaguṇatāya sattānaṃ esikā. Guṇasobhāsurabhibhāvena sattānaṃ pasūnaṃ surabhi kusumanti attho.
在种种功德当中,慧是最高、最首要的;戒能成为使慧光显发的因,所以说戒是“最高首要的庄严”。对于在戒上圆满行持的人,并不存在未成就的功德,所以说“戒是宝藏,因为它能超越一切恶趣”。这个含义应当依据《若希望经》(中部1.64等)来说明。另外还说:“诸比丘,具戒者的心之愿求能够成就,因为清净的缘故。”(长部3.337;相应部4.352;增支部8.35)所谓“技艺”,指弓箭等技艺。所谓“财谷”,指可作为财富受用之物。所谓“因法观察性”,是指以止观等法去观察的状态。所谓“以观察为义”,是说就像站在七层楼阁等处一样,立足于戒之后,能够以神通智眼观察世间。戒也随转于一切地,因为四地善法也随顺它而转。其余部分容易明白。巴利
Guṇesu uttamaṅgaṃ paññā tassā upasobhāhetutāya sīlaṃ uttamaṅgopasobhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlesu paripūrakārino anijjhantā nāma guṇā natthīti ‘‘nidhānañca sīlaṃ sabbadobhaggasamatikkamanaṭṭhenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayañca attho ākaṅkheyyasuttena (ma. ni. 1.64 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ijjhati, bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.337; saṃ. ni. 4.352; a. ni. 8.35). Sippanti dhanusippaṃ. Dhaññanti dhanāyitabbaṃ. Dhammavolokanatāyāti samathavipassanādidhammassa volokanabhāvena . Volokanaṭṭhenāti sattabhūmakādipāsāde viya sīle ṭhatvā abhiññācakkhunā lokassa voloketuṃ sakkāti vuttaṃ. Sabbabhūmānuparivatti ca sīlaṃ catubhūmakakusalassāpi tadanuvattanato. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
第11章 施设运载分别注释巴利
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
39 39. 其中,什么是施设句?就是施设句的分别。这里,什么是施设呢?回答说:即自然谈说的开示。这话的意思是:不像开示句等那样,先去特别确定味等词义,而是世尊以本性说法的方式所作的开示。对这种法的安立,就是施设句。又因为世尊是随着所化众生心相续的不同情况,把心中想要表达的意义安置下来,所以叫安置。这个句既能以种种方式让人知道被称为苦等的部分,又能让人毫无混杂地安立它们,因此称为安置施设。以上就是对自然谈说的开示这一简要说法。为了详细分别这个简要说过的意义,又问:什么是自然谈说的开示?接着就从四圣谛等开始解说。巴利
39.Tatthakatamo paññattihāroti paññattihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kā panāyaṃ paññattīti? Āha ‘‘yā pakatikathāya desanā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā desanāhārādayo viya assādādipadatthavisesaniddhāraṇaṃ akatvā bhagavato sābhāvikadhammakathāya desanā. Yā tassā paññāpanā, ayaṃ paññattihāro. Yasmā pana sā bhagavato tathā tathā veneyyasantāne yathādhippetamatthaṃ nikkhipatīti nikkhepo. Tassa cāyaṃ hāro dukkhādisaṅkhāte bhāge pakārehi ñāpeti, asaṅkarato vā ṭhapeti, tasmā ‘‘nikkhepapaññattī’’ti vutto. Iti pakatikathāya desanāti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajituṃ ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘cattāri saccānī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“这是苦”——这是一种施设。对于具有坚硬、触碍等自性的色法与非色法,虽然它们依过去等差别而分成无数种类,但不加区分,以逼迫、有为、烧灼、变易这一共性,通过鄙劣性等角度,作为将它们整体执取的原因,这就是施设。那这是什么施设呢?是依名称施设而起的、由彼所生的施设。另有人说:“就是伴有表识变化的声音。”依照这一方法,应在各处了知施设之义。“五蕴”等,则是显示这种施设所执取的对象。所谓“十根”,就是八种色根、意根、受根,共这十根。因为领受的共性,受被立为一根;信等道支也是如此。巴利
Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ paññattīti kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve rūpārūpadhamme atītādivasena anekabhedabhinne abhinditvā pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhatāsāmaññena yā kucchitabhāvādimukhena ekajjhaṃ gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā paññatti, kā pana sāti? Nāmapaññattinibandhanā tajjāpaññatti. ‘‘Viññattivikārasahito saddo evā’’ti apare. Iminā nayena tattha tattha paññattiattho veditabbo. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ khandhāna’’ntiādinā tassā paññattiyā upādānaṃ dasseti. Dasannaṃ indriyānanti aṭṭha rūpindriyāni manindriyaṃ vedanindriyanti evaṃ dasannaṃ. Anubhavanasāmaññena hi vedanā ekamindriyaṃ katā, tathā saddhādayo ca maggapakkhiyāti.
“团食”:这是按事物本身来作的说明,因为被捏成团状才叫团食。它指的是众生用来维持生命的那个营养素。这个营养素是第八个色法——食素色的摄取,所以叫食。“有”:因为没有被道断除,所以存在。“贪”:因为具有染着的性质,所以是贪。“喜”:因为具有欢喜的性质,所以是喜。“渴爱”:因为具有渴求的性质,所以是渴爱。这些全都是贪的别名。“识安住并生长于彼处”:使业快速运行之后,具备牵引结生的能力,因此识既安住又生长。“于彼处”:指三界轮回中的处所;或者,在上面每一个词句里,这个“于彼处”都适用。“于彼处有行的增长”:这是就安住在此异熟轮中、能成为未来增长之因的那些行而说的,即“于彼处有未来再生的再生”——在某个地方有未来再生的再生。“于彼处有未来的生、老、死”:在纳受结生之处,有以诸蕴再生为特征的生,有以成熟为特征的老,有以坏灭为特征的死。这就是苦与集的生起施设:以上所说的开示,是苦圣谛和集圣谛的生起施设,也是异熟轮中的行以渴爱为缘这一解说的用意所在。巴利
Kabaḷaṃ karīyatīti kabaḷīkāroti vatthuvasena ayaṃ niddeso. Yāya ojāya sattā yāpenti, tassāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakassa rūpassa āharaṇato āhāro. Atthīti maggena asamucchinnatāya vijjati. Rāgoti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Nandanaṭṭhena nandī. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā. Sabbānetāni lobhasseva nāmāni. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva viññāṇaṃ viruḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ, sabbattha vā purimapurimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti ye imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyatiṃ vaḍḍhanahetukā saṅkhārā, te sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi. Atthi tattha āyatiṃjātijarāmaraṇanti yattha paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ, tattha khandhānaṃ abhinibbattilakkhaṇā jāti, paripākalakkhaṇā jarā, bhedanalakkhaṇaṃ maraṇañca atthi. Ayaṃ pabhāvapaññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa cāti ayaṃ yathāvuttā desanā dukkhasaccassa samudayasaccassa ca samuṭṭhānapaññatti, vipākavaṭṭassa saṅkhārānañca taṇhāpaccayaniddesatoti adhippāyo.
没有贪,因为通过修习最上道已经彻底断除,所以贪不存在。如果没有贪,识在那里不安住、不生长,意思是:由于没有让业速行之后牵引结生的能力,所以识既不安住也不生长。这个含义应当依照前面所说的相反方式来理解。巴利
Natthi rāgoti aggamaggabhāvanāya samucchinnattā natthi ce rāgo. Appatiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ aviruḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāyābhāvena appatiṭṭhitañceva aviruḷhañcāti vuttapaṭipakkhanayena attho veditabbo.
“这是遍知施设”等说法,是在说明:道的正见只靠一次现观,就在四圣谛中生起。这是修习施设:对依门和所缘而在六门中生起的诸法作无常随观,这就是道的修习施设。灭施设,是灭的施设:对被称为“障覆”的渴爱,以道作无余灭的施设。生起施设:是对已生起者的安立。处所施设:是对位置的安立。提取施设:是引出的施设。所谓“卵”,是指在牛等伤口处,被蓝蝇产下的卵,名为卵。在这里,对某个生起它的有情来说,因为它成为那有情损害与灾难的原因,所以就像卵一样,也就是烦恼;对它们的击破施设,就是根除施设。巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ pariññāpaññattī’’tiādinā ekābhisamayavaseneva maggasammādiṭṭhi catūsu ariyasaccesu pavattatīti dasseti. Ayaṃ bhāvanāpaññattīti ayaṃ dvārārammaṇehi chadvārappavattanadhammānaṃ aniccānupassanā maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Nirodhapaññatti nirodhassāti rodhasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya maggena anavasesanirodhapaññatti. Uppādapaññattīti uppannassa paññāpanā. Okāsapaññattīti ṭhānassa paññāpanā. Āhaṭanāpaññattīti nīharaṇapaññatti. Āsāṭikānanti gunnaṃ vaṇesu nīlamakkhikāhi ṭhapitaaṇḍakā āsāṭikā nāma. Ettha yassa uppannā, tassa sattassa anayabyasanahetutāya āsāṭikā viyāti āsāṭikā, kilesā, tesaṃ āsāṭikānaṃ. Abhinighātapaññattīti samugghātapaññatti.
41 41. 这样,通过流转与还灭这一门径,也就是通过思惟取蕴这一门径,在诸谛中显示了施设的分别之后,现在为了以三转的方式显示,便开始说“比丘们,此是苦”等。其中,以见的含义称为“眼”,以如实了知的含义称为“智”,以通达的含义称为“慧”,以已知的含义称为“明”,以照耀的含义称为“光”——这一切都只是慧的同义词。这是同义词施设。作证施设,就是现前所作的施设。巴利
41. Evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭamukhena sammasanaupādānakkhandhamukheneva saccesu paññattivibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni teparivaṭṭavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ ‘dukkha’nti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ. Paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena paññā. Viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Obhāsanaṭṭhena āloko. Sabbaṃ paññāvevacanameva. Ayaṃ vevacanapaññatti. Sacchikiriyāpaññattīti paccakkhakaraṇapaññatti.
在“已衡量与未衡量”这首偈颂里,因为对多数人来说它是现前可见的,所以被衡量、被限定,称为“已衡量”,也就是欲界。不是已衡量的,就是“未衡量”;因为世间没有别的业能和它相比,所以叫“未衡量”,指的是大业。或者说,欲界业和色界业是“已衡量”,无色界业是“未衡量”;或者说,果报少的业是“已衡量”,果报多的业是“未衡量”。依它而生起,所以叫“生起”,也就是成为生起的因。“生命行”,就是能再形成后有、再造来生的东西。“舍弃”,就是放舍。“牟尼”,指佛陀牟尼。“内心喜悦”,就是乐于自己内在的喜悦。“入定”,是依近行定和安止定而入定。“像铠甲一样突破”,就是像冲破铠甲一样突破。 “自身所生”,就是从自己身上生起的烦恼。这段话的意思是:他以“有果报”之义叫“生起”,以“能形成后有”之义叫“生命行”,这样得名的、称为已衡量与未衡量的世间业,全都舍弃了;就像在战场前线的大勇士冲破铠甲一样,内心喜悦、已经入定的人,突破了从自身生起的烦恼。巴利
Tulamatulañcāti gāthāya pacurajanānaṃ paccakkhabhāvato tulitaṃ paricchinnanti tulaṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ. Na tulanti atulaṃ, tulaṃ vā sadisamassa aññaṃ lokiyakammaṃ natthīti atulaṃ, mahaggatakammaṃ. Kāmāvacararūpāvacarakammaṃ vā tulaṃ, arūpāvacaraṃ atulaṃ, appavipākaṃ vā tulaṃ. Bahuvipākaṃ atulaṃ. Sambhavati etenāti sambhavaṃ, sambhavahetubhūtaṃ. Bhavasaṅkhāraṃ punabbhavasaṅkharaṇakaṃ. Avassajīti vissajjesi. Munīti buddhamuni. Ajjhattaratoti niyakajjhattarato . Samāhitoti upacārappanāsamādhivasena samāhito. Abhindi kavacamivāti kavacaṃ viya bhindi. Attasambhavanti attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ bhavābhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena bhavasaṅkhāranti ca laddhanāmaṃ tulātulasaṅkhātaṃ lokiyakammañca ossaji, saṅgāmasīse mahāyodho kavacaṃ viya attasambhavaṃ kilesañca ajjhattarato samāhito hutvā abhindīti.
或者,“衡量”就是正在称量、判断。“未衡量与生起”:指涅槃和生起。“生命行”:就是导向生命的业。“牟尼舍弃”:佛陀牟尼以“五蕴是无常的,它们的灭尽就是涅槃,是常”等道理(与《无碍解道》3.38 义理相同)来衡量,看到生命中的过患和涅槃中的利益之后,以能灭尽业的圣道,舍弃了作为诸蕴根本的“生命行”之业。怎样舍弃呢?靠“内心喜悦”。因为他依观修而内心喜悦,依止修而心得定,就像铠甲一样包裹着自身、因从自身生起而名为“自身所生”的一切烦恼,他全都击破了。烦恼不存在时,业因为不再结生,就叫做被舍弃了;意思是说,由于烦恼的灭尽,他舍弃了业。巴利
Atha vā tulanti tulayanto tīrento. Atulañca sambhavanti nibbānañceva sambhavañca. Bhavasaṅkhāranti bhavagāmikammaṃ. Avassaji munīti ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā, tesaṃ nirodho nibbānaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.38 atthato samānaṃ) nayena tulayanto buddhamuni bhave ādīnavaṃ nibbāne ānisaṃsañca disvā taṃ khandhānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ? Ajjhattarato. So hi vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato samathavasena samāhito kavacamiva attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ attani sambhavattā ‘‘attasambhava’’nti laddhanāmaṃ sabbaṃ kilesajātaṃ abhindi, kilesābhāve kammaṃ appaṭisandhikattā avassaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, kilesābhāvena kammaṃ jahīti attho (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.169; udā. aṭṭha. 51).
由于不存在脱离有为界和无为界的应遍知法,所以(经文)说“已衡量……诸法”。以此说明法辨析已经讲述,于是(注释)说“安立施设是法辨析”。针对有行中属于集谛的部分,说“遍舍施设”。依苦谛方面,说“遍知施设”。依内乐超越等持的具足状态,说“修习施设是身至念”。然而应当知道,依内乐性超越等持的状态,说“住立施设是心一境性”。“厌离施设是心的”:指以舍弃寿行的方式,心导向(涅槃)的施设。“取着施设”:即执取的施设。“具一切智性”:即成为正自觉者的状态。以此显示,非正自觉者没有寿行的舍弃。为了显示世尊因无烦恼而舍弃业,说“破除施设”,即对无明卵壳的施设。巴利
Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhātuvinimuttassa abhiññeyyassa abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘tula…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Tena dhammapaṭisambhidā vuttā hotīti āha – ‘‘nikkhepapaññatti dhammapaṭisambhidāyā’’ti. Bhavasaṅkhāre samudayapakkhiyaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pariccāgapaññattī’’ti. Dukkhasaccapakkhiyavasena ‘‘pariññāpaññattī’’ti. Samādhānavisiṭṭhassa ajjhattaratabhāvassa vasena ‘‘bhāvanāpaññatti kāyagatāya satiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ajjhattaratatāvisiṭṭhassa pana samādhānassa vasena ‘‘ṭhitipaññatti cittekaggatāyā’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhinibbidāpaññatti cittassāti āyusaṅkhārossajjanavasena cittassa abhinīharaṇapaññatti. Upādānapaññattīti gahaṇapaññatti. Sabbaññutāyāti sammāsambuddhabhāvassa. Etena asammāsambuddhassa āyusaṅkhārossajjanaṃ natthīti dasseti. Kilesābhāvena bhagavā kammaṃ jahatīti dassento ‘‘padālanāpaññatti avijjaṇḍakosāna’’nti āha.
已经着手修观的人,见到了三地的一切苦,也见到了这苦是从什么因来的——是以什么为因,就见到贪爱是它的因。这样的人,怎么可能还以任何方式对有所依的诸欲、烦恼欲产生倾向、靠近呢?这种倾向根本不存在。为什么?因为已经知道世间诸欲就是结缚。在这个世间,没有像诸欲那样的系缚。世尊也这样说过:“智者不说那是坚固的系缚……”等等。所以,以诸行有触碰之义而了知它是结缚之后,具念的人应当为了调伏它们而修学。意思是:由修习身至念而具念,为了令那些欲寂静下来,应当在三学中不放逸地修学。巴利
Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidānanti yo āraddhavipassako sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ dukkhaṃ adakkhi passi, tañca yatonidānaṃ yaṃ hetukaṃ, tampissa kāraṇabhāvena taṇhaṃ passi. Kāmesu so jantu kathaṃnameyyāti so evaṃ paṭipanno puriso savatthukāmesu kilesakāmesu yena pakārena nameyya abhinameyya, so pakāro natthi. Kasmā? Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā. Yasmā imasmiṃ loke kāmasadisaṃ bandhanaṃ natthi. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘na taṃ daḷhaṃ bandhanamāhu dhīrā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 345; saṃ. ni. 1.121; netti. 106; peṭako 15), tasmā saṅkhāre āsajjanaṭṭhena saṅgoti viditvā. Tesaṃ satīmā vinayāya sikkheti kāyagatāsatiyogena satimā tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vūpasamāya tīsupi sikkhāsu appamatto sikkheyyāti attho.
所谓“同义语施设”,就是对蕴等法的同义名称施设。而由于与“无见”这个词相关联,所以接着说“这也是对苦的遍知施设”。“从敌对角度而见的施设”,意思是由于能产生不利与损害,所以从敌对的角度来说明。“如猛火聚”,比喻像正在炽燃的大火堆一样。“如悬崖与蛇”,就是悬崖的比喻和蛇的比喻。巴利
Vevacanapaññattīti khandhādīnaṃ vevacanapaññatti. Adakkhīti pana padena sambandhattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti cā’’ti. Paccatthikato dassanapaññattīti anatthajananato paccatthikato dassanapaññatti. Pāvakakappāti jalitaaggikkhandhasadisā. Papātauragopamāti papātūpamāuragopamā ca.
世间被愚痴所束缚,是说这个世间被以无明为因的各种结缚捆绑住了。看起来像是贤善的样子:意思是说,即使内心已经败坏,但靠着幻术和欺诳把真实面目遮盖起来,就会把自己表现得好像天生贤善一样。愚者为依所缚,为黑暗所笼罩:那愚者之所以会那样显现,是因为他被愚痴的黑暗所笼罩,在五欲功德上看不到过患,被烦恼的造作所捆绑。这样的愚者在智者看来就是不祥的象征,他现前时就像个没有福运的人。这一切都是因为愚者心中有贪等障执。而对于以智慧之眼观见的智者来说,则没有障执。这是简要之义。以愚痴为首而摄取了颠倒,所以说:“这是对颠倒的言说施设。”颠倒的施设,是指以颠倒的方式显现时的施设。巴利
Mohasambandhano lokoti ayaṃ loko avijjāhetukehi saṃyojanehi bandho. Bhabbarūpova dissatīti vipannajjhāsayopi māyāya sāṭheyyena ca paṭicchāditasabhāvo bhabbajātikaṃ viya attānaṃ dasseti. Upadhibandhano bālo, tamasā parivāritoti tassa pana bālassa tathā dassane sammohatamasā parivāritattā kāmaguṇesu anādīnavadassitāya kilesābhisaṅkhārehi bandhattā. Tathā bhūto cāyaṃ bālo paṇḍitānaṃ assirī viya khāyati alakkhiko eva hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ bālassa sato rāgādikiñcanato. Paṇḍitassa pana paññācakkhunā passato natthi kiñcananti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Mohasīsena vipallāsā gahitāti āha – ‘‘desanāpaññatti vipallāsāna’’nti. Viparītapaññattīti viparītākārena upaṭṭhahamānassa paññāpanā.
“有涅槃”这种说法,只是沙门和婆罗门的一种口头说法而已。“没有涅槃”这种说法,则是那些走错路的人的错误主张,他们认为涅槃在究竟真实的意义上根本找不到、不存在。为了破除这些错误说法,世尊说:“比丘们,存在不生、非有、非造作、无为的法。”为了说明其中的道理,又说了“比丘们,如果不是这样……”等等。这段话的意思是:比丘们,如果无为界不存在,那么在这里,一切有为法的出离就不可能。因为以涅槃为所缘而生起的正见等圣道法,能彻底断除一切烦恼,从此三界的轮回就不再运转。巴利
Atthi nibbānanti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vācāvatthumattameva. Natthi nibbānanti paramatthato alabbhamānasabhāvattāti vippaṭipannānaṃ micchāvādaṃ bhañjituṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti. Tattha hetuṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no cetaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – bhikkhave, yadi asaṅkhatā dhātu na abhavissa, na idha sabbassa saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṃ siyā. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānā sammādiṭṭhiādayo maggadhammā anavasesakilese samucchindanti, tato tividhassapi vaṭṭassa appavattīti.
这里要表达的意思是:就像欲界和色界还有更高的层次、属于应当被彻底了知的对象,而它们的对立面——那种能去除它们自性的出离——是可以被了知的;同样,对于那些具有相同自性的有为法,也应当存在一种出离,它以对立面的形态、以去除这些法自性的本质而存在,这就是无为界。而且,以有为法为所缘的观智和随顺智,并不能以断除的方式舍弃烦恼;以世俗谛为所缘的初禅等智慧,也只是暂时压伏烦恼,并不能真正断除。能够彻底断除、彻底舍弃烦恼的,是圣道智;圣道智的所缘必须与有为法和世俗谛相反,那就是无为界。同样,“涅槃”这个词在某些语境中应当理解为不颠倒的含义,因为它有以近似比喻来使用的情况,就像“狮子音”这个词一样。巴利
Tatthāyamadhippāyo – yathā pariññeyyatāya sauttarānaṃ kāmānaṃ rūpānañca paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tabbidhurasabhāvaṃ nissaraṇaṃ paññāyati, evaṃ taṃsabhāvānaṃ saṅkhabhadhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtena tabbidhuratāsabhāvena nissaraṇena bhavitabbaṃ, yañca taṃ nissaraṇaṃ. Sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Kiñca bhiyyo? Saṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Api ca anulomañāṇaṃ kilese na samucchedavasena pajahituṃ sakkoti. Sammutisaccārammaṇampi paṭhamajjhānādīsu ñāṇaṃ vikkhambhanamattameva karoti, kilesānaṃ na samucchedaṃ, samucchedappahānakarañca ariyamaggañāṇaṃ, tassa saṅkhatadhammasammutisaccaviparītena ārammaṇena bhavitabbaṃ, sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Tathā nibbāna-saddo katthaci visaye aviparītattho veditabbo, upacāravuttisabbhāvato, yathā taṃ ‘‘sīhasaddo’’ti.
另外,世尊说“比丘们,存在不生、非有、非造作、无为”(《优陀那》73)这句话,其含义是不颠倒的,因为这是世尊所说的。凡是世尊所说的,其含义都不颠倒。正如“一切行无常,一切行是苦,一切法无我”(《中部》1.353, 356;《论事》753;《小义释·阿逸多学生问》4;《无碍解道》1.31;《导论》5;《法句》277-279)那样,同样应当通过理证来了知:无为界在胜义上是真实存在的。何必还要做这种理证思考呢?因为世尊在许多经文中开示了涅槃界的胜义真实性,比如“比丘们,存在不生、非有、非造作、无为”(《优陀那》73),“无因缘的法是无为法”(《法集论·二法论母》7-8),以及“比丘们,我将为你们宣说无为法以及趣向无为的道路”(《相应部》4.366-367, 377)等等。其中,“引摄施设”是指从对立面来安立引向解脱的因;“照明施设”是指为了成立所认定的义理而作的阐明。其余一切都很容易理解。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti (udā. 73) vacanaṃ aviparītatthaṃ, bhagavatā bhāsitattā. Yañhi bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ aviparītatthaṃ. Yathā taṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.353, 356; kathā. 753; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4; paṭi. ma. 1.31; netti. 5; dha. pa. 277-279), evampi yuttivasena asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā paramatthato sabbhāvo veditabbo. Kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāya? Yasmā bhagavatā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhatanti (udā. 73), appaccayā dhammā asaṅkhatā dhammāti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8) ca, asaṅkhatañca vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi asaṅkhatagāminiñca paṭipada’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.366-367, 377) ca anekehi suttapadehi nibbānadhātuyā paramatthato sabbhāvo desitoti. Tattha upanayanapaññattīti paṭipakkhato hetuupanayanassa paññāpanā. Jotanāpaññattīti paṭiññātassa atthassa siddhiyā pakāsanāpaññatti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyameva.
12. 粗食分别的注释巴利
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
42 42. 其中,什么是“入的理趣”?这就是对“入的理趣”的分析。其中,“无学的解脱”是指在三界中离贪的无学果解脱。“那些就是”是指无学解脱中的信等诸法。“这是通过诸根而入”是说,依靠在无学解脱中被确定的信等诸根,通过解说来进入。巴利
42.Tattha katamo otaraṇo hāroti otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha asekkhā vimuttīti ayaṃ tedhātuke vītarāgatā asekkhā phalavimutti. Tāniyevāti tāni asekkhāyaṃ vimuttiyaṃ saddhādīni . Ayaṃ indriyehi otaraṇāti asekkhāya vimuttiyā niddhāritehi saddhādīhi indriyehi saṃvaṇṇanāya otaraṇā.
“五根就是明”,意思是:就像正思惟对正见有帮助一样,信等四根对明(也就是慧蕴)有帮助,所以按照它们被归入慧蕴的角度,说它们就是明。“属于行”是说,在五蕴当中,它们被包含在行蕴里。“那些无漏的行”是在特别指出那个行蕴,因为这里指的是最高的果——阿罗汉果。也正是因为这个原因,它们不是有分。“摄在法界中”是说,在十八界当中,它们属于法界。前面虽然已经说明了无学者的离贪解脱,但为了说明它的修行之道,这里又说了“不观我即是”的见道。为了表明这个意思,才说了“不观我即是”等话。这一切都按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Pañcindriyāni vijjāti sammāsaṅkappo viya sammādiṭṭhiyā upakārakattā paññākkhandhe saddhādīni cattāri indriyāni vijjāya upakārakattā saṅgaṇhanavasena vuttāni. Saṅkhārapariyāpannānīti pañcasu khandhesu saṅkhārakkhandhe antogadhāni. Ye saṅkhārā anāsavāti taṃ saṅkhārakkhandhaṃ viseseti, aggaphalassa adhippetattā. Tato eva ca no bhavaṅgā. Dhammadhātusaṅgahitāti aṭṭhārasadhātūsu dhammadhātusaṅgahitā. Yadipi pubbe vītarāgatā asekkhā vimutti dassitā, tassā pana paṭipattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ ahamasmīti anānupassī’’ti dassanamaggo idha vuttoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ ahamasmīti anānupassī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbaṃ vuttanayameva.
43 有依者的动摇,是指由于贪和见的力量,业无法稳定下来。死此生彼,是指一次又一次地死去和再生。为了揭示“依止”这个词里所含的依赖之义,他说“所谓依止”。“贪依止”就是对贪的执著。因为对贪行者来说,贪就是他的立足处,所以才那样说。见依止也应当这样理解。“染著者的思”:因为思是主导,所以以思为首来说,说的其实就是贪。因此他说“这是贪依止”。然而,由于颠倒的执著只有在愚痴强盛时才会生起,所以又说“愚痴者的思,这是见依止”。巴利
43.Nissitassa calitanti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kammaṃ anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Cutūpapātoti aparāparaṃ cavanaṃ upapatanañca. Nissitapade labbhamānaṃ nissayanaṃ uddharanto āha – ‘‘nissayo nāmā’’ti. Taṇhānissayoti taṇhābhiniveso. So hi taṇhācaritassa patiṭṭhābhāvena tathā vutto. Evaṃ diṭṭhinissayopi daṭṭhabbo. Rattassa cetanāti cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāsīsena taṇhaṃ eva vadati. Tenevāha – ‘‘ayaṃ taṇhānissayo’’ti. Yasmā pana viparītābhiniveso mohassa balavabhāve eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘yā mūḷhassa cetanā, ayaṃ diṭṭhinissayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
像这样,先以思为主导讲了贪和见,现在为了在这里毫不含糊地直接把握思本身,就说“然而,思就是行”。对于染著者的受,这就是乐受——这是依据对乐受有贪的随眠而说的。同样,对于不苦不乐受有无明的随眠,他说“愚痴者的受,这就是不苦不乐受”。这里是以受为主导来说思。于贪,就是指贪。于见,就是指见。或者,就像其他诸法以贪为依止时,这个人就被称为依止于贪;同样,当贪成为其他诸法的缘时,这个人也被称为依止于贪,因此说“不依止于贪”。巴利
Evaṃ cetanāsīsena taṇhādiṭṭhiyo vatvā idāni tattha nippariyāyena cetanaṃyeva gaṇhanto ‘‘cetanā pana saṅkhārā’’ti āha. Yā rattassa vedanā, ayaṃ sukhā vedanāti sukhāya vedanāya rāgo anusetīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjā anusetīti āha – ‘‘yā sammūḷhassa vedanā, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti. Idha vedanāsīsena cetanā vuttā. Taṇhāyāti taṇhaṃ. Diṭṭhiyāti diṭṭhiṃ. Yathā vā sesadhammānaṃ taṇhāya nissayabhāve puggalo taṇhāya nissitoti vuccati. Evaṃ taṇhāya sesadhammānaṃ paccayabhāve puggalo taṇhāya nissitoti vuccatīti āha – ‘‘taṇhāya anissito’’ti.
轻安是指内心躁动的平息。身轻安是依止身体的轻安。心轻安是依止心的轻安。然而,这种躁动的平息只有在身心感到快乐时才会明显显现,因此为了说明以果为名的轻安是不动乱的因,才说“身轻安者”等。“他”是指这样心已解脱的漏尽者。“于色灭尽而解脱”是指在色的灭尽,也就是涅槃中得解脱。“不认为有”:不会以贪或见的执取认为“我与世间是常”。“不认为无”:不会执取“无常”。“认为亦有亦无”:不会执取“一部分常、一部分无常”。“认为非有非无”:不会以诡辩搪塞的方式执取。“甚深”:因为没有让心变得肤浅的烦恼,所以甚深。“寂止”:由于平息了“有”等执取的烦恼,而般涅槃、清凉。巴利
Passaddhīti darathapaṭippassambhanā. Kāyikāti karajakāyasannissitā. Cetasikāti cittasannissitā. Yasmā pana sā darathapaṭippassaddhi kāyacittānaṃ sukhe sati pākaṭā hoti, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ kāyikaṃ sukha’’ntiādinā phalūpacārena vuttāya passaddhiyā natiabhāvassa kāraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘passaddhakāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soti evaṃ vimuttacitto khīṇāsavo. Rūpasaṅkhaye vimuttoti rūpānaṃ saṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimutto. Atthītipi na upetīti sassato attā ca loko cātipi taṇhādiṭṭhiupayena na upeti na gaṇhāti. Natthīti asassatoti. Atthi natthīti ekaccaṃ sassataṃ ekaccaṃ asassatanti. Nevatthi no natthīti amarāvikkhepavasena. Gambhīroti uttānabhāvahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena gambhīro. Nibbutoti atthītiādinā upagamanakilesānaṃ vūpasamena parinibbuto sītibhūto.
“来此”是指从另一个世界来到这里。“去”是指从这个世界去往另一个世界。那又叫做“再有”,所以说“死后再生”。“此与彼”展示的是门和所缘的法,因此用“在两者之间”这句话来展示在门中生起的法,他说“在依触而集起的诸法中”。它的意思是:在与触一起、以触为因集起、生成的识、受、想、思、寻、伺等诸法中。“不见我”:正因为那些法本身就是无我的,所以在那里面不见有我。通过“厌离、由离贪而解脱”这些词句,展示出世间法的缘起性质。为了说明这个道理,又以“出世间的”等说法,以方便说说明戒等道支也具有那样的性质。巴利
Idhāgatīti paralokato idha āgati. Gatīti idhalokato paralokagamanaṃ. Taṃ pana punabbhavoti āha ‘‘peccabhavo’’ti. Idha huranti dvārārammaṇadhammā dassitāti ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padena dvārappavattadhamme dassento ‘‘phassasamuditesu dhammesū’’ti āha. Tassattho – phassena saddhiṃ phassena kāraṇabhūtena ca samuditesu sambhūtesu viññāṇavedanāsaññācetanāvitakkavicārādidhammesu. Attānaṃ na passatīti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ anattabhāveneva tattha attānaṃ na passati. Virajjati virāgā vimuccatīti padehi lokuttaradhammānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ dassento tadatthatāya sīlādīnampi pariyāyena tabbhāvamāha ‘‘lokuttaro’’tiādinā.
44 “与名相应”是指与名结合。“有余涅槃界”指的是阿拉汉果。而这也是以慧为主的,所以说“有余涅槃界即是明”。其余一切都容易理解。巴利
44.Nāmasampayuttoti nāmena missito. Saupādisesā nibbānadhātūti arahattaphalaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañca paññāpadhānanti āha – ‘‘saupādisesā nibbānadhātu vijjāti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ uttānameva.
净化方法的分别解说巴利
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
45 45. 其中,什么是净化方法?就是净化方法的分别解说。所谓世尊净化词句,是指世尊在说“世间被无明覆盖”时——这是针对具寿阿耆多所问的“世间被什么覆盖?”而说的——通过解答其含义,便称为净化词句。但这并不是说开始,他尚未净化开始,因为想要了解的含义尚未完成。所谓“清净的开始”,是指想要了解的含义已经被阐明,因此开始得到净化,这就是它的意思。对于陷入无知或生起疑惑的人来说,在他们提问的时候,所问的领域就像未经清理的稠密丛林,像崎岖难行的险路,黑暗而不明。然而,当世尊,或智者,或世尊的声闻弟子们,在无句处示句,解开纠缠、清除丛林而解答问题时,那领域就如同被一头大香象踏破并摧毁的丛林地带,黑暗消散,清晰现前,这时便称为被净化了。巴利
45.Tattha katamo sodhano hāroti sodhanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha bhagavā padaṃ sodhetīti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 58, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2) vadanto bhagavā – ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1) āyasmatā ajitena pucchāvasena vuttaṃ padaṃ sodheti nāma, tadatthassa vissajjanato. No ca ārambhanti na tāva ārambhaṃ sodheti, ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa apariyositattā. Suddho ārambhoti ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pabodhitattā sodhito ārambhoti attho. Aññāṇapakkhandānaṃ dveḷhakajātānaṃ vā pucchanakāle pucchitānaṃ pucchāvisayo avijaṭaṃ mahāgahanaṃ viya mahāduggaṃ viya ca andhakāraṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti. Yadā ca bhagavatā paṇḍitehi vā bhagavato sāvakehi apade padaṃ dassentehi nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvā pañhe vissajjite mahatā gandhahatthinā abhibhavitvā obhaggapadālito gahanappadeso viya vigatandhakāro vibhūto upaṭṭhahamāno visodhito nāma hoti.
第14章 决意方法的分别解说巴利
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
46 46. 关于“决意的方法”的分别解说。其中,“应当这样持取”:应当依据单一性和差异性所构成的共相与别相来持取,而不应对它作任何区分,这就是意图所在。不应作区分的原因,已经在解说分的注释中说过。“道”:追寻、求取种种果,所以叫“道”;或者被求果的人所追寻、所求取,所以叫“道”。“地狱”:以没有喜乐、没有滋味的含义,所以叫“地狱”。“畜生”:向上走之后又横向弯曲而行,所以叫“畜生”;畜生就是畜生道。“饿鬼”:因为具有饿鬼的状态,所以叫“饿鬼”;从此世死后而去的状态,就是其含义。饿鬼就是饿鬼界。“阿修罗”:不饮酒、不照耀、不光辉,所以叫“阿修罗”;阿修罗就是阿修罗道。“天界”:以天界的色等诸法而善为殊胜,所以叫“天界”。“人”:因为人的心识增盛,所以叫“人”。“涅槃”:渴爱叫做“林”,那里面没有它,所以叫“涅槃”。“趣向地狱者”:趣向地狱。“其余诸句也是同样的道理。”“阿修罗道”:为投生阿修罗道所做之利益,即产生阿修罗种姓的意思。“生天者”:能导致生天。“人生者”:趣向人道,即趣向人界。“择灭”:通过择、通过修习对治法而灭,或者对治法如此不转起时,对可能生起者以对治法转起故而不生起。“非择灭”:有为法的自性灭,即刹那灭的意思。巴利
46.Tatthakatamo adhiṭṭhāno hāroti adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha tathā dhārayitabbāti ekattavemattatāsaṅkhātasāmaññavisesamattato dhārayitabbā, na pana tattha kiñci vikappetabbāti adhippāyo. Avikappetabbatāya kāraṇaṃ niddesavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva. Taṃ taṃ phalaṃ maggati gavesatīti maggo, tadatthikehi maggīyati gavesīyatīti vā maggo. Niratiyaṭṭhena nirassādaṭṭhena ca nirayo. Uddhaṃ anugantvā tiriyaṃ añcitāti tiracchānā. Tiracchānāva tiracchānayoni. Petatāya petti, ito pecca gatabhāvoti attho. Petti eva pettivisayo. Na suranti na bhāsanti na dibbantīti asurā. Asurā eva asurayoni. Dibbehi rūpādīhi suṭṭhu aggāti saggā. Manassa ussannatāya manussā. Vānaṃ vuccati taṇhā, taṃ tattha natthīti nibbānaṃ. Nirayaṃ gacchatīti nirayagāmī. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Asurayoniyoti asurayoniyā hito, asurajātinibbattanakoti attho. Saggaṃ gametīti saggagāmiyo. Manussagāmīti manussalokagāmī. Paṭisaṅkhānirodhoti paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhāvanāya nirodho, paṭipakkhe vā tathā appavatte uppajjanārahassa paṭipakkhavuttiyā anuppādo. Appaṭisaṅkhānirodhoti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ sarasanirodho, khaṇikanirodhoti attho.
47 47. “色”是单一性。“依于诸大种”是差异性。“所造色”是单一性。“眼处……乃至……抟食”是差异性。同样,“大种色”是单一性。“地界……乃至……风界”是差异性。“地界”是单一性。“二十种行相”是差异性。“水界”是单一性。“十二种行相”是差异性。“火界”是单一性。“四种行相”是差异性。“风界”是单一性。“六种行相”是差异性。为了说明这个道理,他说“以两种行相把握诸界”等。巴利
47. Rūpanti ekattatā. Bhūtānaṃ upādāyāti vemattatā. Upādārūpanti ekattatā. Cakkhāyatanaṃ…pe… kabaḷīkāro āhāroti vemattatā. Tathā bhūtarūpanti ekattatā. Pathavīdhātu …pe… vāyodhātūti vemattatā. Pathavīdhātūti ekattatā. Vīsati ākārā vemattatā. Āpodhātūti ekattatā. Dvādasa ākārā vemattatā. Tejodhātūti ekattatā. Cattāro ākārā vemattatā. Vāyodhātūti ekattatā. Cha ākārā vemattatāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhi ākārehi dhātuyo pariggaṇhātī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“头发”是指:所谓头发,是位于所执受的身体上、以坚硬为特征、在这个身体中属于地界的一个单独部分。“体毛”……中略……“脑”是指:所谓脑,是位于身体上、以坚硬为特征、在这个身体中属于一个单独部分。这就是它们之间的差别。对于水界等部分中的胆汁等,道理也一样。不过这里有一个特别之处:“由于它”——是由于那被扰乱的火界。“身体发热”——这个身体发热,是因为一日热等状况而变得灼热。“由于它而衰老”——由于它,这个身体衰老,达到根器残缺、力量衰退、皮肤起皱、头发变白等状态。“由于它而燃烧”——由于那被扰乱的火界,这个身体燃烧,而那个人喊着“我烧得慌,我烧得慌”,并盼望用百次精炼的酥油、牛黄、檀香等涂抹,还盼望棕榈扇扇来的风。“由于它,所吃、所喝、所嚼、所尝的得以正确消化”——所吃指米饭等,所喝指饮料等,所嚼指面粉类硬食等,所尝指芒果、熟果、蜂蜜、糖浆等,这些得以正确完全成熟,变成味等而被分解,这就是它的意思。在这里,前三种火界是四因所生,最后一种消化火只是业所生。巴利
Tattha kesāti kesā nāma upādinnakasarīraṭṭhakā kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko pathavīdhātukoṭṭhāso. Lomā nāma…pe… matthaluṅgaṃ nāma sarīraṭṭhakaṃ kakkhaḷalakkhaṇaṃ imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ vemattatā. Āpodhātūtiādikoṭṭhāsesu pittādīsu eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yena cāti yena tejodhātunā kupitena. Santappatīti ayaṃ kāyo santappati ekāhikajarādibhāvena usumajāto hoti. Yena ca jīrīyatīti yena ayaṃ kāyo jarīyati. Indriyavekallataṃ balakkhayaṃ valittacapalitādiñca pāpuṇāti. Yena ca pariḍayhatīti yena kupitena ayaṃ kāyo ḍayhati, so ca puggalo ‘‘ḍayhāmi ḍayhāmī’’ti kandanto satadhotasappigosītacandanādilepanaṃ tālavaṇṭavātañca paccāsīsati. Yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatīti asitaṃ vā odanādi, pītaṃ vā pānakādi, khāyitaṃ vā piṭṭhakhajjakādi, sāyitaṃ vā ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi sammā paripākaṃ gacchati, rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatīti attho. Ettha ca purimā tayo tejodhātū catusamuṭṭhānā. Pacchimo kammasamuṭṭhānova.
上行风:就是引起打嗝、呕吐等动作的向上运行的风。下行风:就是排出大小便等的向下运行的风。腹内肠外风:就是肠子外面的风。腹内肠内风:就是肠子里面的风。肢节随行风:就是沿着血管网络遍布全身各处肢节、引起屈伸等动作的风。入息:就是进入鼻腔的风。出息:就是呼出鼻腔的风。在这里,前面所有这些风都是由四种原因产生的,只有入息和出息是心所产生的。像这样,为了显示它们的差别,分别说明了四界,然后以不净作意来统摄它们,所以说“以这四十二种行相”等等。其中,“不应被执取”就是不应去执取。“由于自性而存在”就是由于自性相而存在。巴利
Uddhaṅgamā vātāti uggārahikkārādipavattakā uddhaṃ ārohanavātā. Adhogamā vātāti uccārapassāvādinīharaṇakā adho orohanavātā. Kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā. Koṭṭhāsayā vātāti antānaṃ antovātā. Aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātāti dhamanijālānusārena sakalasarīre aṅgamaṅgāni anusaṭā samiñjanapasāraṇādinibbattakā vātā. Assāsoti antopavisananāsikavāto. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikavāto. Ettha ca purimā sabbe catusamuṭṭhānā. Assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā eva. Evaṃ vemattatādassanavasena vibhāgena udāhaṭā catasso dhātuyo paṭikkūlamanasikāravasena upasaṃharanto ‘‘imehi dvācattālīsāya ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha na gayhūpaganti na gahaṇayoggaṃ. Sabhāvabhāvatoti sabhāvalakkhaṇato.
像这样开示了不净作意之后,为了再依经文本身说明在这上面的遍察运作,便说“因此,世尊说:凡……”等话。那些内容都很好理解。巴利
Evaṃ paṭikkūlamanasikāraṃ dassetvā puna tattha sammasanacāraṃ pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā yā ceva kho panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
48 48. 这样,通过谛、道、色、法的方面显示了决意的方法之后,现在为了通过无明、明等来显示它,而说了“所谓无明是一性”等。其中,在“于苦无知”等说法里,因为无明不让人们了知、通达苦谛的真实本质与特相,它覆盖、遮蔽而存在着,所以称为“于苦无知”。同样,因为无明不让人们了知、通达苦集、苦灭、苦灭道的真实本质与特相,它覆盖、遮蔽而存在着,所以称为“于苦灭道无知”。前际就是过去时的蕴、处、界。后际就是未来时的蕴、处、界。前际后际就是这两者。此缘性就是诸行等的因,也就是无明等。缘生法就是由无明等所生的诸行等法。巴利
48. Evaṃ saccamaggarūpadhammavasena adhiṭṭhānahāraṃ dassetvā idāni avijjāvijjādīnampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāti ekattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādīsu yasmā avijjā dukkhasaccassa yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tathā yasmā dukkhasamudayassa dukkhanirodhassa dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Pubbanto atītaddhabhūtā khandhāyatanadhātuyo. Aparanto anāgataddhabhūtā. Pubbantāparanto tadubhayaṃ. Idappaccayatā saṅkhārādīnaṃ kāraṇāni avijjādīni. Paṭiccasamuppannā dhammā avijjādīhi nibbattā saṅkhārādidhammā.
在这里,这个无明之所以被称为“在前际无知……乃至对缘生法无知”,是因为它覆盖、遮蔽并阻挡人们去了解和亲证过去诸蕴等直到缘生法的真实本质与特相。这样,这个无明就从作用和生起两方面得到了说明。实际上,这个无明不能让人对这八个方面了解和亲证,所以是从作用上说明的;而当它生起时,也正是在这八个方面生起,所以是从生起上说明的。虽然已经从作用和生起两方面作了说明,但只有在从特相上说明时,才算真正说清楚了,因此为了显示特相,就说出了“无知”等话。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ avijjā yasmā atītānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ yāva paṭiccasamuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘pubbante aññāṇaṃ yāva paṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti vuccati, evāyaṃ avijjā kiccato jātitopi kathitā. Ayañhi imāni aṭṭha ṭhānāni jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detīti kiccato kathitā. Uppajjamānāpi imesu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu uppajjatīti jātito kathitā. Evaṃ kiccato jātito ca kathitāpi lakkhaṇato kathite eva sukathitā hotīti lakkhaṇato dassetuṃ ‘‘aññāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,智把利益与非利益、因与非因、四谛法变成已知的、显现出来的。但无明一旦生起,就不让那(利益与非利益等)成为已知的、显现的,所以从与智对立的角度说,它是“无知”。慧也叫“见”,因为它看见那种行相。而无明一旦生起,就不让看见,所以是“无见”。慧也叫“现观”,因为它现观那种行相。而无明一旦生起,就不让现观,所以是“无现观”。慧也叫“随觉”“正觉”“通达”,因为它随觉、正觉、通达那种行相。而无明一旦生起,就不让随觉、正觉、通达,所以是“无随觉”“无正觉”“无通达”。同样,慧也叫“总察”“别察”“各别察”“平等察”,因为它总察、别察、各别察,平等而正确地观察。而无明一旦生起,就不让那样做,所以也称为“无总察”“无别察”“无各别察”“无平等察”。巴利
Tattha ñāṇaṃ atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ pana avijjā uppajjitvā taṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ na detīti ñāṇapaccanīkato aññāṇaṃ. Dassanantipi paññā, sā hi taṃ ākāraṃ passati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā passituṃ na detīti adassanaṃ. Abhisamayotipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ abhisameti. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ abhisametuṃ na detīti anabhisamayo. Anubodho sambodho paṭivedhotipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ anubujjhati sambujjhati paṭivijjhati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ anubujjhituṃ sambujjhituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detīti ananubodho asambodho appaṭivedho. Tathā sallakkhaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ paccupalakkhaṇaṃ samapekkhaṇantipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhati upalakkhati paccupalakkhati samaṃ sammā ca apekkhati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā tassa tathā kātuṃ na detīti asallakkhaṇaṃ anupalakkhaṇaṃ apaccupalakkhaṇaṃ asamapekkhaṇanti ca vuccati.
他没有做任何现前可见的行为,自己也不加省察就造作行为,所以叫“无现前业”。愚昧者的状态就是愚昧性。愚痴者的状态就是愚痴性。“正知”就是慧,它能清楚地了知利益与非利益、因与非因,以及四谛法。而无明一旦生起,就不让人去了知那个因,所以叫“不正知”。由于迷惑的作用,叫“痴”;由于昏昧的作用,叫“昏昧”;由于迷乱的作用,叫“迷乱”。了知不该了知的,不了知该了知的,所以叫“无明”。在轮回中沉没、陷落,所以叫“无明暴流”。在轮回中把人绑住、系住,所以叫“无明轭”。因为没有被断除,又反复生起,所以叫“无明随眠”。就像埋伏在路上的盗贼劫夺旅人一样,它在心中现起,劫夺善心,所以叫“无明缠”。好比城门口的横闩一落下,人们就进不了城;同样,这个无明横闩一旦落在某人的身见之城上,他通往涅槃的智慧之路就被截断,所以叫“无明闩”。它是不善,也是根,或者说是不善的根,所以叫“不善根”。而这个不善根不是别的,正是这里所说的“痴”,因此“痴不善根”就是对无明含义的单句解释。这些就是差别,这就是无明的种种差别。巴利
Nāssa kiñci paccakkhakammaṃ atthi, sayañca appaccavekkhitvā katakammanti appaccakkhakammaṃ. Dummedhānaṃ bhāvo dummejjhaṃ. Bālānaṃ bhāvo bālyaṃ. Sampajaññanti paññā, sā atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ sampajānāti. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ pajānituṃ na detīti asampajaññaṃ. Mohanavasena moho. Pamohanavasena pamoho. Sammohanavasena sammoho. Avindiyaṃ vindati, vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ ohanati otaratīti avijjogho. Vaṭṭasmiṃ yojetīti avijjāyogo. Appahīnaṭṭhena ceva punappunaṃ uppajjanato ca avijjānusayo. Magge pariyuṭṭhitacorā viya addhike kusalacittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti viluppatīti avijjāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā nagaradvāre palighasaṅkhātāya laṅgiyā patitāya manussānaṃ nagarappaveso pacchijjati, evameva yassa sakkāyanagare ayaṃ patitā, tassa nibbānasampāpakaṃ ñāṇagamanaṃ pacchijjatīti avijjālaṅgī nāma hoti. Akusalañca taṃ mūlañca, akusalānaṃ vā mūlanti akusalamūlaṃ. Taṃ pana na aññaṃ, idhādhippeto mohoti moho akusalamūlanti ayaṃ ekapadiko avijjāya atthuddhāro. Ayaṃ vemattatāti ayaṃ avijjāya vemattatā.
所谓“明”,就是能了知应当了知的东西,所以叫明;以穿透、通达为义,所以叫明;以让人清楚地知道为义,所以叫明。在“于苦中智”等说法里,因为它如实了知、照见、通达苦圣谛的真实本质和特相,所以当苦圣谛作为所缘时,这个智就说为“于苦中智”。其余几个圣谛也是同样的道理。“慧”,是以让种种义理变得清楚明白为义,所以叫慧;或者说,以无常等种种方式来了知诸法,所以叫慧。了知的样态就是了知。能拣择无常等,叫“择”。以种种方式拣择,叫“极择”。能拣择四圣谛之法,叫“择法”。以观察无常等,叫“相察”。以对各别之法一一观察,叫“各别相察”。有智慧的状态叫“聪慧”。善巧的状态叫“善巧”。微细的状态叫“微细”。以显明无常等,叫“显明性”。以思索无常等,叫“思索”。能推察无常等,叫“推察”。“bhūrī”是地的名字,这个也因为细密之义和广博之义而如地一样,所以叫“bhūrī”。因此说:“‘bhūrī’称为地,具备与地相等、广博的慧,所以叫广慧。”另外,“bhūrī”也是慧的同义词。安住于真实之义,所以叫“bhūrī”。巴利
Vijjāti vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. ‘‘Dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu dukkhasaccassa yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānāti passati paṭivijjhatīti dukkhe ariyasacce visayabhūte ñāṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Paññāti tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātīti paññā. Pajānanākāro pajānanā. Aniccādīni vicinatīti vicayo. Pakārehi vicinatīti pavicayo. Catusaccadhamme vicinatīti dhammavicayo. Aniccādīnaṃ sallakkhaṇavasena sallakkhaṇā. Tesaṃyeva pati pati upalakkhaṇavasena paccupalakkhaṇā. Paṇḍitabhāvo paṇḍiccaṃ. Kusalabhāvo kosallaṃ. Nipuṇabhāvo nepuññaṃ. Aniccādīnaṃ vibhāvanavasena vebhabyā. Tesaṃyeva cintanavasena cintā. Aniccādīni upaparikkhatīti upaparikkhā. Bhūrīti pathaviyā nāmaṃ, ayampi saṇhaṭṭhena vitthataṭṭhena ca bhūrī viyāti bhūrī. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhūrī vuccati pathavī, tāya pathavisamāya vitthatāya paññāya samannāgatoti bhūripañño’’ti (mahāni. 27). Api ca bhūrīti paññāyevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhūte atthe ramatīti bhūrī.
慧能磨碎烦恼,所以叫慧;或者以快速掌握、记住为义,所以叫慧。它生起时,能把那个有情引导到利益的行为上,或者引导相应者通达真实相,所以叫引导者。以无常等观照诸法,所以叫观。以正确的方式了知无常等,所以叫正知。就像刺棒是为了把走上邪道的马引回正道,它刺向在邪道上奔跑的虚妄心,把它引回正道,所以像刺棒一样,叫刺棒。在见相中起到根的作用,所以叫根,以慧为根的根就是慧根。不被无明动摇,所以叫慧力。以断烦恼为义,慧就是剑,所以叫慧剑。以高耸为义,慧就是宫殿,所以叫慧宫殿。以照明为义,慧就是光,所以叫慧光。巴利
Kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā. Yassuppajjati, taṃ sattaṃ hitapaṭipattiyaṃ sampayuttaṃ vā yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhe pariṇetīti pariṇāyikā. Aniccādivasena dhamme vipassatīti vipassanā. Sammā pakārehi aniccādīni jānātīti sampajaññaṃ. Uppathapaṭipanne sindhave vīthiāropanatthaṃ patodo viya uppathe dhāvanakūṭacittaṃ vīthiāropanatthaṃ vijjhatīti patodo viyāti patodo. Dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, paññāsaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Avijjāya na kampatīti paññābalaṃ. Kilesacchedanaṭṭhena paññāva satthaṃ paññāsatthaṃ. Accuggataṭṭhena paññāva pāsādo paññāpāsādo. Ālokanaṭṭhena paññāva āloko paññāāloko.
以照耀为义的就是慧,所以叫慧光明。以照亮为义的就是慧,所以叫慧灯。以能带来喜悦为义、以能给予喜悦为义、以能产生喜悦为义、以令人尊重为义、以难以出现为义、以无与伦比为义、以被无上者所受用为义,这些说的就是慧,所以叫慧宝。众生不会因为它而迷惑,或者它自己面对所缘时不会迷惑,所以叫无痴。择法这一项,前面已经说过的意思就是那样。那为什么还要再说一次呢?是为了说明无痴是与痴相对立的。由此就表明了这一点:这个无痴,并不只是与痴不同的法,而是与痴相对立、名为择法的无痴,在这里就是指它。正见,是真实、能导向出离的善见。名为择法的、值得称赞的或善妙的觉支,就是择法觉支。道支,是圣道的支分、原因,所以叫道支。因为包含在圣道之中,所以是摄于道。巴利
Obhāsanaṭṭhena paññāva obhāso paññāobhāso. Pajjotanaṭṭhena paññāva pajjoto paññāpajjoto. Ratikaraṇaṭṭhena ratidāyakaṭṭhena ratijanakaṭṭhena cittīkataṭṭhena dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena atulaṭṭhena anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ca paññāva ratanaṃ paññāratanaṃ. Na tena sattā muyhanti, sayaṃ vā ārammaṇe na muyhatīti amoho. Dhammavicayapadaṃ vuttatthameva. Kasmā panetaṃ puna vuttanti? Amohassa mohapaṭipakkhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti – yvāyaṃ amoho, so na kevalaṃ mohato añño dhammo, mohassa paṭipakkho dhammavicayasaṅkhāto amohova idhādhippetoti. Sammādiṭṭhīti yāthāvaniyyānikakusaladiṭṭhi. Dhammavicayasaṅkhāto pasattho sundaro vā bojjhaṅgoti dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo. Maggaṅganti ariyamaggassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇanti maggaṅgaṃ. Ariyamaggassa antogadhattā maggapariyāpannanti.
无想定:这是通过离想的修习而产生、能带来无想有投生的定。在佛还没出现的时候,有些外道出家,以风遍作为修行所缘,修成第四禅那,出定后看到想的过患:只要有想,就会有断手等痛苦以及一切恐惧,于是这样看待想的过患:“这个想足够了,没有想才是寂静。”然后以离想的方式修成第四禅那,在禅那没有退失的情况下命终,投生到无想有情那里。他们的心,就在死亡心灭去时,在这里便不再生起,在那里只有色蕴生起。巴利
Asaññāsamāpattīti saññāvirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattitā asaññabhavūpapattinibbattanasamāpatti. Anuppanne hi buddhe ekacce titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya saññāya dosaṃ passanti, saññāya sati hatthacchedādidukkhañceva sabbabhayāni ca honti, ‘‘alaṃ imāya saññāya, saññābhāvo santo’’ti evaṃ saññāya dosaṃ passitvā saññāvirāgavasena catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā asaññīsu nibbattanti. Cittaṃ nesaṃ cuticittanirodheneva idha nivattati, rūpakkhandhamattameva tattha nibbattati.
他们就像被弓弦射出的箭,弓弦的力量有多大,它就在虚空中飞多远;同样,这些众生被禅那之力投生到那里后,禅那的力量有多大,他们就住留那么久。可是当禅那之力耗尽时,那里的色蕴就消失,而在这里结生的想就生起。针对这个,才说“能生无想有结生的定”。“显了想定”就是识无边处定。因为它能让初无色定的识显了,也能让初无色定的想显了,所以称为“显了想”。有些人读作“显了色想”,按他们的主张,所谓“显了色定”就是指其余的无色定。其余的那些定很容易理解。巴利
Te yathā nāma jiyāvegukkhitto saro yattako jiyāvego, tattakameva ākāse gacchati, evamevaṃ jhānavegukkhittā upapajjitvā yattako jhānavego, tattakameva kālaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Jhānavege pana parikkhīṇe tattha rūpakkhandho antaradhāyati, idha paṭisandhisaññā uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘asaññabhavūpapattinibbattanasamāpattī’’ti. Vibhūtasaññāsamāpattīti viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpatti. Sā hi paṭhamāruppaviññāṇassa paṭhamāruppasaññāyapi vibhāvanato ‘‘vibhūtasaññā’’ti vuccati. Keci ‘‘vibhūtarūpasaññā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ matena vibhūtarūpasamāpatti nāma sesāruppasamāpattiyo. Sesā samāpattiyo suviññeyyāva.
已得禅那的凡夫,就是“既非有学也非无学”的禅修者。阿罗汉,或者一切圣者,就是“良骏”禅修者。像劣马那样的禅修者,就是“劣马”禅修者。正如劣马不接受调教,随心所欲地到处乱跑;同样,一个已得神通的凡夫,享受神通之后,觉得“到此就够了,该做的已经做了”,不再为更高的调伏而努力,反而随着神通之心到处奔驰、流转,这种人就被称为“劣马禅修者”。执持恶见而获得禅那的人,就是“见增上”禅修者。以观照诸法特相而修禅那的人,或者一切以智慧为增上的禅修者,就是“慧增上”禅修者。巴利
Nevasekkhanāsekkho jhāyīti jhānalābhī puthujjano. Ājāniyo jhāyīti arahā, sabbepi vā ariyapuggalā. Assakhaluṅko jhāyīti khaluṅkassasadiso jhāyī. Tathā hi khaluṅko asso damathaṃ na upeti ito cito ca yathāruci dhāvati, evamevaṃ yo puthujjano abhiññālābhī, so abhiññā assādetvā ‘‘alamettāvatā, katamettāvatā’’ti uttaridamathāya aparisakkanto abhiññācittavasena ito cito ca dhāvati pavattati, so ‘‘assakhaluṅko jhāyī’’ti vutto. Diṭṭhuttaro jhāyīti jhānalābhī diṭṭhigatiko. Paññuttaro jhāyīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyī, sabbo eva vā paññādhiko jhāyī.
有诤定,就是不善心的一境性;或者也可以说,一切有漏的定都是“有诤定”。无诤定,就是一切善和无记的定;或者单指出世间定。有嗔定,就是在有嗔心的状态里的一境性。无嗔定,就是慈心解脱。在“无间双论”里,也是同样的解释方式。有染定,就是世间定。因为它还没有超越轮回的染着和世间的染着,所以叫有染定。无染定,就是出世间定。有行定,就是“苦行道而迟通达”和“乐行道而迟通达”这两种定。因为这种定必须靠有加行、有精勤的心,艰难、困苦地压制敌对法之后才能证得。另一种是无行定。一边修习定,就是纯观行者的定。两边修习定,就是止行者的定。两方已修修习定,就是身证者和俱分解脱者的定。因为他从两方面都已修习、修习圆满。巴利
Saraṇo samādhīti akusalacittekaggatā, sabbopi vā sāsavo samādhi. Araṇo samādhīti sabbo kusalābyākato samādhi, lokuttaro eva vā. Savero samādhīti paṭighacittesu ekaggatā. Avero samādhīti mettācetovimutti. Anantaradukepi eseva nayo. Sāmiso samādhīti lokiyasamādhi. So hi anatikkantavaṭṭāmisalokāmisatāya sāmiso. Nirāmiso samādhīti lokuttaro samādhi. Sasaṅkhāro samādhīti dukkhāpaṭipado dandhābhiñño sukhāpaṭipado ca dandhābhiñño. So hi sasaṅkhārena sappayogena cittena paccanīkadhamme kicchena kasirena niggahetvā adhigantabbo. Itaro asaṅkhāro samādhi. Ekaṃsabhāvito samādhīti sukkhavipassakassa samādhi. Ubhayaṃsabhāvito samādhīti samathayānikassa samādhi. Ubhayato bhāvitabhāvano samādhīti kāyasakkhino ubhatobhāgavimuttassa ca samādhi. So hi ubhayato bhāgehi ubhayato bhāvitabhāvano.
沉溺行,是指沉溺于欲乐的行为方式,也就是放纵感官享乐的意思。烧燃行,是指以沉迷欲乐来烧灼自己、以疲惫消耗自己的行为方式,也就是自我折磨的苦行。在“不忍行”等说法中:精勤修行时,不能忍受寒冷等外境的人,他的行为就是不忍行,因为他忍受不了这些;而能忍受的人,这些对他来说是能忍的,所以叫能忍行。寂静行:按照“对已生起的欲寻不予忍受随顺”等方法,平息错误的寻思,所以叫寂静。调伏行:调伏以意门为首的六根,所以叫调伏行。巴利
Āgāḷhapaṭipadāti kāmānaṃ orohanapaṭipatti, kāmasukhānuyogoti attho. Nijjhāmapaṭipadāti kāmassa nijjhāpanavasena khedanavasena pavattā paṭipatti, attakilamathānuyogoti attho. Akkhamā paṭipadātiādīsu padhānakaraṇakāle sītādīni asahantassa paṭipadā, tāni nakkhamatīti akkhamā. Sahantassa pana tāni khamatīti khamā. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) nayena micchāvitakke sametīti samā. Manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni dametīti damā paṭipadā.
“如此”是指按照上面所说的方式。“任何法”是指任何一个具有生等性质的法。“对于某法”是指对于与它不同的、具有老等性质的法。“相同状态”是指在苦等性质上状态相同。“以单一性”是指由于苦等性质上的共同性而合为一体。“成为一体”是指即使数目上是多个,但因为都能用“苦”等同一个名称来指称,所以成为一体。这里说的是单一性的特征。“又以何种差异”是指某一法在哪些方面与另一法不相似。“则以彼彼方式达至差别”是指通过那些方面,此法对于彼法达到差别性,也就是不相似性;意思是,虽然在苦的性质上是相同的,但生等法相对于老等法,在生起等方面具有殊异性。这里说的是差别性的特征。巴利
Evanti iminā vuttanayena. Yo dhammoti yo koci jātiādidhammo. Yassa dhammassāti tato aññassa jarādidhammassa. Samānabhāvoti dukkhādibhāvena samānabhāvo. Ekattatāyāti samānatāya dukkhādibhāvānaṃ ekībhāvena. Ekī bhavatīti anekopi ‘‘dukkha’’ntiādinā ekasaddābhidheyyatāya ekī bhavati. Etena ekattatāya lakkhaṇamāha. Yena yena vā pana vilakkhaṇoti yo dhammo yassa dhammassa yena yena bhāvena visadiso. Tena tena vemattaṃ gacchatīti tena tena bhāvena so dhammo tassa dhammassa vemattataṃ visadisattaṃ gacchati, dukkhabhāvena samānopi jātiādiko abhinibbattiādibhāvena jarādikassa visiṭṭhataṃ gacchatīti attho. Iminā vemattatāya lakkhaṇamāha.
现在,为了先就单一性和差别性这一主题加以应用后显示,而说“在经中或记说中”等等。其中,“所问”是就提问的方式、就所说之经的方式而说的,并不是就安住持的提问所缘性而言。其余部分浅显易懂。巴利
Idāni tāva ekattavemattatāvisaye niyojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sutte vā veyyākaraṇe vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchitanti pucchāvasena desitasuttavasena vuttaṃ, na pana adhiṭṭhānahārassa pucchāvisayatāya. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
第15章 资具导的分别注释巴利
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
49 49. 其中,什么是资具之网?就是资具之网的分别解析。在这里,如果某一法产生某一法,那么前者就是后者的资具。先简要说明资具的特征,然后为了详细展示它,就说了“以什么为特征”等话。其中,因:能走向自己的果、达到作为酬报的状态,所以叫因。果依此而生起,所以叫缘。虽然因和缘这两个词说的都是原因,但为了详细展示其中的差别,就说了“不共的特征”等话。自性为因:以同类自性的种子为因。难道种子和芽等不相似吗?并非不相似,因为如果不是这样,就不会有那样的芽等生起。巴利
49.Tatthakatamo parikkhāro hāroti parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāroti saṅkhepato parikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ vatvā taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hinoti attano phalaṃ paṭikāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti hetu. Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ etīti paccayo. Kiñcāpi hetupaccayasaddehi kāraṇameva vuccati, tathāpi tattha visesaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabhāvo hetūti samānabhāvo bījaṃ hetu. Nanu ca bījaṃ aṅkurādisadisaṃ na hotīti? No na hoti, aññato hi tādisassa anuppajjanato.
“又或者,譬如”等语句,也是通过举出另一个例子,来特别说明因和缘的差别。这里,“牛奶”就是乳汁。“变成酪”,这是按同一性的说法,或者是以无差别的假立方式来说的,并不是说真的另有变化。因为牛奶确实不会真的变成酪。所以就说:“牛奶和酪不可能在同一时间同时存在。”或者也可以说,牛奶倒进罐子里后变成酪,酪是在那里经过一段时间,由其他缘聚合才生起的,因此牛奶和酪不可能在同一时间同时存在,因为它们在味道、乳性、成熟程度等方面体性不同。“同样地”:就像作为因的牛奶和作为果的酪不可能在同一时间同时存在,其他任何因和果也不可能在同一时间同时存在;但缘不是这样,因为缘并不一定和果处在不同时间。这样也应当了知因和缘的差别,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Yathā vā panā’’tiādināpi udāharaṇantaradassanena hetupaccayānaṃ visesameva vibhāveti. Tattha duddhanti khīraṃ. Dadhi bhavatīti ekattanayena abhedopacārena vā vuttaṃ, na aññathā. Na hi khīraṃ dadhi hoti. Tenevāha – ‘‘na catthi ekakālasamavadhānaṃ duddhassa ca dadhissa cā’’ti. Atha vā ghaṭe duddhaṃ pakkhittaṃ dadhi bhavati, dadhi tattha kālantare jāyati paccayantarasamāyogena, tasmā na catthi ekakālasamavadhānaṃ duddhassa ca dadhissa ca rasakhīravipākādīhi bhinnasabhāvattā. Evamevanti yathā hetubhūtassa khīrassa phalabhūtena dadhinā na ekakālasamavadhānaṃ, evamaññassāpi hetussa phalena na ekakālasamavadhānaṃ, na tathā paccayassa, na hi paccayo ekantena phalena bhinnakālo evāti. Evampi hetupaccayānaṃ viseso veditabboti adhippāyo.
先这样显示了外在的因与缘的区分之后,现在为了显示内在的,就说“因为此轮回”等话。其中,当说“无明是无明之因”时,难道在同一个心识生起中有多种无明吗?回答说:“前一个无明是后一个无明之因。”这就证明了在同一时间因与果不会同时存在。其中,通过“前一个无明”等话,显示了作为因和果的无明之间的区分。通过“犹如种子与芽”等话,显示了这样的道理:就像种子作为芽的因,是以无间因的方式成为因;而由种子所生出的果,种子对它则是以辗转因的方式成为因。同样地,无明作为因的道理也应当这样理解。巴利
Evaṃ bāhiraṃ hetupaccayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘avijjā avijjāya hetū’’ti vutte kiṃ ekasmiṃ cittuppāde anekā avijjā vijjantīti? Āha ‘‘purimikā avijjā pacchimikāya avijjāya hetū’’ti. Tena ekasmiṃ kāle hetuphalānaṃ samavadhānaṃ natthīti etamevatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha ‘‘purimikā avijjā’’tiādinā hetuphalabhūtānaṃ avijjānaṃ vibhāgaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bījaṅkuro viyā’’tiādinā imamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā bījaṃ aṅkurassa hetu hontaṃ samanantarahetutāya hetu hoti. Yaṃ pana bījato phalaṃ nibbattati, tassa bījaṃ paramparahetutāya hetu hoti. Evaṃ avijjāyapi hetubhāve daṭṭhabbanti.
再者,通过“又或者如同”等语句,也只是在显示因和缘的区分。其中,灯盏就是灯碟;无火就是没有火;点燃就是使之燃烧。因此,自性因就是像在点油灯等情形中,火等与油灯相似的那种原因,这就是自性因。他性缘就是在那里,灯碟、灯芯、油等与火不同的其他自性,就是缘。内在的就是属于自身内在的,在自己内在存在的。外在的就是其之外的。能生的就是能产生者。能摄的就是能支持者。不共的就是特有的。共的就是对其他所生果也是共同的。巴利
Puna ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādināpi hetupaccayavibhāgameva dasseti. Tattha thālakanti dīpakapallikā. Anaggikanti aggiṃ vinā. Dīpetunti jāletuṃ. Iti sabhāvo hetūti evaṃ padīpujjālanādīsu aggiādipadīpasadisaṃ kāraṇaṃ sabhāvo hetu. Parabhāvo paccayoti tattheva kapallikāvaṭṭitelādisadiso aggito añño sabhāvo paccayo. Ajjhattikoti niyakajjhattiko niyakajjhatte bhavo. Bāhiroti tato bahibhūto. Janakoti nibbattako. Pariggāhakoti upatthambhako. Asādhāraṇoti āveṇiko. Sādhāraṇoti aññesampi paccayuppannānaṃ samāno.
现在,因为“资具”被说成是因,而因的身份是相对于果来说的,所以,为了说明因之所以为因是怎样的、它又如何成立,什么是果、果有什么差别,以及因与果之间的关系,就说了“不断绝义”等这些话。其中,以因与果的关系而相连,就是相续。那么在这里,什么是关联,什么是因果关系呢?那就是不断绝义。如果一个作为果的法灭去之后,不再成为别的法的因,那就叫作“断绝”,就像阿拉汉的死心那样。但如果一个法灭去之后,成为与自己相应的果的因,那就叫作“不断绝”,因为因与果的关联确实存在。因此说:“不断绝义就是相续义。”巴利
Idāni yasmā kāraṇaṃ ‘‘parikkhāro’’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāya, tasmā kāraṇassa yo kāraṇabhāvo yathā ca so hoti, yañca phalaṃ yo ca tassa viseso, yo ca kāraṇaphalānaṃ sambandho, taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘avupacchedattho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇaphalabhāvena sambandhatā santati. Ko ca tattha sambandho, ko kāraṇaphalabhāvo ca? So eva avupacchedattho. Yo phalabhūto aññassa akāraṇaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, so vupacchinno nāma hoti, yathā taṃ arahato cuticittaṃ. Yo pana attano anurūpassa phalassa hetu hutvā nirujjhati, so anupacchinno eva nāma hoti, hetuphalasambandhassa vijjamānattāti āha – ‘‘avupacchedattho santatiattho’’ti.
因为由因而生的果才叫“果”,不是没有生起的也叫果,所以说“已生起之义就是果之义”。又因为由前一世以无间隔的方式结生到下一世的那些投生蕴,就是“再有”,所以说“结生之义就是再有之义”。同样,对于某个人来说,烦恼生起时,就会障碍他,使他不能正确地修行。只要还没有被道彻底断除,它们就叫做“随眠”。因此说“障碍之义就是缠缚之义,未断除之义就是随眠之义”。由于以遍知的现观而遍知之后,它任何时候都不会再成为那名色芽的因,所以说“未遍知之义就是识的种子之义”。在哪里没有断绝,哪里就有相续;也就是说,在色法与无色法的生起中,像上面所说的那样没有断绝的地方,那里就称为“相续”。哪里有相续,哪里就有生起等等,这只是显示缘的传承,也就是阐明因果之间的关系而已。巴利
Yasmā ca kāraṇato nibbattaṃ phalaṃ nāma, na anibbattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘nibbattiattho phalattho’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana purimabhavena anantarabhavapaṭisandhānavasena pavattā upapattikkhandhā punabbhavo, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṭisandhiattho punabbhavattho’’ti. Tathā yassa puggalassa kilesā uppajjanti, taṃ palibundhenti sammā paṭipajjituṃ na denti. Yāva ca maggena asamugghātitā, tāva anusenti nāma, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘palibodhattho pariyuṭṭhānattho, asamugghātattho anusayattho’’ti. Pariññābhisamayavasena pariññāte na kadāci taṃ nāmarūpaṅkurassa kāraṇaṃ hessatīti āha – ‘‘apariññātattho viññāṇassa bījattho’’ti. Yattha avupacchedo tattha santatīti yattha rūpārūpappavattiyaṃ yathāvutto avupacchedo, tattha santativohāro . Yattha santati tattha nibbattītiādi paccayaparamparadassanaṃ hetuphalasambandhavibhāvanameva.
“或者,又如‘缘于眼和……’等等”,通过分别解说的方式,把前面已经说过的“自性是因”这个含义展示出来。其中,“依止性”就是亲依止缘性。“作意”指唯作意界,因为它和眼识的识性属于同一类,所以自性是因。“行是识的缘,自性是因”,意思是:福行等造作是结生识的缘,其中的自性就是因。这里说的“行”,指的是所有世间的善和不善的心生起。按照这个道理,其余各句的含义也应当这样理解。如此,任何一种亲依止缘都是资具,意思是:如上所说分类的任何一种缘,都因为它能资助、促成自己的果而称为资具。把它择取出来加以说明,就是资具网。巴利
‘‘Yathā vā pana cakkhuñca paṭiccā’’tiādinā ‘‘sabhāvo hetū’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāgena dasseti. Tattha sannissayatāyāti upanissayapaccayatāya. Manasikāroti kiriyāmanodhātu. Sā hi cakkhuviññāṇassa viññāṇabhāvena samānajātitāya sabhāvo hetu. Saṅkhārā viññāṇassa paccayo sabhāvo hetūti puññādiabhisaṅkhārā paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayo, tattha yo sabhāvo, so hetūti. Saṅkhārāti cettha sabbo lokiyo kusalākusalacittuppādo adhippeto. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ yo koci upanissayo sabbo so parikkhāroti yathāvuttappabhedo yo koci paccayo, so sabbo attano phalassa parikkharaṇato abhisaṅkharaṇato parikkhāro. Tassa niddhāretvā kathanaṃ parikkhāro hāroti.
16. 安立网分别的注释巴利
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
50 50. 其中,什么是“补装修网”?就是关于补装修网的分别。这里说“在一个所依处”,是指在经中把握了任何一个作为因的法。“有多少所依处进入”,是指有多少其他作为因的法汇入那个法。“所有那些都应补修”,意思是所有那些所依处、那些作为所依处的法,都应当以正确抉择的方式提取出来,然后安立到教说中,就像它们本来就已经出现在教说里那样来解说。正如在“转向网”中所说:“在一个所依处,寻求其余的所依处”,这句话说明应当寻求众多所依处;同样,这里为了说明应当对众多所依处进行补修,所以说了“如转向网”。为了说明补修不只是按所依处来进行,还可以按异名、修习、断除来进行,所以又说:“其中,补修有四种”等等。巴利
50.Tatthakatamo samāropano hāroti samāropanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāneti yasmiṃ kismiñci ekasmiṃ kāraṇabhūte dhamme suttena gahite. Yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otarantīti yattakāni aññesaṃ kāraṇabhūtāni tasmiṃ dhamme samosaranti. Sabbāni tāni samāropayitabbānīti sabbāni tāni padaṭṭhānāni padaṭṭhānabhūtā dhammā sammā niddhāraṇavasena ānetvā desanāya āropetabbā, desanāruḷhe viya katvā kathetabbāti attho. Yathā āvaṭṭe hāre ‘‘ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti (netti. 4 niddesavāra) vacanato anekesaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ pariyesanā vuttā, evamidhāpi bahūnaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘yathā āvaṭṭe hāre’’ti āha. Na kevalaṃ padaṭṭhānavaseneva samāropanā, atha kho vevacanabhāvanāpahānavasenapi samāropanā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha samāropanā catubbidhā’’tiādimāha.
为什么这里要采用“所依处”的异名呢?在“所依处异名网”里不是已经说明这个意思了吗?确实如此。不过,这里采用所依处的异名,是为了显示修习和断除的所依与所缘,同时也是为了展示它们各自的异名分类。这样一来,修习和断除就容易理解,也容易教导。所谓“这是所依处”,就是说这三种善行是诸佛教诫和教示的领域与所依,所以叫所依处。其中,通过“身善行”等三种善行,抉择并显示了戒等三蕴、止与观,以及第三果和第四果,这本身就很容易理解。被贪求,所以叫“林”;或者从“vanati”“vanute”这个词来,也叫“林”。其中,五种欲乐是欲爱的因,执取相是执取随好的因,内外处是与之相连的欲贪等的因,随眠是缠缚的因,所以为了显示这个道理,才举出“五种欲乐”等说法。巴利
Kasmā panettha padaṭṭhānavevacanāni gahitāni, nanu padaṭṭhānavevacanahāre eva ayamattho vibhāvitoti? Saccametaṃ, idha pana padaṭṭhānavevacanaggahaṇaṃ bhāvanāpahānānaṃ adhiṭṭhānavisayadassanatthañceva tesaṃ adhivacanavibhāgadassanatthañca. Evañhi bhāvanāpahānāni suviññeyyāni honti sukarāni ca paññāpetuṃ. Idaṃ padaṭṭhānanti idaṃ tividhaṃ sucaritaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanassa ovādassa visayādhiṭṭhānabhāvato padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāyika’’ntiādinā tīhi sucaritehi sīlādayo tayo khandhe samathavipassanā tatiyacatutthaphalāni ca niddhāretvā dasseti, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Vanīyatīti vanaṃ, vanati, vanute iti vā vanaṃ. Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā kāmataṇhāya, nimittaggāho anubyañjanaggāhassa, ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni tappaṭibandhachandarāgādīnaṃ, anusayā ca pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ kāraṇāni honti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
51 这是用异名来作安立:凡是透过“离贪的心解脱是有学果、不来果、超越欲界”这些异门说法,来解说第三果;同样,凡是透过“离无明的慧解脱是无学果、最上果、阿罗汉果、超越三界”这些异门说法,来解说第四果;以及凡是透过“慧根”等异门说法,来解说慧——这就是用异名来作安立。巴利
51.Ayaṃ vevacanena samāropanāti yo ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphalaṃ, anāgāmiphalaṃ, kāmadhātusamatikkamana’’nti etehi pariyāyavacanehi tatiyaphalassa niddeso, tathā yo ‘‘avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti asekkhaphalaṃ, aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ, tedhātukasamatikkamana’’nti etehi pariyāyavacanehi catutthaphalassa niddeso, yo ca ‘‘paññindriya’’ntiādīhi pariyāyavacanehi paññāya niddeso, ayaṃ vevacanehi ca samāropanā.
所以在这里,比丘,你应当依照“于身随观身而住”等语在《相网分别注》中所说的方式来了知。只是在那里,因为具有同一相的缘故,即使没有说到的也以已说的方式显示出来;而在这里,则是依修习安立的方式。这就是差别所在。身随观,特别是不净随观,正是与欲贪及同地烦恼完全对立的对治法。为了显示这个含义而说“于身随观身而住”:不净想能断除这些恶法——对段食遍知的障碍烦恼、欲取、欲轭、贪欲身系、欲漏、欲暴流、贪刺,以及对色法遍知的对治烦恼、对色法的贪、随欲而行。巴利
Tasmātiha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharāhītiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Kevalaṃ tattha ekalakkhaṇattā avuttānampi vuttabhāvadassanavaseneva āgataṃ, idha bhāvanāsamāropanavasenāti ayameva viseso. Kāyānupassanā visesato asubhānupassanā eva kāmarāgatadekaṭṭhakilesānaṃ ekantapaṭipakkhāti asubhasaññā kabaḷīkārāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesā kāmupādānaṃ kāmayogo abhijjhākāyagantho kāmāsavo kāmogho rāgasallaṃ rūpadhammapariññāya paṭipakkhakilesā rūpadhammesu rāgo chandāgatigamananti etesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharanto’’tiādinā.
同样,受随观尤其是苦随观,它——巴利
Tathā vedanānupassanā visesato dukkhānupassanāti, sā –
如果有人把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭,
他把不苦不乐的寂静看成无常。巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, adakkhi naṃ aniccato’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253; itivu. 53) –
从“最初所说”开始,把一切受都看作“苦”的人,能断除乐想以及障碍受之因遍知的烦恼:也就是认为靠牛戒等就能清净存在,以及由贪著受的滋味而转起的、称为有取和戒禁取的执取;还有由受而转起的“他曾对我不好”这类想法所形成的嗔恚身系和嗔箭;以及唯独由贪著受的滋味而转起的、称为有轭、有流、有暴流的贪;为了遍知存在,断除这些障碍性烦恼,也就是以受为所缘的贪和嗔的趣行。为了显示这个道理,所以说“于受,随观受”等等。巴利
Ādivacanato sabbaṃ vedanaṃ ‘‘dukkha’’nti passantī sukhasaññāya vedanāhetupariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ gosīlādīhi bhavasuddhi hotīti vedanāssādena pavattassa bhavupādānasaṅkhātassa sīlabbatupādānassa vedanāvasena ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinayappavattassa (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29; 10.79; dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909, 960) byāpādakāyaganthassa dosasallassa vedanāssādavaseneva pavattassa bhavayogabhavābhavabhavoghasaṅkhātassa bhavarāgassa bhavapariññāya paribandhakakilesānaṃ vedanāvisayassa rāgassa dosāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti etamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘vedanāsu vedanānupassī’’tiādinā.
同样地,在心随观中,特别是以无常随观为核心。当它观见心是“无常”时,因为大多数众生对心持有常想,所以它能对治常执,从而断除以下这些:由常想而障碍识食遍知的烦恼;作为常执直接对治的邪见——也就是被称为见取、见轭、戒禁取身系、见漏、见流的邪见;以常想为因、以“我更好”等方式生起的慢箭;想遍知的对治性烦恼,即对想的贪;以及因为见执著尚未断除而可能生起的怖畏趣行。为了显示这个道理,所以说“于心,随观心”等。巴利
Tathā cittānupassanā visesato aniccānupassanāti, sā cittaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti passantī tattha yebhuyyena sattā niccasaññinoti niccasaññāya viññāṇāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ niccābhinivesapaṭipakkhato eva diṭṭhupādānaṃ diṭṭhiyogasīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthadiṭṭhāsavadiṭṭhoghasaṅkhātāya diṭṭhiyā niccasaññānimittassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinayappavattassa (dha. sa. 1239; vibha. 832, 866, 962) mānasallassa saññāpariññāya paṭipakkhakilesānaṃ saññāya rāgassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa appahīnattā uppajjanakassa bhayāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘citte cittānupassī’’tiādinā.
同样地,法随观尤其是指无我想。它在诸行当中,为了断除以下这些障碍:与我想和意思食的遍知相对立的烦恼,也就是有身见;以“唯有这个才是真理”而运作的邪执著;由邪执著所引起、被称为无明轭、无明漏、无明流、痴箭的无明;以及障碍对诸行遍知的烦恼,也就是对诸行的贪著和无明趣行——它能带来这些的断除。为了显示这个道理,所以说“于诸法中随观法而安住”等等。其余部分则浅显易懂。巴利
Tathā dhammānupassanā visesato anattasaññāti, sā saṅkhāresu attasaññāya manosañcetanāhārapariññāya paṭipakkhakilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202-203; 3.27) pavattassa micchābhinivesassa micchābhinivesahetukāya avijjāyogaavijjāsavaavijjoghamohasallasaṅkhātāya avijjāya saṅkhārapariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ saṅkhāresu rāgassa mohāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘dhammesu dhammānupassī viharanto’’tiādinā. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
说法的食摄集的注释巴利
1. Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā
就像在一块精心处理过的地面上撒满各种颜色的落花;又像在技艺精湛的工匠指导下,把种种光芒闪耀的珠宝镶嵌到打磨精细的纯金装饰上;又像翻转大地,让人咀嚼地味精华;又像压榨一个由旬大的蜜团,让人喝到极其甘甜的蜜汁——同样,具寿摩诃迦咤那尊者从各部经典中引述经文段落,把十六网分别解说之后,现在为了把它们统合到同一部经里来展示,便开始了“摄集品”。巴利
Evaṃ suparikammakatāya bhūmiyā nānāvaṇṇāni muttapupphāni pakiranto viya susikkhitasippācariyavicāritesu surattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāresu nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalāni vividhāni maṇiratanāni bandhanto viya mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ khādāpento viya yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasaṃ pāyento viya ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nānāsuttapadese udāharanto soḷasa hāre vibhajitvā idāni te ekasmiṃyeva sutte yojetvā dassento hārasampātavāraṃ ārabhi. Ārabhanto ca yāyaṃ niddesavāre –
先以“十六种摄义”为开头,用观察方向的眼光看向各方之后……巴利
‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disalocanato disā viloketvā.
用钩子把要点收拢起来后,再以三种理趣来说明经。巴利
Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. –
偈颂已经讲完了。因为那理趣分别分并不适用于该偈颂,它的范围太散,而且对理趣的考察在其中也断了。理趣分别分其实只是在许多经句里展示各种理趣的分别而已。而理趣会遇分则适用于它,因为在同一经句里运用了十六种理趣之后,紧接着就讲说了理趣的生起。因此,先回顾“十六理趣为第一”这首偈颂,然后说:“它的解释应该在哪里看?在理趣会遇中。”意思是:“那首偈颂的解释应该在哪里看?”这就表明:在诸经中理趣运用方法的展示,就是这理趣会遇分。“理趣会遇”这个词的意思前面已经说过了。巴利
Gāthā vuttā. Yasmā taṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti, vippakiṇṇavisayattā, nayavicārassa ca antaritattā . Anekehi suttapadesehi hārānaṃ vibhāgadassanameva hi hāravibhaṅgavāro. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojeti, ekasmiṃyeva suttapadese soḷasa hāre yojetvāva tadanantaraṃ nayasamuṭṭhānassa kathitattā. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’nti gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā ‘‘tassā niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo, hārasampāte’’ti āha. Tassattho – ‘‘tassā gāthāya niddeso kattha daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Etena suttesu hārānaṃ yojanānayadassanaṃ hārasampātavāroti dasseti. Hārasampātapadassa attho vutto eva.
以没有守护的心:指在眼门等处由于缺少正念的防护,心没有被守护。被邪见所害:指被常见等错误执著所染污。被昏沉睡眠所征服:指被以身心迟钝为特征的昏沉和睡眠所压制。走入魔罗的掌控:就是成为烦恼魔等的随意支配对象。以上是这首偈颂的词句含义。巴利
Arakkhitenacittenāti cakkhudvārādīsu satiārakkhābhāvena aguttena cittena. Micchādiṭṭhihatenāti sassatādimicchābhinivesadūsitena. Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti cittassa kāyassa ca akalyatālakkhaṇehi thinamiddhehi ajjhotthaṭena. Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti kilesamārādīnaṃ yathākāmaṃ karaṇīyo hotīti ayaṃ tāva gāthāya padattho.
“放逸”是指“没有守护的心”这句话,它说明的是在六个门(感官通道)中舍弃了正念这一特征的放逸。“那是死魔的领域”:那种放逸因为能杀害善德,所以成为被称为“死”的魔所支配的处所。因此,把第一句和第四句连起来显示:“以没有守护的心,走入魔的掌控。”
所谓“颠倒”,就是把无常的五蕴看成“常”的那种见解,这就是颠倒,也就是颠倒的执取。因此说:“以颠倒执取为特征的就是颠倒。”在总括了一切颠倒的共同性质之后,问:“什么在颠倒?”接着按共同性质中的具体类别,说:“想、心、见。”这些要和“颠倒”这个词连在一起理解。
其中,想颠倒最微细,只是把无常等对象以错误的方式呈现并执取其相,就像幼鹿把草人当成真人而生起“人”的想一样。心颠倒比它更强,当对象把不是宝的东西显现为宝的样子时,心就那样认定,比如认定为常等。见颠倒则最强,无论什么对象怎样显现,它都以常见等观念固执地认为“只有这才是真的,其他都是假的”而运作。其中,想颠倒是心颠倒的原因,心颠倒是见颠倒的原因。巴利
Pamādanti ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ chasu dvāresu sativosaggalakkhaṇaṃ pamādaṃ katheti. Taṃ maccuno padanti taṃ pamajjanaṃ guṇamāraṇato maccusaṅkhātassa mārassa vasavattanaṭṭhānaṃ, tena ‘‘arakkhitena cittena, vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti paṭhamapādaṃ catutthapādena sambandhitvā dasseti. So vipallāsoti yaṃ aniccassa khandhapañcakassa ‘‘nicca’’nti dassanaṃ, so vipallāso vipariyesaggāho. Tenevāha – ‘‘viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso’’ti. Sabbaṃ vipallāsasāmaññena gahetvā tassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchati ‘‘kiṃ vipallāsayatī’’ti. Sāmaññassa ca viseso adhiṭṭhānabhāvena voharīyatīti āha – ‘‘saññaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhimitī’’ti. Taṃ ‘‘vipallāsayatī’’ti padena sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesu saññāvipallāso sabbamuduko, aniccādikassa visayassa micchāvasena upaṭṭhitākāraggahaṇamattaṃ migapotakānaṃ tiṇapurisakesu purisoti uppannasaññā viya. Cittavipallāso tato balavataro, amaṇiādike visaye maṇiādiākārena upaṭṭhahante tathā sanniṭṭhānaṃ viya niccādito sanniṭṭhānamattaṃ. Diṭṭhivipallāso pana sabbabalavataro yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yathā yathā upaṭṭhāti, tathā tathā naṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti abhinivisanto pavattati. Tattha saññāvipallāso cittavipallāsassa kāraṇaṃ, cittavipallāso diṭṭhivipallāsassa kāraṇaṃ hoti.
现在为了说明颠倒运作的处所和对象,说:“它在哪里颠倒?在四种有身事中。”其中,“有身事”就是五取蕴。因为“我”和“我慢”依它们而安住,在这里生起“我”的认知和言说,所以叫“有身”;它又是净等颠倒的所依基础,所以叫“事”,因此称为“有身事”。以“观色为我”等说明它们是一切颠倒之根——有身见的运作处所之后,再按颠倒的运作方式和对象分别说明:“色是第一颠倒事,于不净为净。”这一切都容易理解。再按根本原因分别颠倒,说:“二法是心的杂染。”其中,虽然离开无明的渴爱不存在,而且无明也是净想、乐想等的缘,但为了说明渴爱是它们特别强的缘,所以说:“被渴爱所覆……于苦为乐。”“被见所覆”是以见为首来说无明,意思就是“被无明所覆”。虽然在渴爱不伴随的地方见也不存在,而且渴爱也是见的缘,但为了说明痴是特别的缘,所以说:“被见所覆……于我。”巴利
Idāni vipallāsānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ visayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so kuhiṃ vipallāsayati, catūsu attabhāvavatthūsū’’ti āha. Tattha attabhāvavatthūsūti pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu. Te hi āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, ‘‘attā’’ti bhavati ettha buddhi vohāro cāti attabhāvo, so eva subhādīnaṃ vipallāsassa ca adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vatthu cāti ‘‘attabhāvavatthū’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā tesaṃ sabbavipallāsamūlabhūtāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pavattiṭṭhānabhāvena attabhāvavatthutaṃ dassetvā puna vipallāsānaṃ pavattiākārena saddhiṃ visayaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ paṭhamaṃ vipallāsavatthu asubhe subha’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Puna mūlakāraṇavasena vipallāse vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dve dhammā cittassa saṃkilesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi avijjārahitā taṇhā natthi, avijjā ca subhasukhasaññānampi paccayo eva, tathāpi taṇhā etāsaṃ sātisayaṃ paccayoti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhānivutaṃ…pe… dukkhe sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhinivutanti diṭṭhisīsena avijjā vuttāti avijjānivutanti attho. Kāmañcettha taṇhārahitā diṭṭhi natthi, taṇhāpi diṭṭhiyā paccayo eva. Taṇhāpi ‘‘niccaṃ attā’’ti ayoniso ummujjantānaṃ tathāpavattamicchābhinivesassa moho visesapaccayoti dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhinivutaṃ…pe… attā’’ti vuttaṃ.
有人把“见颠倒”说成是“在无常中执为常、在无我中执为我”这两种颠倒,所以这样说:“他把过去的色……乃至过去的识看作我。”这就表明,十八种关于前际的推论之说,都是依据后两种颠倒而产生的。“爱颠倒”就是以渴爱为根的颠倒,说的是“在不净中执为净、在苦中执为乐”这两种颠倒。所谓“欢喜未来色”,就是带着见和爱去欢喜未来色;对未来受、想、行、识欢喜,也是同样的道理。这就表明,四十四种关于后际的推论之说,大多也是依据前两种颠倒而产生的。“二法是心的随染”:这样特别指出最应呵责的颠倒的根本原因,也就是渴爱和无明这两种法正是心的随染,从而显示它们的自性。又说“依此,清净的心得以清净”:这也是从对立面说明它们确实是随染,因为一旦渴爱和无明被断除,就没有任何杂染法不被断除。而且,正如渴爱和无明是颠倒的根本原因,它们也是整个轮回的根本原因,所以为了顺着这个理路结束偈颂,说了“他们的”等话。其中,“他们的”是指那些心没有守护、又被邪见所害的人。“被无明所盖……”等句则说明,由于落入魔的掌控,他们在无始轮回中流转。巴利
Yo diṭṭhivipallāsoti ‘‘anicce niccaṃ, anattani attā’’ti pavattampi vipallāsadvayaṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘so atītaṃ rūpaṃ…pe… atītaṃ viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti. Etena aṭṭhārasavidhopi pubbantānukappikavādo pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ vasena hotīti dasseti. Taṇhāvipallāsoti taṇhāmūlako vipallāso. ‘‘Asubhe subhaṃ, dukkhe sukha’’nti etaṃ vipallāsadvayaṃ sandhāya vadati. Anāgataṃ rūpaṃ abhinandatīti anāgataṃ rūpaṃ diṭṭhābhinandanavasena abhinandati. Anāgataṃ vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ abhinandatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Etena catucattālīsavidhopi aparantānukappikavādo yebhuyyena purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ vasena hotīti dasseti. Dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesāti evaṃ paramasāvajjassa vipallāsassa mūlakāraṇanti visesato dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesā taṇhā ca avijjā cāti te sarūpato dasseti. Tāhi visujjhantaṃ cittaṃ visujjhatīti paṭipakkhavasenapi tāsaṃ upakkilesabhāvaṃyeva vibhāveti, na hi taṇhāavijjāsu pahīnāsu koci saṃkilesadhammo na pahīyatīti. Yathā ca vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ taṇhāvijjā, evaṃ sakalassāpi vaṭṭassa mūlakāraṇanti yathānusandhināva gāthaṃ niṭṭhapetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesanti yesaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ micchādiṭṭhihatañca, tesaṃ. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇāna’’ntiādinā mārassa vasagamanena anādimatisaṃsāre saṃsaraṇanti dasseti.
被昏沉睡眠征服这句话里,用“所谓昏沉”等说法,是在显示昏沉和睡眠自身的相状。由于心被它们征服的状态很容易理解,所以不特别说明,只通过举出烦恼魔,就已经把以它为因的行蕴魔、蕴魔、死魔一并收摄了,因此说“以及烦恼魔和有情魔”,或者说通过“以及”这个词,也表明把它们都收摄了。他因为被覆盖而朝向轮回:他落入了魔的掌控,正因如此被烦恼覆盖,只要魔的束缚还没断除,他就一直朝向轮回,而不是朝向涅槃,这是这里的意旨。这些是世尊所教导的两种真理。是怎样教导的呢?巴利
Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti ettha ‘‘thinaṃ nāmā’’tiādinā thinamiddhānaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. Tehi cittassa abhibhūtatā suviññeyyāvāti taṃ anāmasitvā kilesamāraggahaṇeneva taṃnimittā abhisaṅkhāramārakhandhamāramaccumārā gahitā evāti ‘‘kilesamārassa ca sattamārassa cā’’ti ca-saddena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. So hi nivuto saṃsārābhimukhoti so māravasaṃ gato, tato eva nivuto kilesehi yāva na mārabandhanaṃ chijjati, tāva saṃsārābhimukhova hoti, na visaṅkhārābhimukhoti adhippāyo. Imāni bhagavatā dve saccāni desitāni. Kathaṃ desitāni?
这里有两种说法:依阿毗达摩的说法和依经的说法。其中,依阿毗达摩的说法,“没有守护的心”是指:贪著的心是没有守护的,嗔恨的心是没有守护的,愚痴的心是没有守护的。其中,贪著的心应当依八种贪俱生心的生起来理解,嗔恨的心应当依两种嗔俱生心的生起来理解,愚痴的心应当依两种痴俱生心的生起来理解。当这些心生起时,诸根不守护、不保护、不看管、不防护,舍弃正念,放逸,心不约束,这样就是没有守护的心。“被邪见所害”的心,应当依四种与见相应的心生起来理解。“被昏沉睡眠压倒”的心,应当依五种有行不善心的生起来理解。这样,以未收摄应收摄之法的角度来说,总共有十二种不善心生起。这些应当依照《心生起品》中关于不善心生起的教导,即“哪些法是不善?当某时不善心生起……”等,按不善心生起的方式详细说明。“魔”在这里指五种魔。其中,烦恼魔应当依四漏、四暴流、四轭、四缚、四取、八盖、十烦恼事,按照《漏双论》等中所说的方法来分析;同样,也应当依《小事分别》中“生慢、族慢、无病慢”等所说的七种烦恼来分别说明。以上就是这里依阿毗达摩的说法。巴利
Tattha duvidhā kathā abhidhammanissitā ca suttantanissitā ca. Tāsu abhidhammanissitā nāma arakkhitena cittenāti rattampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ. Tattha rattaṃ cittaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ lobhasahagatacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ dvinnaṃ paṭighacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, mūḷhaṃ cittaṃ dvinnaṃ momūhacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Yāva imesaṃ cittuppādānaṃ vasena indriyānaṃ agutti agopāyanā apālanā anārakkhā sativosaggo pamādo cittassa asaṃvaro, evaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāma cittaṃ catunnaṃ diṭṭhisampayuttacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ nāma cittaṃ pañcannaṃ sasaṅkhārikākusalacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi aggahitaggahaṇena dvādasa akusalacittuppādā honti. Te ‘‘katame dhammā akusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye akusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā cittuppādakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 365) akusalacittuppādadesanāvasena vitthārato vattabbā. Mārassāti ettha pañca mārā. Tesu kilesamārassa catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ catunnaṃ oghānaṃ catunnaṃ yogānaṃ catunnaṃ ganthānaṃ catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dasannaṃ kilesavatthūnaṃ vasena āsavagocchakādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 14-19, 1102) vuttanayena, tathā ‘‘jātimado gottamado ārogyamado’’tiādinā khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge (vibha. 832) āgatānaṃ sattannaṃ kilesānañca vasena vibhāgo vattabbo. Ayaṃ tāvettha abhidhammanissitā kathā.
依经而说的“无守护的心”是这样:眼睛看见色之后,就执取整体相,执取细节相;由于这个原因,当他住于不防护眼根时,贪、忧等恶不善法就会不断渗入。他不为了防护而实行,不守护眼根,在眼根上不成就防护。耳……鼻……舌……身……意根……也同样的道理。这样,心就是无守护的。
“被邪见所害”是指:心被邪见所害,就是由于对前际的计度、对后际的计度、对前后际的计度,对邪见固执不舍、不如理地浮想,而生起“世间是常”……乃至“如来死后既非有也非无”这样的见,被这些见所害、所毁损。还有《梵网经》和《五三经》等中所说的六十二种邪见——四种常住论……五种现法涅槃论——应当依这些来说明心被邪见所害的情况。巴利
Suttantanissitā (ma. ni. 1.347; a. ni. 11.17) pana arakkhitena cittenāti cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī, yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati. Sotena …pe… ghānena… jivhāya… kāyena… manasā…pe… manindriyena saṃvaraṃ āpajjati (ma. ni. 1.347, 411, 421; 2.419; 3.15, 75). Evaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Micchādiṭṭhihatena cāti micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāma cittaṃ pubbantakappanavasena vā aparantakappanavasena vā pubbantāparantakappanavasena vā micchābhinivisantassa ayoniso ummujjantassa ‘‘sassato lokoti vā…pe… neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (vibha. 937; paṭi. ma. 1.140) vā yā diṭṭhi, tāya hataṃ upahataṃ. Yā ca kho ‘‘imā cattāro sassatavādā…pe… pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā’’ti brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.30 ādayo) pañcattaye (ma. ni. 3.21 ādayo) ca āgatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo, tāsaṃ vasena cittassa micchādiṭṭhihatabhāvo kathetabbo.
被昏沉和睡眠压倒:昏沉,就是心没有堪任性;睡眠,就是受等三蕴没有堪任性。同样,昏沉是精进被压住、提不起来;睡眠是力量被摧毁。这样,心被昏沉和睡眠压倒、覆盖、侵害,变得收缩、迟钝,就进入魔罗的掌控。所谓掌控,就是欲求、贪、意图、喜好、渴望、命令、指令。魔罗,指五种魔:蕴魔、行魔、死魔、天子魔、烦恼魔。进入,就是走向、靠近、趋入、随转、顺从它们的掌控、欲求……指令,不超越。因此说进入魔罗的掌控。巴利
Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti thinaṃ nāma cittassa akammaññatā. Middhaṃ nāma vedanādikkhandhattayassa akammaññatā. Tathā thinaṃ anussāhasaṃhananaṃ. Middhaṃ asattivighāto. Iti thinena middhena ca cittaṃ abhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ upaddutaṃ saṅkocanappattaṃ layāpannaṃ. Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti vaso nāma icchā lobho adhippāyo ruci ākaṅkhā āṇā āṇatti. Māroti pañca mārā – khandhamāro abhisaṅkhāramāro maccumāro devaputtamāro kilesamāroti. Gacchatīti tesaṃ vasaṃ icchaṃ…pe… āṇattiṃ gacchati upagacchati upeti vattati anuvattati nātikkamatīti. Tena vuccati – ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti.
在这里,前面所说的不善法,或者单是渴爱与无明,就是集谛。那个被称为“走入魔罗掌控”的,是依靠五取蕴而假立施设的,那五蕴就是苦谛。世尊在这里就是这样开示了两种真理。所以他说:“苦与集。”为了把世尊说法是为了遍知它们、为了断除它们这个已经说过的意思表达得更清楚,所以又说:“为了遍知苦,为了断除集。”那么,他是怎样说法的呢?巴利
Tattha yathāvuttā akusalā dhammā, taṇhāvijjā eva vā samudayasaccaṃ. Yo so ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti vutto, so ye pañcupādānakkhandhe upādāya paññatto, te pañcakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Evaṃ bhagavatā idha dve saccāni desitāni. Tenevāha – ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayo cā’’ti. Tesaṃ bhagavā pariññāya ca pahānāya ca dhammaṃ desetīti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ desetīti ce –
因此,对于守护自心的人,正思惟就是他的行境;
把正见放在前面,看清了生与灭之后;
比丘战胜了昏沉与睡眠,就能舍弃一切恶趣。巴利
‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkhatvā, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32) –
这首偈颂的意思是:因为心没有守护好,就会落入魔罗的掌控,所以要通过正念的防护——也就是守护包括意在内的六根——使心得到守护。所谓“以正思惟为行境”:因为以欲思惟等邪思惟为行境的人,会以种种不如理的方式分别,执取各种邪见,正因如此,他的心被邪见所害,落入魔罗的掌控。所以,行持如理作意之业的人,应当以出离思惟等正思惟为行境。所谓“令正见居于前”:由于以正思惟为行境,便舍弃了邪见,将以业自性为特征、以如实智为特征的正见放在首位,精勤地修习戒与定。由此,“了知生灭”之后:在五取蕴中,以五十种行相了知生起与灭去之后,努力修习观,次第证入圣道。以最上之道战胜昏沉睡眠的比丘,如此断除一切恶趣。意思是:由于烦恼已彻底断尽,作为漏尽比丘,凭借与三种苦性相应的力量,断除一切被称为恶趣的趣,并安住于这一切的彼岸——涅槃。巴利
Gāthāya . Tassattho – yasmā arakkhitena cittena vasaṃ mārassa gacchati, tasmā satisaṃvarena manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ rakkhaṇena rakkhitacitto assa. Sammāsaṅkappagocaroti yasmā kāmasaṅkappādimicchāsaṅkappagocaro tathā tathā ayoniso vikappetvā nānāvidhāni micchādassanāni gaṇhāti. Tato eva ca micchādiṭṭhihatena cittena vasaṃ mārassa gacchati, tasmā yonisomanasikārena kammaṃ karonto nekkhammasaṅkappādisammāsaṅkappagocaro assa. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkhatvāti sammāsaṅkappagocaratāya vidhutamicchādassano kammassakatālakkhaṇaṃ yathābhūtañāṇalakkhaṇañca sammādiṭṭhiṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā sīlasamādhīsu yuttappayutto. Tato eva ca ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu samapaññāsāya ākārehi uppādaṃ nirodhañca ñatvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā anukkamena ariyamagge gaṇhanto aggamaggena thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu sabbā duggatiyo jaheti evaṃ sabbaso bhinnakilesattā bhikkhu khīṇāsavo yathāsambhavaṃ tividhadukkhatāyogena duggatisaṅkhātā sabbāpi gatiyo jaheyya, tāsaṃ parabhāge nibbāne tiṭṭheyyāti attho.
断除渴爱与无明,这就是灭;因为这种断除是灭的缘,所以无为界也被说为断和灭。这两首偈颂中,前一偈说的是前二谛,后一偈说的是后二谛,这样就用两首偈颂宣说了这四圣谛。在四圣谛中,通过集谛了知味,通过苦谛了知过患,通过道谛和灭谛了知出离。断除一切趣是果,守护心等是方法,以遮止不守护心等方式,劝导修习守护心等,这是世尊的教令。应当这样确定教法的义理,即味等。因此说:教法义理相应。巴利
Yaṃ taṇhāya avijjāya ca pahānaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti pahānassa nirodhassa paccayabhāvato asaṅkhatadhātu pahānaṃ nirodhoti ca vuttā. Imāni cattāri saccānīti purimagāthāya purimāni dve, pacchimagāthāya pacchimāni dveti dvīhi gāthāhi bhāsitāni imāni cattāri ariyasaccāni. Tesu samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, sabbagatijahanaṃ phalaṃ, rakkhitacittatādiko upāyo, arakkhitacittatādinisedhanamukhena rakkhitacittatādīsu niyojanaṃ bhagavato āṇattīti. Evaṃ desanāhārapadatthā assādādayo niddhāretabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘niyutto desanāhārasampāto’’ti.
2. 抉择理趣交融的释义巴利
2. Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā
53 53. 这样显示了开示理趣的相应之后,现在要显示抉择理趣的相应。因为对开示理趣中句义的抉择就是抉择理趣,所以,为了通过把开示理趣中已被确定为颠倒之因的渴爱,按善等分类来加以抉择,从而显示抉择理趣的相应,便开始了“其中,渴爱有两种”等说法。其中,“善”是指以善法为所缘的渴爱。这里“善”这个词,应当像《巴希提聚经》等中那样,理解为“无过失”的意思。那么,为什么在这里把渴爱以“善”这一名目提出来呢?前面在开示理趣中,已经以颠倒之因的方式提出渴爱,并依它显示了杂染的一面。然而,为了以种种辩才,在这里也通过渴爱这一门来显示清净的一面,所以以“善”这一名目提出渴爱。其中,“令趋向轮回”就是趣向轮回,意思是轮回的引导者。“令趋向损减、趋向涅槃”就是趣向损减者。那么,渴爱怎么会是趣向损减的呢?回答说:是“断除渴爱”。这是作为彼分断等断除之因的渴爱。那么,完全有过失的渴爱,怎么会有善的性质呢?因为从应当修习的角度来说。就像渴爱一样,慢也有两种,有善的也有不善的,并非只有渴爱如此。因此,以渴爱为例而说到了慢。巴利
53. Evaṃ desanāhārasampātaṃ dassetvā idāni vicayahārasampātaṃ dassento yasmā desanāhārapadatthavicayo vicayahāro, tasmā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena niddhāritāya taṇhāya kusalādivibhāgapavicayamukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha taṇhā duvidhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kusalāti kusaladhammārammaṇā. Kusala-saddo cettha bāhitikasutte (ma. ni. 2.358 ādayo) viya anavajjatthe daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā panettha taṇhā kusalapariyāyena uddhaṭā? Heṭṭhā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena taṇhaṃ uddharitvā tassā vasena saṃkilesapakkho dassito. Vicittapaṭibhānatāya pana idhāpi taṇhāmukheneva vodānapakkhaṃ dassetuṃ kusalapariyāyena taṇhā uddhaṭā. Tattha saṃsāraṃ gametīti saṃsāragāminī, saṃsāranāyikāti attho. Apacayaṃ nibbānaṃ gametīti apacayagāminī. Kathaṃ pana taṇhā apacayagāminīti? Āha ‘‘pahānataṇhā’’ti. Tadaṅgādippahānassa hetubhūtā taṇhā. Kathaṃ pana ekantasāvajjāya taṇhāya kusalabhāvoti? Sevitabbabhāvato. Yathā taṇhā, evaṃ mānopi duvidho kusalopi akusalopi, na taṇhā evāti taṇhāya nidassanabhāvena māno vutto.
在这里,为了说明慢具有所想要的善等性质,而说了“依止某种慢……”等话。世尊确实这样说过:“帝释,我说慢有两种:一种是可以亲近的,一种是不可以亲近的”等等。“依止出离的忧”等话,则是为了显示被称为“善”的渴爱本身的面貌而说的。其中,所谓依止出离的忧,就是——巴利
Tattha mānassa yathādhippetaṃ kusalādibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ mānaṃ nissāyā’’tiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘mānamahaṃ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’tiādi. Yaṃ nekkhammassitaṃ domanassantiādi ‘‘kusalā’’ti vuttataṇhāya sarūpadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma –
在这里,哪六种是依于出离的忧?就是:已经知道色的无常、变易、离欲、灭尽,并且如实地以正慧看见“过去的色和现在的色,这一切色都是无常、苦、变易法”,然后对无上的解脱生起渴望:“我什么时候才能进入并安住于圣者们现在所进入、所安住的那个境界呢?”像这样对无上的解脱生起渴望时,就生起渴望,以渴望为缘,就产生忧。像这样的忧,就叫做依于出离的忧。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammassitāni domanassāni? Rūpānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca, sabbete rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharissāmi, yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṃ upasampajja viharantī’ti. Iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihā, pihāpaccayā domanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ domanassaṃ, idaṃ vuccati nekkhammassitaṃ domanassa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.307) –
在六门中,当合意的所缘出现在面前时,他对被称为无上解脱的圣果法生起渴望;为了证得它,他以无常等方式修观,却无法精勤努力,于是悲伤地忧叹:“这半个月、这个月、这一年,我精勤修观,却没能证得圣者的境界。”这样生起的忧,因为是以出离、观、随念、初禅等作为修行之因而生起的,所以叫做出离所依的忧。这种被称为“渴望”的渴爱是善的。为什么?因为离贪而得的心解脱,是以它为所缘的善法。这里说的是:离贪而得的心解脱,并不是自性上是善的,而是从“没有过失”这个意义上说是善的。由于它是为了那个目标而生起的,所以以它为所缘的渴爱,因为以善法为所缘,也就成为善的。离无明而得的慧解脱,从“没有过失”这个意义上说是善的。依靠那个慧解脱,在“因此,守护心的人”这首偈颂中,才说“能舍断一切恶趣”。巴利
Evaṃ chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate anuttaravimokkhasaṅkhātaariyaphaladhammesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā tadadhigamāya aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā ussukkāpetuṃ asakkontassa ‘‘imampi pakkhaṃ imampi māsaṃ, imampi saṃvaccharaṃ, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyabhūmiṃ sampāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi’’nti anusocato uppannaṃ domanassaṃ nekkhammavasena vipassanāvasena anussativasena paṭhamajjhānādivasena paṭipattiyā hetubhāvena uppajjanato nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma. Ayaṃ taṇhā kusalāti ayaṃ ‘‘pihā’’ti vuttā taṇhā kusalā. Kathaṃ? Rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, tadārammaṇā kusalāti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, na sabhāvena kusalā, anavajjaṭṭhena kusalā. Taṃ uddissa pavattiyā tadārammaṇā pana taṇhā kusalārammaṇatāya kusalāti. Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti anavajjaṭṭhena kusalā. Tassāti paññāvimuttiyā . Yāya vasena ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāyaṃ ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti vuttaṃ.
于是,为了藉由在长久地经历观的别住之后,依苦行道、迟钝神通而证得的慧解脱,来显示其简择的理趣,便开始了“它的简择是什么”等论述。其中,因为慧解脱以圣道为根本,所以先指出以第四禅为立足处的圣道诸法,接着为了显示它们生起的前行修法,才说“应在何处见?在第四禅中见”等。这里的“到达彼岸”,是指修到最高程度的第四禅修习。为了说明那被称为具足八支的第四禅心,才说了“清净”等。巴利
Iti cirataraṃ vipassanāparivāsaṃ parivasitvā dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya adhigatāya paññāvimuttiyā vasena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassā ko pavicayo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yasmā paññāvimutti ariyamaggamūlikā, tasmā catutthajjhānapādake ariyamaggadhamme uddisitvā tesaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha daṭṭhabbo, catutthe jhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pāramitāyāti ukkaṃsagatāya catutthajjhānabhāvanāya. Yehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ vuttaṃ, tāni aṅgāni dassetuṃ ‘‘parisuddha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,因为舍与念清净,所以是清净的。正因为清净,才说它洁白、光明。由于断除了乐等缘的伤害,远离了贪等垢秽,所以是无秽。正因为无秽,才是已离随烦恼——因为垢秽确实会污染心。由于善加修习,它变得柔软,达到了自在,这就是这里的意思。安住在自在之中的心,就称为柔软。正因为柔软,才是适业的,意思是堪能作业、适合作业。柔软的心确实是适业的,正如经中所说:比丘们,这样修习的心,就成为柔软和适业的。由于安住在这些清净等状态中,所以是安住。正因为安住,才到达不动,意思是不动摇、无扰动。或者也可以说,由于柔软和适业,心安住于自在之中,所以是安住。由于被信等法所摄持,所以到达不动。被信摄持的心,不会因为无信而动摇;被精进摄持的心,不会因为懈怠而动摇;被念摄持的心,不会因为放逸而动摇;被定摄持的心,不会因为掉举而动摇;被慧摄持的心,不会因为无明而动摇;已到达光明的心,不会因为烦恼的黑暗而动摇。被这六种法摄持,就到达不动。这样具足八支的心,就适合发起趣向,适合为了证悟那些应以证智证得的法而证悟。巴利
Tattha upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhaṃ. Parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ, pabhassaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayaghātena vītarāgādiaṅgaṇattā anaṅgaṇaṃ. Anaṅgaṇattā eva vigatūpakkilesaṃ, aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissati, subhāvitattā mudubhūtaṃ vasibhāvappattanti attho. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ ‘‘mudū’’ti vuccati. Muduttā eva ca kammaniyaṃ, kammakkhamaṃ kammayogganti attho. Muduñhi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti , evaṃ bhāvitaṃ muduñca hoti kammaniyañca, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.22). Etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsu ṭhitattā ṭhitaṃ. Ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappattaṃ, acalaṃ niriñjananti attho. Mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhitaṃ. Saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappattaṃ. Saddhāpariggahitañhi cittaṃ assaddhiyena na iñjati, vīriyapariggahitaṃ kosajjena na iñjati, satipariggahitaṃ pamādena na iñjati, samādhipariggahitaṃ uddhaccena na iñjati, paññāpariggahitaṃ avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakārena na iñjati. Imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya.
另一种解释方式:由第四禅定而安止的心,因为远离了诸盖,所以是清净的;因为超越了寻、伺等,所以是洁白明亮的;因为那些与获得禅那相违背的、被欲求所驱使而现起的、以种种忿怒等为缘的恶法不存在,所以是无垢的。所谓被欲求所驱使,意思是依着欲求而行动、沉溺于欲求、被欲求推动而生起的、以忿怒等为缘的各种恶法。由于贪欲等心的随烦恼已经离去,所以是已离随烦恼的。这两项也应当依据《无垢经》和《事经》(《中部》1.57以下;70以下)来理解。由于达到了自在,所以是柔软的;由于达到了神足的状态,所以是适业的;由于修习圆满而达到了殊胜的状态,所以是安住的、到达不动的。正如达到不动的状态就叫作到达不动,同样也就是安住,这是它的含义。如此,具足这八支的心,就成为能够引导的心,成为为了实证那些应以神通证得的法而作为基础、作为近依的。因此他说:他在那里证得了八种功德,即六种神通和两种殊胜。巴利
Aparo nayo – catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhitaṃ cittaṃ nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddhaṃ. Vitakkādisamatikkamena pariyodātaṃ. Jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaapaccayānanti attho. Abhijjhādīnaṃ cittupakkilesānaṃ vigamena vigatūpakkilesaṃ. Ubhayampi cetaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttānaṃ (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo; 70 ādayo) vasena veditabbaṃ. Vasippattiyā mudubhūtaṃ. Iddhipādabhāvūpagamena kammaniyaṃ. Bhāvanāpāripūriyā paṇītabhāvūpagamena ṭhitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ. Yathā āneñjabhāvappattaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitanti attho. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘so tattha aṭṭhavidhaṃ adhigacchati cha abhiññā dve ca visese’’ti.
这里,“他”指已经证得第四禅的修行者。“在那里”指在作为依止处的第四禅中。“证得八种”意思是证得八种功德。那么这八种功德是什么呢?回答说:“六种神通和两种殊胜”,也就是意所成神通和观智。“那心”指第四禅的心。通过“因为它清净,所以它洁白”等说法,表明前前是后后的因。“那两者”是指,由于没有贪等污垢和贪欲等随烦恼,所以被称为“无秽”和“离随烦恼”。那些污垢和随烦恼,就是“那两者”。这两者因为本质是渴爱、又随顺渴爱,所以属于渴爱一边。“动摇”指心由于不能安定而颤动。“不安住”指不稳固。这动摇和不安住,因为是错误执取的原因,所以属于邪见一边。巴利
Tattha soti adhigatacatutthajjhāno yogī. Tatthāti tasmiṃ catutthajjhāne adhiṭṭhānabhūte. Aṭṭhavidhaṃ adhigacchatīti aṭṭhavidhaṃ guṇaṃ adhigacchati. Ko pana so aṭṭhavidho guṇoti? Āha ‘‘cha abhiññā dve ca visese’’ti. Manomayiddhi vipassanāñāṇañca. Taṃ cittanti catutthajjhānacittaṃ. ‘‘Yato parisuddhaṃ, tato pariyodāta’’ntiādinā purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa kāraṇavacananti dasseti. Tadubhayanti yesaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ abhijjhādiupakkilesānañca abhāvena ‘‘anaṅgaṇaṃ vigatūpakkilesa’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Tāni aṅgaṇāni upakkilesā cāti taṃ ubhayaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ taṇhāsabhāvattā taṇhāya anulomanato ca taṇhāpakkho. Yā ca iñjanāti yā ca cittassa asamādānena phandanā. Aṭṭhitīti anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkhoti yā iñjanā aṭṭhiti ca, ayaṃ micchābhinivesahetutāya diṭṭhipakkho.
通过“四根”等说法,也从感受的角度阐明第四禅。这样,具足八支的第四禅心,为了进一步证得神通,就成为适合引导的心。而这种适合引导的状态,只有通过十四种方式反复修习、达到自在的人才能拥有。这种自在,只有获得八等至的人才具备,不是仅仅获得色界禅那的人所能有的。为了说明无色界等至的作意方法,他说“他作意更高的等至为寂静”等。这里,“更高的等至”指空无边处等至。“作意为寂静”是指,无论从支的寂静还是从所缘的寂静,都作意“寂静”。因为,当他无论从哪方面作意无色界等至为寂静时,从那方面色界禅那就以不寂静的状态呈现。因此他说:“他的更高的……乃至……安住。” “厌离和嗔恚想”是指在被称为嗔恚想的五识想中,不喜乐安住。“他完全……”等,以一部分说明无色界等至。“神通引导的色想”是指色界想,这只是为了神通目的的引导而已,并不是像无色界等至那样寂静,这是意趣。“种种想之运作”是指种种想被称为在种种所缘中的运作,在那里心散乱转起,这是意思。“超越”是指这样在那里见到过患后,超越它们。“他的嗔恚想消失”是指当这位瑜伽行者证得空无边处等至时,十种嗔恚想都消失。以此说明了第一无色界等至。巴利
‘‘Cattāri indriyānī’’tiādinā vedanātopi catutthajjhānaṃ vibhāveti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ upari abhiññādhigamāya abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Sā ca abhinīhārakkhamatā cuddasahi ākārehi ciṇṇavasibhāvasseva hoti. So ca vasibhāvo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino, na rūpāvacarajjhānamattalābhinoti āruppasamāpattiyā manasikāravidhiṃ dassento ‘‘so uparimaṃ samāpattiṃ santato manasikarotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uparimaṃ samāpattinti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ. Santato manasikarotīti aṅgasantatāyapi ārammaṇasantatāyapi ‘‘santā’’ti manasikaroti. Yato yato hi āruppasamāpattiṃ santato manasikaroti, tato tato rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ avūpasantaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tenevāha – ‘‘tassa uparimaṃ…pe… saṇṭhahatī’’ti. Ukkaṇṭhā ca paṭighasaññāti paṭighasaññāsaṅkhātāsu pañcaviññāṇasaññāsu anabhirati saṇṭhahati. ‘‘So sabbaso’’tiādinā ekadesena āruppasamāpattiṃ dasseti. Abhiññābhinīhāro rūpasaññāti rūpāvacarasaññā nāmetā yāvadeva abhiññatthābhinīhāramattaṃ, na pana arūpāvacarasamāpattiyo viya santāti adhippāyo. Vokāro nānattasaññāti nānattasaññā nāmetā nānārammaṇesu vokāro, tattha cittassa ākulappavattīti attho. Samatikkamatīti evaṃ tattha ādīnavadassī hutvā tā samatikkamati. Paṭighasaññā cassa abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti assa ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ adhigacchantassa yogino dasapi paṭighasaññā vigacchanti. Iminā paṭhamāruppasamāpattimāha.
像这样入定的人,是指依照上面所说的方法,在色界禅那中达到心一境性之后,又进一步超越它而入定的人。入定的人,是指以寂静而安住的无色界定入定的人。光明,是指先前色界禅那的光明。消失,是说在进入无色界禅那的时候,那色界禅那的光明就消失了。所见也一样,是指以色界禅那之眼所见也消失了。此定,就是指前面所说的色界定和无色界定。具足六支,是指具足六种作为辅助资具之性的支分。应当观察,意思是应当反复地观察、一再地思惟。为了连同所缘一起说明观察的方式,所以说“无贪俱行”等。其中,一切世间,是指在一切可爱、可意的众生世间与行世间中。以此说明欲贪的断除。同样,以“无瞋”等说明瞋恚、懈怠、恼害、诡诈、散乱、忘念的断除。再者,为了将六支依止与观而分别说明,所以说“无贪俱行等”。这一切都应当善加了知。巴利
Evaṃ samāhitassāti evaṃ iminā vuttanayena rūpāvacarajjhāne cittekaggatāyapi samatikkamena samāhitassa. Samāhitassāti āruppasamādhinā santavuttinā samāhitassa. Obhāsoti yo pure rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso. Antaradhāyatīti so rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso arūpāvacarajjhānasamāpajjanakāle vigacchati. Dassanañcāti rūpāvacarajjhānacakkhunā dassanañca antaradhāyati. So samādhīti so yathāvutto rūpārūpasamādhi. Chaḷaṅgasamannāgatoti upakārakaparikkhārasabhāvabhūtehi chahi aṅgehi samannāgato. Paccavekkhitabboti pati avekkhitabbo, punappunaṃ cintetabboti attho. Paccavekkhaṇākāraṃ saha visayena dassetuṃ ‘‘anabhijjhāsahagata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbaloketi sabbasmiṃ piyarūpe sātarūpe sattaloke saṅkhāraloke ca. Tena kāmacchandassa pahānamāha. Tathā ‘‘abyāpanna’’ntiādinā byāpādakosajjasārambhasāṭheyyavikkhepasammosānaṃ pahānaṃ. Puna tāni cha aṅgāni samathavipassanāvasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yañca anabhijjhāsahagata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
54 到这一步为止,已经通过定的角度,说明了被称为“慧解脱”的阿罗汉果的前分行道。现在为了说明阿罗汉果的定,所以说“彼定”等语。其中,“彼定”就是指那个正定。应当知道,先前所说的圣道定的果定,有五种;也就是通过现在所说的五种观察智,以自己应当观察的方式所规定的五种,应当这样了知。在“此定是现前乐”等语句中,阿罗汉果定在每一次入定的刹那都是乐的,所以是现前乐。前前之定是后后定乐的缘,所以未来感乐果。因为远离烦恼,所以是圣。因为不存在欲染、有染、世间染,所以是无染。因为为佛等大士所修习,所以不是下劣之人所修习的。因为支分相续,且一切烦恼的热恼止息相续,所以是寂静。因为令人不满足,所以是殊胜。因为是从烦恼止息而获得,或者因为其体性就是烦恼止息,所以是止息所得。所谓“止息”和“止息所得”,在意义上其实是一回事。又因为是由烦恼止息的阿罗汉所获得,所以也是止息所得。因为是以心一境性而证得,或者因为所证得的正是心一境性,所以是心一境性所证得。不像少功德、有漏的定那样,以有功用、有加行压制对立之法、阻止烦恼而证得;因为不是这样证得的,所以是“非以功用抑制而证得”。巴利
54. Ettāvatā ‘‘paññāvimuttī’’ti vuttassa arahattaphalassa samādhimukhena pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ dassetvā idāni arahattaphalasamādhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha so samādhīti yo so sammāsamādhi. Pubbe vuttassa ariyamaggasamādhissa phalabhūto samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo idāni vuccamānehi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi attano paccavekkhitabbākārasaṅkhātena pañcavidhena veditabbo. ‘‘Ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho’’tiādīsu arahattaphalasamādhi appitappitakkhaṇe sukhattā paccuppannasukho. Purimo purimo pacchimassa pacchimassa samādhisukhassa paccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko. Kilesehi ārakattā ariyo. Kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvā nirāmiso. Buddhādīhi mahāpurisehi sevitattā akāpurisasevito. Aṅgasantatāya sabbakilesadarathasantatāya ca santo. Atittikaraṭṭhena paṇīto. Kilesapaṭippassaddhiyā laddhattā, kilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvena vā laddhattā paṭippassaddhiladdho. Passaddhaṃ passaddhīti hi idaṃ atthato ekaṃ. Paṭippassaddhikilesena vā arahatā laddhattāpi paṭippassaddhiladdho. Ekodibhāvena adhigatattā, ekodibhāvameva vā adhigatattā ekodibhāvādhigato. Appaguṇasāsavasamādhi viya sasaṅkhārena sappayogena paccanīkadhamme niggayha kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatoti.
不论他从哪个方面进入这种定,或者从哪个方面出定,在正念达到圆满之后,他都是带着正念入定、带着正念出定;或者按照预先限定的时间,带着正念入定、带着正念出定。因此,当他在这里这样观察:“这种定既是当下快乐的,未来也会带来快乐的果报”时,他就会生起只属于自己、不依赖他人的智慧,这是一个方面。其余各个方面也同样是这个道理。这样,应当依据这五种应当观察的方面,以五种方式来了知这种定。巴利
Yato yato bhāgato tañca samādhiṃ samāpajjanto, tato vā vuṭṭhahanto sativepullappatto satova samāpajjati satova vuṭṭhahati, yathāparicchinnakālavasena vā sato samāpajjati sato vuṭṭhahati. Tasmā yadettha ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhantassa paccattameva aparappaccayañāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayameko ākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ paccavekkhitabbākārānaṃ vasena samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo.
再者,通过“凡有定……”等语句,说明了在阿罗汉果中,止与观的区分。其中,因为定中的乐被认定为“乐”,所以这样说:“凡是当下乐的定,以及凡是未来会带来乐果报的定,这属于止。”而圣的、无染等性质,则是依靠慧的力量成就的,因此说:“凡是圣的定……(中略)……这属于观。”巴利
Puna ‘‘yo ca samādhī’’tiādinā arahattaphale samathavipassanāvibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tattha samādhisukhassa ‘‘sukha’’nti adhippetattā ‘‘yo ca samādhi paccuppannasukho, yo ca samādhi āyatiṃ sukhavipāko, ayaṃ samatho’’ti vuttaṃ. Ariyanirāmisādibhāvo pana paññānubhāvena nipphajjatīti āha – ‘‘yo ca samādhi ariyo…pe… ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti.
这样,先用分类的方式说明了阿拉汉果定,现在为了用定的分类来说明它之前的预备修行,所以说“彼定”。这里,“彼定”指的是在阿拉汉果定的预备修行阶段所说的色界第四禅定,那就是这里说的定。“以五种方式”应当按接下来要说的五种分类来理解。在“喜遍满”等说法中,喜遍满地生起时的慧,在两种禅里叫“喜遍满”;乐遍满地生起时的慧,在三种禅里叫“乐遍满”;遍满他人之心而生起的他心智,叫“心遍满”;在光明遍满中生起的天眼智,叫“光明遍满”;观察智叫“观察相”。这也是论中所说的:“在两种禅中,慧是喜遍满;在三种禅中,慧是乐遍满;对他心的智是心遍满;天眼是光明遍满;从每一种定出起后的观察智是观察相。”巴利
Evaṃ arahattaphalasamādhiṃ vibhāgena dassetvā idāni tassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ samādhivibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘so samādhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha so samādhīti yo so arahattaphalasamādhissa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi, so samādhi. Pañcavidhenāti vakkhamānena pañcappakārena veditabbo. ‘‘Pītipharaṇatā’’tiādīsu pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokapharaṇe uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇānimittaṃ nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā, paracitte ñāṇaṃ cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhu ālokapharaṇatā, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).
这里,为了说明止和观的区别,才说了“什么是喜遍满”等这些话。而且在这里,开示是以慧为主导来进行的,所以注释也是从慧的角度来作的。在“慧是喜遍满性”等说法里,因为那些慧必定与定同时生起,所以就在这些当中依定而把止举出来。因此,喜遍满性、乐遍满性、心遍满性,特别是依定的威力而成就,所以它们被称为“止”;其余的则是依智的威力而成就,所以被称为“观”。巴利
Idha samathavipassanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo ca pītipharaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca paññāsīsena desanā katāti paññāvasena saṃvaṇṇanā katā. Paññā pītipharaṇatātiādīsu samādhisahagatā evāti tattha samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭo. Tasmā pītisukhacetopharaṇatā visesato samādhivipphāravasena ijjhantīti tā ‘‘samatho’’ti vuttā. Itarāni ñāṇavipphāravasenāti tāni ‘‘vipassanā’’ti vuttāni.
55 现在,为了按所缘来分别说明那种定,就说了“十遍处”等这些话。其中,被称为遍处禅的遍处,因为它们是修行者殊胜快乐的依止处,又因为是意处和法处,所以叫遍处。地遍:既指已经修过准备工作的地轮,也指在那上面生起的取相和似相,还指依那个相生起的禅那。这里指的是其中的禅那。空遍:指在除去遍处后的虚空中生起的第一无色禅。识遍:指以第一无色禅的识为所缘的第二无色禅。关于地遍等纯粹修止而生的,就说“这八种遍处是止”。剩下两种遍处,因为是作为观的依止而生起的,就说它们是“观”。巴利
55. Idāni taṃ samādhiṃ ārammaṇavasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dasa kasiṇāyatanānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kasiṇajjhānasaṅkhātāni kasiṇāni ca tāni yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, manāyatanadhammāyatanabhāvato ca āyatanāni cāti kasiṇāyatanāni. Pathavīkasiṇanti kataparikammaṃ pathavīmaṇḍalampi, tattha pavattaṃ uggahapaṭibhāganimittampi, tasmiṃ nimitte uppannajjhānampi vuccati. Tesu jhānaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Ākāsakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattapaṭhamāruppajjhānaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇanti paṭhamāruppaviññāṇārammaṇaṃ dutiyāruppajjhānaṃ. Pathavīkasiṇādike suddhasamathabhāvanāvasena pavattite sandhāya ‘‘imāni aṭṭha kasiṇāni samatho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesakasiṇadvayaṃ vipassanādhiṭṭhānabhāvena pavattaṃ ‘‘vipassanā’’ti vuttaṃ.
如此这句话,是用这种方法来说的。一切圣道,就是正见等这些组成部分;虽然作为正见等并未分割,但依四念处等前行修行来区分,也有种种不同,所以是完整无余的一切圣道。以任何一种方式,是指在无贪等状态中,以及在当下快乐等状态中,以任何一种被说明的方式。以那种方式,是指在那些状态中,凡能以止的方式、以及能以观的方式配合起来的,就以那种方式,通过止和观,简择圣道之后与之结合。它们,是指止所依和观法。为三法所摄,就是为三种随观所摄,意思是纳入其数目之中。是哪三种呢?回答说:无常性、苦性、无我性。因为与无常性俱起,所以观被称为无常性。其余两种也依同样的道理理解。巴利
Evanti iminā nayena. Sabbo ariyamaggoti sammādiṭṭhiādibhāvena abhinnopi ariyamaggo satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno niravaseso ariyamaggo. Yena yena ākārenāti anabhijjhādīsu, paccuppannasukhatādīsu ca ākāresu yena yena ākārena vutto. Tena tenāti tesu tesu ākāresu ye ye samathavasena, ye ca ye ca vipassanāvasena yojetuṃ sambhavanti, tena tena ākārena samathavipassanāhi ariyamaggo vicinitvā yojetabbo. Teti samathādhiṭṭhānavipassanādhammā. Tīhi dhammehi saṅgahitāti tīhi anupassanādhammehi saṅgahitā, gaṇanaṃ gatāti attho. Katamehi tīhīti? Āha ‘‘aniccatāya dukkhatāya anattatāyā’’ti. Aniccatāya sahacaraṇato vipassanā ‘‘aniccatā’’ti vuttā. Esa nayo sesesupi.
正在修习止观的人,就是在修习三种解脱门。具体来说,那位为了证得圣道而精勤努力的修行者,有时以入定的方式修止,有时以观照的方式修观,这样不断增长时,就在培育被称为无相解脱门等的三种随观。所谓“修习三蕴”,就是让这三种随观逐步达到更高的殊胜,也就是在增长戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴这三蕴。又因为圣八支道被这三蕴所涵盖,所以说:“修习三蕴的人,就是在修习圣八支道。”巴利
So samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayatīti so ariyamaggādhigamāya yuttappayutto yogī kālena samathaṃ samāpajjanavasena kālena vipassanaṃ sammasanavasena vaḍḍhayamāno animittavimokkhamukhādisaṅkhātā tisso anupassanā brūheti. Tayo khandhe bhāvayatīti tisso anupassanā uparūparivisesaṃ pāpento sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho paññākkhandhoti ete tayo khandhe vaḍḍheti. Yasmā pana tīhi khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito, tasmā ‘‘tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了说明哪些人、在哪里修学时,哪些解脱门特别是出离之门,以及它们是对治哪些烦恼的,并与这三解脱门一起显示出来,所以说了“贪行人”等。其中,“以无相解脱门”:是指以无常随观。它因为破除常相等而称为“无相”;又因为它是能断除贪等、得“解脱”之名的圣道的入口和门径,所以称为“无相解脱门”。“于增上心学”:就是在定中修学。“不亲近能生乐受的触”:就是对能生乐受的触,不带着渴爱去亲近它。“遍知乐受”:就是“这乐受会因变易等而成为苦”,这样去了知,从而超越对自身境域的贪。通过“驱除贪垢”等种种说法,是以这些方式说明断除贪。“嗔行人”等句子,也应依照同样的道理来理解其含义。巴利
Idāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ yattha sikkhantānaṃ visesato niyyānamukhāni yesañca kilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni, tehi saddhiṃ tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘rāgacarito’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha animittena vimokkhamukhenāti aniccānupassanāya. Sā hi niccanimittādisamugghāṭanena animitto, rāgādīnaṃ samucchedavimuttiyā vimokkhoti laddhanāmassa ariyamaggassa mukhabhāvato dvārabhāvato ‘‘animittavimokkhamukha’’nti vuccati. Adhicittasikkhāyāti samādhismiṃ. Sukhavedanīyaṃ phassaṃ anupagacchantoti sukhavedanāya hitaṃ sukhavedanākāraṇato phassaṃ taṇhāya anupagacchanto. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ parijānantoti ‘‘ayaṃ sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmādinā dukkhā’’ti parijānanto, savisayaṃ rāgaṃ samatikkanto. ‘‘Rāgamalaṃ pavāhento’’tiādinā tehi pariyāyehi rāgasseva pahānamāha. ‘‘Dosacarito puggalo’’tiādīsupi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo.
对于智慧增上的人,因为能拆解相续、聚集、作用、所缘等密集,诸行中无我的空性就清楚地显现出来,所以无我随观特别以智慧为主导,因此说“空解脱门是慧蕴”。同样,因为诸行的自性是坏灭的、只有短暂的刹那,已生起的诸法就在各自所在之处坏灭,这对正确入定的人来说很清楚,所以无常随观特别以定为主导,因此说“无相解脱门是定蕴”。同样,对于戒行圆满、多修忍辱、战胜了生起的苦和不悦而安住的人,诸行的苦性变得清楚,因此苦随观以戒为主导,所以说“无愿解脱门是戒蕴”。这样一来,因为三解脱门已经含摄了三蕴,所以说“他修习三解脱门,就是在修习三蕴”。又因为圣八支道已被这三蕴所含摄,所以说修习三蕴的人“修习圣八支道”。因此,为了显示它们对圣八支道的含摄关系,而说了“yā ca sammāvācā”等句子。巴利
Paññādhikassa santatisamūhakiccārammaṇādighanavinibbhogena saṅkhāresu attasuññatā pākaṭā hotīti visesato anattānupassanā paññāpadhānāti āha – ‘‘suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ paññākkhandho’’ti. Tathā saṅkhārānaṃ sarasapabhaṅgutāya ittarakhaṇattā uppannānaṃ tattha tattheva bhijjanaṃ sammā samāhitasseva pākaṭaṃ hotīti visesato aniccānupassanā samādhippadhānāti āha – ‘‘animittavimokkhamukhaṃ samādhikkhandho’’ti. Tathā sīlesu paripūrakārino khantibahulassa uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aratiñca abhibhuyya viharato saṅkhārānaṃ dukkhatā vibhūtā hotīti dukkhānupassanā sīlappadhānāti āha – ‘‘appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ sīlakkhandho’’ti. Iti tīhi vimokkhamukhehi tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ saṅgahitattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘so tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto tayo khandhe bhāvayatī’’ti. Yasmā ca tīhi ca khandhehi ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa saṅgahitattā tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ‘‘ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tehi tassa saṅgahaṃ dassento ‘‘yā ca sammāvācā’’tiādimāha.
再者,为了说明三蕴是止与观的缺失,所以说了“戒蕴”等话。其中应当知道,戒蕴以忍辱为最首要,而定对它有很大帮助,所以它属于止那一类。所谓“有支”,就是投生有的组成部分。“二足”,就是两只脚。因为一般来说,十五种行法大多被戒和定所包含。所谓“身已修”,是因为增上行仪戒圆满,所以身得到了修习。“戒已修”,是因为根本梵行戒圆满,所以戒得到了修习。或者,“身已修”是指通过守护根门,五门之身得到了修习;“戒已修”是指通过其余的戒,戒得到了修习。在正确修习身的时候,就能彻底断除身恶行,成就没有过失的行为。同样,当无上的戒圆满成就时,就能毫无剩余地断除邪语和邪命。而且,当心和慧得到修习时,正念、正定、正见、正思惟的修习就已经达到圆满,因为它们与心和慧本质相同,又是心和慧的原因。为了说明这个道理,所以说了“当身被修习时”等话。巴利
Puna tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ samathavipassanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlakkhandho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlakkhandhassa khantipadhānattā, samādhissa bahūpakārattā ca samathapakkhabhajanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhavaṅgānīti upapattibhavassa aṅgāni. Dve padānīti dve pādā. Yebhuyyena hi pañcadasa caraṇadhammā sīlasamādhisaṅgahitāti. Bhāvitakāyoti ābhisamācārikasīlassa pāripūriyā bhāvitakāyo. Ādibrahmacariyakasīlassa pāripūriyā bhāvitasīlo. Atha vā bhāvitakāyoti indriyasaṃvarena bhāvitapañcadvārakāyo. Bhāvitasīloti avasiṭṭhasīlavasena bhāvitasīlo. Sammā kāyabhāvanāya sati accantaṃ kāyaduccaritappahānaṃ anavajjañca uṭṭhānaṃ sampajjati. Tathā anuttare sīle sijjhamāne anavasesato micchāvācāya micchājīvassa ca pahānaṃ sampajjati. Cittapaññāsu ca bhāvitāsu sammāsatisammāsamādhisammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gatā eva honti taṃsabhāvattā tadubhayakāraṇattā cāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘kāye bhāviyamāne’’tiādinā.
“证得五种证得”这句话,是就修行阶位的差别,把圣道的证得分成五种来显示。因为圣道确实能在同一个心识刹那中,迅速、一次性地证得自己应当证得的四圣谛,不像世间禅定那样需要先修出自在运用的能力,所以叫“速证得”。又因为它是从彻底解脱的角度断除应当断除的烦恼,所以叫“解脱证得”。又因为它证得了比世间的戒蕴等更殊胜的圣戒蕴等,所以叫“大证得”。又因为它证得了那些圣戒蕴等广大果报之法,所以叫“广证得”。又因为对自己应当完成的一切都毫无剩余地完成,所以叫“无余证得”。那么,这些证得究竟指哪些呢?为了说明“有些是靠止的力量,有些是靠观的力量”这一区分,才说了“tattha samathena”等句子。巴利
Pañcavidhaṃ adhigamaṃ gacchatīti ariyamaggādhigamameva avatthāvisesavasena pañcadhā vibhajitvā dasseti. Ariyamaggo hi khippaṃ sakiṃ ekacittakkhaṇeneva catūsu saccesu attanā adhigantabbaṃ adhigacchatīti na tassa lokiyasamāpattiyā viya vasibhāvanākiccaṃ atthīti khippādhigamo ca hoti. Pajahitabbānaṃ accantavimuttivasena pajahanato vimuttādhigamo ca. Lokiyehi mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ adhigamanabhāvato mahādhigamo ca. Tesaṃyeva vipulaphalānaṃ adhigamanato vipulādhigamo ca. Attanā kattabbassa kassaci anavasesato anavasesādhigamo ca hotīti. Ke panete adhigamā? Keci samathānubhāvena, keci vipassanānubhāvenāti imaṃ vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha samathenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
56 大长老这样以“因此,对于已守护心者”这首偈颂,通过阿罗汉果解脱的角度,说明了简择理趣的汇集。他凭借说法的善巧,用许多经文段落,把那前行道、各种修行差别以及修行利益加以分析,从多种方面展示了简择理趣。现在,为了再以十种如来力来说明它,他说了“其中,他开示……”等话。
“以教诫不欺骗声闻弟子”:因为弟子们听闻了他自己的教导之法,所以得到“声闻”这个名称;对于这些应当教化的众生,他不欺骗、不诈惑,因为欺诈之因的种种恶法已由圣道在菩提树下彻底断除故。三种的:三类、三种方式。你们应做此:你们应当实践此皈依、持守净戒等,并安住其中。以此方便而做:也依此方式,净化皈依、圆满戒律等,从而成就。做此于你们:这皈依与戒律等,对于实践它们的你们,将依现法、后生及涅槃而成为利益与安乐,你们应当成就它们,这就是其含义。巴利
56. Iti mahāthero ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāya vasena arahattaphalavimuttimukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ niddisanto desanākusalatāya anekehi suttappadesehi tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhāvanāvisesānaṃ bhāvanānisaṃsānañca vibhajanavasena nānappakārato vicayahāraṃ dassetvā idāni dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yo desayatī’’tiādimāha. Ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayatīti attano anusiṭṭhiyā dhammassa savanato ‘‘sāvakā’’ti laddhanāme veneyye na vippalambheti na vañceti, visaṃvādanahetūnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ ariyamaggena bodhimūle eva suppahīnattā. Tividhanti tippakāraṃ, tīhi ākārehīti attho. Idaṃ karothāti imaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sīlādiñca upasampajja viharatha. Iminā upāyena karothāti anenapi vidhinā saraṇāni sodhentā sīlādīni paripūrentā sampādetha. Idaṃ vo kurumānānanti idaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sīlādiñca tumhākaṃ anutiṭṭhantānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasamparāyanibbānānaṃ vasena hitāya sukhāya ca bhavissati, tāni sampādethāti attho.
像这样显示了教诫的方式之后,为了用如来力来分别说明前面所说的“以教诫不欺骗声闻弟子”这句话,他接着说了“他如此被教诫”等话。其中,“如此”是指以那样的方式,也就是前面所说的“你们要做这个”“用这个方法来做”等开示的方式。“被教诫”是指通过说法而受到教导。“被教导”是同一个意思的另一种说法。“如此而行者”是指按照所教导的那样去实践的人。“彼地”是指为了证得该境地而接受教诫的那个人所对应的境地,也就是见地和修地。“没有这种可能”是指这个原因不存在。因为在这里,果依于它而存在,所以原因被称为“处”。在第二遍中,“地”是指通过戒蕴而证得的、属于成就有的境地。巴利
Evaṃ ovadanākāraṃ dassetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayatī’’ti, taṃ tathāgatabalehi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘so tathā ovadito’’tiādimāha. Tattha tathāti tena pakārena ‘‘idaṃ karotha, iminā upāyena karothā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Ovaditoti dhammadesanāya sāsito. Anusiṭṭhoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tathā karontoti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā karonto. Taṃ bhūminti yassā bhūmiyā adhigamatthāya ovadito, taṃ dassanabhūmiñca bhāvanābhūmiñca. Netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjati. Kāraṇañhi tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Dutiyavāre bhūminti sīlakkhandhena pattabbaṃ sampattibhavasaṅkhātaṃ bhūmiṃ.
现在,因为世尊的四无所畏同样具有不颠倒的真实本质,所以它们是初果智的特殊对象,因此,为了说明它们也是那种智的对象,便说了“你是正自觉者……”等话。其中,“你是正自觉者”:通过宣称“我是正自觉者,我已现证一切法”,说明你是正自觉者。“这些法未被现证——没有这种可能”:意思是,如果有人像善星那样胡言乱语,说“你所谓的这些法,其实你并没有现证”,这样的人虽然无量无数,但能以法、以因、以理来如法指责你的人,根本不存在。其余句子的理解方式也是如此。“为了谁的利益而说法”:指为了断除贪等烦恼,针对每一种烦恼而宣说不净观等法门。“那样实行的人”:指按照那样去修行的人。“殊胜的证得”:指证得神通、无碍解等殊胜成就。巴利
Idāni yasmā bhagavato catuvesārajjānipi aviparītasabhāvatāya paṭhamaphalañāṇassa visayaviseso hoti, tasmā tānipi tassa visayabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa te sato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sammāsambuddhassa te satoti ahaṃ sammāsambuddho, mayā sabbe dhammā abhisambuddhāti paṭijānanena sammāsambuddhassa te sato. Ime dhammā anabhisambuddhāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti ‘‘ime nāma tayā dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’ti koci sahadhammena sahetunā sakāraṇena vacanena, sunakkhatto (dī. ni. 3.1 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.146 ādayo) viya vippalapantā pana appamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjati. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Yassa te atthāya dhammo desitoti rāgādīsu yassa yassa pahānatthāya asubhabhāvanādidhammo kathito. Takkarassāti tathā paṭipannassa. Visesādhigamanti abhiññāpaṭisambhidādivisesādhigamaṃ.
“有障碍的”:造成障碍的就是障碍,这些法以障碍为本质,所以叫有障碍的。或者说,与障碍相应、以障碍为果报、以障碍为目的,也叫有障碍的。这些障碍按业和烦恼等类别分为五种。“非出离的”:除了圣道以外的一切法。巴利
Antarāyikāti antarāyakaraṇaṃ antarāyo, so sīlaṃ etesanti antarāyikā. Antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyappayojanāti vā antarāyikā. Te pana kammakilesādibhedena pañcavidhā. Aniyyānikāti ariyamaggavajjā sabbe dhammā.
具足见者:就是具足圣道之见、已证入流果的圣弟子。极度伤害:就是严重伤害。这里也只是举出一部分来说而已。像祭祀亡灵、布施给亡者这类事,他绝对不做。凡夫:因为有种种烦恼、业行等生起的原因,所以叫凡夫。对此是有开示的——巴利
Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno sotāpanno ariyasāvako. Suhatanti ativadhitaṃ. Idampi ekadesakathanameva. Matakapetādidānampi so na karoti eva. Puthujjanoti puthūnaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Vuttañhetaṃ –
因为能生起种种烦恼等,所以叫凡夫;
因为凡夫这个词本身就包含了普通人,所以说“众人就是凡夫”。巴利
‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano itī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130);
在“母亲”等说法里,生养自己的是母亲,生养自己的是父亲。这里说的“人”,特指生为人类、已经漏尽烦恼的阿拉汉。那么,圣弟子还会去杀害其他众生的性命吗?这也是不可能的。即使有人对已经投生到别处的圣弟子这样说——哪怕他并不知道自己是圣弟子——“你杀掉这只蝼蚁,就能统治整个轮围界,当上转轮王”,他也绝不会去杀那只蝼蚁。就算有人这样威胁他:“你要是不杀它,我们就砍下你的头”,他们最多也就是砍下他的头,他也绝不会去杀那个众生。这样说,是为了显示凡夫状态有极大的过失,也是为了表明圣者状态有强大的力量。这里的意思就是:凡夫状态实在可悲,竟然会造下杀母等无间重罪;而圣者状态有大力量,绝不会去造这些业。巴利
‘‘Mātara’’ntiādīsu janikā mātā. Janako ca pitā. Manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññe jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ. Sacepi bhavantaragataṃ ariyasāvakaṃ attano ariyasāvakabhāvaṃ ajānantampi koci evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idaṃ kunthakipillikaṃ jīvitā voropetvā sakalacakkavāḷagabbhe cakkavattirajjaṃ paṭipajjāhī’’ti, neva so naṃ jīvitā voropeyya. Athāpi evaṃ vadeyyuṃ – ‘‘sace imaṃ na ghātessasi, sīsaṃ te chindissāmā’’ti, sīsamevassa chindeyyuṃ, neva so taṃ ghāteyya. Puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca baladīpanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sāvajjo vata puthujjanabhāvo. Yatra hi nāma mātughākādīnipi ānantariyāni karissati, mahābalova ca ariyabhāvo, yo etāni kammāni na karotīti.
破坏僧团,是指破坏那些共同居住、处在同一结界内的僧团,以五种方式使僧团分裂。关于这一点已经说过:优波离,僧团以五种方式分裂:通过羯磨、通过诵戒、通过宣说、通过宣告、通过收取筹票。巴利
Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ pañcahi kāraṇehi saṅghaṃ bhindeyya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcahupāli, ākārehi saṅgho bhijjati kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458).
在这里,“以羯磨”是指表白、羯磨等四种羯磨中的任何一种羯磨。“以诵戒”是指五种巴帝摩卡诵戒中的任何一种诵戒。“以宣称”是指正在说的时候,借由各种投生经历来揭示“非法是法”等十八种导致分裂的事。“以告白”是指用这样的方式在耳边私下传言:“你们难道不知道我出身高贵家族而出家,而且博学多闻吗?像我这样的人,怎么会执取非法、非律、非导师教诫呢?你们心里连这样的念头都不该生起,我难道不怕堕入恶趣吗?”“以收取筹票”是指如此告白后,令他们心坚固、不动摇,然后说“取此筹票吧”,将筹票给予他们。诸如此巴利
Tattha kammenāti apalokanādīsu catūsu kammesu aññatarakammena. Uddesenāti pañcasu pātimokkhuddesesu aññatarena uddesena. Voharantoti kathayanto, tāhi tāhi upapattīhi ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūni dīpayanto. Anussāvanenāti ‘‘nanu tumhe jānātha mayhaṃ uccakulā pabbajitabhāvaṃ bahussutabhāvañca, mādiso nāma uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ gāheyyāti kiṃ tumhākaṃ cittampi uppādetuṃ yuttaṃ, kimahaṃ apāyato na bhāyāmī’’tiādinā nayena kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā anussāvanena. Salākaggāhenāti evaṃ anussāvetvā tesaṃ cittaṃ upatthambhetvā anivattidhammaṃ katvā ‘‘gaṇhatha imaṃ salāka’’nti salākaggāhena.
在这里,关键只在于羯磨或诵戒本身,而宣告、告白和收取筹票只是前期的准备工作。因为当一个人以阐明十八事的方式来进行宣告时,即使为了让在场的人生起信乐而做了告白、又收取了筹票,僧团仍然没有分裂。只有当四个人或更多人这样取了筹票之后,另行举行别众羯磨或别众诵戒,这才叫作僧团分裂。因此,说一位具足正见的人可能分裂僧团或造成僧团纷争,这是不可能的事。巴利
Ettha ca kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhāpanaṃ pana pubbabhāgo . Aṭṭhārasavatthudīpanavasena hi voharantena tattha rucijananatthaṃ anussāvetvā salākāya gāhitāyapi abhinno eva hoti saṅgho. Yadā pana evaṃ cattāro vā atirekā vā salākaṃ gāhetvā āveṇikaṃ kammaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā karonti, tadā saṅgho bhinno nāma hoti. Evaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo saṅghaṃ bhindeyya saṅgharājiṃ vā janeyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti.
以杀心而染污的心,就是“恶心”。所谓“令其出血”,是指在活着的身体上,哪怕只引出够一只小苍蝇吸食那么一点血。到这里,就已经说明了杀母等五种无间业。这些业是凡夫才会造的,圣弟子不会造。“恶心”也指以毁灭心而染污的心。“塔”就是支提。“破坏”就是毁掉它。巴利
Duṭṭhacittoti vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Ettāvatā hi mātughātādīni pañcānantariyakammāni dassitāni honti. Yāni puthujjano karoti, na ariyasāvako. Duṭṭhacittoti vināsacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Thūpanti cetiyaṃ. Bhindeyyāti nāseyya.
“另一位导师”:意思是,即使在别的生命形态中,也把某个外道师当作“这是我的导师,他有能力做导师该做的事”。
“会宣称”:就是会执取“这是我的导师”——这种事根本不可能发生。
“到教法之外去寻找别的应受供养者”:意思是,在佛陀教法之外,带着这样的想法去寻找别的外道沙门或婆罗门——“这个人值得供养,供养他会有大果报”——然后去依止他。
“靠好奇仪式求清净”:就是相信通过所谓“好奇”的所见、所闻、所感知的仪式能让自己清净、洁白,心里想“做了这个,那个就会实现”。巴利
Aññaṃ satthāranti ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā satthu kiccaṃ kātuṃ samattho’’ti bhavantarepi aññaṃ titthakaraṃ. Apadiseyyāti ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ito bahiddhā aññaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyeseyyāti sāsanato bahiddhā aññaṃ bāhirakaṃ samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā ‘‘ayaṃ dakkhiṇāraho, imasmiṃ katā kārā mahapphalā bhavissantī’’ti adhippāyena tasmiṃ paṭipajjeyyāti attho. Kutūhalamaṅgalena suddhiṃ pacceyyāti ‘‘iminā idaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ pavattattā kutūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena attano suddhiṃ vodānaṃ saddaheyya.
57 女人不可能成为转轮王,这种事不存在。因为女人没有隐藏在衣鞘中的男根等相,所以相好不能圆满;又因为没有女宝,所以具足七宝也不能实现。而且女人的自体也不能比一切男人更殊胜,因此说“女人……这种事不存在”。因为帝释、梵天、转轮王这三种地位最为殊胜,而女性性别是低劣的,所以女人也被排除在这三种地位之外。
那么,难道不能说:就像女性性别在梵天界不存在一样,男性性别在梵天界也不存在,所以不该说“男人可以成为大梵天”吗?不,这话并非不能说。为什么?因为男人能投生到那里。女人在这世间修习禅那,命终后投生为梵众天的同伴,而不是大梵天。但男人并非哪里都不能投生。虽说那里两种性别都不存在,但那里的梵天们只现男人身形,不现女人身形,所以这样说没有错。
“女人成为如来”——且不说具足一切知功德、能度脱世间众生的佛陀境界,就连仅仅是发愿,女人也做不到。巴利
57.Itthī rājā cakkavattī siyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti yasmā itthiyā kosohitavatthaguyhādīnaṃ abhāvena lakkhaṇāni na paripūranti, itthiratanābhāvena ca sattaratanasamaṅgitā na sampajjati. Sabbamanussānampi ca na adhiko attabhāvo hoti, tasmā ‘‘itthī…pe… vijjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā sakkattādīni tīṇi ṭhānāni uttamāni, itthiliṅgañca hīnaṃ, tasmā tassā sakkattādīnipi paṭisiddhānīti. Nanu ca yathā itthiliṅgaṃ, evaṃ purisaliṅgampi brahmaloke natthi, tasmā puriso mahābrahmā siyāti na vattabbanti? No na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Idha purisassa tattha nibbattanato. Itthiyo hi idha jhānaṃ bhāvetvā kālaṃ katvā brahmapārisajjānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjanti, na mahābrahmānaṃ. Puriso pana katthaci na uppajjatīti na vattabbo. Samānepi tattha ubhayaliṅgābhāve purisasaṇṭhānāva tattha brahmāno, na itthisaṇṭhānā, tasmā suvuttametaṃ. Itthī tathāgatoti ettha tiṭṭhatu tāva sabbaññuguṇe nibbattetvā lokānaṃ tāraṇasamattho buddhabhāvo, paṇidhānamattampi itthiyā na sampajjati.
投生为人、具备男根、有因、得见导师,
出家、德行成就、资格和意欲;
这八种条件具备时,发愿就能圆满实现。巴利
‘‘Manussattaṃ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassanaṃ; Pabbajjā guṇasampatti, adhikāro ca chandatā; Aṭṭhadhammasamodhānā, abhinīhāro samijjhatī’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) –
这些确实是发愿得以成就的原因。所以,连发愿都还不能圆满做到的女人,又怎么可能成佛呢?因此说:“女人成为如来、阿拉汉、正等觉者,这是不可能的。”因为圆满具足一切方面的福德者,只会感得圆满具足一切方面的存在,所以只有男人才能成为阿拉汉、正等觉者。巴利
Imāni hi paṇidhānasampattikāraṇāni. Iti paṇidhānamattampi sampādetuṃ asamatthāya itthiyā kuto buddhabhāvoti ‘‘itthī tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho siyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbākāraparipūro puññussayo sabbākāraparipūrameva attabhāvaṃ nibbattetīti purisova arahaṃ hoti sammāsambuddho.
“一个世界界”是指一万个世界组成的范围,也就是被称为“生处田”的那个世界。如来入胎等时候,它确实会震动。“教令田”则是一万亿个轮围世界。在那里,世界一起坏灭,也一起生成,而且《阿吒那吒经》等护经的教令之力就在那里起作用。“境界田”则没有限量。因为对佛陀们来说,正如所说:“智慧所及的范围就是所知的范围,所知所及的范围就是智慧的范围;智慧以所知为界限,所知以智慧为界限。”所以,并没有佛陀不能触及的境界。这样,在这三种田当中,结集于三藏里的佛陀教法中,并没有一部经说“除了这个轮围世界以外,佛陀还会出现在别的轮围世界”,但确实有经说佛陀不会出现。巴利
Ekissā lokadhātuyāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā, yā jātikhettanti vuccati. Sā hi tathāgatassa gabbhokkantikālādīsu kampati. Āṇākhettaṃ pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ. Yā ekato saṃvaṭṭati ca vivaṭṭati ca, yattha ca āṭānāṭiyaparittādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 3.277 ādayo) āṇā pavattati. Visayakhettassa parimāṇaṃ natthi. Buddhānañhi ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ tāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ, yāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, neyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ neyya’’nti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato avisayo nāma natthi. Iti imesu tīsu khettesu tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane ‘‘ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantī’’ti suttaṃ natthi, na uppajjantīti pana atthi.
“不前不后”的意思是:不是在前、也不是在后、也不是同时生起,而是说或在前或在后生起。这里,“前”应当理解为入胎之前。因为从入胎那一刻起,就以震动一万个轮围世界的方式占据了这片领域,所以不会有另一位佛陀出现。而“后”则是指佛陀般涅槃之后。从那时起,在下方也不会再有另一位佛陀出现,但上方并没有被限制。巴利
Apubbaṃacarimanti apure apacchā ekato na uppajjanti, pure vā pacchā vā uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha gabbhokkantito pubbe pureti veditabbaṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya hi dasasahassicakkavāḷakampanena khettapariggaho kato nāma hoti, aññassa buddhassa uppatti natthi. Dhātuparinibbānato paraṃ pana pacchā, tato heṭṭhāpi aññassa buddhassa uppatti natthi, uddhaṃ na vāritā.
为什么诸佛不会既非先前、也非随后同时出现呢?因为那样就不稀奇了。诸佛世尊本来就是稀有之人。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,有一个人出现在世间,就是稀有之人出现于世。”(《增支部》1.171)如果许多佛陀同时出现,他们就不稀奇了。而且教法也不会有差别。一位佛陀所教导的法,比如四念处等,另一位佛陀也必定会教导同样的法,这样就会产生争论。如果许多佛陀同时出现,弟子们就会像多位老师门下的学童那样争论:“我们的佛陀更庄严……”何必再去找其他理由呢?这就是法性:在一个世界界中,两位如来不会同时出现。(《弥兰陀问经》5.1.1)巴利
Kasmā pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ na uppajjantīti? Anacchariyattā. Acchariyamanussā hi buddhā bhagavanto. Yathāha – ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso’’tiādi (a. ni. 1.171). Yadi ca aneke buddhā ekato uppajjeyyuṃ, anacchariyā bhaveyyuṃ. Desanāya ca visesābhāvato. Yañhi satipaṭṭhānādibhedaṃ dhammaṃ eko deseti, aññenapi so eva desetabbo siyā, vivādabhāvato ca. Bahūsu hi buddhesu ekato uppannesu bahūnaṃ ācariyānaṃ antevāsikā viya ‘‘amhākaṃ buddho pāsādiko’’tiādinā tesaṃ sāvakā vivadeyyuṃ. Kiṃ vā etena kāraṇagavesanena, dhammatāvesā yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve tathāgatā ekato na uppajjantīti (mi. pa. 5.1.1).
就像苦楝树的种子、药西瓜的种子等等,长不出甜美的果实,只会长出不好吃、不甜的果实;同样,身恶行等也长不出甜美的果报,只会长出不好的果报。又像甘蔗的种子、稻谷的种子等等,长出的果实又甜又美味,不会长出不好吃、苦涩的果实;同样,身善行等长出的果报是甜美的,不会是不甜的。关于这一点也有这样的说法——巴利
Yathā nimbabījakosātakibījādīni madhuraṃ phalaṃ na nibbattenti, asātaṃ amadhurameva phalaṃ nibbattenti, evaṃ kāyaduccaritādīni madhuravipākaṃ na nibbattenti amadhurameva nibbattenti. Yathā ca ucchubījasālibījādīni madhuraṃ sādurasameva phalaṃ nibbattenti na asātaṃ kaṭukaṃ. Evaṃ kāyasucaritādīni madhurameva vipākaṃ nibbattenti na amadhuraṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
播下怎样的种子,便会收获怎样的果实。
行善的人得到善果,作恶的人得到恶果。巴利
‘‘Yādisaṃ vapate bījaṃ, tādisaṃ harate phalaṃ; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.256; netti. 122);
因此才说“三种恶行”等等。巴利
Tasmā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ duccaritāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
“某位沙门或婆罗门”,指的是任何人仅仅因为出家就称为沙门,或者仅仅因为出身就称为婆罗门。他怀着恶劣的欲望,为了博取他人的尊敬而故作姿态、迷惑他人,所以叫“诈伪者”。他依靠资具而说种种话,所以叫“谄媚者”。他为了得到资具而做出各种暗示动作,所以叫“占相者”。把诈伪、谄媚、占相放在最前面,就是把诈伪等状态摆在首位,装出一副根门寂静、内心寂静的样子来行事。“五盖”,就是欲贪等五种盖。没有舍弃、没有彻底断除,就是心的随烦恼,也就是五盖。因为五盖使心污秽,令心污染、障碍、烧恼,所以称为“心的随烦恼”。令慧薄弱,就是五盖。因为五盖生起时,使未生的慧不能生起,所以称为“令慧薄弱”。“未现起念”,是指在四念处中未现起正念。“未修习”,是指未令增长。“无上正等正觉”,是指立足于阿拉汉果的智慧,即了知一切的一切知智。巴利
Aññataro samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti yo koci pabbajjāmattena samaṇo vā jātimattena brāhmaṇo vā. Pāpiccho sambhāvanādhippāyena vimhāpanato kuhako. Paccayasannissitāya payuttavācāya vasena lapako. Paccayanibbattakanimittāvacarato nemittako. Kuhanalapananemittakattaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvāti kuhanādibhāvameva purakkhatvā santindriyo santamānaso viya caranto. Pañca nīvaraṇeti kāmacchandādike pañca nīvaraṇe. Appahāya asamucchinditvā, cetaso upakkileseti nīvaraṇe. Nīvaraṇā hi cittaṃ upakkilesenti kiliṭṭhaṃ karonti vibādhenti upatāpenti ca. Tasmā ‘‘cetaso upakkilesā’’ti vuccanti. Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti nīvaraṇe. Nīvaraṇā hi uppajjamānā anuppannāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti. Tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā’’ti vuccanti. Anupaṭṭhitassatīti catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu na upaṭṭhitassati. Abhāvayitvāti avaḍḍhayitvā. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ.
在后一节里,“某位沙门或婆罗门”这句话,是针对一切知菩萨说的。其中,“远离一切过失”是指已经远离了所有与波罗蜜对立、成为波罗蜜障碍的过失。这样说是为了显示他的波罗蜜已经圆满。四念处就是观,觉支就是道,无上正等正觉就是阿拉汉果。或者也可以说,四念处是观,觉支是混合的,正等正觉就是阿拉汉果。其余部分,应当依照前一段所说的对立面来理解。“在这里,那智慧”是指在上述所说的处中知道其为处、在非处中知道其为非处的智。从因而说,是从处与非处的因。从处而说,是在那转向的刹那之后紧接着。“无界限”是指没有局限,即没有丝毫遗漏。巴利
Pacchimavāre aññataro samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti sabbaññubodhisattaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha sabbadosāpagatoti sabbehi pāramitāpaṭipakkhabhūtehi dosehi apagato. Etena paripūritapāramibhāvaṃ dasseti. Satipaṭṭhānāni vipassanā, bojjhaṅgo maggo, anuttarā sammāsambodhi arahattaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānāni vā vipassanā, bojjhaṅgā missakā, sammāsambodhi arahattameva. Sesaṃ anantaravāre vuttapaṭipakkhato veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ ettha ñāṇanti yaṃ etasmiṃ yathāvutte ṭhāne ca ṭhānaṃ, aṭṭhāne ca aṭṭhānanti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Hetusoti tassa ṭhānassa aṭṭhānassa ca hetuto. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇe eva āvajjanasamanantaraṃ. Anodhisoti odhiabhāvena, kiñci anavasesetvāti attho.
像这样“趣向于处与非处”等等,就是指他们如此趣向于处和非处的状态。“一切”:是指那些具有坏灭、衰亡、离染、息灭性质的有为法,而它们正是安立“有情”这一概念的依托。在这些有情当中,有些是行法的,往生天界;有些是行非法 的,往生恶趣;还有些已经踏上能灭尽业力的圣道,则趣向涅槃。巴利
Iti ṭhānāṭṭhānagatātiādīsu evaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatā. Sabbeti khayavayavirajjananirujjhanasabhāvā saṅkhatadhammā, te eva ca sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtā keci saggūpagā ye dhammacārino, keci apāyūpagā ye adhammacārino, keci nibbānūpagā ye kammakkhayakaraṃ ariyamaggaṃ paṭipannā.
58 58. 现在,为了阐明前面所说的义理,诵出“一切有情都将死去”等两首偈颂。对于其中的含义,他自己就以“一切有情,即圣者和凡夫”等语句来解说。在这里,“寿尽的尽头就是死的尽头”:寿命的尽头,就是被称为死亡的那个终结。“将随业而去”:在这里,有情随各自的业而去,这就是“业是自己所有的”的意思。而业的果报必定会显现、不会落空,通过“趣向福与非福之果”这句话,就表明了业的果报会被亲自体验到,已经造作并积累的业绝不会不把果报给予造业者,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
58. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sabbe sattā marissantī’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tassa atthaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattāti ariyā ca anariyā cā’’tiādinā sayameva niddisati. Tattha jīvitapariyanto maraṇapariyantoti jīvitassa pariyanto nāma maraṇasaṅkhāto anto. Yathākammaṃ gamissantīti ettha yadetaṃ sattānaṃ yathākammaṃ gamanaṃ, ayaṃ kammassakatāti attho . Kammānaṃ phaladassāvitā ca avippavāso cāti ‘‘puññapāpaphalūpagā’’ti iminā vacanena kammānaṃ phalassa paccakkhakāritā, katūpacitānaṃ kammānaṃ attano phalassa appadānābhāvo ca dassitoti attho.
业本身就是行,而“他们有恶的业行”,所以叫“恶业行者”。为了说明这个意思,才说“非福行”。他们拥有非福行,所以是“非福行者”。或者,“恶业行者”这个词是从格用法,意思是“以恶业为因”。同样,“福行”等说法也应这样理解。接着,通过“恶业行者堕地狱”等说法,用两个极端来显示中道。同样,通过“这是杂染”等说法,从轮回与出离、过患与贪著、因与果的角度,在这首偈颂中显示了三种义理分别。又通过“恶业行者堕地狱,这是杂染”等说法,从清净的角度来显示偈颂的意义。巴利
Kammameva kammantaṃ, pāpaṃ kammantaṃ etesanti pāpakammantā, tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apuññasaṅkhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Apuñño saṅkhāro etesanti apuññasaṅkhārā. Pāpakammantāti vā nissakkavacanaṃ, pāpakammantahetūti attho. Tathā puññasaṅkhārātiādīsupi. Puna ‘‘nirayaṃ pāpakammantā’’tiādinā antadvayena saddhiṃ majjhimapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Tathā ‘‘ayaṃ saṃkileso’’tiādinā vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena ādīnavassādanissaraṇavasena hetuphalavasena ca gāthāyaṃ tayo atthavikappā dassitā. Puna ‘‘nirayaṃ pāpakammantāti ayaṃ saṃkileso’’tiādinā vodānavasena gāthāya atthaṃ dasseti.
59 “以彼彼”:是指由各种不同的执取对象,比如色有、无色有等等。“三十六”:先说欲爱,按色等对象的不同分为六种;同样,有爱和无有爱也各有六种,加起来就是十八种。这十八种爱,在内在的色等对象上有十八种,在外在的色等对象上也有十八种,这样总共就是三十六种。“以彼彼”:就是“这是美的、快乐的”等等。巴利
59.Tenatenāti tena tena ajjhositavatthunā rūpabhavaarūpabhavādinā. Chattiṃsāti kāmataṇhā tāva rūpādivisayabhedena cha, tathā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā cāti aṭṭhārasa. Tā eva ajjhattikesu rūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bāhiresu rūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti evaṃ chattiṃsa. Yena yenāti ‘‘subhaṃ sukha’’ntiādinā.
清净有三种,这是按三蕴来说的。为了说明这一点,才说了“爱欲杂染”等话。接着又说“一切有情都将死去”等,是为了按修行道路的不同来阐明偈颂的含义。其中“于处处导向”的意思是:导向那各处各自的涅槃,也就是具有导向涅槃的习性。巴利
Vodānaṃ tividhaṃ khandhattayavasenāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkileso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna ‘‘sabbe sattā marissantī’’tiādi paṭipadāvibhāgena gāthānamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha gāminīti tattha tattheva nibbāne gāminī, nibbānassa gamanasīlāti attho.
接着,为了说明导向各个地方和导向一切地方的道之间的区别,说了“三类聚集”等话。所往者即地狱等。能随宜令往彼彼处,所以叫“导向一切地方”。世尊对于被称为道的非福业、福业以及能灭尽业的业,分别转起之智。这就叫“导向一切地方的道智”,是如来力之一。因为世尊以此智,如实了知一切道。巴利
Puna tatthatatthagāminīsabbatthagāminīnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tayo rāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yanti yaṃ nirayādi. Taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ yathārahaṃ gametīti sabbatthagāminī. Paṭipadāsaṅkhāte apuññakamme puññakamme ca kammakkhayakaraṇakamme ca vibhāgaso bhagavato pavattanañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ sabbatthagāminī paṭipadāñāṇaṃ nāma tathāgatabalaṃ. Iminā hi ñāṇena bhagavā sabbampi paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti.
怎么知道呢?比如整个村子的居民一起杀一头猪或一只鹿时,虽然所有人的思都以其他有情的命根为所缘,但他们在造作积累业的那个当下,业就各不相同了。因为其中有人是认真用心地做,有人是被别人逼着说“你也来做”才做的,还有人像是同样有意愿一样,不阻拦地随大流。就在他们造作积累业的那个当下,如来就知道:这个人因为以这种方式积累业,将投生到地狱;这个人将投生到畜生道;这个人将投生到鬼界。对于将投生地狱的,如来也知道:这个人将投生在八大地狱,那个人将投生在十六小地狱。对于将投生畜生道的,如来也知道:这个将成为无足的,这个将成为两足的,这个将成为四足的,这个将成为多足的。对于将投生鬼界的,如来也知道:这个将成为被烈火灼烧、极度口渴的鬼,这个将成为饥渴难耐的鬼,这个将成为靠别人施舍过活的鬼。巴利
Kathaṃ? Sakalagāmavāsikesupi ekaṃ sūkaraṃ vā migaṃ vā mārentesu sabbesaṃ cetanā parassa jīvitindriyārammaṇāva hoti, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva nānā hoti. Tesu hi eko ādarena karoti, eko ‘‘tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti , eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhamāno vicarati. Tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa aṭṭhasu mahānirayesu nibbattissati, esa soḷasasu ussadesū’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppādako, esa bahuppādako’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti.
对于这些业,如来也了知:其中这个业将会牵引结生,这个业则不会牵引结生,它软弱无力,在结生已经形成的情况下,只会成为生存期间剩余的果报。同样,当整个村子的居民一起布施时,所有人的思都以所施之物为所缘,但他们在累积善业的当下,业就已经有了差别。因为其中有些人会投生到天界,有些人会投生到人界。就在他们造业的当下,如来便了知:此人以这种方式累积了业,将会投生人界;此人将会投生天界。对此,如来还了知:此人将投生到他化自在天;此人将投生到地居天;此人将成为大天王;此人则将投生为在第二或第三阶层服侍他的仆从。巴利
‘‘Tesu ca kammesu idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhissati, idaṃ nākaḍḍhissati dubbalaṃ dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti. Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato dānaṃ dadamānesu sabbesampi cetanā deyyadhammārammaṇāva hoti, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇe eva nānaṃ hoti. Tesu hi keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke’’ti jānāti. Tatthapi ‘‘esa paranimmitavasavattīsu nibbattissati, esa bhummadevesu nibbattissati, esa jeṭṭhakadevarājā hutvā, esa tassa dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ vā ṭhānantaraṃ karonto paricārako hutvā nibbattissatī’’ti jānāti.
对于这些业,他也知道:这些业里,哪一种能牵引结生,哪一种不能,哪一种力量微弱,在结生已经确定的情况下,只会在这一生中留下残余的果报。同样,对于正在修观的人,他也知道:这个人以这种方式开始修观,将会成为阿罗汉;这个人会成为不来者;这个人会成为一来者;这个人会成为入流者,或者成为一种子者、一花者、七返有者;这个人无法证得圣道,只会停留在以行相为所缘的观上;这个人会停留在把握缘的阶段;这个人会停留在把握名色、把握无色的阶段;这个人只能辨别四大种;这个人则什么都观察不了。再者,对于修习遍业处的人,他也知道:这个人会一直停留在准备阶段;这个人能生起取相,但达不到安止定;这个人能生起安止定,也能证得禅那,但证不到更高的殊胜成就;这个人还能证得更高的殊胜成就。巴利
‘‘Tesu ca kammesu idaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ sakkhissati, idaṃ na sakkhissati dubbalaṃ dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti. Tathā ‘‘vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesu ca esa iminā nīhārena vipassanāya āraddhattā arahā bhavissati, esa anāgāmī, esa sakadāgāmī, esa sotāpanno, ekabījī kolaṃkolo sattakkhattuparamo, esa maggaṃ pattuṃ na sakkhissati lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyameva ṭhassati, esa paccayapariggahe, esa nāmarūpapariggahe, arūpapariggahe ca ṭhassati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissatī’’ti jānāti. ‘‘Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi esa parikammamatte eva ṭhassati, esa nimittaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkhissati, na appanaṃ. Esa appanampi uppādessati, esa jhānaṃ adhigamissati, na uparivisesaṃ. Esa uparivisesampi adhigamissatī’’ti jānāti.
具有种种界,意思是:眼等以及地等这些界,属于它的,所以叫具有种种界;含义就是有多种界。世间,是指蕴、处等世间。眼界的等等,是为了从它们各自的自性上,说明那些界——由于这些界,世间才被称为“具有种种界”。其中,以自性之义、以无有情之义,称为界。眼本身就是界,所以叫眼界。其余各项也应当依此理解。欲界:这里有两种欲——烦恼欲和事物欲。在烦恼欲这一边,与欲相应的界就是欲界,这是欲寻的名称。在事物欲这一边,欲界诸法就是欲,这是省略了后一词;欲本身就是界,所以叫欲界。与嗔恚相应的界是嗔恚界,这是嗔恚寻的名称。嗔恚本身就是界,所以叫嗔恚界,这是十种恼害事所缘的嗔恚的名称。与害相应的界是害界,即害寻。或者,害本身就是界,所以叫害界,这是伤害其他众生的名称。出离界、无嗔界、无害界,应当知道就是出离寻等一切善法,以及慈和悲。色界:就是色有,或者一切色法。无色界:就是无色有,或者无色法。灭界:就是渴爱的灭尽。行界:就是一切有为法。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Anekadhātūti anekā cakkhādayo pathavādayo ca dhātuyo etassāti anekadhātu, bahudhātūti attho. Lokoti khandhāyatanādiloko. Cakkhudhātūtiādi yāhi dhātūhi ‘‘anekadhātū’’ti loko vutto, tāsaṃ sarūpato dassanaṃ. Tattha sabhāvaṭṭhena nissattaṭṭhena ca dhātu. Cakkhu eva dhātu cakkhudhātu. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Kāmadhātūti ettha dve kāmā kilesakāmo ca vatthukāmo ca. Kilesakāmapakkhe kāmapaṭisaṃyutto dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmavitakkassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vatthukāmapakkhe pana kāmāvacaradhammā kāmo uttarapadalopena, kāmo ca so dhātu cāti kāmadhātu. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto dhātu byāpādadhātu, byāpādavitakkassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Byāpādova dhātu byāpādadhātu, dasaāghātavatthuvisayassa paṭighassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto dhātu vihiṃsādhātu, vihiṃsāvitakko. Vihiṃsā eva vā dhātu vihiṃsādhātu, parasattavihesanassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsādhātuyo nekkhammavitakkādayo sabbakusaladhammā mettākaruṇā cāti veditabbaṃ. Rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo, sabbe vā rūpadhammā. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo, arūpadhammā vā. Nirodhadhātūti nirodhataṇhā. Saṅkhāradhātūti sabbe saṅkhatadhammā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
因为诸界彼此的特征各不相同,所以这个世间叫作“种种界”。正因如此,经里说:“眼界是一种,直到涅槃界是另一种。”就像这种智慧是依眼界等各类界的区分,从有执取的行世间去了解多界、种种界的世间;同样,它也依无执取的行世间去了知。独觉佛和两位上首弟子,只能了知有执取行世间的差别,而且还只是部分,不是全部。他们不了知无执取行世间的差别。但世尊则了知:“因为这种界偏盛,这棵树的树干是白的,那棵的是黑的;这棵光滑,那棵粗糙;这棵树皮厚,那棵树皮薄。因为这种界偏盛,这棵树的叶子在颜色、形状等方面就是这样;因为那种界偏盛,这棵树的花是青的、黄的、红的、白的,香的、臭的;因为这种界偏盛,这棵树的果实小、大、长、圆、形状好看、形状难看、光滑、粗糙、香、臭、苦、甜、辣、酸、涩。因为这种界偏盛,这棵树的刺锐利、极锐利、直、弯、黑、青、白。”像这样,世尊也依无执取的行世间,了知多界、种种界的情况。因为这种力量只属于一切知佛,不属于其他人。巴利
Aññamaññavilakkhaṇattā nānappakārā dhātuyo etasminti nānādhātu, loko. Tenevāha – ‘‘aññā cakkhudhātu yāva aññā nibbānadhātū’’ti, yathā ca idaṃ ñāṇaṃ cakkhudhātuādibhedena upādinnakasaṅkhāralokassa vasena anekadhātunānādhātulokaṃ pajānāti, evaṃ anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassapi vasena taṃ pajānāti. Paccekabuddhā hi dve ca aggasāvakā upādinnakasaṅkhāralokasseva nānattaṃ jānanti, tampi ekadeseneva, na nippadesato. Anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassa pana nānattaṃ na jānanti. Bhagavā pana ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa khandho seto hoti, imassa kāḷo, imassa maṭṭho, imassa pharuso, imassa bahalo, imassa tanuttaco. Imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa pattaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena evarūpaṃ nāma hoti, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā imassa rukkhassa pupphaṃ nīlaṃ hoti pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya phalaṃ khuddakaṃ mahantaṃ dīghaṃ vaṭṭaṃ susaṇṭhānaṃ dussaṇṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ pharusaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ tittaṃ madhuraṃ kaṭukaṃ ambilaṃ kasāvaṃ hoti, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa kaṇṭako tikhiṇo hoti, atikhiṇo ujuko kuṭilo kaṇho nīlo odāto hotī’’ti evaṃ anupādinnasaṅkhāralokassāpi vasena anekadhātunānādhātubhāvaṃ jānāti. Sabbaññubuddhānaṃ eva hi etaṃ balaṃ, na aññesaṃ.
60 无论哪一种界,就是指任何一种具有下劣等自性的界。因为意乐其实就是性向之界,所以意乐就是性向以下劣等状态而运作。而那种意乐,就是那个人对种种事物的决意和执著,因此说:他们意乐,就对那个事物决意、执著。为了分别说明意乐所涉及的范围,所以说有些偏于色等。这部分很容易理解。种种意乐智:就是对以下劣等不同状态而存在的种种意乐的智慧。巴利
60.Yaṃ yadeva dhātunti yaṃ kiñci hīnādisabhāvaṃ. Yasmā adhimutti nāma ajjhāsayadhātu, tasmā adhimuccanaṃ ajjhāsayassa hīnādisabhāvena pavattanaṃ. Taṃ pana tassa taṃ taṃ adhiṭṭhahanaṃ abhinivisanañca hotīti āha – ‘‘adhimuccanti, taṃ tadeva adhiṭṭhahanti abhinivisantī’’ti. Adhimuccanassa visayaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘keci rūpādhimuttā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Nānādhimuttikatāñāṇanti hīnādivasena nānādhimuttikatāya ñāṇaṃ.
他们随着自己的意乐而成为那样,也就是说,那些意乐低劣或意乐殊胜的有情,随各自意乐的不同而成为不同的样子。他们采纳种种业行,意思是说,他们按照与自己意乐相符的方式,亲自去采纳、去造作那些应当采纳、应当造作的种种业。为了从生起方式的角度分析这些业行,论中说“他们造六种业”等等。在这里应当这样连接文义:有些人以贪为动机来造业。其余几句也是同样的理解方式。所谓“此业被分析”,是说这业先从生起方式的角度分为六种,再从流转与还灭的角度来分析时,就变成两种。巴利
Te yathādhimuttā ca bhavantīti te hīnādhimuttikā paṇītādhimuttikā sattā yathā yathā adhimuttā honti. Taṃ taṃ kammasamādānaṃ samādiyantīti adhimuttianurūpaṃ taṃ taṃ attanā samādiyitabbaṃ kattabbaṃ kammaṃ karonti, tāni kammasamādānāni samuṭṭhānavasena vibhajanto ‘‘te chabbidhaṃ kamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha keci lobhavasena kammaṃ samādiyantīti sambandhitabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti taṃ samuṭṭhānavasena chabbidhaṃ puna pavattinivattivasena vibhajjamānaṃ duvidhaṃ.
“以贪的力量、以嗔的力量、以痴的力量造业”,这是针对十不善业道之业说的。那种业因为染污,所以是黑的,因此叫“黑业”;因为它使人投生在恶趣,带来黑的果报,所以叫“有黑报”。“以信的力量造业”,这是指十善业道之业。那种业因为无染污,所以是白的,因此叫“白业”;因为它使人投生在天界,带来白的果报,所以叫“有白报”。“以贪的力量、以嗔的力量、以痴的力量、以信的力量造业”,这是“黑白混杂业”,也就是“有黑白报”,即苦乐混杂的果报。因为造了混杂业,有人靠不善的力量投生为畜生道中的吉祥象,又靠善的力量在现世享受快乐;或者靠善的力量投生在王族,却因不善而感受痛苦。“以精进的力量、以慧的力量造业”,这种业是“非黑非白业”,是“有非黑非白报”,也就是能灭尽诸业的四道之思。为什么呢?如果这种业是黑的,就该带来黑报;如果是白的,就该带来属于投生白处的白报。但它并不给出这两种果报中的任何一种,所以叫“有非黑非白报”。这里的意思就是这样。巴利
Yaṃ lobhavasena dosavasena mohavasena ca kammaṃ karotīti dasaakusalakammapathakammaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tañhi saṃkiliṭṭhatāya kāḷakanti kaṇhaṃ. Apāyesu nibbattāpanato kāḷakavipākanti kaṇhavipākaṃ. Yaṃ saddhāvasena kammaṃ karotīti dasakusalakammapathakammaṃ. Tañhi asaṃkiliṭṭhattā paṇḍaranti sukkaṃ. Sagge nibbattāpanato paṇḍaravipākattā sukkavipākaṃ. Yaṃ lobhavasena dosavasena mohavasena saddhāvasena ca kammaṃ karoti, idaṃ kaṇhasukkanti vomissakakammaṃ. Kaṇhasukkavipākanti sukhadukkhavipākaṃ. Missakakammañhi katvā akusalavalena tiracchānayoniyaṃ maṅgalahatthibhāvaṃ upapanno kusalena pavatte sukhaṃ anubhavati, kusalena rājakule nibbattopi akusalena dukkhaṃ vedayati. Yaṃ vīriyavasena paññāvasena ca kammaṃ karoti, idaṃ kammaṃ akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ akaṇhaasukkavipākanti kammakkhayakarā catumaggacetanā. Tañhi yadi kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Yadi sukkaṃ bhaveyya, sukkaupapattipariyāpannaṃ vipākaṃ dadeyya. Ubhayavipākassa pana appadānato akaṇhaasukkavipākanti ayamettha attho.
在业的领受中,第一种是裸形者的行道,即沉迷于诸欲;第二种是烦恼炽盛者、即使哭泣的泣面者,却修习清净梵行;第三种是裸形者不沉迷于诸欲;第四种是即使得不到资具、具有禅那与观乐的人,修习教法梵行。像这样的种类之「业的领受」,也指任何其他类似类型的业。关于「以此人」等,是显示世尊之智在此业报中运作的方式。其中,「已累积的」:指业已按能产生果报的方式被造作、已累积。「未异熟的」:指果报尚未成熟。「现起于异熟」:指已为给予果报创造了机会。「而不能进入破邪见」:指不能证得名为破邪见的圣道,即由于破除烦恼行而应进入的圣道。「世尊不教导他」:指对于被异熟障覆盖的人,世尊不以使其证悟谛理为主要目的而教导,但为了熏习,也会为那样的人说法,如同对阿阇世等人那样。巴利
Kammasamādāne paṭhamaṃ acelakapaṭipadā kāmesu pātabyatā, dutiyaṃ tibbakilesassa assumukhassāpi rudato parisuddhabrahmacariyacaraṇaṃ, tatiyaṃ kāmesu apātabyatā acelakapaṭipadā, catutthaṃ paccaye alabhamānassāpi jhānavipassanāsukhasamaṅgino sāsanabrahmacariyacaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ evaṃ jātiyaṃ kammasamādānanti yaṃ aññampi evaṃpakāraṃ kammaṃ. Iminā puggalenātiādi tasmiṃ kammavipāke bhagavato ñāṇassa pavattanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha upacitanti yathā kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitaṃ. Avipakkanti na vipakkavipākaṃ. Vipākāya paccupaṭṭhitanti vipākadānāya katokāsaṃ. Na ca bhabbo abhinibbidhā gantunti kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ abhinibbijjhanato abhinibbidhāsaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ adhigantuṃ na ca bhabbo. Taṃ bhagavā na ovadatīti taṃ vipākāvaraṇena nivutaṃ puggalaṃ bhagavā saccapaṭivedhaṃ purakkhatvā na ovadati, vāsanatthaṃ pana tādisānampi dhammaṃ deseti eva, ajātasattuādīnaṃ viya.
已累积的,是指已经开始造作。所以经文说“还未达到圆满”。这是为了显示它不可能成为邪定性。“在达到圆满之前”,意思是在达到能产生果报的圆满之前就先证得了。由于是邪定性的缘故,它在果法尚未成熟之时就立刻造成不具备果法资格的状态。所以经文说“在超越可调伏性之前”。另一种读法是“在超越不定性之前”,意思一样。“未完成”是指业未圆满,或者指那些未圆满的业。巴利
Upacitanti kātuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘na ca tāva pāripūriṃ gata’’nti. Tena micchattaniyāmassa asamatthataṃ dasseti. Purā pāripūriṃ gacchatīti pāripūriṃ phalanipphādanasamatthataṃ gacchati purā adhigaccheyya. Micchattaniyatatāya sajjukaṃ phaladhammassa abhājanabhāvaṃ nibbattayati purā. Tenevāha – ‘‘purā veneyyattaṃ samatikkamatī’’ti. ‘‘Purā aniyataṃ samatikkamatī’’tipi pāṭho, so evattho. Asamatteti kamme asampuṇṇe, te asampuṇṇe vā.
61 像这样,先说明了与烦恼障混杂在一起的业障,现在为了说明不混杂的业障,就说了“对于这个人”等等。那段话的意思和前面说的一样。巴利
61. Evaṃ kilesantarāyamissakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetvā idāni amissakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa ca puggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vuttanayameva.
“一切”是指在这个“力分别”里所说的一切业。“柔软、中等、强烈”:就是柔软、中等、强烈的状态。意思是说,因为业有柔软等差别,所以能显出它们果报的柔软、中等、强烈差别。在“现法受”等当中,在此世、也就是这个身体里应当感受的果报,叫“现法受”;在下一世、也就是紧接着的身体里应当感受的果报,叫“次生受”;在更后面的身体里,也就是从这以后任何一个身体里应当感受的果报,叫“后后受”。因为在一个速行心路里,七种思当中,第一种思叫“现法受”,最后一种思叫“次生受”,中间五种思叫“后后受”。“果报差别智”:就是对果报的差别、也就是果报种种不同的智慧。而此业果成熟的原因有:趣的成就、趣的失坏,依报的成就、依报的失坏,时机的成就、时机的失坏,精勤的成就、精勤的失坏。这些作为它们原因的关系,应当依据“有些不善业被趣的成就所阻碍,所以不成熟”等经文(《分别论》810)来了知。巴利
Sabbesanti imasmiṃ balaniddese vuttānaṃ sabbesaṃ kammānaṃ. Mudumajjhādhimattatāti mudumajjhatibbabhāvo. Kammānañhi muduādibhāvena taṃvipākānaṃ mudumajjhatikkhabhāvo viññāyatīti adhippāyo. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyantiādīsu diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃ attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ. Upapajje anantare attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ. Aparasmiṃ attabhāve ito aññasmiṃ yasmiṃ kasmiñci attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ. Ekajavanavārasmiñhi sattasu cetanāsu paṭhamacetanā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ nāma. Pariyosānacetanā upapajjavedanīyaṃ nāma. Majjhe pañca cetanā aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ nāma. Vipākavemattatāñāṇanti vipākavemattatāya vipākavisese ñāṇaṃ. Imassa pana kammavipākassa gatisampatti gativipatti, upadhisampatti upadhivipatti, kālasampatti kālavipatti, payogasampatti payogavipattiyo kāraṇaṃ. So ca nesaṃ kāraṇabhāvo ‘‘atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccantī’’tiādipāḷivasena (vibha. 810) veditabbo.
62 62. 在《无间力分别》中,为了用那里所说的“业之领受”这一词就把禅那等也包括进去说明,所以说了“如此已受持的业”等话。在有学和凡夫的相续中生起的禅那等,就是业。其中,“如此已受持的”是指在“白、有白报、现世乐、未来乐报”这类方式中已受持的业。“杂染”是指由于对立之法而成为染污的状态。“清净”是指从对立之法中净化。“出起”是指熟练的清净以及从有分中出起。所谓“如此杂染”等,意思就是:世尊以这种方式了知禅那等的杂染、清净和出起的智慧,就是无障智,对他来说没有任何障碍。巴利
62. Anantarabalaniddese vuttakammasamādānapadeneva jhānādīni saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā samādinnānaṃ kammāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sekkhaputhujjanasantānesu pavattāni jhānādīni kammaṃ honti. Tattha tathā samādinnānanti ‘‘sukkaṃ sukkavipākaṃ paccuppannasukhaṃ, āyatiṃ sukhavipāka’’nti evamādippakārehi samādinnesu kammesu. Saṃkilesoti paṭipakkhadhammavasena kiliṭṭhabhāvo. Vodānaṃ paṭipakkhadhammehi visujjhanaṃ. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paguṇavodānaṃ bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānañca. Evaṃ saṃkilissatītiādīsu ayamevattho – iminā ākārena jhānādi saṃkilissati vodāyati vuṭṭhahatīti jānanañāṇaṃ bhagavato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, na tassa āvaraṇaṃ atthīti.
“禅那有多少种”等这一问,是为了按类别说明禅那等法而开始的。“四种禅那”是依四法的方式,指色界禅那。“十一种”是依“有色者观色”等经文,按八种解脱和三种空解脱等来说的。“八种”是从这些当中除去出世间的解脱,剩下八种。“七种”是从那些当中除去灭尽定,剩下七种。“三种”是依经的方式,指空解脱等三种。“两种”是依阿毗达摩的方式,因为无相解脱不可能存在,所以是剩下的两种。在这里,依次所说的七种解脱,是在安止的刹那,以镇伏的方式从敌对法中解脱出来,又因为信解所缘而称为解脱。而灭尽定因为完全从想与受中脱离,所以叫做出离式的解脱。出世间的解脱则因为以各自的道断除烦恼而解脱,所以称为解脱。应当了知这个差别。巴利
Kati jhānānītiādi jhānādayo vibhāgena dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Cattāri jhānānīti catukkanayavasena rūpāvacarajjhānāni sandhāyāha. Ekādasāti ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.129, 174; 3.339, 358; ma. ni. 2.248; 3.312) aṭṭhannaṃ tiṇṇañca suññatavimokkhādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhāti tesu ṭhapetvā lokuttare vimokkhe aṭṭha. Sattāti tesu eva nirodhasamāpattiṃ ṭhapetvā satta. Tayoti suttantapariyāyena suññatavimokkhādayo tayo. Dveti abhidhammapariyāyena animittavimokkhassāsambhavato avasesā dve. Ettha ca paṭipāṭiyā satta appitappitakkhaṇe vikkhambhanavasena paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato , ārammaṇe adhimuccanato ca vimokkhā. Nirodhasamāpatti pana sabbaso saññāvedayitehi vimuttattā apagamavimokkho nāma. Lokuttarā ca taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi samucchedavasena vimuttattā vimokkhoti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo.
在各类定当中,按四法方式和五法方式来分,初禅的定叫作有寻有伺定。按五法方式,第二禅的定叫作无寻唯伺定。按四法方式和五法方式,其余诸禅的定都叫作无寻无伺定。巴利
Samādhīsu catukkanayapañcakanayesu paṭhamajjhānasamādhi savitakko savicāro samādhi nāma. Pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi avitakko vicāramatto samādhi nāma. Catukkanaye pañcakanayepi sesajhānesu samādhi avitakko avicāro samādhi nāma.
在诸等至当中,按次序排列的八种等至,既可以叫“定”,也可以叫“等至”。为什么?因为有心的专一状态。灭尽定因为没有这个,所以不叫“定”。想等至等,前面已经说过了。巴利
Samāpattīsu paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ ‘‘samādhī’’tipi nāmaṃ ‘‘samāpattī’’tipi. Kasmā? Cittekaggatāsabbhāvato. Nirodhasamāpattiyā tadabhāvato na ‘‘samādhī’’ti nāmaṃ. Saññāsamāpattiādi heṭṭhā vuttameva.
有退分性质的定:从还不熟练的初禅等定中出定的人,他的想和作意会冲向欲贪等,这就是初禅等定具有退分性质。因为经中说“初禅的染污是欲贪和嗔恚”,所以应当按第二禅等的方式来套用理解。所谓“鸡”,是指以不知、厌恶的方式而贪著其中。“鸡修习者”:这是就人来说诸禅那,说的就是初禅和第二禅这两种。如果有人证得初禅或第二禅后,心想“到此就够了”而退缩,不再向上努力,那么那四种禅那都称为“鸡禅那”,具有这些禅那的人就是鸡修习者。其中,前两种禅那因为敌人近在眼前、势力强大,又没有殊胜分,所以按染污来说;后两种禅那虽然没有殊胜分,但因为敌人微弱,所以按清净来说。应当这样理解。巴利
Hānabhāgiyo samādhīti appaguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādianupakkhandanaṃ paṭhamajjhānādisamādhissa hānabhāgiyatā. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānassa kāmarāgabyāpādā saṃkileso’’ti vuttattā dutiyajjhānādivasena yojetabbaṃ. Kukkuṭaṃ vuccati ajaññājigucchanamukhena tapparamatā. Kukkuṭajhāyīti puggalādhiṭṭhānena jhānāni vuttāni, dve paṭhamadutiyajjhānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo paṭhamaṃ dutiyaṃ vā jhānaṃ nibbattetvā ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjati, uttari na vāyamati, tassa tāni jhānāni cattāripi ‘‘kukkuṭajhānānī’’ti vuccanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca kukkuṭajhāyī. Tesu purimāni dve āsannabalavapaccatthikattā visesabhāgiyatābhāvato ca saṃkilesabhāvena vuttāni. Itarāni pana visesabhāgiyatābhāvepi mandapaccatthikattā vodānabhāvena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
具有殊胜分的定:从熟练的初禅等出定后,想与作意跃入第二禅等,以及熟练的清净、有分出起,这称为“出起”。因为较低的熟练禅那,是较高禅那的近因,所以清净也称为“出起”。依有分心而从一切禅那出起,因此有分与清净都是出起。然而,由于以出起自在力,能在所限定的时间内从等至出定,所以这里把等至出起的善巧称为“出起”。巴利
Visesabhāgiyo samādhīti paguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ dutiyajjhānādipakkhandanaṃ, paguṇavodānaṃ bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānañca ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tasmā vodānampi ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgavasena sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti bhavaṅgañca vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ. Yasmā pana vuṭṭhānavasibhāvena yathāparicchinnakālaṃ samāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā samāpattivuṭṭhānakosallaṃ idha ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
63 就是那定本身是指紧接在(如来)十力解说之后、以禅那等名称所说的那个定。资具就是辅助条件。诸根是指信根、念根、慧根。诸力是指这些根连同惭、愧一起。把精进单独提出来说,是为了显示精进对诸力有很大帮助。因为靠着精进的支撑,信等诸力面对对立面时才不会被撼动。所以这样说:“依精进之力,诸力得以生起。”它们的是指这些根的。软、中等、上等之性:不清净明利的就是软;不太清净明利的是中等;极度清净明利、强而有力的,就称为锐利。巴利
63.Tassevasamādhissāti tassa anantarabalaniddese jhānādipariyāyehi vuttasamādhissa. Parivārāti parikkhārā. Indriyānīti saddhāsatipaññindriyāni. Balānīti hirottappehi saddhiṃ tāniyeva. Vīriyassa visuṃ gahaṇaṃ balānaṃ bahūpakāradassanatthaṃ. Vīriyupatthambhena hi saddhādayo paṭipakkhena akampanīyā honti. Tenevāha – ‘‘vīriyavasena balāni bhavantī’’ti. Tesanti indriyānaṃ. Mudumajjhādhimattatāti avisadaṃ mudu. Nātivisadaṃ majjhaṃ. Ativisadaṃ adhimattaṃ balavaṃ ‘‘tikkha’’nti vuccati.
为了说明世尊的说法是随顺所教化众生的根性而展开的,所以说了“其中,世尊”等话。其中,“以略说与广说”,是指用广说来解释略说的内容。或者,“略说”是指仅仅列出纲目。“以略说与广说”,是指通过总说和详释。“以广说”,是指通过总说、详释和再详释。“柔和”,是指轻缓,不以恶趣的恐怖、轮回的恐怖等来恐吓、施压。“柔和而锐利”,是指不太锐利。通过令人生起悚惧的事物来激发悚惧等,从而施加压力,那就是锐利的方式。“开示止”,是指偏重于止而教导,并非同样偏重观——这是它的意趣。因为仅仅依靠止,是不可能证悟圣谛的。“止与观”,是指止与观平衡并行。“观”,是指极度偏重于观而教导。因为在这里,钝根等类众生正是迅速通达之类,所以说“为钝根者开示出离”等话。其中,“于增上慧学”,是指增上慧学。巴利
Veneyyānaṃ indriyānurūpaṃ bhagavato desanāpavattīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṃkhittavitthārenāti saṃkhittassa vitthārena. Atha vā saṃkhittenāti uddiṭṭhamattena. Saṃkhittavitthārenāti uddesena niddesena ca. Vitthārenāti uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesehi. Mudukanti lahukaṃ apāyabhayavaṭṭabhayādīhi santajjanavasena bhāriyaṃ akatvā. Mudutikkhanti nātitikkhaṃ. Saṃvegavatthūhi saṃvegajananādivasena bhāriyaṃ katvā. Samathaṃ upadisatīti samathaṃ adhikaṃ katvā upadisati, na tathā vipassananti adhippāyo. Na hi kevalena samathena saccappaṭivedho sambhavati. Samathavipassananti samadhuraṃ samathavipassanaṃ. Vipassananti sātisayaṃ vipassanaṃ upadisati. Yasmā cettha tikkhindriyādayo ugghaṭitaññuādayova, tasmā ‘‘tikkhindriyassa nissaraṇaṃ upadisatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhipaññāsikkhāyāti adhipaññāsikkhaṃ.
这里说的“智”,是指由于诸根的钝、中、利差别而有的那种智,这称为“对其他众生、其他个人的根器上下差异之智”,应当这样联系起来理解。为了说明这种智运作的方式,才说了“此人达到了这个境地”等话。其中,“此人达到了这个境地与修习”:是说这个人已经达到、正在达到或将会达到这样的杂染习气与清净有分,因为时态的选定并没有固定限制,就像“duddha”这个词的用法一样。在此时、此刻,以这种钝、中、利的区分来教导他。“如是界者”:是说他依低劣等性质而具有这样的志向、这样的胜解。“此人的意趣”:是说这个人有常见或断见这一类意趣,或者有随顺如实智的忍这一类意趣。因为有四种意趣,众生安住于其中,所以称为意趣。而世尊了知众生这种意趣时,甚至在他们还没有生起对各种恶见的观智和业自作智的那一刻,也能了知。经中也这样说过:“即使正在享受欲乐,也了知:‘这个人是重欲的人,是欲意趣、欲胜解的人。’即使正在享受欲乐,也了知:‘这个人是重出离的人,是出离意趣、出离胜解的人。’正在修出离……嗔恨……无嗔……昏沉睡眠……光明想时,也了知:‘这个人是重昏沉睡眠的人,是昏沉睡眠意趣、昏沉睡眠胜解的人。’”巴利
Yaṃ ettha ñāṇanti ettha indriyānaṃ mudumajjhādhimattatāya yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, idaṃ vuccati parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti sambandhitabbaṃ. Tassa ñāṇassa pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ bhūmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ imaṃ bhūmiṃ bhāvanañca gatoti ayaṃ puggalo evamimaṃ saṃkilesavāsanaṃ vodānaṃ bhavaṅgañca gato gacchati gamissati ca, kālavacanicchāya abhāvato, yathā duddhanti. Imāya velāya imasmiṃ samaye imāya mudumajjhatikkhabhedāya anusāsaniyā. Evaṃdhātukoti hīnādivasena evaṃajjhāsayo evaṃadhimuttiko. Ayañcassa āsayoti imassa puggalassa ayaṃ sassatucchedappakāro, yathābhūtañāṇānulomakhantippakāro vā āsayo. Idañhi catubbidhaṃ āsayanti ettha sattā vasantīti āsayoti vuccati. Imaṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vipassanāñāṇakammassakataññāṇānañca appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti eva. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti. Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti. Nekkhammaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti… byāpādaṃ… abyāpādaṃ… thinamiddhaṃ… ālokasaññaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo thinamiddhagaruko thinamiddhāsayo thinamiddhādhimutto’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
这个“随眠”,是指这个人还没有断除的欲贪之类的随眠烦恼。确实,只有还没有断除、并且已经变得强有力的烦恼,才叫随眠。
“对其他众生”,是指主要的众生。
“对其他补特伽罗”,是指除了那些之外的其他众生,意思是较低劣的众生。
或者,这两个词其实是同一个意思,只是为了适应所教化的对象不同,才分成两种说法。
“根之上下差异差别智”:para 是“上”,apara 是“下”,合起来就是 paropariyatta,也就是“上下性”,把 a 变成 o;它的差别性就是 vemattatā。
所以,这是对信等诸根的上下差异和差别性的智,就叫“根之上下差异差别智”。应当这样理解这个词的拆分。巴利
Ayaṃ anusayoti ayaṃ imassa puggalassa kāmarāgādiko appahīnoyeva anusayitakileso. Appahīnoyeva hi thāmagato kileso anusayo. Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ sattānaṃ, hīnasattānanti attho. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena dvidhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti parabhāvo ca aparabhāvo ca paropariyattaṃ a-kārassa okāraṃ katvā, tassa vemattatā paropariyattavemattatā. Saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattavemattatāya ñāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti padavibhāgo veditabbo.
在这里,“凡”指的是:通过随念种种宿住的方式而生起的世尊之智,这就是第八如来力,应当这样联系起来理解。“种种”指多种多样,或者以种种方式生起。“宿住”指想要忆念的自他紧接过去的一生,从那里开始,在各处所住的生命相续。“随念”指像“一生、二生”这样,按出生的次第一路追溯而忆念;或者说,随顺而忆念,只要心一转向就能忆念,这就是它的含义。因为世尊不需要任何准备工作,仅仅凭转向就能忆念。“即如”是一个介词,用来引出例子。“乃至一生”指以一个结生为开端、以死亡为终结、包含在一期生命中的蕴相续。这个道理也适用于“二生”等等。巴利
Tattha yanti yaṃ anekavihitassa pubbenivāsassa anussaraṇavasena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ, idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalanti sambandho. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ. Pubbenivāsanti anussarituṃ icchitaṃ attano paresañca samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussaratīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭiyā anugantvā sarati, anudeva vā sarati, citte abhininnāmitamatte eva saratīti attho. Bhagavato hi parikammakiccaṃ natthi, āvajjanamatteneva sarati. Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāranidassanatthe nipāto. Ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsupi.
在“许多坏劫”等说法里,逐渐衰减的劫应理解为坏劫,逐渐增长的劫应理解为成劫。其中,坏劫本身就涵盖了坏住劫,因为坏住劫以坏劫为根源;成劫也涵盖了成住劫。这样一来,经中说的“比丘们,劫有这四种不可计数。哪四种?坏、坏住、成、成住”,这些就全都被包含在内了。“我于彼处”等话,是在显示随念的方式。其中,“我于彼处”指在那个坏劫中,或者在那个有、胎、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中。“有如是名”指名叫帝须或弗沙。“有如是种姓”指婆伽婆种姓或乔达摩种姓。“有如是容貌”指肤色白或黑。“有如是食物”指以含肉之粳米饭为食,或以自然落下的果实为食。“有如是苦乐感受”指以各种方式感受身体的、心理的,或有染着、无染着等各类苦乐。“有如是寿量边际”指寿命最长一百岁,或最长八万四千劫。“我从彼处死后,生于彼处”指我从那个有或有情聚死后,又转生到某个有情聚中。或者也可理解为,我曾存在于那个有或有情聚中。至于“有如是名”等,含义和前面已解释的一样。巴利
Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo, vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti veditabbo. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito taṃmūlattā, vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni , tāni sabbāni pariggahitāni honti. Amutrāsintiādi saraṇākāradassanaṃ. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe, amumhi bhave vā yoniyaṃ vā gatiyaṃ vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyaṃ vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti bhaggavo vā gotamo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisappabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparamāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasahassaparamāyupariyanto vā. So tato cuto amutra udapādinti so tato bhavato, sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma sattanikāye udapādiṃ. Atha vā tatrāpi bhave vā sattanikāye vā ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttatthameva.
64 在“天眼”等说法中,因为和天眼相似,所以叫“天”。诸天的眼净色是善行所生,不受胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,远离了随烦恼,因此即使很远也能取到所缘,这就是天眼。而这里由精进修行之力所生的智眼,也和它一样,所以因为与天眼相似而叫“天”;又因为依天住而获得,也叫“天”;又因为自身依止于天住,也叫“天”;又因为通过光明遍而有大光明,也叫“天”;又因为能看见穿墙等处的色法,有广大的行境,也叫“天”。这一切应当依据声明的论典来理解。以能见的含义来说,就是“眼”。因为能执行眼的作用,所以也像眼一样,就是“眼”。因为能看见死与生,是见解清净的因,所以是“清净”。如果一个人只看见死,没看见生,就会执取断见;如果只看见生,没看见死,就会执取新有情突然出现的见解。但如果一个人两者都看见,因为他超越了这两种恶见,这种见就成为见解清净的因。而世尊两者都看见,因此说“因为能看见死与生,是见解清净的因,所以是清净”。巴利
64.Dibbenātiādīsu dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattampi pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttattā dūrepi ārammaṇaggahaṇasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idampi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena vā paṭiladdhattā, attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu. Cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati, na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati. Tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Tadubhayañca bhagavā passati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti.
或者,因为远离了十一种随烦恼,所以是清净的。正如所说的:巴利
Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Yathāha –
“阿那律,我这样了知‘疑是心的杂染’之后,就断除了疑这个心的杂染。‘不作意是心的杂染……昏沉睡眠……惊悚……兴奋……粗恶……过度精进……精进不足……欲求……种种想……对色过度沉思是心的杂染’,我这样了知之后,就断除了对色过度沉思这个心的杂染。”巴利
‘‘So kho ahaṃ anuruddhā ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. ‘Amanasikāro cittassa upakkileso… thinamiddhaṃ… chambhitattaṃ… uppilaṃ… duṭṭhullaṃ… accāraddhavīriyaṃ… atilīnavīriyaṃ… abhijappā… nānattasaññā… atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahi’’nti (ma. ni. 3.242) evamādi.
这同样因为远离了十一种随烦恼,所以是清净的。它超越了人们通常活动的范围,能看见色相,所以是超越人的;或者因为超越了肉眼,所以是超越人的。就以那清净、超越人的天眼。巴利
Tadevaṃ ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā vā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
“看见众生”,是指像用肉眼看见众生那样,用天眼看见、观察众生。“正在死去、正在投生”在这里是指:在死心那一刹那或投生心那一刹那,即使以天眼也无法看见。然而,那些临近死亡、现在即将死去的有情,以及那些已经取到结生、刚刚投生的有情,则被称为“正在死去、正在投生”。他们就是这样的正在死去、正在投生者。“低劣”是指因为与痴的等流相应,所以由于低贱的种姓、家族、财富等而受轻视、被轻蔑。“殊胜”是指因为与不痴的等流相应,所以与前者相反。“金色”是指因为与不瞋的等流相应,所以具有可爱、可意、悦意的肤色。“丑陋”是指因为与瞋的等流相应,所以具有不可爱、不可意、不悦意的肤色,也就是指美丽或丑陋。“善趣”是指投生到善趣,或者因为与不贪的等流相应,所以指富裕、大财。“恶趣”是指投生到恶趣,或者因为与贪的等流相应,所以指贫穷、缺乏饮食。“随业而行”是指无论积累了什么样的业,就随着那种业而去。在这里,前面“正在死去”等语句说的是天眼的作用;而“随业而行”这个词说的是随业行智的作用。随业行智和未来分智都是以天眼为基础,与天眼一起成就。巴利
Satte passatīti manusso manussaṃ maṃsacakkhunā viya satte passati oloketi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunāpi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā. Ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti, ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampati nibbattā, te ‘‘cavamānā upapajjamānā’’ti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnajātikulabhogādivasena hīḷite paribhūte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte abhirūpe virūpe vāti attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapānabhojane. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ. Iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ. Yathākammūpagañāṇaanāgataṃsañāṇāni ca dibbacakkhupādakāneva dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
在“身恶行”等说法中,恶劣的行为,或者被烦恼染污而腐坏的行为,就是恶行。通过身体造作的恶行,或者从身体生起的恶行,就是身恶行。语恶行和意恶行也应当这样理解。“具足”就是具备的意思。“毁谤诸圣者”是指对佛陀等诸圣者,甚至对在家的入流者,以最严重的事情或者以贬损功德的方式,进行毁谤、辱骂、指责。“有邪见”是指持有颠倒的看法。“受持邪见之业”是指以邪见为根本原因而受持的各种各样的业。他们还会促使别人也去受持那些以邪见为根本的身业等。在这里,虽然毁谤圣者和邪见已经包含在语恶行和意恶行的举出中,但再次说出它们,是为了显示它们具有极大的罪过。因为毁谤圣者有很大的罪过,和无间业相似。正如所说的:巴利
Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu duṭṭhu caritaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattā duccaritaṃ. Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Evaṃ vacīmanoduccaritānipi daṭṭhabbāni. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃupavādakāti buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ, antamaso gihisotāpannānampi antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā akkosakā garahakā. Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhihetubhūtasamādinnanānāvidhakammā. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Tattha vacīmanoduccaritaggahaṇena ariyūpavādamicchādiṭṭhīsu gahitāsupi tesaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha –
舍利弗,就像一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,若能在现世中证得某项,舍利弗,我说,如果他不舍弃那语、不舍弃那心、不舍弃那见,就会像被搬运的东西一样,原封不动地堕入地狱。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi , sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
再没有别的什么比邪见罪过更重了。正如经中所说:巴利
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha –
比丘们,我看不到任何别的单一法,会像邪见这样罪过这么大。比丘们,邪见就是罪过中最严重的。巴利
‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
身体分解,是指舍弃执取的五蕴。死后,是指紧接着执取新生的五蕴。或者,身体分解是指命根断绝;死后是指从死殁之后。“恶道”等全部都是地狱的别名。地狱之所以叫“恶道”,是因为它远离了被认为是福德、能导向天界和解脱的法;或者是因为没有快乐的来源。“恶趣”是苦的去处和归宿;或者因为嗔恚深重,是由恶业所生的趣处。“堕落”是指造恶业的人无力地堕入其中。“地狱”是指其中没有任何可以称为快乐滋味的东西。巴利
Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ. Apāyantiādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati, dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gati duggati. Vivasā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
或者,用“恶道”这个词来指畜生道,因为畜生道属于恶道,已经离开了善趣。但它不算恶趣,因为其中有龙王等有大势力的众生存在。用“恶趣”这个词来指饿鬼界,因为它既是恶道又是恶趣,既离开了善趣,又是苦的去处。但它不算堕落,因为不像阿修罗那样堕落;而且有大神力的饿鬼也能生到宫殿中。用“堕落”这个词来指阿修罗众,因为按前面所说的含义,它既是恶道又是恶趣,而且是从快乐的聚合中堕落,所以称为堕落。用“地狱”这个词来指无间地狱等各种类型的地狱。“再生”是指往生到那里,也就是在那里出生。从相反的一面来理解,应当知道白分(善的一类)。巴利
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti, tiracchānayoni hi apāyo, sugatito apetattā. Na duggati, mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ dīpeti, so hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā, dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā. Na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Petamahiddhikānañhi vimānānipi nibbattanti. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ dīpeti, so hi yathāvuttenatthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sukhasamussayehi vinipātattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādianekappakāraṃ nirayameva dīpeti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
不过这里有个区别:在这里,用“善趣”这个词也把人趣包括进来了;而用“天”这个词则只指天趣。其中,美好的去处就是善趣。“天”是因为以色等所缘而极为殊妙。一切事物都因为会坏灭、会毁坏,所以称为“世间”,这就是词义。某人在某个俱胝劫中积累的业,使他现在或未来投生天界或堕入恶道,这把第八和第九佛力智的作用合在一起展示了。对于“十万劫”等说法也是如此。因此说:“这是世尊的两种智。”巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – ettha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatimpi saṅgaṇhāti. Saggaggahaṇena devagatiṃ eva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Amukāya kappakoṭiyaṃ upacitaṃ tenāyaṃ etarahi, anāgate vā saggūpago apāyūpago cāti aṭṭhamanavamabalañāṇakiccaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā dassitaṃ. Tathā kappasatasahassevātiādīsupi. Tenevāha – ‘‘imāni bhagavato dve ñāṇānī’’ti.
魔罗在菩提树下被摧伏,意思是烦恼魔罗在菩提树下被摧伏、被彻底断除。这摧伏、断除烦恼魔罗,就是世尊的第十力。因此说“尽一切漏的智”。又因为当以阿罗汉道连同一并的习气断尽一切漏时,世尊便算是证得了一切知智,所以说“证得一切知性”等。巴利
Nihato māro bodhimūleti nihato samucchinno kilesamāro bodhirukkhamūle. Idaṃ bhagavato dasamaṃ balanti idaṃ kilesamārassa hananaṃ samucchindanaṃ bhagavato dasamaṃ balaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘sabbāsavaparikkhayaṃ ñāṇa’’nti. Yasmā pana yadā arahattamaggena savāsanā sabbe āsavā khepitā, tadā bhagavatā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ adhigataṃ nāma, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ sabbaññutā pattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这一点,首先是诸位阿阇梨一致同意的解释。但持反对意见的人说:“所谓十力智并不是各自独立的,因为说过‘证得一切知性,了知一切法’,所以这只是对一切知智所作的区分。”这种说法不能那样看待。因为十力智和一切知智确实是不同的。十力智只了知各自各自的作用,而一切知智则连那些以及除此之外的也都了知。在十力智中,第一力只了知因与非因;第二力只了知业的区分;第三力只了知界的种种差别之因;第四力只了知意乐与信解;第五力只了知业异熟的不同;第六力只了知与禅那等一起的它们的杂染等;第七力只了知诸根的利钝状态;第八力只了知过去世蕴的相续;第九力只了知有情的死与生;第十力只了知真理的区分。而一切知智则了知这些应当了知的以及比这更超出的。但它并不做所有这些的作用。因为它若是禅那,就不能入定;若是神通,就不能变现神变;若是道,就不能断尽烦恼。巴利
Ayaṃ tāvettha ācariyānaṃ samānatthakathā. Paravādī panāha – ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiekkaṃ natthi, yasmā ‘sabbaññutā pattā viditā sabbadhammā’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti. Dutiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, tatiyaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, catutthaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, pañcamaṃ kammavipākantarameva, chaṭṭhaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, sattamaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutūpapātameva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ sabbaṃ na karoti . Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti.
另外,应该这样反问持反对意见的人:“所谓十力智,它是有寻有伺、无寻唯伺、还是无寻无伺?是欲界、色界、无色界?是世间还是出世间?”如果对方了解,就会说:“按顺序,前七个是有寻有伺,后面两个是无寻无伺;漏尽智则可能是有寻有伺,可能是无寻唯伺,可能是无寻无伺。”同样,他会说:按顺序,前七个是欲界,接着两个是色界,最后一个是出世间。但一切知智则只是有寻有伺、只是欲界、只是世间——在这里应当得出这个结论。巴利
Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāmetaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati, tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānīti, āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāranti. Tathā paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ lokuttaranti vakkhati. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva kāmāvacarameva lokiyamevāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
第三,理趣摄的注释。巴利
3. Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā
65 65. 这样用种种不同的理路把“择摄”详细展开之后,现在为了说明“理趣摄”等,就开始说“其中,什么是理趣摄?”等等。在这里,“因此,守护心者”这偈颂的词义已经详细解释过了。守护心者将以正思惟为行境,这是合理的。也就是说,一个人以正念为门闩,关闭包括意门在内的六根门而安住,欲寻等邪思惟根本没有机会生起,只有出离寻等正思惟才会成为他的行境、心的活动处。这个道理是成立的。所谓“理趣”,就是与道理相连接、相吻合、相一致的意思。以正思惟为行境者将成为正见。按照前面所说的方式,以正思惟为行境的人,因为思惟不颠倒,所以必定成为正见。以正见——也就是观智——为先行而安住的人,将以道智毫无迷惑地透彻了知五蕴的生灭。这样透彻了知时,由于五蕴的本性就是苦,他将舍弃一切被称为恶趣的生存状态,因此超越一切堕落怖畏和轮回怖畏。以上所说的全部义理,都是完全合理、合乎道理的。巴利
65. Evaṃ nānānayehi vicayahārasampātaṃ vitthāretvā idāni yuttihārasampātādīni dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāya padattho vitthāritoyeva. Rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro bhavissatīti yujjatīti manacchaṭṭhāni dvārāni satikavāṭena pidahitvā viharantassa kāmavitakkādīnaṃ micchāsaṅkappānaṃ avasaro eva natthīti nekkhammavitakkādiko sammāsaṅkappo eva tassa gocaro pavattiṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatīti ayamattho yujjati. Yuttiyā ghaṭeti saṃsandati sametīti attho. Sammāsaṅkappagocaro sammādiṭṭhi bhavissatīti vuttanayena sammāsaṅkappagocaro puggalo aviparītameva vitakkato sammādiṭṭhi bhavissati. Sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ purakkhatvā viharanto maggañāṇena pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ asammohato paṭivijjhissati. Tathā paṭivijjhanto ca dukkhasabhāvattā duggatisaṅkhātā sabbā bhavagatiyo jahissati, tato eva sabbaṃ vinipātabhayaṃ saṃsārabhayañca samatikkamissatīti sabbopi cāyamattho yutto evāti.
第四,近依、摄、会合的注释。巴利
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātavaṇṇanā
66 就像拥有自己的成就时,思惟会变得善加安立。因为守护根门是圆满善行的近因,所以说“守护心者”是三种善行的近依。它的意思是:“守护心者”这句话,就是三种善行的近依之说。对于多修出离寻等正思惟的人,断除欲贪等盖障变得容易,因此出离寻等是止的近因,所以说“正思惟为所行境”是止的近依。安立在业自性正见和有因缘名色正见中的人,看到属于自身的轮回之苦,为了超越它而开始修观,因此正见是观的特殊原因,所以说“以正见为先行”是观的近依。努力修习生灭随观的人,会进入正性决定,因此那是证得初道的原因,所以说“知生灭后”是见地的近依。通过光明想等作意来战胜昏沉睡眠,是精进的近因,所以说“战胜昏沉睡眠的比丘”是精进的近依。虽然在圣道刹那,断除和修习同时发生,因为欲求同一证悟,但如果没有断除应断的烦恼,修习就不可能圆满。因此,就像以断为因由那样,说了修习:“断除一切恶趣”是修习的近依。或者,“断除一切恶趣”这句话是世尊的话,为了激发修行者的精进,是称颂功德,因此说是修习的特殊原因,所以说“断除一切……乃至……近依”。巴利
66. Sakasampattiyā viya susaṃvihitasaṅkappo bhavati. Indriyesu guttadvāratā sucaritapāripūriyā āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘rakkhitacittassāti tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tassattho – ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti idaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānavacananti. Nekkhammasaṅkappādibahulassa kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānaṃ sukaranti nekkhammasaṅkappādayo samathassa āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘sammāsaṅkappagocaroti samathassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kammassakatāsammādiṭṭhiyaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpadassanasammādiṭṭhiyañca ṭhito attādhīnaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ passanto tadatikkamanupāyaṃ vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti sammādiṭṭhivipassanāya visesakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāroti vipassanāya padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Udayabbayadassanaṃ ussukkāpento sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamatīti taṃ paṭhamamaggādhigamassa kāraṇanti āha – ‘‘ñatvāna udayabbayanti dassanabhūmiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Ālokasaññāmanasikārādīhi thinamiddhassa abhibhavanaṃ vīriyassa āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhūti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Yadipi ariyamaggakkhaṇe pahānabhāvanā samānakālā ekābhisamayassa icchitattā, tathāpi pahātabbassa pahānābhāve bhāvanāpāripūrī natthīti pahānanimittā viya katvā bhāvanā vuttā ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jaheti bhāvanāya padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ yogīnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ ānisaṃsakittanaṃ hotīti bhāvanāya visesakāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbā…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
第五,相摄相应的注释。巴利
5. Lakkhaṇahārasampātavaṇṇanā
67 在诸根上守护根门,就是以正念防护,并且依靠念的力量让出离寻等变得多起来,所以这样说:“因此,对于守护心者,正思惟行境,此是念根。”这句话的意思是:在“因此,对于守护心者,正思惟行境”这里,通过守护心和正思惟行境这两者作为原因来指代,这念根便涵盖了五根,因为无论从根的特征来说,还是从令解脱成熟来说,它们都是同一特征——这就是意趣所在。关于“涵盖”这个说法,在这里以道的特征来理解涵盖是很容易的,暂且放下不说;为了显示从原因上的涵盖,才说了“正思惟确实从正见生起”等话。正是因此涵盖而获得了圣八支道之后,也顺便说了解脱和解脱智见。巴利
67. Indriyesu guttadvāratā satisaṃvaro, satibalena ca nekkhammavitakkādibahulo hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaroti idaṃ satindriya’’nti. Tassattho – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti ettha rakkhitacittatāya ca sammāsaṅkappagocaratā kāraṇūpacārena idaṃ satindriyaṃ, gahitāni bhavanti pañcindriyāni indriyalakkhaṇena vimuttiparipācanabhāvena vā ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo. Gahito bhavatīti ettha maggalakkhaṇena gahaṇaṃ suviññeyyanti taṃ ṭhapetvā kāraṇato gahaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hi sammāsaṅkappo pabhavatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tato eva gahito bhavati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti vatvā vimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanānipi vuttāni.
第六,四阵列摄合的注释。巴利
6. Catubyūhahārasampātavaṇṇanā
68 68. 被守护,所以叫“已守护”。这是从词的角度做的解释。不过,从意义的角度解释时,其实词的解释也已经包含在内了,因此说:“已守护,即被保护——这就是它的辞。”其中,“iti”这个词表示开始,或者表示种类。借此,说的就是“像这样一类”或“如此这般一类”的辞。因此,思量,所以叫“心”。它收集自己的相续,所以叫“心”;由诸缘积聚而成,所以叫“心”;以种种为义,所以叫“心”;以造作为义,所以叫“心”。正确地思惟,故名“正思惟”等,应当依照这样的辞来理解。巴利
68. Rakkhīyatīti rakkhitaṃ. Idaṃ padavasena nibbacanaṃ. Yasmā pana atthavasena nibbacane vutte padavasena nibbacanaṃ vuttameva hoti, tasmā ‘‘rakkhitaṃ paripālīyatīti esā niruttī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha iti-saddo ādyattho, pakāre vā. Tena evamādikā evaṃpakārā vā esā niruttīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā cintetīti cittaṃ. Attano santānaṃ cinotīti cittaṃ, paccayehi citanti cittaṃ, cittavicittaṭṭhena cittaṃ, cittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ. Sammā saṅkappetīti sammāsaṅkappotiādinā nirutti veditabbā.
世尊在这里的真正用意是这样的:他用“应当守护自心”等说法,开示了守护根门等方法以及断除恶趣的道理,这就是他在这首偈颂里的用意。“拘迦利”等部分,是在说明事情的起因。这里的“hi”表示原因。这段话的意思是:因为拘迦利没有守护自心,对上首弟子们心生嗔怒,所以投生到了红莲地狱;因此,想要断除恶趣的人,就应当守护自心。也就是说,世尊具备以正念守护的心,就能断除一切恶趣,这就是其中的含义。经文里说“应当以正念守护心”,这是在显示教法前后衔接的脉络。巴利
Ayaṃ ettha bhagavato adhippāyoti ‘‘rakkhitacitto assā’’tiādinā indriyasaṃvarādayo duggatipahānañca vadato bhagavato ettha gāthāyaṃ adhippāyo. Kokāliko hītiādi nidānaniddeso. Tattha hi-saddo kāraṇe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā kokāliko (saṃ. ni. 1.181; a. ni. 10.89; su. ni. kokālikasutta) arakkhitacittatāya aggasāvakesu cittaṃ padosetvā padumanirayaṃ upapanno, tasmā duggatiyo jahitukāmo rakkhitacitto assāti bhagavā satiārakkhena cetasā samannāgato sabbā duggatiyo jahatīti attho. Suttamhi vuttaṃ ‘‘satiyā cittaṃ rakkhitabba’’nti desanānusandhidassanaṃ.
7. 回转摄合堕的注释巴利
7. Āvaṭṭahārasampātavaṇṇanā
69 69. 当一个人出离寻很多,依靠遍处或慈心等方法获得心一境性,也就是所谓的心箧,把心安放在这个心箧里,或者只是把所获得的定从杂染中守护住,这样就被称为守护心者。因此说:“所以,对于守护心者,正思惟的行境——这就是奢摩他。”以慧为主导的是观,所以说:“以正见为先导——这就是观。”通过圣道完全了知苦谛时,观察生灭的智慧就达到了顶峰,因此说:“了知了生灭——这就是苦的遍知。”因为“凡是集起性质的法,这一切都是灭尽性质的法”,这句话显示了道智的运作。这四者就是四圣谛,以四圣谛之法来完成旋转。其中应当看到:通过前面建立前两个圣谛,是以不同性质的法来旋转;通过后面,是以相同性质的法来旋转。巴利
69. Nekkhammasaṅkappabahulo kasiṇavasena mettādivasena vā laddhāya cittekaggatāsaṅkhātāya cittamañjūsāya cittaṃ ṭhapetvā samādhiṃyeva vā yathāladdhaṃ saṃkilesato rakkhitacitto nāma hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaroti ayaṃ samatho’’ti. Paññāpadhānā vipassanāti āha – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāroti ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Ariyamaggena dukkhasacce pariññāte udayabbayadassanaṃ matthakappattaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘ñatvāna udayabbayanti dukkhapariññā’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti hi maggañāṇassa pavattidassanāti. Imāni cattāri saccānīti catusaccadhammavasena āvaṭṭanaṃ niṭṭhapeti. Tattha purimena saccadvayaṭṭhapanena visabhāgadhammavasena, pacchimena sabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
8. 分别门合集注释巴利
8. Vibhattihārasampātavaṇṇanā
70 守护心,就是念的防护,应通过善品或不善品来说明。这种防护按门类分为六种:眼门防护……一直到意门防护。正思惟有三种:出离思惟、无瞋思惟、无害思惟。正见有八种:对苦的智……乃至对此缘性、缘已生法的智。生灭智有五十种:从无明集而有色集……乃至观察变异相的人,也见识蕴的灭。克服惛沉睡眠有四种,按四种道来分。其中,念的防护有世间和出世间两种。世间念的防护只属于欲界;出世间念的防护按见道和修道分为两种,每一种又按四念处的分类有四种。正思惟等也是同样的道理。巴利
70.Kusalapakkhokusalapakkhena niddisitabboti rakkhitacittassāti satisaṃvaro, so chabbidho dvāravasena cakkhudvārasaṃvaro yāva manodvārasaṃvaroti. Sammāsaṅkappo tividho – nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṃsāsaṅkappoti. Sammādiṭṭhi aṭṭhavidhā dukkhe ñāṇaṃ…pe… idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇanti. Udayabbayañāṇaṃ paññāsavidhaṃ avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo…pe… vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi viññāṇakkhandhassa vayaṃ passati. Thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ catubbidhaṃ catumaggavasena. Tattha satisaṃvaro lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidho. Tesu lokiyo kāmāvacarova, lokuttaro dassanabhāvanābhedato duvidho. Ekameko cettha catusatipaṭṭhānabhedato catubbidho. Esa nayo sammāsaṅkappādīsupi.
这里有一个差别:正思惟按初禅来说,也可以归入色界。近因的分类,应该按照《近因宝摄颂》里讲的方式来解说。在不善这一边,不防护有八种:眼不防护……身不防护、掉举身不防护、语不防护、意不防护。邪思惟按欲寻等来分,有三种。无智按“对苦的无智”等来分,有八种。与正见相对的邪见,应当知道有六十二种。惛沉睡眠按它生起的处所来分,有五种。这样,就应当知道不善这一边的分类。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – sammāsaṅkappo paṭhamajjhānavasena rūpāvacarotipi nīharitabbo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgo padaṭṭhānahārasampāte vuttanayena vattabbo . Akusalapakkhe asaṃvaro cakkhuasaṃvaro…pe… kāyaasaṃvaro, copanakāyaasaṃvaro, vācāasaṃvaro, manoasaṃvaroti aṭṭhavidho. Micchāsaṅkappo kāmavitakkādivasena tividho. Aññāṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā aṭṭhavidhā vibhattaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhipaṭipakkhato micchādiṭṭhi dvāsaṭṭhividhena veditabbā. Thinamiddhaṃ uppattibhūmito pañcavidhanti evaṃ akusalapakkhe vibhatti veditabbā.
第9章 转换宝集释巴利
9. Parivattanahārasampātavaṇṇanā
71 71. 在转换宝中,按照在旋转宝中所说的方式,没有对止与观作出判定,而直接说“以已修习的止与观”。这里应当理解为世间止观。所谓“以对立面”,在“以不守护的心”这首偈颂中,意思是以对立面为所指。或者另一种说法,是指以分别宝中所说的不善一方的对立面为含义。巴利
71. Parivattanahāre āvaṭṭahāre vuttanayena samathavipassanāniddhāraṇaṃ akatvā ‘‘samathavipassanāya bhāvitāyā’’ti āha. Lokiyā cettha samathavipassanā daṭṭhabbā. Paṭipakkhenāti ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti gāthāya paṭipakkhenāti adhippāyo. Atha vā vibhattihāre niddiṭṭhassa akusalapakkhassa paṭipakkhenāti attho.
10. 异名导聚集的注释巴利
10. Vevacanahārasampātavaṇṇanā
72 72. 「意、心脏、清净、识、识蕴、意识界」,这些是心的异名。「思惟、寻、思量、安止、极安止、心的投向」,这些是正思惟的异名。「慧、了知、简择、审察」等等,这些是正见的异名。「惛沉、昏沉、昏沉状态、心不适业、不作业性、覆盖、遍覆、内收」,这些是惛沉的异名。「不适业、不作业性、身懈怠、睡眠、睡眠状态、睡眠性」,这些是睡眠的异名。「乞食者、比丘」等等,这是比丘一词的异名。「恶趣、苦界、堕处、轮回之苦、生死」等等,应当知道这些是恶趣的异名。巴利
72. ‘‘Mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti (dha. sa. 6) ca cittassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Takko vitakko saṅkappo appanā byappanā cetaso abhiniropanā’’ti ca sammāsaṅkappassa. ‘‘Paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 16) sammādiṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Thinaṃ thiyanā thiyitattaṃ cittassa akallatā akammaññatā onāho parināho antosaṅkoco’’ti thinassa. ‘‘Akallatā akammaññatā kāyālasiyaṃ supyaṃ supyanā supitatta’’nti (dha. sa. 1163) middhassa. ‘‘Bhikkhako bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45) bhikkhupadassa. ‘‘Duggati apāyo vinipāto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ saṃsāro’’tiādinā duggatiyā vevacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
11. 施设论法会合的解说巴利
11. Paññattihārasampātavaṇṇanā
73 73. 以决意守护的念所守护的心,就像那念的决意本身一样,因此说:“‘已护心’这一施设,是以念为基。”其余内容在“施设论说”这一节以及后面“进入消尽论说”等节中,都没有新的东西,都按照前面所说的方式理解即可。巴利
73. Adhiṭṭhahitvā rakkhantiyā satiyā rakkhiyamānaṃ cittaṃ tassā adhiṭṭhānaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘rakkhitacittassāti padaṭṭhānapaññatti satiyā’’ti. Sesaṃ imasmiṃ paññattihārasampāte ito paresu otaraṇasodhanahārasampātesupi apubbaṃ natthi. Heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
14. 确立经会合的解说巴利
14. Adhiṭṭhānahārasampātavaṇṇanā
76 76. 在“确立论说”这一节里,所谓“正见”,就是通过“于苦的智”等说法,依四谛、因与因所生、缘与缘所生所摄的对象范围,显示出它们的种种差别;然后,又用“于彼彼处如实知见”这一句,依其余尚未说明的对象范围来显示差别。其中,“谛之到达”是指对对象以谛、以不颠倒而到达,也就是证得的意思。也有“随转到达”这种读法,意思是对次第的对象而到达,即一一证得各个对象。至于在这里“资具安立论说”等节中应当说明的内容,因为和前面所说的方式相同,所以很清楚。巴利
76. Adhiṭṭhānahārasampāte sammādiṭṭhi nāma yaṃ dukkhe ñāṇantiādinā catusaccahetuhetusamuppannapaccayapaccayuppannasaṅkhātassa visayassa vasena vemattataṃ dassetvā puna yaṃ tattha tattha yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇadassananti pāḷipāḷiatthānaṃ avasiṭṭhavisayavaseneva vemattataṃ dīpeti. Tattha yaṃ saccāgamananti yaṃ saccato aviparītato visayassa āgamanaṃ, adhigamoti attho. ‘‘Yaṃ paccāgamana’’ntipi pāṭho, tassa yaṃ paṭipāṭivisayassa āgamanaṃ, taṃtaṃvisayādhigamoti attho . Sesamettha parikkhārasamāropanahārasampātesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva.
混合论法会合的解说巴利
Missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā
在这里,论说汇集(hārasampāta)的解释也应当通过这种方式来了知。巴利
Api cettha hārasampātaniddeso imināpi nayena veditabbo –
诸法以心为先导,以心为最胜,由心所成;
如果以清净的心,来说话或做事;
从那以后,快乐就跟着他,像影子一样寸步不离。巴利
‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayā; Manasā ce pasannena, bhāsati vā karoti vā; Tato naṃ sukhamanveti, chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti. (dha. pa. 2);
在这里,什么是教示所摄的成就?在“诸法以意为前导”这句话里,按照蕴的分类,“意”指的是识蕴;按照处的分类,指的是意处;按照界的分类,指的是识界;按照根的分类,指的是意根。哪些法是前导的?有六种法作为前导:对善法来说,善根是前导;对不善法来说,不善根是前导;对具有主导作用的法来说,主导是前导;对一切心的生起来说,诸根是前导。而在这部经里,真正要说明的是“意”。就像军队以国王为先锋一样,诸法也以意为前导。在这里,意作为前导有三种方式:出离的意愿、无嗔的意愿、无害的意愿。其中,无贪以出离的意愿作为意的前导,无嗔以无嗔的意愿作为意的前导,无痴以无害的意愿作为意的前导。巴利
Tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammāti manoti khandhavavatthānena viññāṇakkhandhaṃ deseti. Āyatanavavatthānena manāyatanaṃ , dhātuvavatthānena viññāṇadhātuṃ, indriyavavatthānena manindriyaṃ. Katame dhammā pubbaṅgamā? Cha dhammā pubbaṅgamā, kusalānaṃ kusalamūlāni, akusalānaṃ akusalamūlāni, sādhipatikānaṃ adhipati, sabbacittuppādānaṃ indriyāni. Api ca imasmiṃ sutte mano adhippeto. Yathā balaggassa rājā pubbaṅgamo, evamevaṃ dhammānaṃ mano pubbaṅgamo. Tattha tividhena mano pubbaṅgamo nekkhammachandena abyāpādachandena avihiṃsāchandena. Tattha alobhassa nekkhammachandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ, adosassa abyāpādachandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ, amohassa avihiṃsāchandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ.
“意最胜”是说:意对于这些法来说,是最殊胜、最卓越、最高、最上、是根本、是前导、是首领,因此称为“意最胜”。“意所成”是说:由意所造、由意所化现、由意所生起,意是它们的缘,因此称为“意所成”。而那些法是由欲所集起,由清净无浊的思惟所生起,由触所和合,也就是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴。“以清净信之意”:这里说的是信、信解、信受、净信。就是具备、拥有、达到、成就了这种净信,因此称为“以清净信”,这指的是意业。“或说”指语业,“或行”指身业。如此显示了十善业道。巴利
Manoseṭṭhāti mano tesaṃ dhammānaṃ seṭṭhaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ pavaraṃ mūlaṃ pamukhaṃ pāmokkhaṃ, tena vuccati ‘‘manoseṭṭhā’’ti. Manomayāti manena katā, manena nimmitā, manena nibbattā, mano tesaṃ paccayo, tena vuccati ‘‘manomayā’’ti. Te pana dhammā chandasamudānitā anāvilasaṅkappasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho. Manasā ce pasannenāti yā saddhā saddahanā okappanā abhippasādo. Iti iminā pasādena upeto samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato, tena vuccati ‘‘pasannenā’’ti idaṃ manokammaṃ . Bhāsati vāti vacīkammaṃ. Karoti vāti kāyakammaṃ. Iti dasakusalakammapathā dassitā.
“从彼”是指:因为十种善业已经被造作、已经累积。“彼”是指:那个已经积了福德、已经行了善、已经做了庇护的人。“乐”有两种:身体的乐和心的乐。“跟随”就是跟随着。巴利
Tatoti dasavidhassa kusalakammassa katattā upacitattā. Nanti yo so katapuñño katakusalo katabhīruttāṇo, taṃ puggalaṃ. Sukhanti duvidhaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikañca. Anvetīti anugacchati.
在这里,假如有一个人没有断除随眠,还在会被结缚的法里面观察乐味。他这样在会被结缚的法里面观察乐味时,就按照自己所见、所闻,去渴求成就和生存。这样一来,无明和有爱就跟着他。他按照所见、所闻去渴求成就和生存时,对能让人生起净信的事物,心就生起净信、相信、认可。他带着净信的心,用身体、语言、心意去实行三种福业事:布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成。他在今生、或者下一生、或者之后的生生世世里,承受这些的果报。于是,以无明为缘而有行,以行为缘而有识,以识为缘而有名色,以名色为缘而有六处,以六处为缘而有乐受之触,以触为缘而有受。这样存在的时候,那乐就跟着他。当他的受这样一次又一次地辗转生起时,渴爱就产生了。以渴爱为缘而有取……(中略)……这就是集起。巴利
Idhassu puriso appahīnānusayo saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādaṃ anupassati, so saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādaṃ anupassanto yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāsutaṃ sampattibhavaṃ pattheti. Iccassa avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca anubaddhā honti, so yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāsutaṃ sampattibhavaṃ patthento pasādanīyavatthusmiṃ cittaṃ pasādeti saddahati okappeti. So pasannacitto tividhaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ anutiṭṭhati dānamayaṃ sīlamayaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā. So tassa vipākaṃ paccanubhoti diṭṭheva dhamme upapajje vā aparāpare vā pariyāye. Iti kho panassa avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ, saḷāyatanapaccayā sukhavedanīyo phasso, phassapaccayā vedanāti evaṃ santaṃ taṃ sukhamanveti. Tassevaṃ vedanāya aparāparaṃ parivattamānāya uppajjati taṇhā. Taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ…pe… samudayo hotīti.
在这里,凡是意,以及那些以意为前导的法,还有乐,这些被称为五蕴,它们就是苦谛。作为它们先前之因的无明和有爱,就是集谛。为了让它们被遍知、被断除,世尊宣说法,就是为了遍知苦、断除集。用来遍知、用来断除的,就是道。道所运作之处,就是灭。这四谛也应当通过处、界、根的方式来确定。其中,以集为乐味,以苦为过患,以道和灭为出离;乐的随逐是果;以清净信心而发起身、语的行动是方法;由于诸法以意为前导,想求自己快乐的人应当以清净信心的意发动语业和身业,这是世尊的教令。这就是教示的结合成就。巴利
Tattha yaṃ mano, ye ca manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, yañca sukhaṃ, ime vuccanti pañcakkhandhā, te dukkhasaccaṃ. Tesaṃ purimakāraṇabhūtā avijjā bhavataṇhā ca samudayasaccaṃ. Tesaṃ pariññāya pahānāya bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti, dukkhassa pariññāya samudayassa pahānāya. Yena parijānāti, yena pajahati, ayaṃ maggo. Yattha ca maggo pavattati, ayaṃ nirodho. Imāni cattāri saccāni evaṃ āyatanadhātuindriyamukhenāpi niddhāretabbāni. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, sukhassa anvayo phalaṃ, manasā pasannena kāyavacīsamīhā upāyo, manopubbaṅgamattā dhammānaṃ attano sukhakāmena pasannena manasā vacīkammaṃ kāyakammañca pavattetabbanti ayaṃ bhagavato āṇatti. Ayaṃ desanāhārasampāto.
在这里,什么是审察结合成就?能思量、能了别所缘,所以叫“意”。它以思量为特征,在相应法中起主导作用,所以是前导;因为无众生、无命、无我的意义,所以是“法”。就像村里的村长一样,因为意在其中起主导作用,所以是最殊胜的,因此说“意最胜”。由作为俱生等缘的意所生起,所以是“意所成”。因为清净无浊,因为对所缘的安立,因为清净之语的表达,因为这样地领受,所以说“说”。因为身体动作的表达,因为这样地领受,所以说“做”。因为已经这样造作、没有别的造作,所以说“从彼”。因为带来快乐、适意、可意,所以说“乐”。因为已经造作、已经积集,而果报还未成熟,所以说“随逐”。因为依因缘而转起、不曾离开,所以说“如影不离”。这就是从逐词审察而来的审察结合成就。巴利
Tattha katamo vicayahārasampāto? Mananato ārammaṇavijānanato mano. Mananalakkhaṇe sampayuttesu ādhipaccakaraṇato pubbaṅgamo īhābhāvato nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena dhammā. Gāmesu gāmaṇi viya padhānaṭṭhena mano seṭṭho etesanti manoseṭṭhā. Sahajātādipaccayabhūtena manasā nibbattāti manomayā. Akālussiyato, ārammaṇassa okappanato ca pasannena vacīviññattivipphārato tathā sādiyanato ca bhāsati. Copanakāyavipphārato tathā sādiyanato ca karoti. Tathā pasutattā anaññattā ca ‘‘tato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sukhanato sātabhāvato iṭṭhabhāvato ca ‘‘sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Katūpacitattā avipakkavipākattā ca ‘‘anvetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāraṇāyattavuttito asaṅkantito ca ‘‘chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ anupadavicayato vicayahārasampāto.
在这里,什么是合理结合成就?因为意对诸法有增上作用,所以诸法以意为前导,这是合理的。正因为诸法随顺于意,所以诸法以意为最胜,这是合理的。因为诸法是由作为俱生等缘的意所生起,所以诸法为意所成,这是合理的。由具有净信的意所等起的身业和语业是善的,这是合理的。那积集了善业者,乐如同影子一样跟随他,这是合理的。这就是合理结合成就。巴利
Tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto? Manassa dhammānaṃ ādhipaccayogato pubbaṅgamatā yujjati. Tato eva tesaṃ manassa anuvattanato dhammānaṃ manoseṭṭhatā yujjati. Sahajātādipaccayavasena manasā nibbattattā dhammānaṃ manomayatā yujjati. Manasā pasannena samuṭṭhānānaṃ kāyavacīkammānaṃ kusalabhāvo yujjati. Yena kusalakammaṃ upacitaṃ, taṃ chāyā viya sukhaṃ anvetīti yujjati. Ayaṃ yuttihārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“近因结合”呢?意是各种意伺察的近因。以意为前导的诸法,是一切善方面的近因。“说”就是正语,“做”就是正业,这些是正命的近因。正命是正精进的近因。正精进是正念的近因。正念是正定的近因。“以清净的心”这里,清净就是信根,它是戒的近因。戒是定的近因。定是慧的近因,这样一直连接到解脱智见。这就是近因结合。巴利
Tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto? Mano manopavicārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā sabbassa kusalapakkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhāsatī’’ti sammāvācā, ‘‘karotī’’ti sammākammanto, te sammāājīvassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāsati sammāsamādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Manasā pasannenā’’ti ettha pasādo saddhindriyaṃ, taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhi paññāyāti yāva vimuttiñāṇadassanā yojetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“相的结合成就”?在“诸法以意为前导”这句话里,通过“以意为前导”这个说法,也等于说诸法以欲为前导、以精进为前导、以观为前导,因为依增上相来说,欲等与心具有同一相。同样,也说它们以信等为前导,因为依根相来说,信等与心具有同一相。“以清净之心”这句话,是说心具备清净信心时,由它所产生的身业和语业具有无可指责的性质。同样,心具备念等,也是它们无可指责的性质,因为如理作意所引发的,具有同一相。“乐随逐”这句话,通过说乐随逐,也等于说作为乐之因的可意色等随逐,因为它们同样以业为因,具有同一相。这就是相的结合成就。巴利
Tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti manopubbaṅgamatāvacanena dhammānaṃ chandapubbaṅgamatāpi vīriyapubbaṅgamatāpi vīmaṃsāpubbaṅgamatāpi vuttā hoti ādhipateyyalakkhaṇena chandādīnaṃ manasā ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā nesaṃ saddhādipubbaṅgamatāpi vuttā hoti indriyalakkhaṇena saddhādīnaṃ manasā ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Manasā ce pasannenā’’ti yathā manassa pasādasamannāgamo taṃsamuṭṭhānānaṃ kāyavacīkammānaṃ anavajjabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Evaṃ cittassa satiādisamannāgamopi nesaṃ anavajjabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ yonisomanasikārasamuṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti sukhānugamanavacanena sukhassa paccayabhūtānaṃ manāpiyarūpādīnaṃ anugamo vutto hoti tesampi kammapaccayatāya ekalakkhaṇattāti. Ayaṃ lakkhaṇahārasampāto.
在这里,什么是四阵列结合成就?在“意为前导”等句子中,对“意”等词所作的语言学解释和语法说明,应当通过词义解释来理解。词义依照前面所说的方法,已经很容易了知。世尊在这里的意趣是:那些希求快乐的人,应当以清净的信心发起身业、语业和意业。在修集福德业时,自己先作前导,然后正确地引导他人,这就是这段说法的缘起。像“六门增上王”(《法句经注》2.181 伊罗跋陀龙王的故事)、“心所随转之法”(《法集论》双论母 62; 1205-1206)、“心是一法,一切皆随其而行”(《相应部》1.62)这类同义经文的会通,显示这段说法在义理上的连贯,就是教说的系属。至于句子与句子之间的连贯,则很容易了知。这就是四阵列结合成就。巴利
Tattha katamo catubyūho hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu ‘‘mano’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ nibbacanaṃ niruttaṃ, taṃ padatthaniddesavasena veditabbaṃ. Padattho ca vuttanayena suviññeyyova. Ye sukhena atthikā, tehi pasannena manasā kāyavacīmanokammāni pavattetabbānīti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Puññakiriyāya aññesampi pubbaṅgamā hutvā tattha tesaṃ sammā upanetāro imissā desanāya nidānaṃ. ‘‘Chadvārādhipatī rājā (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.181 erakapattanāgarājavatthu), cittānuparivattino dhammā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 62; 1205-1206), cittassa ekadhammassa, sabbeva vasamanvagū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62) evamādisamānayanena imissā desanāya saṃsandanā desanānusandhi. Padānusandhiyo pana suviññeyyāvāti. Ayaṃ catubyūho hārasampāto.
在这当中,什么是“回转结合”?在“意在前引导诸法”这句话里,那三种善根是八种正性的因。那些正性,就是八支圣道。与意同时生起的名色,这就是苦。尚未断除的、先前已经生起的无明和有爱,这就是集。它们被断除的地方,这就是灭。这四项就是四圣谛。这就叫“回转结合”。巴利
Tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti tattha yāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tāni aṭṭhannaṃ sammattānaṃ hetu. Ye sammattā, ayaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Yaṃ manosahajanāmarūpaṃ, idaṃ dukkhaṃ. Asamucchinnā purimanipphannā avijjā bhavataṇhā, ayaṃ samudayo. Yattha tesaṃ pahānaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti imāni cattāri saccāni. Ayaṃ āvaṭṭo hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是分别论式?意为主导,诸法随行,若以清净之心,则乐随之——这句经文不能只按字面意思来理解。为什么呢?如果有一个沙门或婆罗门,对一个杀生者、持邪见者、行邪道者生起清净信心,并以清净心去赞叹对方并不具备的功德,或者对他做出恭敬的行为,那么快乐并不会因此跟随他。相反,只有苦会跟着他,就像车轮跟着拉车的牛脚一样。所以,这句经文应当加以分别解说:若以清净心而说、而行,那样的语业和身业能带来乐的果报。这是什么原因呢?因为对于处于正性的人,其业能带来乐的果报;对于处于邪性的人,其业能带来苦的果报。那么,这种清净信心应当如何看待呢?我说,这不是真正的清净信心,而是貌似清净信心的邪胜解。这就是分别论式。巴利
Tattha katamo vibhattihārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manasā ce pasannena, tato naṃ sukhamanvetī’’ti nayidaṃ yathārutavasena gahetabbaṃ. Yo hi samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pāṇātipātimhi micchādiṭṭhike micchāpaṭipanne sakaṃ cittaṃ pasādeti, pasannena ca cittena abhūtaguṇābhitthavanavasena bhāsati vā nipaccakāraṃ vāssa yaṃ karoti, na tato naṃ sukhamanveti. Dukkhameva pana taṃ tato cakkaṃva vahato padamanveti. Iti hi idaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇīyaṃ. Yaṃ manasā ce pasannena bhāsati vā karoti vā, tañce vacīkammaṃ kāyakammañca sukhavedanīyanti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Sammattagatehi sukhavedanīyaṃ micchāgatehi dukkhavedanīyanti. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ pasādo daṭṭhabbo? Nāyaṃ pasādo, pasādapatirūpako pana micchādhimokkhoti vadāmi. Ayaṃ vibhattihārasampāto.
在这里,什么是转起论式?就是“意为主导”等。凡以染污的心说话或行动,苦就跟随。因为这段经文正是它的直接反面。这就叫转起论式。巴利
Tattha katamo parivattano hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamātiādi. Yaṃ manasā paduṭṭhena bhāsati vā karoti vā dukkhassānugāmī. Idañhi suttaṃ etassa ujupaṭipakkho. Ayaṃ parivattano hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“同义论式”?“意为主导”中的“意”,就是心、意处、意根、意识、意识界,这些是同义词。“主导”就是前行者、先去者、先导者,这些是同义词。“诸法”就是我、自性,这些是同义词。“最胜”就是最上、首要、殊胜,这些是同义词。“意所成”就是意所生、意所发起,这些是同义词。“净”就是相信、信解,这些是同义词。“乐”就是怡悦、乐受,这些是同义词。“随之”就是跟随、追随,这些是同义词。这就称为同义论式。巴利
Tattha katamo vevacano hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’ti mano cittaṃ manāyatanaṃ manindriyaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇadhātūti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Pubbaṅgamā purecārino puregāminoti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Dhammā attā sabhāvāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Seṭṭhaṃ padhānaṃ pavaranti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Manomayā manonibbattā manosambhūtāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Pasannena saddahantena okappentenāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Sukhaṃ sātaṃ vedayitanti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Anveti anugacchati anubandhatīti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Ayaṃ vevacano hārasampāto.
在这其中,什么是施设论式?所谓“意为前导”,这是对心的作用的施设。所谓“法”,是自性的施设,也是善业道的施设。所谓“意为最胜”,是精进的施设。所谓“意所成”,是俱生的施设。所谓“以清净”,是与信根相应的施设,也是对无信的遮止施设。所谓“或说或作”,是对正语和正业的弃舍的施设。所谓“乐随之”,是业果相随的施设,也是业不消失的施设。这就是施设论式。巴利
Tattha katamo paññattihārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamāti ayaṃ manaso kiccapaññatti. Dhammāti sabhāvapaññatti, kusalakammapathapaññatti. Manoseṭṭhāti padhānapaññatti. Manomayāti sahajātapaññatti. Pasannenāti saddhindriyena samannāgatapaññatti, assaddhiyassa paṭikkhepapaññatti. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti sammāvācāsammākammantānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti. Tato naṃ sukhamanvetīti kammassa phalānubandhapaññatti, kammassa avināsapaññattīti. Ayaṃ paññattihārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“进入式的论母组合”?“意”,指识蕴。“法”,指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴。“或说或作”,指身表和语表。它们所依靠的四大种,就是色蕴。这就是通过诸蕴来进入。再者,“意”,指行作识。通过执取“意”这个说法,无明缘行就被包含进来了。行缘识……乃至苦聚的生起。这就是通过缘起来进入。这就是进入式的论母组合。巴利
Tattha katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto? Manoti viññāṇakkhandho. Dhammāti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti kāyavacīviññattiyo. Tāsaṃ nissayā cattāro mahābhūtāti rūpakkhandhoti ayaṃ khandhehi otaraṇo. Manoti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇanti manoggahaṇena avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā gahitāti. Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ…pe… samudayo hotīti ayaṃ paṭiccasamuppādena otaraṇoti. Ayaṃ otaraṇo hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是净化行结合?只说“意”时,既不是句清净,也不是开端清净。说“意为前导”时,是句清净,但不是开端清净。同样,从“法”一直到“乐”时,是句清净,但不是开端清净。而说到“乐随行”时,既是句清净,也是开端清净。这就是净化行结合。巴利
Tattha katamo sodhano hārasampāto? Manoti ārambho neva padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Manopubbaṅgamāti padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Tathā dhammāti yāva sukhanti padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Sukhamanvetīti pana padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cāti. Ayaṃ sodhano hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“决意论式”?“诸法以意为先导,以意为最上,由意所成”——这是同一性。“若以意生信”——这是差异性;同样,“若以意生信”又是同一性。“或说话或行动”——这是差异性;同样,“若以意生信”又是同一性。这种净信有两种:向内,是因为镇伏了嗔害;向外,是因为信解。同样,它既是作为成就的因,也是作为增长的因——这就是差异性。因此,这部经应当从两个方面来决意:从因上来说,是“具有净信之意的人”;从果上来说,是“感受乐受果报的人”。这就是决意论式。巴利
Tattha katamo adhiṭṭhāno hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayāti ekattatā. Manasā ce pasannenāti vemattatā, tathā manasā ce pasannenāti ekattatā. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti vemattatā, tathā manasā ce pasannenāti ekattatā. So pasādo duvidho ajjhattañca byāpādavikkhambhanato, bahiddhā ca okappanato. Tathā sampattibhavahetubhūtopi vaḍḍhihetubhūtovāti ayaṃ vemattatā. Tayidaṃ suttaṃ dvīhi ākārehi adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ hetunā ca yo pasannamānaso, vipākena ca yo sukhavedanīyoti. Ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是资具论式?在“意先导”这句话里,“意”指善识。与智相应的善识,有无贪、无嗔、无痴这三个相应因;与智不相应的善识,有无贪、无嗔这两个相应因。对一切善识来说,不加区分地,如理作意是因,四种成就轮是缘。同样,听闻正法也是缘;而当善识以布施等方式生起时,所施之物等也是缘。这里所说的“法”,指受等(心所)的可爱所缘等。同样,三者是识的缘,受等是净信的缘,可信赖之事与善行是异熟乐的缘。这就是资具论式。巴利
Tattha katamo parikkhāro hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamāti ettha manoti kusalaviññāṇaṃ. Tassa ca ñāṇasampayuttassa alobho adoso amohoti tayo sampayuttā hetū, ñāṇavippayuttassa alobho adosoti dve sampayuttā hetū. Sabbesaṃ avisesena yonisomanasikāro hetu, cattāri sampatticakkāni paccayo. Tathā saddhammassavanaṃ, tassa ca dānādivasena pavattamānassa deyyadhammādayo paccayo. Dhammāti cettha vedanādīnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇādayo. Tathā tayo viññāṇassa, vedanādayo pasādassa, saddheyyavatthukusalābhisaṅkhāro vipākasukhassa paccayoti. Ayaṃ parikkhāro hārasampāto.
在这里,什么是“等起句义的行相结合”?“诸法以意为先行”中的“意”,指福德心,它有三种:布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成。其中,布施所成的近因是无贪,持戒所成的近因是无嗔,修习所成的近因是无痴。这一切共同的近因是净信,应当依据经文“由信而生起,便前往亲近,前往亲近便恭敬承事”来详细展开。善心是可爱乐果报的近因。如理作意是善心的近因,因为如理作意的人会确立善心、修习善心,对尚未生起的恶不善法,生起令其不生的意愿;对已经生起的善法,精勤令其增长。如此在四正勤中修习时,四念处乃至八圣道分都达到修习圆满——这就是通过修习而等起。并且,由修习而舍断也得以成就。这就是等起句义的行相结合。巴利
Tattha katamo samāropano hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammāti manoti puññacittaṃ, taṃ tividhaṃ – dānamayaṃ, sīlamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti. Tattha dānamayassa alobho padaṭṭhānaṃ, sīlamayassa adoso padaṭṭhānaṃ, bhāvanāmayassa amoho padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbesaṃ abhippasādo padaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.183) suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Kusalacittaṃ sukhassa iṭṭhavipākassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro kusalacittassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yoniso hi manasi karonto kusalacittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti kusalacittaṃ bhāveti, so anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya chandaṃ janeti, uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ…pe… padahati. Tassevaṃ catūsu sammappadhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro satipaṭṭhānā yāva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti ayaṃ bhāvanāya samāropanā. Sati ca bhāvanāya pahānañca siddhamevāti. Ayaṃ samāropano hārasampāto.
施与者福德增长,自制者不积怨恨;
善者舍弃恶,因为贪、嗔、痴灭尽,他就寂灭了。巴利
‘‘Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyati; Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ, rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.197; udā. 75; peṭako. 16);
在这里,布施的人福德增长,说的是布施所成的福德事。约束自己的人不会积下怨仇,说的是持戒所成的福德事。善巧的人舍弃恶,说的是断除贪、嗔、痴,因此说了修习所成的福德事。因为贪嗔痴灭尽,他得到寂灭,说的是无余依般涅槃。巴利
Tattha dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti lobhassa ca dosassa ca mohassa ca pahānamāha. Tena bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti anupādāparinibbānamāha.
布施的人福德增长,说的是无贪这个善根。约束自己的人不会积下怨仇,说的是无嗔这个善根。善巧的人舍弃恶,说的是无痴这个善根。因为贪、嗔、痴灭尽,他得到寂灭,这是说它们(烦恼)的出离。巴利
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti alobho kusalamūlaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti adoso kusalamūlaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti amoho kusalamūlaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti tesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
布施的人福德增长,这是戒蕴的立足处。约束自己的人不积攒怨恨,这是定蕴的立足处。善巧的人舍弃恶,这是慧蕴和解脱蕴的立足处。通过布施断除粗重的烦恼,通过持戒断除中等的烦恼,通过智慧断除微细的烦恼。因为贪嗔痴的灭尽,他得以寂灭,这显示了所作已办的境地。巴利
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti sīlakkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti paññākkhandhassa vimuttikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Dānena oḷārikānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ, sīlena majjhimānaṃ, paññāya sukhumānaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti katāvībhūmiṃ dasseti.
布施的人福德增长……舍弃恶法,这部分显示的是有学地。因为贪嗔痴灭尽,他得以寂灭,这里说的是最上果。巴利
Dadato puññaṃ…pe… jahāti pāpakanti sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti aggaphalaṃ vuttaṃ.
同样,对于布施者,福德……不再积聚,这是说世间善根。“善者舍弃恶”,这是说出世间善根。“因贪嗔痴灭尽,他得寂灭”,这是说出世间善根的果。巴利
Tathā dadato puññaṃ…pe… na cīyatīti lokiyakusalamūlaṃ vuttaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti lokuttarakusalamūlaṃ vuttaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti lokuttarassa kusalamūlassa phalaṃ vuttaṃ.
对于布施者……不被积存,这显示的是凡夫地。善者舍弃恶,这显示的是有学地。因为贪嗔痴灭尽,他得以寂灭,这显示的是无学地。巴利
Dadato…pe… na cīyatīti puthujjanabhūmi dassitā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti asekkhabhūmi dassitā.
布施的人……不会积藏,这是说通往天界的修行之道。善者舍弃恶,这是说有学的解脱。因为贪嗔痴灭尽,他证得寂灭,这是说无学的解脱。巴利
Dadato …pe… na cīyatīti saggagāminī paṭipadā vuttā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti sekkhavimutti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti asekkhavimutti vuttā.
“施与者……不再积怨”这一段,讲的是布施论、持戒论、生天论,也就是世间法的教说。“善者舍弃恶”这一段,讲的是配合观察世间过患而说的殊胜法教。“因贪嗔痴灭尽,他得寂灭”这一段,讲的是那套法教的果。巴利
Dadato…pe… na cīyatīti dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ lokiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ desanamāha. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti loke ādīnavānupassanāya saddhiṃ sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanamāha. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti tassā desanāya phalamāha.
“布施的人福德增长”,这句话说的是法施和财物布施。“由于防护而不积怨”,说的是通过远离杀生等,给众生无畏施。同样,所有学处都应该这样展开来讲。依靠这种戒的防护,安立在戒上的人调伏自己的心,他的止就达到圆满。这样安住在止之后,由于具备观的善巧,这位善巧者就舍弃恶:舍弃贪,舍弃嗔,舍弃痴,以圣道舍弃一切恶的不善法。这样修行的人,“贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”——因为贪等完全灭尽,就证得两种解脱。这就是这首偈颂的释义。巴利
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dhammadānaṃ āmisadānañca vadati. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā sattānaṃ abhayadānaṃ vadati. Evaṃ sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni vitthāretabbāni. Tena ca sīlasaṃyamena sīle patiṭṭhito cittaṃ saṃyameti, tassa samatho pāripūriṃ gacchati. Evaṃ so samathe ṭhito vipassanākosallayogato kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ rāgaṃ jahāti, dosaṃ jahāti, mohaṃ jahāti, ariyamaggena sabbepi pāpake akusale dhamme jahāti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ca rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti rāgādīnaṃ parikkhayā dvepi vimuttiyo adhigacchatīti ayaṃ suttaniddeso.
在这里,什么是教导的收摄?在这部经里教导了什么?两种善趣,就是天和人;天的五种欲乐,人的五种欲乐;天的五取蕴,人的五取蕴。这称为苦圣谛。以它们为因,先前依次生起的渴爱就是集圣谛。这又被称为味与患。这一切由前面两句“布施者……不积集”来说明。“善巧者舍弃恶”说的是道。“由贪嗔痴灭尽而寂灭”说的是两种涅槃界:有余依和无余依。这是出离。至于果等,则应随其相应而了知。这就是教导的收摄。巴利
Tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto? Imasmiṃ sutte kiṃ desitaṃ? Dve sugatiyo devā ca manussā ca, dibbā ca pañca kāmaguṇā, mānusakā ca pañca kāmaguṇā, dibbā ca pañcupādānakkhandhā, mānusakā ca pañcupādānakkhandhā. Idaṃ vuccati dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Tassa kāraṇabhāvena purimapurimanipphannā taṇhā samudayo ariyasaccaṃ. Tayidaṃ vuccati assādo ca ādīnavo ca. Sabbassa purimehi dvīhi padehi niddeso ‘‘dadato…pe… na cīyatī’’ti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti maggo vutto. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti dve nibbānadhātuyo saupādisesā ca anupādisesā ca. Idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ. Phalādīni pana yathārahaṃ veditabbānīti. Ayaṃ desanāhārasampāto.
“简择”的意思是:通过“布施的人福德增长”这第一句,说明了三种福业事,也就是布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成;也说明了十种应施之物的施舍;同样说明了六种所缘,如色等。“由于自制,怨恨不积聚”这第二句,说明了无怨、无敌对、无嗔害的修行之道。“善者舍弃恶法”这第三句,说明了智慧的生起、无明的灭尽,以及全部圣八支道和全部菩提分法。“由贪嗔痴的灭尽,他得以寂灭”这一句,通过贪的灭尽、离贪,说明了心解脱;通过痴的灭尽、离无明,说明了慧解脱。这就是简择摄。巴利
Vicayoti ‘‘dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti iminā paṭhamena padena tividhampi dānamayaṃ sīlamayaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Dasavidhassapi deyyadhammassa pariccāgo vutto. Tathā chabbidhassapi rūpādiārammaṇassa. ‘‘Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatī’’ti dutiyena padena averā asapattā abyāpādā ca paṭipadā vuttā. ‘‘Kusalo ca jahāti pāpaka’’nti tatiyena padena ñāṇuppādo aññāṇanirodho sabbopi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo sabbepi bodhipakkhiyā dhammā vuttā . ‘‘Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto’’ti rāgakkhayena rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, mohakkhayena avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti vuttāti. Ayaṃ vicayo hārasampāto.
所谓“理趣”,就是:安住在布施中的人,能圆满两件事——断除悭吝和福德的流注,这就是这里的义理。安住在戒的防护中的人,能圆满两件事——近行定和安止定,这就是这里的义理。舍弃恶法的人,遍知苦、证悟灭、修习道,这就是这里的义理。当贪、嗔、痴完全灭尽时,就在无余涅槃界般涅槃,这就是这里的义理。这就是理趣摄。巴利
Yuttīti dāne ṭhito ubhayaṃ paripūreti macchariyappahānañca puññābhisandañcāti atthesā yutti. Sīlasaṃyame ṭhito ubhayaṃ paripūreti upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiñcāti atthesā yutti. Pāpake dhamme pajahanto dukkhaṃ parijānāti, nirodhaṃ sacchikaroti, maggaṃ bhāvetīti atthesā yutti. Rāgadosamohesu sabbaso parikkhīṇesu anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyatīti atthesā yuttīti. Ayaṃ yuttihārasampāto.
所谓“足处”:因为“布施的人福德增长”,这是施舍依处的足处。因为“克制自己的人怨仇不积集”,这是谛依处的足处。因为“善者舍断恶”,这是慧依处的足处。因为“贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”,这是寂止依处的足处。这就是足处摄。巴利
Padaṭṭhānanti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti cāgādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti saccādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti paññādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti upasamādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto.
关于“相”:通过“布施者”这个词,应当知道已经显示了爱语、利行和同事,因为它们同属摄事,具有同一相。通过“自制者”这个词,应当知道已经显示了忍、慈、无害、怜悯等,因为它们以不产生怨恨为同一相。通过“怨仇不积集”这句话,已经显示了惭、愧、少欲、知足等,因为它们以不让怨恨增长为同一相。同样,无惭、无愧等则以不应积集为同一相。通过“善者”这个词,以善巧之义显示了正思惟等,因为它们以道支等为同一相。通过“舍断恶”这句话,也显示了遍知、现观等,因为它们以现观为同一相。通过“贪嗔痴灭尽”这句话,显示了其余烦恼等的灭尽,因为它们以应当被灭尽为同一相。这就是相。巴利
Lakkhaṇoti ‘‘dadato’’ti etena peyyavajjaṃ atthacariyaṃ samānattatā ca dassitāti veditabbā saṅgahavatthubhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Saṃyamato’’ti etena khantimettāavihiṃsāanuddayādayo dassitāti veditabbā verānuppādanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Veraṃ na cīyatī’’ti etena hirīottappaappicchatāsantuṭṭhitādayo dassitā verāvaḍḍhanena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā ahirīkānottappādayo acetabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Kusalo’’ti etena kosalladīpanena sammāsaṅkappādayo dassitā maggaṅgādibhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Jahāti pāpaka’’nti etena pariññābhisamayādayopi dassitā abhisamayalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Rāgadosamohakkhayā’’ti etena avasiṭṭhakilesādīnampi khayā dassitā khepetabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti ayaṃ lakkhaṇo.
在这首偈颂里,“施与者”这个词,世尊的用意是什么?那些想要获得大财富的人,会去行布施,为了断除贫穷。那些想要没有怨恨的人,会舍弃五种怨恨。那些对善法有欲求、有意愿的人,会修习八支道。那些想要证入涅槃的人,会舍弃贪、嗔、痴。这就是世尊在这里的用意。应当这样说明语词、因缘和关联。这就是四阵列。巴利
Catubyūhoti dadatoti gāthāyaṃ bhagavato ko adhippāyo? Ye mahābhogataṃ patthayissanti, te dānaṃ dassanti dāliddiyappahānāya. Ye averataṃ icchanti, te pañca verāni pajahissanti. Ye kusaladhammehi chandakāmā, te aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessanti. Ye nibbāyitukāmā, te rāgadosamohaṃ pajahissantīti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Evaṃ nibbacananidānasandhayo vattabbāti. Ayaṃ catubyūho.
所谓“回转”,是指:不布施的人有悭吝,不约束自己的人有怨仇,以及不舍断不善的恶法——这是通过说明它的对立面来讲“集”。用无贪、无嗔、无痴,通过布施等来断除这些,这就是三善根。八正道是它们的助缘,这就是道。贪、嗔、痴的灭尽,这就是灭。这就是“回转”。巴利
Āvaṭṭoti yañca adadato macchariyaṃ, yañca asaṃyamato veraṃ, yañca akusalassa pāpassa appahānaṃ, ayaṃ paṭipakkhaniddesena samudayo. Tassa alobhena ca adosena ca amohena ca dānādīhi pahānaṃ, imāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni. Tesaṃ paccayo aṭṭha sammattāni, ayaṃ maggo. Yo rāgadosamohānaṃ khayo, ayaṃ nirodhoti. Ayaṃ āvaṭṭo.
“分别”的意思是:布施的人福德增长。若有人纯粹因为害怕而布施,因为贪心而布施,因为想得到一点财物好处而布施,他的福德不会增长。而布施刑具、刀杖,是为了伤害别人,那他的非福反而增长。但如果他以善心,出于悲悯或恭敬,布施食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘、香、涂香、床座、住所、灯明;或者给一切众生无畏布施;或者以慈心、想要利益他人、带着出离想而说法——这样福德才增长。“自制者不积怨”——若有人因害怕而停止,怨确实会积聚。为什么?因为无力的人、因害怕而停止的人,会害怕现世的果报:“愿国王们不要抓住我,砍断我的手……甚至把我活活插在矛上恐吓。”因此,通过这种自制,怨会积聚。但若有人如此(真正持戒),怨则不积聚。若有人这样受持,杀生的恶报在现世和来世都会显现,同样一切不善法也是如此,他因此远离那些,通过这种自制,怨不积聚。所谓自制就是戒。戒有四种:思戒、心所戒、律仪戒、不犯戒。善者舍弃恶法——舍弃恶法的三十七菩提分法应当被说。这就是分别。巴利
Vibhattīti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti ekaṃsena yo bhayahetu deti, rāgahetu deti, āmisakiñcikkhahetu deti, na tassa puññaṃ vaḍḍhati. Yañca daṇḍadānaṃ satthadānaṃ paraviheṭhanatthaṃ apuññaṃ assa pavaḍḍhati. Yaṃ pana kusalena cittena anukampanto vā apacāyamāno vā annaṃ deti, pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathaṃ padīpeyyaṃ deti, sabbasattānaṃ vā abhayadānaṃ deti, mettacitto hitajjhāsayo nissaraṇasaññī dhammaṃ deseti. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti ekaṃsena abhayūparatassa cīyati, kiṃkāraṇaṃ? Yaṃ asamattho, bhayūparato diṭṭhadhammikassa bhāyati ‘‘mā maṃ rājāno gahetvā hatthaṃ vā chindeyyuṃ…pe… jīvantampi sūle uttāseyyu’’nti, tena saṃyamena averaṃ cīyati. Yo pana evaṃ samāno veraṃ na cīyati. Yo pana evaṃ samādiyati, pāṇātipātassa pāpako vipāko diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāye ca, evaṃ sabbassa akusalassa, so tato āramati, iminā saṃyamena veraṃ na cīyati. Saṃyamo nāma sīlaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhaṃ cetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīlanti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pāpapahāyakā sattattiṃsa bodhipakkhiyā dhammā vattabbāti. Ayaṃ vibhatti.
所谓“转起”:布施的人福德增长,不布施的人福德也增长,但那不是布施所生的福德。克制的人怨仇不积集,不克制的人怨仇也不积集,这是通过布施、反复思察之力以及修习之力而来的。善的人舍断恶,不善的人却不舍断。由于贪嗔痴的灭尽,他得以涅槃;如果贪嗔痴没有灭尽,就没有涅槃。这就是转起。巴利
Parivattanoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, adadatopi puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, na dānamayikaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyati asaṃyamatopi veraṃ na cīyati, yaṃ dānena paṭisaṅkhānabalena bhāvanābalena. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ, akusalo pana na jahāti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto, tesaṃ aparikkhayā natthi nibbutīti. Ayaṃ parivattano.
所谓“异名”:布施的人,福德增长,也就是通过施舍而积聚善法。随喜的人,福德也增长;内心清净生信,福德也增长;服务做事,福德也增长。自制的人,就是靠持戒防护、靠柔和忍让来自制。怨仇不积集,就是恶不增长、不善不增长。善者,就是贤明的人、聪慧的人、有智慧的人、能观照的人。舍断,就是斩断、根除。这就是异名。巴利
Vevacanoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati. Pariccāgato kusalaṃ upacīyati. Anumodatopi puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati cittappasādatopi veyyāvaccakiriyāyapi. Saṃyamatoti sīlasaṃvarato soraccato. Veraṃ na cīyatīti pāpaṃ na vaḍḍhati, akusalaṃ na vaḍḍhati. Kusaloti paṇḍito nipuṇo medhāvī parikkhako. Jahātīti samucchindati samugghāṭeti. Ayaṃ vevacano.
布施的人福德增长,这是对舍离贪的施设,是对安立无贪的施设。自制的人怨仇不积集,这是对镇伏嗔的施设,是对安立无嗔的施设。善巧的人舍断恶,这是对根除痴的施设,是对修习无痴的施设。这是对断除贪嗔痴的施设,是对修习无贪、无嗔、无痴的施设。由于贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃,这是对烦恼止息的施设,是对证得涅槃的施设。这就是施设。巴利
Paññattīti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti lobhassa paṭinissaggapaññatti, alobhassa nikkhepapaññatti. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti dosassa vikkhambhanapaññatti, adosassa nikkhepapaññatti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti mohassa samugghātapaññatti, amohassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Rāgadosamohassa pahānapaññatti, alobhādosāmohassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhipaññatti, nibbānassa sacchikiriyapaññattīti. Ayaṃ paññatti.
所谓“入处”:布施的人福德增长,所以布施是靠信等诸根而发生的,这是以诸根为入处。克制自己的人怨仇不积集,所以克制就是戒蕴,这是以诸蕴为入处。善者舍断恶,所以舍断恶是通过三种解脱而发生的,而它们所依的方法就是三解脱门,这是以解脱门为入处。由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃,这就是解脱蕴,它也就是法界和法处,这是以界和处为入处。这就是入处。巴利
Otaraṇoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānaṃ nāma saddhādīhi indriyehi hotīti ayaṃ indriyehi otaraṇo. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti saṃyamo nāma sīlakkhandhoti ayaṃ khandhehi otaraṇo. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pāpappahānaṃ nāma tīhi vimokkhehi hoti. Tesaṃ upāyabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhānīti ayaṃ vimokkhamukhehi otaraṇo. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti vimuttikkhandho. So ca dhammadhātu dhammāyatanañcāti ayaṃ dhātūhi ca āyatanehi ca otaraṇoti. Ayaṃ otaraṇo.
“净化”:像“施与者”这类词句上的清净,只是文字层面的清净,还不是开端意义上的清净。而“由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”这一句,则既是文字层面的清净,也是开端意义上的清净。这就是净化。巴利
Sodhanoti dadatotiādikā padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti ayaṃ padasuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi cāti. Ayaṃ sodhano.
“决意”:“施与”这一说法,是就单一性来说的;而布施、舍离、法施、财施、无畏施这八种布施,则应展开详细说明,这是就差别性来说的。“自制”是就单一性来说的;而巴帝摩卡防护、念防护等,则是就差别性来说的。“善者舍断恶”是就单一性来说的;而舍断有身见、舍断疑等,则是就差别性来说的。“由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”是就单一性来说的;而有余涅槃界、无余涅槃界,则是就差别性来说的。这就是“决意”。巴利
Adhiṭṭhānoti dadatoti ayaṃ ekattatā, cāgo pariccāgo dhammadānaṃ āmisadānaṃ abhayadānaṃ, aṭṭha dānāni vitthāretabbāni. Ayaṃ vemattatā. Saṃyamoti ayaṃ ekattatā. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaroti ayaṃ vemattatā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti ayaṃ ekattatā. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati vicikicchaṃ pajahatītiādikā ayaṃ vemattatā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti ayaṃ ekattatā. Saupādisesā nibbānadhātu anupādisesā nibbānadhātūti ayaṃ vemattatāti. Ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno.
所谓“资具”:欢喜是布施的缘;无贪是布施的因。惭、愧等是克制的缘;如理作意和无嗔是克制的因。定和如实知见是断除恶的缘;三种随观是断除恶的因。道正见是涅槃的因;正思惟等是涅槃的缘。这就是资具。巴利
Parikkhāroti dānassa pāmojjaṃ paccayo. Alobho hetu, saṃyamassa hirottappādayo paccayo. Yonisomanasikāro adoso ca hetu, pāpappahānassa samādhi yathābhūtañāṇadassanañca paccayo. Tisso anupassanā hetu, nibbutiyā maggasammādiṭṭhi hetu, sammāsaṅkappādayo paccayoti. Ayaṃ parikkhāro.
布施的人福德增长,这就是布施所成的福行事,它是戒的近因。自制的人不会积怨结仇,这就是持戒所成的福行事,它是定的近因。因为依靠戒,即使通过禅那,贪等烦恼也不会积集;那些因他可能生起的诸漏、损害热恼,对他也不会出现。善者舍断诸恶,这就是断遍知,是修习所成的福行事。由贪、嗔、痴的灭尽而寂灭——也就是贪的灭尽、嗔的灭尽、痴的灭尽。其中,贪,就是那种贪、深贪、心的染着、贪求、贪求性、贪求态、贪欲、贪不善根。嗔,就是那种嗔、嗔怒性、嗔怒态、嗔恚、心的恼害、嗔不善根。痴,就是那种无智、无见、未通达、未正觉、未现观、愚钝、愚昧、无正知、痴不善根。像这样,这些贪等的灭尽、消散、舍断、寂止、寂静,就是有余涅槃界和无余涅槃界。这就是安立理趣。巴利
Samāropanohārasampātoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, taṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlena hi jhānenapi rāgādikilesā na cīyanti. Yepissa tappaccayā uppajjeyyuṃ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, tepissa na honti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pahānapariññā, taṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti rāgassapi khayā dosassapi khayā mohassapi khayā. Tattha rāgoti yo rāgo sārāgo cetaso sārajjanā lobho lubbhanā lubbhitattaṃ abhijjhā lobho akusalamūlaṃ. Dosoti yo doso dussanā dussitattaṃ byāpādo cetaso byāpajjanā doso akusalamūlaṃ. Mohoti yaṃ aññāṇaṃ adassanaṃ anabhisamayo asambodho appaṭivedho dummejjhaṃ bālyaṃ asampajaññaṃ moho akusalamūlaṃ. Iti imesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ khayo nirodho paṭinissaggo nibbuti nibbāyanā parinibbānaṃ saupādisesā nibbānadhātu anupādisesā nibbānadhātūti. Ayaṃ samāropano hārasampāto.